Revit MEP

Metric Tutorial

25703-050000-5080A

2007

Copyright© 2007 Autodesk, Inc.
All Rights Reserved This publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. AUTODESK, INC., MAKES NO WARRANTY, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS, AND MAKES SUCH MATERIALS AVAILABLE SOLELY ON AN "AS-IS" BASIS. IN NO EVENT SHALL AUTODESK, INC., BE LIABLE TO ANYONE FOR SPECIAL, COLLATERAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN CONNECTION WITH OR ARISING OUT OF ACQUISITION OR USE OF THESE MATERIALS. THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE LIABILITY TO AUTODESK, INC., REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF ACTION, SHALL NOT EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE, IF ANY, OF THE MATERIALS DESCRIBED HEREIN. Autodesk, Inc., reserves the right to revise and improve its products as it sees fit. This publication describes the state of the product at the time of publication, and may not reflect the product at all times in the future.

Autodesk Trademarks
The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ActiveShapes, Actrix, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Your World, Design Your World (design/logo), DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, EditDV, Education by Design, Extending the Design Team, FBX, Filmbox, FMDesktop, GDX Driver, Gmax, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HOOPS, HumanIK, i-drop, iMOUT, Incinerator, IntroDV, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), LocationLogic, Lustre, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, MotionBuilder, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, Render Queue, Revit, Showcase, SketchBook, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, Visual, Visual Bridge, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Hydro, Visual Landscape, Visual Roads, Visual Survey, Visual Syllabus, Visual Toolbox, Visual Tugboat, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, and Wiretap. The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner, Discreet, Fire, Flame, Flint, Frost, Inferno, Multi-Master Editing, River, Smoke, Sparks, Stone, Wire.

Third Party Trademarks
All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders.

Third Party Software Program Credits
ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Copyright© 1997 Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved. IES <Virtual Environment>, IES <VE> Copyright© 2007 by Integrated Environmental Solutions Limited Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE® and other Pantone, Inc. trademarks are the property of Pantone, Inc.© Pantone, Inc., 2002 Pantone, Inc. is the copyright owner of color data and/or software which are licensed to Autodesk, Inc., to distribute for use only in combination with certain Autodesk software products. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. AutoCAD 2008 is produced under a license of data derived from DIC Color Guide® from Dainippon Ink and Chemicals, Inc. Copyright © Dainippon Ink and Chemicals, Inc. All rights reserved. DIC Color Guide computer color simulations used in this product may not exactly match DIC Color Guide, DIC color Guide Part 2 identified solid color standards. Use current DIC Color Guide Manuals for exact color reference. DIC and DIC Color Guide are registered trademarks of Dainippon Ink and Chemicals, Inc. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002).

Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved.

GOVERNMENT USE
Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Contents

Part 1

Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Navigating the User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Performing Common Tasks as You Work in Revit MEP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Chapter 1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Planning Mechanical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Creating Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Assigning a Color Scheme to Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Performing an Energy Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Designing Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Placing Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Using a Schedule as an Air Systems Design Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Using Views to Validate Duct Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Drawing the Primary Supply Air Duct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Resolving Routing Conflicts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Sizing the Primary Duct: Velocity Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Assigning a Color Scheme to Duct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Sizing the Secondary Air System Duct: Equal Friction Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Inspecting Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Placing Air Conditioning Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Completing the Supply Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Checking Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Designing Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Creating Piping Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Placing Radiators and a Boiler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Creating the Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Creating Pipe Runs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Resolving Pipe Interference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Connecting the Boiler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Sizing the Pipe Runs: Friction & Velocity Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Placing Circulator Pumps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Inspecting Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Checking Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Planning Electrical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the Electrical Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Required Lighting Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning Room Color Fills According to Required Lighting Levels . Creating a Room Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels . . . . Designing the Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 . 214 . 219 . 223 . 225 . 228

Contents | v

Adding Lighting Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . Placing Lighting Switches . . . . . . . . . Placing Power Receptacles . . . . . . . . . Creating Power & Lighting Usage Reports . Placing Electrical Equipment . . . . . . . . Creating Power Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires . . . Creating Switch Systems . . . . . . . . . . Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs . . . . . Checking Your Design . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Circuit Loads . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 228 . 234 . 239 . 244 . 245 . 250 . 255 . 260 . 264 . 270 . 275 . 282 . 282 . 283 . 284 . 284 . 289 . 296 . 306 . 312 . 317 . 323 . 330 . 336 . 336 . 340 . 364 . 403 . 409

Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Planning Plumbing Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the Plumbing Plan . . . . . . . . Configuring Plumbing and Piping Systems . Designing Plumbing Systems . . . . . . . . . . . Add Plumbing Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . Begin Creating the Sanitary System . . . . . Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System . . Refining the Sanitary Stack . . . . . . . . . . Refining the Urinal Lines . . . . . . . . . . Adding Vents to the System . . . . . . . . . Create the Cold Water System . . . . . . . . Create the Hot Water System . . . . . . . . Designing Fire Protection Systems . . . . . . . . Starting the Fire Protection Project . . . . . Creating Schedules and Placing Sprinklers . Connecting the Sprinklers . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Fire Protection Dry System . . . Modifying Pipe Diameters . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335

Part 2

Documenting Your Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Creating Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Elevation and Section Views . . . . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying View Tag Appearance . . . . . . . Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views . Creating a View Template . . . . . . . . . . View Range and Plan Regions . . . . . . . . Using Filters to Control Visibility . . . . . . Masking Portions of a View . . . . . . . . . Working with Visual Overrides . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Views to Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet . . . . Tagging Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms . Tagging Doors and Windows . . . . . . . . Tagging Other Objects . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams . . . . Creating a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422 . 422 . 425 . 431 . 436 . 440 . 440 . 443 . 446 . 447 . 450 . 456 . 456 . 459 . 463 . 465 . 470 . 470 . 475 . 479 . 482 . 482

Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421

Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469

vi | Contents

Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Rooms from a Program List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Color Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Material Takeoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Shared Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shared Parameter File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shared Parameters to a Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing, Tagging, and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions . . . . . . . Exporting Project Information with ODBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 487 . 489 . 491 . 493 . 499 . 502 . 505 . 505 . 506 . 509 . 514 . 514 . 516 . 516 . 520 . 521 . 525 . 525 . 531 . 533 . 537 . 540 . 541 . 548 . 548 . 554 . 558 . 560 . 562 . 564 . 568 . 569 . 570 . 570 . 572 . 588 . 588 . 593 . 593 . 594 . 594 . 597 . 602 . 602 . 604 . 606 . 607 . 609 . 609 . 610 . 611

Chapter 8 Annotating and Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519
Changing the Base Elevation of a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Relocating a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Witness Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions . Creating Text Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail from a Building Model . . . . Detailing the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Detail Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Detail Components . . . . . . . . Adding Keynotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Line-based Detail Components . Modifying a Keynote Database . . . . . . . Creating a Drafted Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a Detail into a Drafting View . . Creating a Reference Callout . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail in a Drafting View . . . . Using Note Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Note Block . . . . . . Using Drawing Lists . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Drawing List . . . . . Using Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Symbol Legend . . . . Creating a Component Legend . Using Revision Tracking . . . . . . . . Setting Up a Revision Table . . . Sketching Revision Clouds . . . . Tagging Revision Clouds . . . . . Working with Revisions . . . . . Importing from Other Applications . . Importing Image Files . . . . . . Importing Text Documents . . . Importing Spreadsheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 9 Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547

Chapter 10 Finishing the Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587

Chapter 11 Using Dependent Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 613
Using Dependent Views in Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 616 Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 616

Contents | vii

Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626

Part 3

Viewing and Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631
Viewing a Building Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exploring the Building Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Perspective View with a Camera . . . . . . . . . Creating a Section View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Elevation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Fill Pattern Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling the Fill Pattern Color of a Material . . . . . . . Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type . Creating a View Plan Region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Plan Region in a Floor Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Exterior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model . Adding Trees to the Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding RPC People . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Interior Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a New Render Scene . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Daylights and Rendering the View . . . . . . . Creating and Recording Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position . . Recording the Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Views for Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Solar Study - Courtyard View . . . . . . . . Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View . . . . . Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View . . . . . . Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations . . Creating Solar Studies - Summer and Winter Solstice . Previewing Solar Study Animation . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting the Study as AVI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting a Study as PNG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Internal Plan Solar Study . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Internal Plan Study . . . . . . . . . . . . Orienting to True North for Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . Orienting to True North . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering Interior Shadow Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634 . 634 . 637 . 643 . 645 . 647 . 647 . 649 . 650 . 651 . 656 . 656 . 660 . 662 . 665 . 668 . 668 . 670 . 674 . 675 . 677 . 677 . 680 . 682 . 686 . 686 . 687 . 689 . 692 . 692 . 693 . 694 . 694 . 697 . 698 . 698 . 700 . 701 . 704 . 704 . 709 . 709 . 711 . 713 . 716 . 716 . 718 . 721 . 721 . 725

Chapter 12 Viewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633

Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 655

Chapter 14 Creating Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 685

Chapter 15 Presentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 707
Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Advanced Model Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the Elevation Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet . Adding Section Views to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing a Section View for the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View . . . . . . . . .

viii | Contents

Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique . Working with a Presentation View Template . . . . Working in a Callout Analytique . . . . . . . . . . Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes . . . . . . . . Creating Cutaway Isometric Views . . . . . . . . . . Creating Cutaway Perspective Views . . . . . . . . . Annotating the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. 727 . 730 . 732 . 739 . 739 . 746 . 750

Part 4

Creating

Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 753

Chapter 16 About Families and the Family Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 755
Using Families and the Family Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 756 Introduction to Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 756

Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 759
Creating a Door Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing the Door Plan View Components . . . . . . Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry . . . . . . . . Assigning Materials to the Door Components . . . . . Defining New Door Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Window Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the New Window Parameters . . . . . . . Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry . . . . . Creating the Window Sash Solid Geometry . . . . . . Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry . . . . . Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry . . . . Assigning Materials to the Window Components . . . Defining New Window Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Furniture Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters . . . . . Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry . . . . . . . . . Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry . . . . Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry . . . . . . . . . Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry . . . . . . . . . Defining New Furniture Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Baluster Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Baluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning the New Baluster to a Stair Run . . . . . . . Creating Profile Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Sweep Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Rail Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Stair Nosing Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Reveal Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Host Sweep Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying a Sweep Profile to a 2D Path . . . . . . . . . Applying a Host Sweep Profile to Walls . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Room Tag Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Annotation Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Custom North Arrow Annotation Symbol . Adding the New North Arrow to a Project . . . . . . . Creating a Titleblock Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet . . . . . . . Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock . . . . . . . Adding the Titleblock to a New Project . . . . . . . . Creating In-Place Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family . . . . . . . Creating the Concave Floor In-Place Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 760 . 760 . 765 . 768 . 770 . 773 . 774 . 775 . 782 . 784 . 789 . 801 . 804 . 808 . 808 . 815 . 818 . 827 . 833 . 836 . 838 . 838 . 840 . 842 . 842 . 842 . 843 . 844 . 845 . 846 . 848 . 850 . 850 . 852 . 852 . 854 . 855 . 855 . 858 . 866 . 868 . 868 . 874

Chapter 18 Parametric Component Design Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 879
Planning a Parametric Component Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 880

Contents | ix

Determining Component Needs . . . . . . . . Selecting the Family Template . . . . . . . . . Creating the Component Skeleton . . . . . . . . . Adding Reference Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Dimensions and Constraints . . . . . Creating New Length Parameters . . . . . . . Flexing the Component Model . . . . . . . . Adding Solid Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Solid Extrusions . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Constraints to the Solid Geometry . . Creating Additional Solid Geometry . . . . . . Testing the Family in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . Loading a Family into a Project . . . . . . . . Testing a Family Instance in a Project . . . . . Working with Nested Subcomponents . . . . . . . Adding a Nested Component . . . . . . . . . Creating Formula-controlled Parameters . . . Arraying Nested Subcomponents . . . . . . . Reloading a Family into a Project . . . . . . . Applying Subcategories, Materials, and Parameters . Creating and Applying Subcategories . . . . . Creating Material Parameters . . . . . . . . . Controlling Component Visibility . . . . . . . . . Assigning Detail Level and View Controls . . . Creating Component Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Multiple Component Types . . . . . Creating Conditional Formulas . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 880 . 881 . 884 . 884 . 890 . 894 . 897 . 900 . 900 . 902 . 905 . 914 . 914 . 915 . 919 . 919 . 923 . 928 . 933 . 935 . 935 . 940 . 942 . 942 . 945 . 945 . 946

Part 5

Using Advanced Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 949
Creating Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Extruded Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint . Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aligning Roof Eaves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Mansard Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Fascia, Gutters, and Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Roof Fascia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Gutters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 952 . 952 . 956 . 958 . 960 . 963 . 965 . 966 . 967 . 969 . 970 . 971 . 972

Chapter 19 Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 951

Part 6

Customizing Project Settings and Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 975
Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 978 Modifying General System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 978 Specifying File Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 980 Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 982 Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 983 Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 985 Creating and Applying Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 985 Creating and Applying Fill Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 989 Controlling Object Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 991 Modifying Line Patterns and Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 992 Modifying Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 997 Specifying Units of Measurement, Temporary Dimensions, and Detail Level Options . . . . . . . . . . . 999 Modifying Project Browser Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000

Chapter 20 Modifying Project and System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 977

x | Contents

Creating an Office Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . Choosing the Base Template . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Modifying Families and Groups . Modifying Views and View Templates . . . . . Modifying Render Scene Settings . . . . . . . . Modifying Import/Export Settings . . . . . . . Setting up Shared and Project Parameters . . . Creating Named Print Settings . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. 1003 . 1003 . 1004 . 1008 . 1011 . 1013 . 1015 . 1016 . 1018

Contents | xi

xii | Contents

Getting Started

1

1

2 | Chapter 1 Getting Started

Introduction

1

This introduction helps you get started with the Revit MEP 2008 tutorials and presents the fundamental concepts of the product, including:
■ ■ ■ ■

how Revit MEP works. the terms used when working with the product. how to navigate the user interface. how to perform some common tasks in the product.

3

Using the Tutorials
In this lesson, you learn how to get started with the Revit MEP tutorials, including where to locate the training files specified in the tutorials and how to create a new Revit MEP project from a template file. The Contents tab of the Revit MEP Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. Expand a title to display the titles of the lessons in the tutorial, and expand a lesson title to display a list of exercises in the lesson. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit MEP. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit MEP.

Accessing Training Files
Training files are Revit MEP projects, templates, and families that were created specifically for the tutorials. The training files, like the tutorials, are bundled with the product. Training files are provided to help you work through the tutorials. In this exercise, you learn where the training files are located, as well as how to open and save them.

Where are the training files located?
Training files, by default, are located in C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2008\Training. Training files are grouped into three folders within the training folder:

Common: generic files often used to teach a concept. These files are not dependent on imperial or metric units. Common file names have a c_ prefix. Imperial: files specifically for users working with imperial units. Imperial file names have an i_ prefix. Metric: files specifically for users working with metric units. Metric file names have an m_ prefix.

■ ■

NOTE Depending on your installation, your training folder may be in a different location. Contact your CAD manager for more information.

IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials, such as templates and families, is located and accessed in the training files location. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system, all content used in the tutorials is included in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files.

What is a dataset?
A dataset is a Revit MEP project that defines a building information model and views of the model that is used to complete the steps in a tutorial. Many tutorials include a Dataset section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. In other tutorials, you create a project from a template, rather than opening an existing dataset.

Open a dataset
1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog, scroll down, and click the Training Files icon. 3 In the right pane, double-click Common, Imperial, or Metric, depending on the type of dataset.

4 | Chapter 1 Introduction

4 Click the dataset name, and click Open.

Save a dataset
5 To save a dataset with a new name, click File menu ➤ Save As. In many cases, the work you do in a project during a tutorial exercise becomes the starting point for the next exercise. In many tutorials, you create a project or modify an existing project, save the changes, and use the saved version of the file to begin the next exercise or lesson. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog:

For Save in, select the folder in which to save the new file. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. Note where you save the file so you can open it for additional exercises as required.

For File name, enter the new file name. A good practice is to save the dataset with a unique name after you have made changes. For example, if you open c_settings.rvt and make changes, you should save this file with a new name such as c_settings_modified.rvt.

For Save as type, verify that Project Files is selected, and then click Save.

Create a project from a template
7 To create a project from a template, rather than using an existing dataset, click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project.

8 In the New Project dialog, under Create new, select Project. 9 Under Template file, verify the second option is selected, and click Browse. In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Templates. 10 In the Choose Template dialog, review the Revit MEP templates.

Accessing Training Files | 5

Templates are available for specific building types: commercial, construction, and residential. Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding building type. For most tutorial projects, you use the default template and customize the project as necessary. 11 Select Systems-Default_Metric.rte, and click Open. 12 Click OK.

Understanding the Basics
In this lesson, you learn what Revit MEP is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. You begin with the fundamental concepts that Revit MEP is built upon. You learn the terminology, the hierarchy of elements, how to navigate the user interface, and how to perform some common tasks in the product.

What is Revit MEP 2008?
The Revit MEP platform for building information modeling is a design and documentation system that supports the design, drawings, and schedules required for a building project. Building information modeling (BIM) delivers information about project design, scope, quantities, and phases when you need it. In the Revit MEP model, every drawing sheet, 2D and 3D view, and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. As you work in drawing and schedule views, Revit MEP collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. The Revit MEP parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views, drawing sheets, schedules, sections, and plans.

What is meant by parametric?
The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the model that enable the coordination and change management that Revit MEP provides. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. In mathematics and mechanical CAD, the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters; hence, the operation of the software is parametric. This concept is important because it is this capability that delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit MEP: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project, and Revit MEP coordinates that change through the entire project. The following are examples of these element relationships:

The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. If you move the partition, the door retains this relationship to the partition. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. If the length of the elevation is changed, the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. In this case, the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved, the floor or roof remains connected. In this case, the parameter is one of association or connection.

How does Revit MEP 2008 keep things updated?
A fundamental characteristic of a building information modeling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. When you change something, Revit MEP immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. Revit MEP uses two key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do, without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design.

Element behavior in a parametric modeler
Revit MEP uses five software element classes: host, component, annotation, view, and datum.
■ ■

Hosts include walls, floors, roofs, and ceilings. Components include windows, doors, and furniture.

6 | Chapter 1 Introduction

■ ■ ■

Annotations are 2D, view-specific elements that help you produce documentation. Views are dynamic representations of the model and are always up-to-date. Datums are reference elements that help you put your building together.

This implementation provides flexibility for designers. Revit MEP elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly; programming is not required. If you can draw, you can define new parametric elements in Revit MEP. In Revit MEP, the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the building. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. Often, you do nothing to establish these relationships; they are implied by what you do and how you draw. In other cases, you can explicitly control them, by locking a dimension or aligning two walls, for example.

Understanding Revit MEP 2008 terms
Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit MEP are common, industry-standard terms familiar to most architects. However, there are some terms that are unique to Revit MEP, and understanding them is crucial to understanding the software. This section defines the basic terms used in Revit MEP. Project: In Revit MEP, the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. The project file contains all the information for your building design, from geometry to construction data. This information includes components used to design the model, views of the project, and drawings of the design. By using a single project file, Revit MEP makes it easy for you to alter your design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views, elevation views, section views, schedules, and so forth). Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements, such as roofs, floors, and ceilings. Most often, you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a building. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building; for example, first floor, top of wall, or bottom of foundation. To place levels, you must be in a section or elevation view.
Level 2 work plane cutting through the 3D view with the corresponding floor plan tiled next to it.

Element: When creating your project, you add Revit MEP parametric building elements to the design. All elements are considered categories. Revit MEP classifies elements by model component elements and annotation elements.
■ ■

A model component element, such as a door, desk, or roof, represents the actual 3D geometry of the building. An annotation building element, such as a door tag, elevation symbol, or room tag, helps document the model.

Family: Families are classes of elements in a category that group elements with a common set of parameters (properties), identical use, and similar graphical representation. Different elements in a family may have different values for some

Understanding the Basics | 7

or all properties, but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. For example, six-panel colonial doors could be considered one family, although the doors that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. Families are either component families or system families:

Component family files can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. System families include walls, dimensions, ceilings, roofs, floors, and levels, and are not available for loading or creating as separate files.
■ ■

Revit MEP predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. For example, the behavior of a wall is predefined in the system; however, you can create different types of walls with different compositions. System families can be transferred between projects.

Type: Each family can have different types. A type can be a specific size of a family, such as a A0 title block or a 910 x 2110 door. A type can also be a style, such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. A family can have several types. For example, a table could come in several different sizes. Each different size would be a new type within the same family. Instance: Instances are the actual items that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the building (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances).

Revit MEP 2008 terms

Navigating the User Interface
One of the advantages of Revit MEP is its ease of use, specifically its clear user interface. The Revit MEP window is arranged to make navigation easy. Even the toolbar buttons are labeled, making it easy to understand what each button represents. Revit MEP uses standard Microsoft® Windows® conventions. If you have used any other product that follows these conventions, learning Revit MEP is much easier.

8 | Chapter 1 Introduction

click . you navigate and become familiar with the user interface. This creates a new project based on the default template. The Menu Bar 3 Click View menu ➤ Zoom. By default. In addition.In the following illustration. The Title Bar 2 Place the cursor at the top of the user interface and notice the Title Bar contains the name of the project and the view that is currently open. new projects are numbered consecutively until saved with a new name. Navigating the User Interface | 9 . the user interface is labeled. TIP The view opened and the view names are dependent on the template on which the project is based. the Level 1 floor plan view is the default open view. In the steps that follow. Start a new project 1 On the Standard toolbar.

While working in the drawing area. 10 | Chapter 1 Introduction . click the command name to start the command. Then. you simply type the required keystrokes to run the command. Notice the bar beneath the toolbars contains wall design options. the shortcut key for Zoom in Region is ZR. These shortcut keys are listed next to the command on the menu. Edit. The Toolbar 4 On the Window menu. You can use the toolbar grips to resize and move each toolbar. There are six toolbars across the top of the window just beneath the Menu Bar. and View. You can control the visibility of the six toolbars and turn the toolbar text labels on or off within the Window ➤ Toolbar menu. and click. The Options Bar 5 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall. To choose commands. Many of the commands also have shortcut keys to speed up the design process. 6 Click Modelling menu ➤ Door. The context menu changes depending on the function you are performing and what is currently selected. A context menu appears with a list of all available commands. The buttons on the toolbar represent some of the more common commands. TIP For example. The Options Bar is context-sensitive and varies depending on the tool or selected component. On the left side of the Options Bar.The Menu Bar across the top of the window includes standard menu names such as File. notice a door type is specified. click Toolbar. place the cursor over the menu name. Notice the design options available on the Options Bar are now applicable to doors. Another timesaving tool for selecting commands is to place the cursor in the drawing area and right-click.

Within the drawing area. you can select any component and then change the type from the Type Selector. 8 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall. the door type active in the Type Selector is the door type that is added when you insert it into the building model. You use the Type Selector in two ways. you can select a component type before you add it to the building model. 9 In the Type Selector. First. the Type Selector displays a list of doors available within the project. if you intend to add a door. For example. You can also use the Type Selector to change a component type after it has been added to the building model. The list of components in the Type Selector is identical to the components listed in the Families branch of the Project Browser under the respective category. Navigating the User Interface | 11 . The Type Selector is a context-sensitive drop-down list. If you select the Door tool. The Design Bar 10 Click Window menu ➤ Design Bars. Select the drop-down list to view the list of doors. notice the list of walls that are available.The Type Selector 7 The drop-down list on the left side of the Options Bar is called the Type Selector.

■ 12 | Chapter 1 Introduction . The Design Bar is located on the left side of the interface. ■ ■ ■ ■ Basics tab: Includes commands for creating most basic building model components. Each tab contains frequently used commands that are also available from the menu. You can control which tabs display by selecting them in the Show Design Bars dialog.The Show Design Bars dialog is displayed. containing buttons grouped by function. immediately below the Type Selector. Modelling tab: All the commands to create model elements. Drafting tab: Commands for both adding annotation symbols and creating the sheet details for the project construction documents. Rendering tab: Commands for creating rendered 3D images. View tab: Commands for creating different views in the project. 11 Click OK. There are 10 tabs in the Design Bar.

family category (doors. reports. windows). Expand or compress the browser list by clicking the + or sign next to the name. families. sheets. and rename views. and group name. elevations. TIP You can turn the visibility of each tab on and off by right-clicking on the Design Bar and selecting the tab from the context menu. Structural tab: Commands for adding structural components to your project. Construction tab: Includes commands for creating construction industry information. Navigating the User Interface | 13 . Room and Area tab: Commands for making room and area schemes and plans. select Views (all). In the Project Browser. You can use the Project Browser to quickly manage the views. and groups. families. 3D). delete. click the tab. and groups of your current project: ■ ■ Right-click in the browser to add. To access the commands within a tab. walls. Massing tab: Commands for executing conceptual massing commands. schedules. The Project Browser 12 To the right of the Design Bar is the Project Browser.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Site tab: Commands for adding site components and producing site plans. and the respective commands are displayed on the Design Bar. The browser is conveniently organized by view type (floor plans.

click Cancel. After you create a browser organization scheme. 14 | Chapter 1 Introduction . scroll through the sorting options available for the Project Browser.■ ■ To open a view. double-click the name. 17 Place the cursor near the center of the drawing area. The browser is dockable. The cursor is displayed as a pencil. ■ 13 In the Type Selector. so you can position it wherever you want by dragging the Project Browser title bar to a new location. The Status Bar 16 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar. You can create and modify Project Browser organization schemes for both views and sheets. You can also drag and drop from the browser into the drawing area. you can instantly change the sorting within the Project Browser by selecting the scheme in the Type Selector. Do not click. making it easy to add a family or group to the project or add a view to a sheet. click Wall. 14 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. 15 In the Browser Organization dialog.

click Modify. and notice that the preselected component switches to the main elevation symbol. 20 Press TAB. When you place the cursor over a component. in conjunction with Tooltips. 18 On the Design Bar. You can turn the Status Bar visibility on or off from the Window menu. use the Tab key to alternate between nearby components. it highlights and the status bar displays the component name. the main symbol and the elevation directional arrows. In the Status Bar. Navigating the User Interface | 15 . Revit MEP 2008 Help 21 Click Help menu ➤ Revit MEP 2008 Help.In the bottom left corner of the window. The Status Bar also provides information. notice that the name of the preselected component is Views: Elevation: West." TIP The tooltip that displays is identical to the note in the status bar. When attempting to select a specific component in a complex or crowded view. The elevation symbol consists of two parts. It highlights when the cursor is over it. 19 Place the cursor over the elevation symbol arrow on the left side of the drawing area. regarding selected components within a view. it tells you to "Click to enter wall start point. notice the Status Bar provides information regarding what you should do next. Elevations: Elevation: Elevation 5. Make sure you place the cursor over the arrow portion of the symbol. you can use the Status Bar and the Tab key to toggle between components and select the desired component. TIP When attempting to select a specific component in a crowded or detailed view. In this case.

Tool Tips: To see Tool Tips. search for all instances of a word or phrase on the Search tab. Be sure to have the Standard toolbar displayed. Use zoom commands to adjust the view 1 In the tutorials. you open a dataset and practice adjusting the view with the zoom commands. There are several tools that help you find information. 16 | Chapter 1 Introduction . Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the building model in the window. You can use this tri-pane. If there is no Help button displayed. After you are familiar with how to complete these tasks. rest the cursor over the Toolbar button until the Tool Tip displays. Performing Common Tasks as You Work in Revit MEP In this exercise. press F1 to get help on that dialog box. press F1 to get the topic associated with the window. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\m_Cohouse. click Training Files. Click the Help button. HTML help window to search for information and quickly display it to read or print. You can access Help in the following ways: ■ Dialog Boxes: Dialog boxes include Help buttons. Toolbar: From the Toolbar. find a keyword on the Index tab. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the unique tasks for each tutorial.Help is available online at all times during a Revit MEP session. You can also press SHIFT+F1. You can select a topic on the Contents tab. you learn to perform some of the common Revit MEP tasks that are included in the tutorials. and the topic specific to the dialog box opens. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire building or floor plan in the view. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. Windows: From any window. click . and then click on a specific menu command or command button for Help. TIP You can control the level of Tool Tip assistance from the Settings ➤ Options menu. ■ ■ ■ 22 Close the Revit MEP Help window. or save commonly used pages on the Favorites tab.rvt. There are several ways to access zoom options: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ View menu commands Zoom command on the View toolbar Shortcut keys Wheel mouse Dynamic View dialog In the following steps. 2 Click File menu ➤ Open. Context-sensitive help is also available to provide instant help on any menu command. For example.

NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself automatically activates the Zoom In Region command. 5 Click Zoom Out (2x). The zoom menu lists the zoom options and the shortcut keys for each option. Performing Common Tasks as You Work in Revit MEP | 17 .The 3D isometric view displays: 4 Click View menu ➤ Zoom to display the zoom options menu. 7 Click Zoom To Fit. and enter the shortcut keys ZR to zoom in on a region. this is referred to as a crossing selection. 8 Click in the drawing area. and the view of the buiding model is sized to fit the available window. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. 9 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region you wish to zoom. 6 On the View toolbar. click the drop-down menu next to the Zoom command to display the zoom options.

you can roll the wheel to zoom the view dynamically. referred to as shape handles. and select the wall. Without clicking in the dialog. When drawing or modifying a building model. display at the ends of selected lines and walls in a plan view. as shown: Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the wall.10 If you use a mouse where the middle button is a wheel. click Zoom. Cnst. 11 Zoom is also available in Dynamic View mode. These are the drag controls. press and hold CTRL. and double-click 2nd Flr. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. hold the middle mouse button (or left mouse button on a wheel mouse). roll the wheel to zoom the view. NOTE As you zoom in and out within a view. click . click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. 12 Use one of the following methods to zoom: ■ ■ In the Dynamic View dialog. 18 | Chapter 1 Introduction . To display the Dynamic View dialog in a 2D or 3D view. zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. bottoms. expand Floor Plans. on the View toolbar. and drag the cursor in the drawing area. 14 Enter ZR. Small blue dots. Similar controls. display along the ends. use a zoom menu command or the Toolbar option to zoom out within the view. On a wheel mouse. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire building again. The Dynamic View dialog displays in the lower-left corner of the screen. If you do not have a wheel mouse. and tops of selected walls in elevation and 3D views. and drag the cursor. Revit MEP uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. expand Views (all). called drag controls. To modify or add snap increments. ■ Resize elements using drag controls 13 In the Project Browser.

to lengthen the wall. click to specify the starting position. Some commands. moving the cursor to the left horizontally. 16 Click in the drawing area to deselect the wall. for example. 18 Select the Craftsman02 table. Move an element 17 Scroll the view down so you can see the couch and table in the floor plan. Performing Common Tasks as You Work in Revit MEP | 19 . and on the Edit toolbar. After selecting the element to be moved. require two clicks to complete the command. you want to move the table closer to the wall. and click again to specify the ending position. click (Move).15 Click and drag the left control. such as Move and Copy. 19 Click the lower-left endpoint of the table. In this case.

The Undo command allows you to undo several commands by clicking the drop-down menu next to the Undo command on the Toolbar. and drag it on top of the table. All changes you make to a project are tracked. as shown. In this example.20 Click next to the lower wall. 20 | Chapter 1 Introduction . you decide that you like the table better where it was placed originally. Selecting the second action in the list will undo the last two actions. 23 On the Undo menu. Select the plant. The table moves down and the lower-left corner is placed at the move endpoint. Undo commands 22 On the Standard toolbar. Move. select the second item in the list. 21 Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. click the drop-down menu next to . The table and plant are returned to their original locations.

End a command 24 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Lines. 25 Click in the drawing area to start the line and click again to end it. 27 Close the file without saving your changes. Performing Common Tasks as You Work in Revit MEP | 21 . Press ESC twice. On the Design Bar.NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. or press and hold CTRL and enter Z. such as the Lines command. use one of the following methods: ■ ■ ■ Choose another command. Some commands. click Modify. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. Notice that the Lines command is still active and you could continue to place lines. click the Undo command. 26 To end the command. on the Standard toolbar.

22 | Chapter 1 Introduction .

This system consist of a VAV duct system and a hydronic piping system. As you create the mechanical system. At the end of this tutorial. However. This workflow begins with systems planning and design. you follow a series of lessons and exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Revit MEP 2008. If the tutorial datasets are not present. methodology.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. you design a mechanical system for an office building. you learn system design best practices while understanding how Revit MEP makes systems designing more efficient.autodesk. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. 23 . After finishing each exercise. The datasets that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training FilesMetric directory. and concludes with documenting your design and exporting your design. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided dataset. You can search this directory to verify that the datasets have been downloaded. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design a mechanical system using Revit MEP 2008. This dataset includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. you will understand the process. By following the recommended workflow. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. go to http://www. and specific techniques for designing mechanical systems. you can choose to save your work.Mechanical Systems 2 In this tutorial.

Create a new floor plan view 1 In the Project Browser. and click Save. 10 Under Parameters. In this lesson. and click OK. click Add. When prompted to choose a shared parameter file. and click OK. under Groups. and click Rename. A new view called Copy of 2 . under Categories. Creating Zones In this exercise. 6 In the Parameter Properties dialog.Mech Zones for Name. 5 After the Project Parameters dialog opens. In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter Office for File name. Notice that the new Rooms group is selected for the parameter group. and click Select. 2 In the Project Browser. 11 In the Parameter Properties dialog. you copy the room tags from the level 2 architectural floor plan to the level 2 mechanical HVAC floor plan. you refer back to the views to verify zone information. Next. and double-click Level 2. click New. click the Training Files icon. and click OK 3 times. click Yes. After you create these views. right-click Copy of 2 . 24 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . and name the new parameter group Rooms. First. you create separate views in which to work with zones. planning is critical to a successful design. however. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Architectural ➤ New Construction ➤ Floor Plans. select Shared parameter for Parameter Type. navigate to the folder of your choice. 3 Enter 2 . right-click the view named 2 .Mech is created and becomes the active view (it is in boldface). you plan the system by first creating zones and then performing an energy analysis on the building space to determine heating and cooling requirements.Planning Mechanical Systems Creating a mechanical system in Revit MEP is similar to any design project. 13 Place the cursor outside of the building at the upper left corner. drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a pick box around the entire level 2 floor plan. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click New. 7 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. select Rooms. 9 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. Zones allow you to better analyze and control the heating and cooling of the space. Open the m Zones. Create a shared project parameter 4 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. you create zones for the rooms on the first and second floors. Copy room tags 12 In the Project Browser.Mech. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. The shared parameter file is saved as a text file.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. click Create. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. This allows you to easily identify the rooms when assigning zones. and click OK twice. and then you use this parameter to assign each zone to a room. and enter Zone for Name in the Parameter Properties dialog.Mech. you create a shared project parameter. Later in the design process. 8 In the Save As dialog.

Notice that all of the selected elements highlight. you would have needed to manually align the selection. all room tags are automatically aligned based on their original placement. double-click 2 . and click OK. TIP Notice that by selecting Paste Aligned. 16 Press CTRL+C to copy the selection. In this case. and then select Room Tags. 17 In the Project Browser. 15 In the Filter box.Mech Zones to make it the active view. 14 On the Options Bar. click to filter the selected elements. If you had selected Paste from Clipboard (CTRL+V). click Check None. 18 Click Edit ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Current View. All level 2 room tags are selected. under Mechanical. All level 2 room tags are pasted into the view. Remember that when drawing a pick box or using cross-picking (right to left dragging) all elements visible in the view range are selected. only mechanical elements are selected because the view discipline has been specified as Mechanical. Creating Zones | 25 .

To clear a selection. Office 27 Office 26 Lounge 25 Open 2 Ladies’ Room 23 Men’s Room 22 Zone zone 1 zone 2 zone 3 zone 4 zone 5 zone 6 zone 7 zone 8 zone 9 zone 10 zone 11 zone 12 zone 13 26 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . and select each additional room component. 21 Assign zones to the remaining Level 2 rooms according to the table below. select the Office 6 room component. Then. press Ctrl. TIP You can easily identify the room component by the diagonal lines that display after placing the cursor in the room. Level 2 Room Name Office 6 Office 7 Office 8 Office 33 Office 32 Conference Room 31 Office 29 Office 28. select the first room component. TIP To assign the same zone to more than one room. press SHIFT and select the room component to clear. and click OK.Assign zones to the level 2 rooms 19 In the 2 . use the Element Properties dialog to assign the zone. and click (Properties). You have assigned zone 1 to Office 6. Room Component Room Tag 20 In the Element Properties dialog. enter zone 1 for Zone. under Other.Mech Zones view. Note that the Office 6 room tag is not the room component but a room tag (annotation).

do the following: ■ ■ Create a new mechanical HVAC view based on 1 . In the next exercise.Assign zones to level 1 rooms 22 Using the methods that you just learned. 23 In the 1 . Copy the room tags from the Level 1 architectural floor plan and paste them (using Paste Aligned) into the 1 . it is highly recommended that you always begin each exercise by opening the dataset that Autodesk provides. NOTE After finishing each exercise. Assigning a Color Scheme to Zones | 27 . you can choose to save your work.Mech Zones. A color scheme allows you to communicate and identify parameters visually and spatially rather than you using room schedules or accessing element properties. Assigning a Color Scheme to Zones In this exercise.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder.Mech and name it 1 . you assign color scheme to these newly assigned zones in preparation for laying out a VAV duct system. navigate to the folder of your choice. Office 5 Office 18 Office 17.Mech Zones view. This dataset includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. and click Save. you assigned zones to the level 1 and level 2 rooms. and created a shared project parameter. You then copied room tags into the new views. enter Zones Training for File name. click the Training Files icon. click File menu ➤ Save. Open the m Zones Color Scheme. In this exercise. you define a color scheme and assign it to the zones that you created in the previous exercise. However. assign zones to the rooms according to the following table: Level 1 Room Name Office 3 Office 4. Office 13 Office 12 Office 11 Office 10. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you created new views by duplicating and renaming existing views. Using this project parameter. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 25 In the Save As dialog. Office 9 Open 1 Ladies’ Room 20 Men’s Room 19 Zone zone 14 zone 15 zone 16 zone 17 zone 18 zone 19 zone 20 zone 21 zone 22 zone 23 zone 24 24 If you want to save your work.Mech Zones view. Office 16 Office 14.

click the Edit/New button. and click Zoom to Fit. and double-click 2 . Apply the color scheme 9 Move the cursor in the drawing area and notice that the color scheme legend outline indicates that no color scheme has been assigned to the view. ■ Colors are automatically assigned to the 24 zones that you previously defined. select Zone. 28 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . The color scheme outline follows the cursor movement to help you accurately position the legend. under Scheme Definition. do the following: ■ For Color. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. TIP You can also right-click. and click to place the legend. 4 On the Options Bar. and click OK. You applied the color scheme but it is based on room number.Create a new color scheme legend type 1 In the Project Browser. Next. notice that Color Scheme Legend : HVAC is now the current color scheme legend type. you modify the color scheme so that it is based on zones. 2 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. and on the Options Bar. NOTE If the Drafting tab is not available on the Design Bar. Verify that By value is selected. click (Properties). Modify the color scheme 12 Select the color scheme legend. and click Drafting. click Duplicate to create a new color scheme legend type based on the existing one. select Number for Color Scheme. 14 Click OK. 11 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit Color Scheme.Mech Zones to make it the active view. 7 For Name. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. right-click the Design Bar. enter HVAC. 10 Position the color scheme legend outline at the top-right corner of the floor plan. and click OK after a message informs you that colors are not preserved when changing a parameter. click Color Scheme Legend. In the Type Selector. 8 Click OK twice. This displays the entire floor plan and centers it in the drawing area. and click OK. 13 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog.

click the color scheme legend. 22 In the Color dialog. 18 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. The color scheme legend that you defined for level 2 is automatically applied. each room displays the color that is associated with its zone. and click OK. Notice that the HVAC color scheme legend that you previously created is selected in the Type Selector. so you will need to assign a color scheme to this view. double-click 1 . 15 In the Project Browser. 21 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog.Mech Zones view. select color RGB 255-255-128 (a light yellow color). Assigning a Color Scheme to Zones | 29 . under Basic Colors. The color scheme legend outline indicates that no color scheme has been assigned.Mech Zones to make it the active view. and verify that Color Scheme Legend : HVAC is selected in the Type Selector. 19 In the drawing area. you create and modify the color scheme for level 1. Notice that the color for zone 22 (Open 1) is similar to that of zone 15 (Offices 4 and 5) and needs to be changed for visual clarity. click Edit Color Scheme. Also note that elevations have been hidden in the view to enhance legend visibility.The modified color scheme displays. select Number for Color Scheme. 16 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and click the associated color. click Color Scheme Legend. Because you specified a color scheme based on zones. TIP Color names are displayed under Name in the Color box. NOTE Rooms that do not have zones assigned to them display as white. scroll down to Value 22 (zone 22). Next. and click OK twice. This is because color schemes are view specific. 20 On the Options Bar. 17 Position and insert the color scheme legend along the right side of the floor plan as you did in the 2 .

23 If you want to save your work. click Compute room volumes. right-click the Design Bar. verify that Compute room volumes is selected. click the Training Files icon. click Heating and Cooling Loads. 24 In the Save As dialog. Open the m Energy Analysis. NOTE This setting must be configured to perform an accurate energy analysis. 4 Click the Building tab of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you perform an energy analysis to estimate building energy usage.Zone 22 (Open 1) displays the new color. 2 On the Calculations tab of the Room and Area Settings dialog. click File menu ➤ Save. enter Zones Color Scheme Training for File name. Verify building information 3 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. In the next exercise. You also edited a color scheme for visual clarity. 30 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . and click Mechanical. if you receive warnings indicating that the compute room volumes option is not checked and the output will be approximate. Performing an Energy Analysis In this exercise. and click OK. you defined a new color scheme and applied it to the rooms in your building according to the zone that you previously assigned each room. In this exercise. you perform an energy analysis on the building to evaluate energy loads. verify that Office is selected. Specify room and area settings 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Room and Area Settings. During an energy analysis. and click Save. navigate to the folder of your choice. NOTE If the Mechanical tab is not available on the Design Bar. and do the following: ■ For Building Type. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

you need to view specific rooms. click Edit for Energy Data. View rooms 5 While pressing SHIFT and the mouse scroll wheel. verify that VAV . spin the view to verify the rooms (energy surfaces) in the building. MA is selected. ■ ■ (Browser Building For Building Service (Default Room Service). 6 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. you view various rooms in the building. You can view the building materials for this construction type by clicking Construction Settings). Next. Each level that contains at least one room is listed under Level. Rooms are then listed for the selected level. Then. click the Rooms tab. Next. You have verified the building information. For Place and Location. 9 Click (Highlight). under Energy Analysis. IMPORTANT Revit MEP stores the building information as project information. Performing an Energy Analysis | 31 . verify that Boston.■ For Building Construction. You can also access the building information by clicking Settings menu ➤ Project Information. 8 Select 16 Office. notice that the rooms in the building display. 7 Select Level 1 for Level.You can also select all levels that contain at least one room to list all of the rooms in the building.Single Duct is selected. In the preview pane of the Heating and Cooling dialog. verify that <Building> is selected.

10 With the Highlight tool active. 12 On the View Selector. or SHIFT-select a range of rooms. 14 Click (Isolate). 13 Select Level 2 for Level. click (Shading) to shade the room in blue. you can select Wireframe or Shading for model graphics style. You can also press CTRL+A to select all rooms on a level. Remember that you may need to spin the view to see a selected room in the model. pan. You can also view a room in relation to the other rooms or architecture in the entire building. and then select 25 Lounge. the rooms display in blue. and zoom) the view in the preview pane as you can in the drawing window or you can use your mouse. Next. TIP You can select multiple rooms by pressing CTRL-selecting them.The Office 16 highlights in red. select a different room or multiple rooms on a level to highlight them. NOTE Using the View Selector. 11 Click to deactivate the Highlight tool. Highlighting rooms allows you to verify that the room boundaries are as you defined them. 32 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . Also note that you click to dynamically modify (spin. If you select Shading. you isolate a room. The View Selector is located at the bottom left corner of the preview pane.

room construction. Room Construction. This indicates that the information in the building type named <Building> will be used for the Office 3 energy analysis. Perform an energy analysis and view the report 20 Click Calculate. or import the IES model that has already been created. right-clicking. these values on the Room tab will be blank. Next. and Room Service. IMPORTANT Revit MEP stores the room information as room properties. 15 With the Isolate tool active. 19 Using the methods that you learned. Verify room information 17 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. select a different room or rooms on any level to isolate that them. The room information is located under Energy Analysis. RELATED <Virtual Environment> allows you to either export the building and room information to the IES <VE> program to perform an energy analysis and create an IES model. verify the room information for the other rooms in the building. Revit MEP performs the building calculations for heating and cooling in partnership with IES (Integrated Environmental Solutions).The Lounge on level 2 displays while all other rooms are hidden. Performing an Energy Analysis | 33 . and the Loads Report Summary displays. TIP If you select multiple rooms that have different room type. select Office 3 on Level 1. you verify room information. Isolating a room allows you to easily verify rooms that normally would be obstructed by other rooms and difficult to view normally. 18 Verify that <Building> is selected for Room Type. the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog closes. and clicking Element Properties. You can also access the room information by selecting a room in the drawing area. or room service values. Now that the building and room information has been verified. you can perform an energy analysis. 16 Click to deactivate the Isolate tool. After the energy analysis is completed. Make your room information selections based on your specifications.

Open the m Air Terminals. sizing ductwork. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Ceiling Plans. Verify that Reflected Ceiling Plan is selected for Underlay Orientation. Create and modify a new ceiling plan view 1 In the Project Browser. After completing the air systems lesson. Then.Ceiling Mech to make it the active view. you create new views. do the following: ■ ■ (Properties). and validate your air system design. 22 If you want to save your work. modify air terminal parameters.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. you will have been introduced to concepts and practices that you will use to design the piping systems. As you place the air terminals. you continue designing by resolving routing conflicts. you specified building and room information. Select Level 1 for Underlay. and double-click 1 .Ceiling Mech view in the Project Browser and click 3 In the Element Properties dialog. click the Training Files icon. 4 Scroll down to the Extents category and click Edit for View Range. 23 In the Save As dialog. and click View Properties. IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you complete Designing Air Systems before starting Designing Piping Systems. you will create supply air systems. Placing Air Terminals In this exercise. Weather Data. You begin your supply air systems design by placing air terminals in rooms and adding the VAV boxes. you begin the designing phase by placing air terminals in the rooms. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. including the Project Information. and viewed room to verify room boundaries. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 34 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . you create the secondary and primary supply air system and ductwork to connect the components that you added. enter Energy Analysis Training for File name.21 Review the Loads Report Summary. otherwise the loads report or schedules will not reflect your changes. and learn a method to precisely place air terminals into the ceiling plan. click File menu ➤ Save. You can also select the 1 . adding AC units. TIP You can find all generated Loads Reports in the Project Browser under Reports. and click Save. In this exercise. NOTE You must perform a new energy analysis each time you change building or room parameters. 2 Right-click in the drawing area. Designing Air Systems Designing air systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward and intuitive process. In this lesson. under Graphics. you place air terminals in the ceiling of the rooms. This concludes the planning stage of the systems project. You then performed an energy analysis on your building and viewed an energy analysis report. navigate to the folder of your choice. After system creation. and Room Summary. In the next lesson.

you can enter 2600 and press Tab for 2600mm. 10 Move your cursor to the upper left corner of the view. You will now use this ceiling plan to place the level 1 air terminals. verify that Associated Level (Level 1) is selected. For example. You specify 2615mm so that your view captures the air terminals (which will be located at the ceiling height of 2600mm) and not other system components that may be above the air terminals and in the same level. and enter 2615 for Offset.5 In the View Range dialog. verify that Associated Level (Level 1) is selected. and click to place the supply air terminal as shown. ■ ■ Under Primary Range. Under View Depth.200 Neck. Add a supply air terminal 7 Verify that 1 . click Air Terminal. specify the following: ■ Under Primary Range. Modify the supply air terminal flow and offset parameters 12 Select the supply air terminal that you just placed. NOTE When entering a value. and press Tab. TIP When you click Modify. for the Cut plane parameter. You can also press Esc to accomplish this. 9 In the Type Selector. These components would obstruct your view of the air terminals.Round Connection : M_600x600 . you do not need to type measurement symbols instead. click Modify. select M_Rectangular Diffuser . 8 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. Notice that the selected air terminal turns red. 6 Click OK twice. and enter 2615 mm for Offset. for the Level parameter. Placing Air Terminals | 35 . the command in progress terminates.Ceiling Mech is the active view. enter 0 for Offset. for the Top parameter. 11 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. enter the value.

click the center mid point of the ceiling grid to specify the move end point as shown. Thus. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. under Constraints. enter 150 L/s for Flow. This places the air terminal with an 2600mm offset from level 1. click to specify the move start point. enter 2600 for Offset. TIP To use the Move tool. and after the mid point snap displays. you first specify a start point on the component that you want to move and then you specify an end point for the destination. the air terminal will be placed in the ceiling. 16 Move the cursor to the bottom right corner of the air terminal. and after the (geometry) end point snap displays. move the cursor in Office 3 located in the upper left corner of the floor plan. 17 In the drawing area.13 On the Options Bar. click (Move) on the Edit toolbar. 36 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . The start point aligns with the end point when the move is completed. Move the supply air terminal 15 With the air terminal selected. and then click . and click OK. This is also the ceiling height for all rooms.

The air terminal is placed. 20 Select the bottom-right corner of the air terminal as the copy start point. then select Multiple. First specify a copy start point on the component that you want to copy and then specify the copy end point (or destination). Placing Air Terminals | 37 . Notice that the air terminal start point and end point align. TIP You use the same procedure with the Copy tool as with the Move tool. Multiple allows you to place multiple copies of the air terminal without reactivating the Copy tool after each placement. verify that Constrain is cleared and Copy is selected. and then click the center mid point of the Office 4 and then of the Office 5 ceiling grids to specify copy end points. Copy the supply air terminal 18 With the Office 3 air terminal selected. 19 On the Options Bar. click (Copy) on the Edit toolbar.

place an exhaust air grill in the Ladies’ Room (upper restroom). TIP You can enter SM to override all other snaps and display mid point snaps only. 23 Using the add-move-copy placement method. listening dimensions display to aid placement. 22 In the Type Selector. Notice that after you specify the copy start point. and then copy it to the Men’s Room (lower restroom) as shown. click Air Terminal.Copies of the air terminal are placed immediately after you specify each end point. select M_Exhaust Air Grill : M_600 x 600 Face 300 x 300 Connection. Add exhaust air grills and return air terminals 21 On the Mechanical tab on the Design Bar. Note that snap overrides deactivate after you make a selection. 38 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems .

Placing Air Terminals | 39 . place 3 return air terminals in the open office (Open 1) to the left of the restrooms. make certain that you specify the airflow parameter to 120 L/s and the offset to 2600mm. and specify a 150 L/s airflow for each of them. select M_Return Air Diffuser : M_600 x 600 Face 300 x 300 Connection.Before you move the exhaust grill. 24 In the Type Selector. 25 Using the same placement method and offset parameter (2600mm).

40 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . Complete the level 1 supply air terminal layout 30 Select the Office 3 air terminal. 29 In the Element Properties dialog. Modify the airflow display arrows 27 Select the Office 3 supply air terminal and use the Copy tool to place a copy below the Men’s Room in the Open 1 area. TIP Notice that each air terminal type is identified by a different symbol. under Mechanical. click Modify. click on the Edit toolbar. and click OK. clear the UpFlowArrow check box. 28 Select the air terminal that you just placed. and click Element Properties. right-click. 31 Place copies of this supply air terminal at the ceiling grid intersections as shown below.26 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar.

Specify the same 2600mm offset parameter for all air terminals as you did for level 1. Create the level 2 air terminal layout 32 Using the placement method that you learned for level 1. and 120 L/s airflow for the exhaust diffusers. 33 If you want to save your work.Ceiling Mech the active view. click File menu ➤ Save. and click Save.After you place the supply air terminals. collapse the ceiling plan views in the Project Browser. In the Element Properties dialog. specify the same view parameters as 1 . enter Air Terminals Training for File name. The completed level 2 air terminal layout is as shown.Ceiling Mech but use Level 2 as an Underlay and verify that Associate Level (Level 2) is set for the view range parameters. navigate to the folder of your choice. Specify 150 L/s airflow for the supply and return diffusers. remember to modify the airflow display arrows for air terminals that need 2-way and 3-way blow patterns. Modify the airflow display arrows for air terminals that need 2-way and 3-way blow patterns. do the following for level 2: ■ ■ Make 2 . Use the add-move-copy placement method to place the same type of air terminals on level 2 that you did on level 1. Placing Air Terminals | 41 . ■ ■ After you finish the level 2 air terminal layout. 34 In the Save As dialog. You will be using different views to design the systems.

click the Training Files icon. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Notice that the content of the Available fields list changes to fields associated with rooms. In the next exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and select the following fields from the Available fields list: ■ ■ ■ ■ Room: Actual Supply Airflow Room: Calculated Supply Airflow Room: Name Room: Number 6 Click Add to add them to the Scheduled fields list. click Schedule/Quantities. you create the air systems. Define schedule type 2 In the New Schedule dialog. More importantly. you create schedules and use them as not only as documents but as design tools. and that Show categories from all disciplines is cleared.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. ■ Verify that Schedule building components is selected. Using a Schedule as an Air Systems Design Tool Schedules allow you to document the mechanical system components and heating and cooling requirements. modified the air terminal parameters. 1 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. 4 Under Select available fields from. ■ Define columns 3 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. you placed air terminals in the ceiling of the rooms. Notice that the schedule name and the phase is automatically added. under Available fields. select Air Terminals. and learned a method for precise placement. You then use the schedule to adjust the air terminal airflow properties to more closely meet design requirements. Instead of placing this schedule on sheets as a construction document. Click OK. 7 Select a field and click Move Up and Move Down to arrange the Scheduled fields list as follows: ■ ■ ■ ■ Room: Number Room: Name Flow Room: Actual Supply Airflow 42 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . In the next exercise.In this exercise. and to quickly and accurately make real-time system modifications across the entire Revit MEP project. select Room. Open the m Air System Schedules. 5 While pressing Ctrl. you can modify this information directly within a schedule making the schedule a design tool. select Flow. you use it as a design tool to determine whether the correct amount of airflow is being supplied to each of the rooms in the model. In this exercise. do the following: ■ Under Category. The schedule as a dynamic design tool is a very powerful method to monitor system requirements. you create a schedule for the supply air system project. and click Add to add the Flow field to the list of scheduled fields to include in the schedule.

and Itemize every instance is selected. Select Air Flow for Type. Verify that Ascending is selected. Verify that (none) is selected for Then by. Format the calculated value parameter 11 On the Formatting tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. Click OK twice. in the Fields list. and Totals only. The Check Supply Airflow calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the bottom of the list) and will display as a column in the schedule. These rooms have a difference between the actual airflow and the calculated airflow within the range of -35 L/s and 35 L/s. select Check Supply Airflow. Create a calculated value parameter 8 Click Calculated Value. 10 Click OK. Enter Room: Actual Supply Airflow . and click Conditional Format. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Room: Number for Sort by. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter Check Supply Airflow for Name. Select Blank line. Enter -35 L/s and 35 L/s for Value. ■ ■ Click the Background Color and select Green in the Color dialog.■ Room: Calculated Supply Airflow If you need to remove a field. Select Footer. Verify that Formula is selected. Organize the data 13 On the Sorting/Grouping tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. Notice that the conditions that you specified display under Conditions to Use. NOTE You must enter the formula verbatim including spaces. Select Between for Test. Click OK.Room: Calculated Supply Airflow for Formula. 12 In the Conditional Formatting dialog. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Check Supply Airflow is selected for Field. select the field and click Remove. The Check Supply Airflow calculated value parameter allows you to immediately determine the rooms that meet the design requirements as they are green in the schedule. Using a Schedule as an Air Systems Design Tool | 43 . Verify that Grand totals is cleared. 9 In the Calculated Value dialog. Select HVAC for Discipline.

Notice that the data is sorted according to room number. The green values in the Check Supply Airflow column immediately report that the actual amount of air being supplied to the room meets the design airflow requirements within the range of plus or minus 35 L/s. NOTE If a different project is also open. This is because you are modifying the digital database of building information. and if you click in the floor plan to make it active. click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows.Mech to make it the active view. The Check Supply Airflow value displays in green indicating that it now complies with the Office 4 airflow design requirements. and press Tab. Notice that the Flow column parameters are the only parameters that you can define in the schedule. and draw a zoom region around Office 4 located on the left outer wall of the floor plan. and click File menu ➤ Close to close the project. Each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. double-click 1 .A new view opens called Air Terminal Schedule and is located under Schedules/Quantities in the Project Browser. This schedule is not only a construction document but also a design tool. All other Check Supply Airflow values that do not meet these requirements are not green and need modification. 15 In the Project Browser.Mech floor plan view. 18 In the schedule. 20 Modify the other Flow parameters for the supply air terminals so that the airflow design requirements are met. the selected air terminal displays in red. Use the schedule as a design tool 14 With the Air Terminal Schedule view active. The schedule and the floor plan display simultaneously in the drawing area. This allows you to use schedules to make multiple modifications in one view. 16 Enter ZR. you use the schedule as a design tool to modify the airflow for an air terminal to satisfy the design requirements. the associated system component is immediately selected and modified in the project as if you used the Element Properties dialog. After you modify the airflow parameters. Next. 44 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . IMPORTANT By modifying each supply air terminal airflow parameter. Air terminal connector sizes are used to calculate airflow but are also used to calculate ductwork sizing. all Check Supply Airflow parameters display in green. and maximize the 1 . NOTE After you select and modify data in a schedule. This digital database information source is the integral concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). This closes all open windows that are hidden by the schedule. NOTE Do not modify the return or exhaust air terminals as these are not supply air terminals and do not affect the supply airflow. You can change one or more entries in the schedule to modify your system. 21 Close the schedule view. These changes dynamically propagate throughout your project because you are changing the digital database of building information. click Window menu and select the project to make it the active view. The other parameters are design or calculated parameters. you are changing the air terminal connector size. select the 150 L/s Flow parameter (in the Flow column) for the Office 4 air terminal. A cursor displays in the selected cell in the schedule enabling you to modify the parameter. under Views ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. 17 Enter WT to tile the 2 views. 19 Delete 150 L/s enter 165.

enter Using Schedules Training for File name. for the Top parameter. During this exercise. click Edit for View Range. Modify a floor plan view 1 In the Project Browser. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. This is the power of BIM. A system is the logical connection between system components such as air terminals and mechanical equipment. This is the Revit MEP recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. However. 4 In the View Range dialog. Different building professionals use different views during the course of the building project.Mech view. TIP You can also press F9 (Window menu ➤ System Browser) to open or close the System Browser. they are necessary to perform calculations that reference the physical geometry such as sizing. navigate to the folder of your choice. and then create the logical connection between the system components. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 45 . and expand each default systems to view all of the air terminals that you placed in the building. you then create ductwork to physically connect the system components. you created a schedule to assess airflow for each room in the building. Open the m Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems. enter an Offset value of 3000. 7 Expand the Unassigned systems folder. Under Primary Range. You then used this schedule as a design tool to modify the airflow so that it meets the design requirements. under Extents.Mech to make it the active view. do the following: ■ ■ Verify that Associated Level (Level 1) is selected for the view range parameters. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. 2 Right-click in the drawing window. In the next exercise. then press F9. you also use the System Browser to validate your systems. If the System Browser does not respond. After creating the logical connection. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click View Properties. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either to a system that you create or to a default system. you create low pressure secondary supply air systems. You create air systems by placing air terminals and mechanical equipment. 23 In the Save As dialog. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. This occurred because you were modifying the digital database of building information that the project sources. click System Browser. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including energy analysis. and click Save. You will create the level 1 supply air systems in the 1 . click in the drawing area to make it active. Unlike logical connections. click the Training Files icon. and double-click 1 .22 If you want to save your work. You modified the airflow parameters directly in the schedule and all changes occurred dynamically and propagated throughout the project. Explore the System Browser 6 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. In this exercise. you create air systems. physical connections (ductwork) are not required for systems designing. You use multiple views to clearly and effectively communicate different systems information. click File menu ➤ Save. 5 Click OK twice.

and sketch a zoom region around Office 3 located in the top-left corner of the floor plan. press Spacebar twice to rotate VAV box 180 degrees. click to place the VAV box. you can identify a room by placing the cursor over the room component. after you placed the diffusers. notice that all of the diffusers (air terminals) that you added are located under default systems categories in the Unassigned folder. This occurred because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed. 11 Move the cursor to the right of the Office 3 door. if all system components are assigned. If desired. you can add room tags to the mechanical floor plans using the Room Tag tool on the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar.200mm Inlet. 46 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . each default system category would not contain any system components and would be considered empty. You assign a system component (mechanical equipment. The System Browser is a powerful tool that allows you to validate and confirm air systems. air terminals. Thus. Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Supply Air system category located in the Unassigned folder. You will learn more about systems in this exercise. As you assign diffusers to systems. click Mechanical Equipment. enter ZR. For now.IMPORTANT In the System Browser. TIP Although this view does not contain room tags. 10 In the Type Selector. select M_Parallel Fan Powered VAV : M_Size 3 . So. the assigned diffusers move from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder. Place a VAV (variable air volume) box 8 With the view active. 9 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. A tooltip and the Status Bar (located at the lower left under the Design Bar) confirm the room name and number. They remain in the default systems category until you assign them to their proper system. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according to the system that you assigned to them. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create your systems. and press Esc twice. and so on) to a system either by creating a logical connection (or system) between the system components or by assigning a system component to an existing system. The cursor changes to a magnifying glass when Zoom in Region is activated.

Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 47 . TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. and cleared from the Options Bar. select an air terminal that you added to the system. Click OK. and select the VAV box. 15 On the Options Bar. This VAV box services only Office 3 so the VAV airflow equals that of the air terminal.Airflow. click (Select Equipment for System). IMPORTANT After you select a system component. 16 On the Options Bar. The offset value places the VAV box in the plenum space (between the level 1 ceiling and the level 2 floor and above the level 1 air terminals). Create a secondary air system containing one diffuser 14 Select the Office 3 rectangular diffuser. click (Create Supply Air System). enter 165 L/s for AirFlow. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. system specific tools display on the Options Bar. Notice that the VAV box listing is placed in the Unassigned folder under the Default Supply Air system in the System Browser. You created a system that includes the air terminal. you add the VAV to this system.Modify VAV box parameters 12 Right-click the VAV box. Under Mechanical . enter 2900 for Offset. and click Element Properties. Next. This system tool displays along with the other Options Bar system tools. Notice that only mechanical equipment highlight and can be selected when using the Select Equipment for System tool. This is because you have yet to assign it to a system. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints.

18 On the Options Bar. It does not indicate a ductwork layout path. and select the system. and select solution 2. 21 In the left pane of the Duct Conversion Settings dialog. and click Select to select the system. the VAV (the parent) to downstream. do the following: 19 ■ Verify that Network is select for Solution Type. The layout path solution displays with the main in blue and the branch in green. The organization is from upstream. the air terminal (the child) with the system between (connecting) them. Notice that the air terminal listing moved to the assigned system but the VAV box is also listed under Unassigned.The newly created system that logically connects the air terminal to the VAV box displays in red. click Layout Path on the Options Bar. Create the ductwork 17 With the new system selected. place the cursor over the Office 3 air terminal and press Tab. Notice that Solutions is selected. 20 On the Options Bar. The Layout Path tab appears on the Design Bar providing various layout tools. Next you create the ductwork to physically connect the air system components (air terminal and VAV). IMPORTANT The new system named Mechanical Supply Air 1 is now listed in the System Browser under Supply Air in the Mechanical folder. select Main. 48 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . ■ Click (Next Solution). You can also view possible layout path solutions by pressing the left and right arrow keys on your keyboard. Default Supply Air and Default Return Air. You can also right-click the Mechanical Supply Air 1 listing in the System Browser. They remain assign to their respective default systems. TIP If you click in the drawing area and the highlighted system clears. click Settings. This display indicates that the new system is selected. This is because you have yet to assign the VAV primary and return air connections to their systems.

Enter 2900mm for Offset. For example. 25 Click OK. Verify that 1800 is selected for Maximum Flex Duct Length. a transition connecting the elbow was automatically added. 24 Under System Type: Supply Air. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Rectangular Duct: Radius Elbows / Taps is selected for Duct Type. For more information. You can also configure these settings in the Mechanical Settings dialog by clicking Mechanical Settings on the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar (or Settings ➤ Mechanical Settings) before beginning your project. click Finish Layout. Change the geometry display 27 On the View Control Bar located below the bottom left of the drawing area.22 Under System Type: Supply Air. select Branch. Enter 2900 for Offset. This is because the System Browser lists system components and systems. IMPORTANT Notice that the ductwork is not listed in the System Browser.Round for Flex Duct Type. thus it is not part of the system. Select Flex Duct Round : Flex . NOTE All fittings required to connect the duct system to system components are automatically added. The ductwork is a physical not a logical connection. you can delete ductwork and the system remains. 23 In the left pane of the Duct Conversion Settings dialog. select Medium for Detail Level. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 49 . The physical connection composed of ducts and fittings is created. refer to Help. The duct geometry now displays in 2-line enabling you to better view the ductwork. as was the elbow itself. NOTE Configuring the duct conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. do the following: ■ ■ Verify that Rectangular Duct: Radius Elbows / Taps is selected for Duct Type. 26 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. For example.

This disconnection will be located at the point where the highlighting stops. ■ 50 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . you check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of ductwork so that it highlights and then press Tab.65 Pa/m. Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts. verify that Calculated Size Only is selected for Branch Sizing. On the View Control Bar. Typically the disconnect results from not having enough room between the components that make the connection. If the entire network does not highlight. You can repair the connection by dragging the duct segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect. Check duct connectivity 28 Place the cursor over the VAV box and after it highlights. 30 On the Options Bar.TIP You can easily change the duct geometry representation. 31 In the Duct Sizing dialog. and click to select them. Note that the arrow over the duct is the diffuser airflow display arrow and not the supply airflow direction in the duct. then you know that a disconnection exists. Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts up to the first piece of connected equipment. and equipment. The first time you press Tab. fittings. and enter . and Medium or Fine detail level for 2-line. and press Tab twice. The system components and ductwork highlight indicating that they are physically connected. and press Tab twice to highlight the duct and the air terminal. Size the duct 29 Place the cursor over the duct. Do not highlight or select the VAV box. Click OK. Rerouting usually correct this issue. select Coarse detail level for single line. Verify that Only is selected. IMPORTANT When multiple ducts and fittings are connected. click Sizing. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Friction. Under Constraints. the branch to which the duct is connected highlights. and that Restrict Height and Restrict Width are cleared. under Sizing Method.

and click Modify on the Basics tab of the Design Bar. press Spacebar twice to rotate VAV box 180 degrees. IMPORTANT The Duct Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. double-click the second VAV box listed. and sketch a zoom region around Offices 4 and 5 (the offices immediately below Office 3). You can also right-click the second VAV box listed. select M_Parallel Fan Powered VAV : M_Size 3 . It does not report the sizing settings of the selected duct. and click Element Properties.200mm Inlet. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 51 . 35 Move the cursor to the right of the Office 4 door. 36 In the left column of the System Browser.The Office 3 low pressure secondary air system ductwork is sized using the Friction method at . IMPORTANT Remember that all system components that you have not assigned to a system are placed in the Unassigned folder in the System Browser.65 Pascals per one meter of ductwork. 34 In the Type Selector. enter ZR. Create a secondary air system containing 2 diffusers 32 Click in the drawing area. Other sizing methods and values can also be used as well. 33 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. click Mechanical Equipment. click to place the VAV box. in the Unassigned folder under Default Supply Air.

38 Select the Office 4 rectangular diffuser. right-click the component in the left column. right-click. under Constraints. Notice that the Options Bar allows you to verify or modify the system name. click Add To System. System components that were not selected for this system are grayed out. 39 Place the cursor over the diffuser connector. and number of elements in the active being edited. 41 On the Edit System tab of the Design Bar. a new system is immediately created. This system includes the selected system component(s). NOTE Remember that after select Create Supply Air System from the context menu or click on the Options Bar. NOTE After you select a system component. or select an air terminal and the airflow displays on the Options Bar.TIP To locate a system component in the System Browser. enter 2900mm for Offset. If not. 40 Click (Edit System). click Show from the context menu to open the appropriate window and zoom in on the selected system component. You can also select the diffuser and click (Create Supply Air System) on the Options Bar. the selected component and its connector(s) highlight. The selected diffuser and its connector highlights. This VAV airflow is the total airflow from the Office 4 and Office 5 air terminals. and enter 350 L/s for AirFlow. and click OK. The component highlights in the drawing area. 37 In the Element Properties dialog. You can verify this new system in the System Browser. TIP You can verify the airflow for the air terminals by opening the Air Terminal Schedule that you created in a past exercise. and click Create Supply Air System from the context menu. Note that the correct view must be active to see the highlighted component. 52 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . and click Select from the context menu. 42 Place the cursor over the Office 5 rectangular diffuser. system equipment. The Edit System tab appears on the Design Bar providing various system editing tools.

Notice that the cursor changes indicating that Select Equipment is active. On the Options Bar. 48 On the Edit System tab of the Design Bar. 44 Select the Office 5 rectangular diffuser. click Select Equipment. The bottom diffuser is no longer grayed out as it is now part of the system. 47 Select the VAV box. 46 Place the cursor over the VAV box located outside Office 4. the selected VAV is listed for System Equipment. On the Options Bar. the number of elements has increased to 2. click Finish System. 49 Place your cursor over the Office 4 rectangular diffuser and press Tab to display the new system. 45 On the Edit System tab of the Design Bar. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 53 .43 Notice that the cursor changes to indicate that Add To System is active.

and select solution 3. 50 Click to select the system. 53 Use the left or right arrow keys on your keyboard to view the various layout solutions. a tooltip displays the system name as Duct Systems : Mechanical Supply Air 2. Modify the layout path and create the ductwork 51 On the Options Bar. click Layout Path.If you leave the mouse stationary. The system displays in red. 52 On the Options Bar. verify that Network is selected for Solution Type. 54 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems .

Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 55 . The ductwork physically connecting the system components is created. You already configured the duct conversion settings for the first system. You can click in the drawing area to close the warning. click Finish Layout. Ignore the warning reporting that no auto-route solution was found. Notice that the main is open and an endcap is needed to close the duct.The layout path solution displays with the main in blue and the branch in green. These settings remain the same and do not need to be changed. This was the reason for the warning message. 54 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar.

Size the duct 60 Place the cursor over the duct. Verify that Only is selected. You can either relocate the VAV box.IMPORTANT When creating layouts. So. it is because the duct usually has insufficient space to be created. Notice that the centerline snap displays to aid in fitting placement. 56 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. Do not highlight or select the VAV box.65 Pa/m. 59 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Duct Fitting tool. click Sizing. and after the end point snap displays. If a warning occurs. Click OK. 61 On the Options Bar. ■ 56 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . Remember to check duct connectivity after modifying ductwork. and that Restrict Height and Restrict Width are cleared. and click to select them. under Sizing Method. select or modify a different layout solution using the Layout Path tool. or modify the duct manually. Under Constraints. 57 In the Type Selector. and press Tab twice to highlight the duct and the air terminals. you can review it and take action if necessary. you are creating the physical duct and not altering the logical system. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Friction. and enter . 62 In the Duct Sizing dialog. click to place the endcap. select M_Rectangular Duct Endcap : M_Standard. NOTE It is highly recommended to zoom the view to accurately place an endcap. click Duct Fitting. 58 Move the cursor over the end of the main. if a layout solution causes errors (not warnings) while attempting create duct. Add an endcap 55 Zoom in on the open (left) end of the main duct in Office 4. or click in the drawing area to close the warning and continue your work. verify that Calculated Size Only is selected for Branch Sizing.

The low pressure secondary air system ductwork for Offices 4 and 5 is sized using the Friction method at . and ductwork highlight indicating that they are physically connected. IMPORTANT Remember that the Duct Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. air terminals. this time you will add the component after the ductwork has been created. Next. Check duct connectivity 63 Place the cursor over the VAV box and after it highlights. and press Tab twice. However.65 Pascals per one meter of ductwork. you create a low pressure secondary air system in which you modify the layout path and add a new system component to it. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected duct. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 57 . The VAV box.

66 Use your mouse scroll wheel to adjust the view as shown below. 69 Move the cursor to the left of the air terminals. 68 In the Type Selector.Mech view. 67 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. 58 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . 70 Click Modify on the Basics tab of the Design Bar. sketch a zoom region around the air terminals in Open 1 (the large open space). select M_Parallel Fan Powered VAV : M_Size 3 . 65 In the 1 . click Mechanical Equipment. click Zoom in Region from the context menu. and click to place the VAV box.Create and modify a secondary supply air system containing multiple diffusers 64 Right-click in the drawing area.200mm Inlet.

You can refer to the Air Terminal Schedule or select each air terminal to verify this information. and press TAB once to highlight the system. The new system named Mechanical Supply Air 3 is now listed in the System Browser under Supply Air in the Mechanical folder. 74 On the Options Bar. click . and the red system display cleared. Then. 76 Select the VAV to add it to the system. place the cursor over one of the air terminals in the system. This is the total amount of airflow for the 5 air terminals that will be connected. Notice that the selected diffusers are included in the system. You will add this later. and click OK. enter 2900 for Offset. Do not select the air terminal in the upper-right corner. click . under Constraints. 72 In the Element Properties dialog. TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. The new supply air system displays in red. and on the Options Bar. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 59 . The selected diffusers highlight in red.71 Select the VAV. select the 5 air terminals to the right of the VAV. and enter 825 for AirFlow. click to select the system. 73 While pressing CTRL. click . 75 On the Options Bar.

The layout path solution displays with the main in blue and the branch in green. click Layout Path on the Options Bar. You have logically connected the air system components. 78 On the Options Bar. select the left section of the main. you create the ductwork to physically the system components.The system displays in red and now includes the VAV. It does not indicate a ductwork layout path. Modify the layout path and create the ductwork 77 With the system selected. Remember that this display indicates that the new system is selected. 80 In the drawing area. ■ Click . do the following: ■ Verify that Network is selected for Solution Type. Next. 60 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . and select solution 3. 79 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. click Modify.

The parallel control (horizontal and vertical arrows) move the layout horizontally and vertically. notice that drag controls display. select each of the 2 branches and drag them to their new locations as shown.After you select the main. you need to modify the branch layout. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 61 . 82 Repeat this procedure and snap the right section of the main creating a straight main to the VAV. 81 Click the parallel drag control and drag the left section of the main down until it snaps creating a straight path to the VAV. IMPORTANT Layout Path provides 2 drag controls enabling you to modify the layout. Next. 83 With Modify selected on the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. The end control points (dots) moves the layout ends in any direction.

Undo the layout. and reuse the Layout Path to modify the branch layout. and you will need to add an air terminal to this system and connect it to the existing ductwork. The ductwork is created.84 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. Remember that all duct and fittings are created automatically according to the duct conversion settings that you configured earlier. and click on the Options Bar. 86 On the Edit Systems tab of the Design Bar. and so on) are logically connected by a system and ductwork is created. 87 Select the upper-right diffuser to add it to the system. click Finish Layout. A change has occurred in the air system design. you can select the duct or component to display system controls on the Options Bar. mechanical equipment. 62 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . click Add to System. the branch path is too close to the diffuser. NOTE If flex duct is created instead of duct fittings. IMPORTANT After system components (air terminals. The system components are now physically connected. Add a diffuser to a system containing ductwork 85 Select the main duct. This allows you to modify the system (logical connection).

90 Use the mouse scroll wheel and zoom in on the end of the ductwork. You can also verify the added diffuser by referring to the system in the System Browser. The new system component is now part of the same system. 91 While pressing CTRL. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 63 . the Number of Elements increased to 6. 89 Place the cursor over the new diffuser and press TAB once to highlight the logical connection. select the transition. and the other duct segment. Next. and click Delete on the context menu. duct segment. and working from the end of the main. elbow. VAV. This verifies the added diffuser. Then. 92 Right-click. TIP You can also add a system component (air terminal. 88 On the Edit Systems tab of the Design Bar. you need to manually modify the ductwork to physically connect the diffuser. and so on) to a system by right-clicking the system component connector and selecting Add to System from the context menu.Notice that on the Options Bar. click Finish System. select a system component that is already part of a system.

and click Draw Duct on the context menu to draw the duct.The rectangular to round duct transition fitting is too close to the main. NOTE If you are moving the transition fitting only. otherwise an error will occur when you attempt to size the duct. 94 Drag the connector (and flex duct) straight down toward the diffuser to shorten the flex duct length and provide sufficient space to create the duct. continue using the Layout Path tool. 64 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . 95 Zoom out the view. You will draw duct in the next exercise. do the following: ■ Verify that Network is selected for Solution Type. However. Undo and drag the top transition connector to relocate the fitting and flex duct. and select an air terminal in the system to display the system tools on the Options Bar. You need to widen the distance between the 2 elements. 97 On the Options Bar. you can right-click the connector. 93 Zoom the view. At this point. 96 Click Layout Path on the Options Bar. and locate the top connector. then you are dragging the lower connector. select the transition fitting.

Add an endcap 99 Zoom in on the open end of the main duct. and after the end point snap displays. click Finish Layout. the main is open and it requires an endcap to close the duct. Ignore the warning message. select M_Rectangular Duct Endcap : M_Standard.■ Click . and select solution 1 98 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. This caused the warning message to display. 100 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 65 . 101 In the Type Selector. click Duct Fitting. The new ductwork is created. 102 Move the cursor over the end of the main. Due to the takeoff based duct type. NOTE It is highly recommended to zoom the view to accurately place an endcap. click to place the endcap.

and press Tab twice. change the airflow to 990 L/s. 66 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . The system components and ductwork highlight indicating that they are physically connected. TIP Depending on your ductwork layout. Check duct connectivity 104 Place the cursor over the VAV box and after it highlights. and click to select them. and click Element Properties from the context menu. and click TAB twice to highlight the duct and diffusers but not the VAV.Notice that the centerline snap also displays to aid in fitting placement. you may need to press TAB 2 or 3 times to check connectivity. Size the duct 105 Right-click the VAV box. You need to change the airflow because you added an air terminal to the system.Airflow. 106 Under Mechanical . 103 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Duct Fitting tool. 107 Place the cursor over the main duct.

■ This low pressure secondary air system ductwork is sized using the Friction method at . and that Restrict Height and Restrict Width are cleared. specify the air terminal airflow. Under Constraints. 111 Using the systems creation methods that you learned. verify that Calculated Size Only is selected for Branch Sizing. you complete the low pressure secondary supply air systems for level 1.200mm Inlet with a 2900mm offset. click Sizing.Mech floor plan to make it the active view. Complete the level 1 secondary supply air systems 110 In the Project Browser. For VAV airflow. 109 In the Duct Sizing dialog. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Friction. Other sizing methods and values can also be used as well.65 Pa/m. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected duct. If multiple air terminals are connected to a system. Click OK. and enter . complete the level 1 system layout according to the following specifications and floor plan layout: ■ M_Parallel Fan Powered VAV : M_Size 3 . ■ Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 67 . Verify that Only is selected. under Sizing Method.The selection displays in red.65 Pascals per one meter of ductwork. Next. specify the total air terminal airflow for VAV airflow. Reposition and rotate if necessary. double-click 1 . 108 On the Options Bar. under Mechanical. IMPORTANT Remember that the Duct Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used.

if a layout solution or duct sizing causes errors or it seems incorrect. Verify that all Other options are cleared. modify the layout. create the level 2 system and duct layout according to the following specifications and floor plan layout: ■ M_Parallel Fan Powered VAV : M_Size 3 . Use TAB to check duct connectivity after creating ductwork and after performing sizing. see the note below. Create the level 2 secondary supply air systems 112 Use the 2 . Add M_Rectangular Duct Endcap : M_Standard fittings where needed. or reinsert duct fittings. You may experience cases where you need to modify the duct manually such as a drag flex duct segment to connect it. The completed level 1 secondary supply air systems are shown below. you are creating and sizing the physical duct and not altering the logical system. Remember to zoom the view for accurate placement. or the duct or duct fittings are not connected properly. Do not change the duct conversion settings. see the note below. set the Primary Range Top Offset to 3000mm and the Detail Level to Medium. So. If you receive errors. If you receive errors.■ Select and modify a Network layout path solution. modify the duct manually. Reposition and rotate if necessary. it is because either the duct usually has insufficient space. 113 Using the systems creation methods that you learned for level 1. Select Calculated Size Only for Branch Sizing. You should always check duct connectivity after modifying ductwork. Next. Review the no auto-route solution warnings as some may be caused by disconnected diffusers due to proximity issues and others due to the need for endcap fittings. Verify that Associate Level (Level 2) is selected for all View Range parameters. Size the duct using the Friction sizing method at . Note that created ductwork may vary slightly from the illustration.200mm Inlet with a 2900mm offset. ■ ■ ■ IMPORTANT Remember that when creating layouts and sizing duct. You can either relocate the VAV box. you create the low pressure secondary supply air systems for level 2.65 Pa/m and select Only. select a different layout solution using the Layout Path tool. an offset elevation is incorrectly specified. 68 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems .Mech mechanical floor plan view.

you created low pressure secondary supply air systems for the building. you create 2 different views to validate the ductwork geometry. specify the air terminal airflow. Select and modify a Network layout path solution. Using Views to Validate Duct Geometry | 69 . see the note above. After creating each system. Use TAB to check duct connectivity after creating ductwork and after performing sizing. You also modified a system by adding an air terminal to an existing system. Review the no auto-route solution warnings as some may be caused by disconnected diffusers due to proximity issues and others due to the need for endcap fittings. 114 If you want to save your work. In the next exercise. You may experience cases where you need to modify the duct manually such as a drag flex duct segment to connect it. If you receive errors. specify the total air terminal airflow for VAV airflow. Using Views to Validate Duct Geometry In this exercise. Although you already checked duct connectivity. Again note that the created ductwork may vary slightly from the illustration. Size the duct using the Friction method at . and click Save. 115 In the Save As dialog. If you receive errors. If multiple air terminals are connected to a system.■ For VAV airflow. Do not change the duct conversion settings. checked duct connectivity. You also specified VAV airflow.65 Pa/m and select Only. sized the ductwork. you used the Layout Path tool to create and modify duct layouts to physically connect the system components. click File menu ➤ Save. and validated the systems in the System Browser. Select Calculated Size Only for Branch Sizing. it is recommended to validate the duct geometry to confirm that the geometry corresponds to your design intent. Remember to zoom the view for accurate placement. enter Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems Training for File name. In this exercise. you use 2 different types of views to validate the duct geometry of the secondary supply air systems that you created. Add M_Rectangular Duct Endcap : M_Standard fittings where needed. ■ ■ ■ ■ The completed level 2 secondary supply air systems are shown below. You used the Create Supply Air Systems tool to logically connect the air terminals to the VAV boxes. navigate to the folder of your choice. see the note above. Verify that all Other options are cleared.

Open the m Using Views for Duct Validation. In the left pane of the Open dialog. A tooltip and the Status Bar (located at the lower left under the Design Bar) confirm the room name and number. 6 In the Project Browser. select HVAC for Sub Discipline. 5 Place the cursor just above the Office 3 air terminal and click to set the start point for the section. The first click specifies the section head. right-click Section 1. 70 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . and the second click specifies the section tail. enter ZR. you can flip the view direction or modify the extents of the view. and sketch a zoom region around Offices 3.Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. under Graphics. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. TIP Although room tags were not copied when you created this view. and 5. The section relocates under HVAC.Mech to make it the active view. click the Training Files icon. click Section. This zooms the view to fit the drawing area. 4. and double-click 1 . Create and use a section view to validate duct geometry 2 Right-click in the empty space of the drawing area. and click Zoom to Fit. you can identify a room by placing the cursor over the room component. Adding a section view is a 2-click process. After you add the section. 4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 3 Place the cursor in the drawing area. 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. move the cursor down and click just below the Office 5 air terminal to set the end point. A new section view named Section 1 is created and located in the Project Browser under ???.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. expand Mechanical ➤ ??? ➤ Sections (Building Section). and click Properties.

The system geometry displays with shading and outlined edges. click Modify. select Medium for Detail Level. 10 On the Design Bar. Using Views to Validate Duct Geometry | 71 . The section head displays in blue. 13 Use the mouse scroll wheel and zoom in on the bottom-right duct servicing offices 4 and 5.8 In the drawing area. You many need to zoom out to view the shape handles. click the section. 9 Using the shape handles (triangles) on the far right. and verify that the geometry and location of the duct that you created is as you expect it to be. 12 On the View Control Bar. 11 Double-click the section head to open the Section 1 view. similar to the level heads in the elevation view. The selected section displays in red. All section heads are linked directly to their corresponding section view. and Shading with Edges for Model Graphics Style. drag the clip planes of the view so that you capture only the systems that you created and set the depth just past the VAV boxes as shown.

They offer easy and immediate accessibility to all floors. and click OK. You will create a number of sections to both inspect and modify the duct layouts that you create. and click View Properties. 72 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . Notice that in the 3D Mech view. click the section box and locate the top center drag handle. select Shading with Edges for Model Graphics Style. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ 3D Views. select Section Box. click Modify. 19 Right-click in the drawing area. 18 On the View Control Bar. and double-click 3D Mech to make it the active view. A section box displays around the building model. This allows you to quickly and easily target your mechanical systems without the architecture obstructing the mechanical design.14 Continue validate the duct geometry of the other secondary supply air systems in the Section view. Modify and use a 3D view to validate duct geometry 16 On the Design Bar. 17 In the Project Browser. 21 In the drawing area. 15 Sections are extremely useful in visualizing the detailed connections between ductwork and equipment in a vertical space. under Extents. all of the mechanical elements display as shaded with edges but all architectural elements displays as halftone underlays that highlight when you move the cursor over them. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. It is especially helpful in 3D views in which the three dimensional space makes it difficult to view some geometry. NOTE A section box allows you to limit the view so that you can target only the geometry that you want to view.

In the next exercise. 23 Click in the drawing area to deactivate the crop boundary. and 5 duct geometry is as you expected. Scroll. and click Save. click File menu ➤ Save. 28 In the Save As dialog. 24 On the View toolbar. Using Views to Validate Duct Geometry | 73 . 4. You will use both section and 3D views during your systems designing. click (Dynamically Modify View). 26 Zoom in on each air system to verify that the geometry and location of the systems that you created are as you expect them to be. 25 In the Dynamic View dialog. In this exercise you created a section view and used a 3D view to validate the secondary supply air system duct geometry.22 Zoom in on the view and slowly drag the top center drag handle down to adjust the crop boundary until the plenum space for the level 1 ceiling is exposed. navigate to the folder of your choice. you draw the primary supply air system ductwork. 27 If you want to save your work. enter Using Views for Duct Validation Training for File name. TIP Release the drag handle at certain points to see a preview of the section at the current crop boundary position. use the Zoom. 3D views allow you to validate geometry of multiple duct runs in a three dimensional space by using the zoom and spin controls. and Spin buttons to verify that the Office 3.

4 In the Type Selector. you manually draw the primary duct and connect to the VAVs. 3 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. and click to specify the start point.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. Verify that Auto Connect is selected. and double-click 1 . Draw the primary duct 1 In the Project Browser. you draw the high pressure primary supply air ductwork and connect the primary to the VAV boxes. Verify that Angle is cleared. click the Training Files icon. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. select Round Duct : Taps. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Open the m Drawing Primary Supply Air Duct. 2 Enter ZR. You will create the primary systems in a later exercise. 74 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . This exercise allows you to become familiar with manually drawing and modifying ductwork which is very important for resolving duct layout errors caused by insufficient space. do the following. Enter 2900 for Offset. 5 On the Options Bar. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 6 Place the cursor in the Mechanical/Electrical room until a snap displays aligning to the furthermost left partition of the Ladies’ Room above.Drawing the Primary Supply Air Duct In this exercise. Unlike the previous exercise in which you created the systems first and then selected from a series of duct layouts. click Duct. and sketch a zoom region around Mechanical/Electrical room.Mech to make it the active view. ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that 300 is selected for diameter (D:).

enter 2750 to specify a 2750mm length for the first duct segment.7 Move the cursor to the left and when the listening dimensions appear. 10 Now. 9 Move the cursor straight down and draw the second duct segment 9800mm. and press Enter to specify the third segment end point. move the cursor down and 45 degrees to the right. and click to specify the end point. and after the listening dimensions appear. 8 Press Enter to specify the end point of the first duct segment. Drawing the Primary Supply Air Duct | 75 . enter 11000.

Depending on the location of the first duct start point. If the duct does not clear the wall. 11 Finally. Next. Notice that the Draw tool remains active. If you happened to press Esc twice and closed the Draw tool. use the Move tool to move the horizontal duct segment (located over the Mechanical/Electrical) up until the duct clears the exterior wall. after the connector snap displays. 12 Press Esc once to stop drawing the current duct. 14 Place the cursor over the Office 3 VAV box supply air connection. click Duct on the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar to open it again. you connect VAV boxes to the primary. enter 3000. press Tab. it may not clear the wall. click to specify the start point. and after the listening dimensions appear. move the cursor to the right. Then. and select the duct (duct displays in red). and press Enter to specify the third segment end point.NOTE The primary duct needs to clear the exterior wall located on the left. and sketch a zoom region around the VAV box outside of Office 3. Connect the VAV boxes to the primary duct 13 Enter ZR. place the cursor over the duct. 76 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems .

TIP When drawing duct. you pressed Spacebar before you began drawing duct. 17 Move the cursor down and draw a 2450mm vertical second duct segment. a tooltip appears confirming the connector. If a warning appears informing you that the line is too short. Note that the Spacebar does not automatically specify the duct type. When drawing duct. and click to specify the end point.NOTE You must place the cursor over the connector to connect to the VAV primary. press the Spacebar after you specify your start point and move the cursor to begin drawing duct. Drawing the Primary Supply Air Duct | 77 . use the connector snap to quickly and accurately locate a connector. 15 Move the cursor to the right to begin drawing duct. and press Enter to specify the end point. and press Spacebar to automatically change the duct diameter and offset to match the 200mm VAV primary connector diameter. and offset parameter to match that of the selected start point object. You should always verify the duct type in the Type Selector. If you pause briefly. This automatically specifies the duct diameter or width and height. 16 Draw the first duct segment 600mm to the right. You can also change the duct diameter from the Options Bar.

and click after the centerline snap displays to specify the end point for the third duct segment. the duct run connecting the Office 3 VAV to the primary is complete. 78 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems .18 Move the cursor to the right and over the primary duct. zoom in on the VAV box outside of Office 4. After you click to specify the end point. the centerline snap makes the process quick and easy. 19 With the Draw tool open. TIP When connecting duct to the centerline of another duct.

22 Press ESC to deactivate the Draw tool. the duct diameter. Remember that you quickly locate a room by highlighting the room component and viewing the room tag information on a tooltip and on the Status Bar. or width and height. 21 Draw the duct to the right and connect it to the centerline of the primary. you should always verify the duct type in the Type Selector. verify that Round Duct : Taps is selected. 26 In the Type Selector. and after the connector snap displays. Drawing the Primary Supply Air Duct | 79 . change the Model Graphics Style to Wireframe to improve performance. 27 Draw a duct segment that connects to the centerline of the primary. 23 Zoom in on the Office 18 VAV box located in the lower-middle of the level 1 floor plan. Because the duct is complete after you connected it to the primary. you only need to press ESC once to deactivate the Draw tool.TIP When zooming or reorienting a view that uses Medium or Fine for Detail Level. and offset automatically match that of the selected connector. TIP If you right-click a connector and click Draw Duct on the context menu. However. On the View Control Bar. and place the cursor over the primary supply air connector. you may experience performance issues depending on the size and complexity of the system geometry. You can also specify the Detail Level to Coarse for viewing a single line display 20 Place the cursor over the Office 4 VAV box supply air connection. click to specify the start point. This allows you to continue to use the 2-line display. 24 Select the Office 18 VAV. 25 Right-click. and click Draw Duct from the context menu.

80 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . and connect the 2 VAVs in Open 1 to the primary duct as shown. 30 Using the draw duct methods that you learned. 29 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area.28 Press Esc. zoom the view to the right of the primary. 31 The 5 secondary supply air system duct runs are now physically connected to the primary. Check connectivity 32 Place the cursor over the primary duct and press Tab twice to check connectivity up to but not including the VAV boxes.

This is usually caused by insufficient space preventing duct creation or fitting insertion. and Angle is cleared. 33 Validate the primary duct geometry using the Section 1 and 3D Mech views. On the Options Bar. and double-click 1-Mech to make it the active view. Finally.You can press TAB 3 times to check connectivity including the VAVs and secondary system ductwork. Drawing the Primary Supply Air Duct | 81 . and use the Draw Duct tool to reconnect. You will connect this VAV in a later exercise. Modify the duct length or relocate the VAV box to make sufficient space. and verify that Auto Connect is selected. remember to always check connectivity and validate the duct geometry. 35 Using the duct drawing methods that you learned. Use approximate duct segment lengths from the layout below. Check connectivity. you will do that in a later exercise. ■ ■ ■ IMPORTANT Remember that when drawing duct. This is because you physically connected the VAVs to the primary duct but you have not logically connected the VAVs with a system. You will create a system for the primary and add the VAVs to it in a later exercise. NOTE Do not size the primary at this time. you may encounter errors when connecting to the primary duct or a VAV. The main has a 300mm diameter and the connections to the VAV boxes have a diameter of 200mm. and use the Section 1 and 3D Mech views for duct geometry validation. You will size the primary in a later exercise. specify a 2900mm offset. complete the level 1 primary duct according to the following specifications and floor plan layout: ■ Draw the primary duct using Round Duct : Taps. IMPORTANT Notice that the VAV boxes are still listed in the Unassigned folder under Default Supply Air. Do not connect the Office 11 VAV because a routing conflict exists. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. Complete the level 1 primary duct 34 In the Project Browser. Do not size the primary.

specify a 2900mm offset. Draw the level 2 primary duct 36 In the Project Browser. ■ ■ ■ 82 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . Do not connect the Office 26 VAV because a routing conflict exists. You will size the primary in a later exercise. complete the level 2 primary duct according to the following specifications and floor plan layout: ■ Draw the primary duct using Round Duct : Taps. and Angle is cleared.Mech to make it the active view. Check connectivity. You will connect this VAV in a later exercise. 37 Using the duct drawing methods that you learned. Do not size the primary. and double-click 2 .The completed level 1 air system layout is shown below. Use approximate duct segment lengths from the layout below. The main has a 300mm diameter and the connections to the VAV boxes have a diameter of 200mm. and use the Section 1 and 3D Mech views for duct geometry validation. and verify that Auto Connect is selected. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. On the Options Bar.

Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click File menu ➤ Save. you resolve routing conflicts with the primary duct. you encounter routing conflicts such as the placement of fittings that prevents a duct connection. 2 Zoom in on the VAV box outside Office 11 located in the upper-right corner of the floor plan. and click Save. navigate to the folder of your choice. In this exercise. you use the Routing Solutions tool to automatically resolve duct routing conflicts with the high pressure supply air primary duct by selecting from a series of routing solutions. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 39 In the Save As dialog. and double-click 1.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. You will connect the primary duct to AC units in a later exercise. Resolving Routing Conflicts Often as you create ductwork. Finally. you used the Duct tool to manually draw the high pressure primary supply air duct and physically connect the VAV boxes to the primary duct. You can resolve these conflicts manually or automatically. Resolving Routing Conflicts | 83 . and notice that the duct run has an elbow that does not allow a connection from the VAV box to the primary.Mech to make it the active view. While drawing duct. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. click the Training Files icon. you learned how to use connectors to create ductwork. Open the m Resolving Routing Conflicts. Resolve a routing conflict on level 1 1 In the Project Browser. In the next exercise. In this exercise. 38 If you want to save your work. you checked duct connectivity and validated duct geometry using different views.The completed level 2 air system layout is shown below. enter Drawing Primary Supply Air Duct Training for File name.

However. you will use the solutions to resolve the routing conflict.3 Place the cursor over the primary duct run. click Routing Solutions. Notice that 2 end control points display enabling you to modify the duct ends in any direction. press Tab once. The selected primary duct run displays in red. 5 Use the left and right arrow buttons on the Options Bar or to view the different routing solutions. 84 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . and click to select the primary and its fittings. 4 On the Options Bar. 6 Select Solution 1. and click Finish.

Resolving Routing Conflicts | 85 . verify that Round Duct : Taps is selected. and place the cursor over the primary supply air connector. 11 Place the cursor over the primary.The 45 degree elbows are replaced by a 90 degree elbow. 8 Right-click. 7 Select the VAV box. Next. and click to specify the end point. and press TAB twice. 10 Draw the duct from the primary air connector to the centerline of the primary below. and click Draw Duct from the context menu. you check connectivity. 9 In the Type Selector.

you manually drew duct to connect the VAV boxes to the primary duct. 12 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the window. enter Resolving Routing Conflicts Training for File name. you must first determine the direction of the airflow in the primary duct. click the Training Files icon.Mech to make it the active view. you use the Velocity sizing method rather than the Friction method. then connect the VAV to the primary. The routing solution and connection are shown below. This determines the airflow direction. 16 If you want to save your work. you created the high pressure primary duct that supplies air to the VAV boxes but you have yet to sized the primary. select a routing solution to resolve the routing conflict that prevents the Office 26 VAV box from connecting to the primary. and double-click 2 . and click Save. the Routing Solutions tool allows you to modify a specific segment of duct. Considering that both ends of the primary are open. 14 Zoom in on the Office 26 VAV box located in the upper-right corner of the floor plan. IMPORTANT Unlike the Layout Path tool which allows you to create entire duct layouts. Resolve a routing conflict on level 2 13 In the Project Browser. 15 Using the process that you just learned. you size the primary to meet airflow requirements using the same sizing tool that you previously used to size the low pressure secondary supply air ductwork. navigate to the folder of your choice. click File menu ➤ Save. 17 In the Save As dialog.All connections to the VAVs highlight indicating that they are physically connected. 86 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . In the left pane of the Open dialog. However. you size the high pressure supply air primary duct. In this exercise. you place an endcap where no further connections are planned.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. you used the Routing Solutions tool to resolve routing conflicts. After resolving the conflicts. In the next exercise. Both tools provide a series of solutions and the ability to modify those solutions. In this exercise. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.Velocity. Sizing the Primary Duct:Velocity Method In a previous exercise. Before sizing the primary. Open the m Duct Sizing . The airflow direction inside the primary must be determined to accurately size the primary duct run. You viewed various routing solutions and selected the best solution to resolve 2 routing conflicts.

Mech to make it the active view. NOTE It is highly recommended to zoom the view to accurately place the endcap. 2 Zoom in on the lower end of the left primary located outside Office 18. click to place the endcap. Notice that the centerline snap displays to aid in fitting placement. and double-click 1 . 3 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. This determines the airflow direction and the duct will size accurately.Place an endcap on the level 1 primary to determine airflow 1 In the Project Browser. Size the level 1 primary duct 8 Place the cursor on the left primary duct run and press Tab twice to highlight the entire run including the VAV connections but not the VAV boxes. and after the end point snap displays. IMPORTANT When sizing duct that has multiple open ends. 5 Move the cursor over the end of the left primary duct run. you must place endcaps to close all open ends except the one that connects to the air source. 6 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Duct Fitting tool. Sizing the Primary Duct:Velocity Method | 87 . 4 In the Type Selector. NOTE If the Mechanical tab is not available on the Design Bar. right-click the Design Bar. and click to select it. click Duct Fitting. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. select M_Round Duct Endcap : M_Standard. and click Mechanical. The upper end of the primary duct run will connect to a rooftop AC unit. 7 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area.

under Sizing Method. click Sizing. ■ 88 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems .5 m/s. Click OK. and that Restrict Height and Restrict Width are cleared. Under Constraints. Verify that Only is selected. IMPORTANT Remember that the Duct Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. 10 In the Duct Sizing dialog. verify that Calculated Size Only is selected for Branch Sizing. 9 On the Options Bar. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected duct. and enter 12. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Velocity.The selected primary displays in red.

12 Zoom in on the lower end of the right primary duct run located outside Office 17. and size this primary using the same sizing method and parameters that you used for the left primary. you are creating and sizing the physical duct and not altering the logical system. it is because either the duct usually has insufficient space. place a round duct endcap at the lower end of the right primary duct run. or reinsert duct fittings. Sizing the Primary Duct:Velocity Method | 89 . The primary and the connections to the VAVs highlight indicating that they are physically connected. and press TAB twice. IMPORTANT Remember that when creating layouts and sizing duct. Next. You should always check duct connectivity after modifying ductwork. modify the layout. if a layout solution or duct sizing causes errors or it seems incorrect.The sized left primary is shown below. select a different layout solution using the Layout Path tool. or duct or duct fittings are not connected properly. 13 Using the process that you just learned. So. 11 Place the cursor over each left side of the primary duct run. you place an endcap on the right side of the primary in order size the duct. You can either relocate the VAV box. modify the duct manually.

90 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems .Mech to make it the active view. and double-click 2 . 17 Size both the left and right sides of the primary duct run using the same sizing method and parameters that you used for the level 1 primary duct run. the upper ends of the primary duct run will connect to a rooftop AC unit. The completed level 2 primary duct run is shown below. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. check the connectivity of the right side of the primary duct run. place a round duct endcap on the lower end of the left and right side of the primary duct run to determine airflow direction. As in level 1.The sized right primary is shown below. 18 Check connectivity for both sides of the primary duct. 14 Using the method you have learned. 16 Using the process that you learned for the level 1 primary duct run. Size the level 2 primary duct run 15 In the Project Browser.

Apply the color scheme 4 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. A new floor plan view called Copy of 1 . you used the Duct Sizing tool to size the primary using the Velocity sizing method. Create a new view 1 In the Project Browser.Mech is created and becomes the active view. 20 In the Save As dialog. you assign a color fill to the ductwork. This makes it much easier to determine whether the plan meets your requirements. This determined the airflow direction inside the primary. click Duct Color Scheme Legend. enter 1 .Mech. Like room color scheme. verify that Color Scheme Legend : HVAC is selected for color scheme legend type. and click Mechanical. 7 Position the color scheme legend outline at the top-right corner of the floor plan. Assigning a Color Scheme to Duct | 91 .Mech Duct Classes for Name. and click Save. Assigning a Color Scheme to Duct In this exercise. right-click Copy of 1 . The color scheme outline follows the cursor movement to help you accurately position the legend.19 If you want to save your work. 2 In the Project Browser. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click OK. you sized the primary duct for the building.Velocity Training for File name. 6 Move the cursor in the drawing area and notice that an outline of the color scheme legend indicates that no color scheme has been assigned to the view displays. In this exercise. enter Duct Sizing . navigate to the folder of your choice.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. you assign a color scheme to the ductwork in your project. Open the m Duct Color Scheme. and click to place the legend. 5 In the Type Selector. click the Training Files icon. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. 3 In the Rename View dialog. NOTE If the Mechanical tab is not available on the Design Bar. Using the same color scheme legend type allows you to quickly assign consistent color scheme legends throughout your design. duct color scheme can help you communicate your design immediately and effectively. you placed an endcap at the end of each side of the primary duct run where no connection was planned. right-click 1 Mech. right-click the Design Bar. click File menu ➤ Save. In the next exercise. Notice that you use the same duct color scheme legend type that you created in a previous exercise called HVAC. First. Then. This procedure is similar to the one that you used for rooms in a previous exercise. and click Rename. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

and click OK after a warning indicates that colors are not preserved. Select By range. delete the existing text. Next. click Edit Color Scheme. and on the Options Bar. verify that Duct Color Fill is selected for Color Scheme. and enter high velocity for the second row. you change the color scheme. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Velocity for Color. In the At Least column. In the Color column. In the Color column. click in the second row and select Red from the Basic colors in the Color box.5 m/s. Edit the color scheme 9 In the Drawing area. 10 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. select the duct color scheme legend that you placed. NOTE Elevations have been hidden for legend clarity. and enter low velocity for the first row. 92 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . click in the second row. and click OK. click in the first row and select Green from the Basic colors in the Color box. and enter 7.8 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. ■ ■ ■ Click OK. In the Caption column. TIP Color names are displayed under Name in the Color box.

Assigning a Color Scheme to Duct | 93 . Notice that duct fittings do not have color scheme applied to them. The completed level 2 duct color scheme legend is shown below.Mech Duct Classes for Name. Assign color scheme to the level 2 duct 11 In the Project Browser.Mech is created and becomes the active view. The same velocity-based color scheme that you created for level 1 is automatically applied to the level 2 duct. and click OK. enter Duct Color Fill Training for File name.Mech. 13 In the Rename View dialog. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. navigate to the folder of your choice.The duct color scheme legend now identifies the duct by velocity. enter 2 . 15 In the Type Selector. click Duct Color Scheme Legend. verify that Color Scheme Legend : HVAC is selected for color scheme legend type. and click OK. right-click 2 Mech. click File menu ➤ Save. 17 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. 18 If you want to save your work. A new floor plan view called Copy of 2 . verify that Duct Color Fill is selected for Color Scheme. Using the same color scheme allow you to quickly assign consistent color throughout your design. and click to place the legend. 14 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. 12 In the Project Browser. and click Save. and click Rename. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. right-click Copy of 2 . 19 In the Save As dialog. 16 Position the color scheme legend outline at the top-right corner of the floor plan.

You need to reduce the size of the main to ensure that the air pressure meets airflow requirements.Mech to make it the active view. 94 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . All mechanical systems that have been created for the project are organized by system type in the Mechanical folder. If the System Browser does not respond. such as a VAV box and diffusers. you sized the secondary air system ductwork using the Friction sizing method and then you sized the primary duct run using the Velocity method. 5 In the Element(s) In View dialog. you split the main into multiple duct segments and then size each segment. and the system including the assigned components and the ductwork displays in red. Every supply air system that you created is listed. Finally. then press F9. In the next exercise. Notice that each system listing consists of a system name and number. Sizing the Secondary Air System Duct: Equal Friction Method In 2 previous exercises. 2 In the System Browser. you added duct color scheme legends to both levels of ductwork in your project. and double-click 1 . and a hierarchy of system components that you assigned to each system. 3 Right-click Supply Air. expand the Mechanical systems folder. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and then you size the duct run using the Equal Friction method.In this exercise. 4 Right-click Mechanical Supply Air 3. click in the drawing area to make it active.Mech view automatically zooms on the selected system. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. you size one of the secondary supply air system duct runs using the Equal Friction sizing method. The 1 . First. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. You edited the color scheme by associating colors to velocity parameters and changed the caption text. not ductwork (physical connections). TIP If the System Browser is closed. and click Show. Notice that the main duct connecting the VAV box to the diffusers is one size. you size the duct for one of the secondary air systems that you previously sized. Locate the secondary air system 1 In the Project Browser. Remember that only systems (logical connections) and the assigned system components are in the System Browser. and click Expand All. To accomplish this. This allows you to more closely meet airflow requirements for that system.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder.Equal Friction. such as Mechanical Supply Air 6. Open the m Duct Sizing . click the Training Files icon. In this exercise. click Close to deactivate the Show tool. you split the duct main into multiple pieces. press F9 (or Window menu ➤ System Browser) to open or close it. you tag the main duct of the secondary air system to annotate the duct segment sizes.

and press Tab twice to highlight the ductwork and air terminals located downstream from the VAV box. Notice that a Rectangular Duct Union fitting is automatically inserted to connect the duct at each split. Note that the VAV box is not selected. You can place the cursor over the union and both a tooltip and the Status Bar confirm the fitting. click (Split). Sizing the Secondary Air System Duct: Equal Friction Method | 95 .Split the main 6 On the Tools toolbar. split the main to the left of the middle branch at 4300mm from the beginning of the main. and click to select them. move the cursor along the top or bottom edge of the duct to view the split line and the listening dimensions. 10 Press Esc twice to deactivate the Split tool. 7 Move the cursor along the top edge of the main and to the right of the 2 middle diffusers. TIP When splitting duct in 2-line display. 8 Watch the listening dimensions. Size the system 11 Move the cursor over the main. and split the main 2400mm from the end of the main. 9 With the Split tool open.

click Tag ➤ By Category. Click Tags. You can click anywhere in the drawing area to close it. click Sizing. under Category.65 Pa/m. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Horizontal is selected. Notice that as the airflow decreases. for Ducts. and click Cancel. 15 On the Options Bar. 18 Position the tag outline in the center of each segment. 13 In the Duct Sizing dialog. verify that Calculated Size Only is selected for Branch Sizing. Next. ■ IMPORTANT Equal Friction sizing is an iterative process. and click to place each tag. Clear Leader. The low pressure secondary air system ductwork is sized using the Equal Friction method at . transitions are automatically added to reduce duct size and maintain air pressure. Tag the main 14 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar.65 Pascals per one meter of ductwork. Click OK. Under Constraints. 17 Move the cursor over the 3 segments of the main. ignore this warning. The completion time varies according to the speed of your computer. verify that M_Duct Size Tag is loaded. and enter . NOTE If a Warning dialog opens alerting you that there is no loss defined.12 On the Options Bar. under Sizing Method. you tag the main to annotate the duct segment sizes. and notice that the tag outline dynamically displays the size of each segment. do the following: ■ ■ Select Equal Friction. 96 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . and that Restrict Height and Restrict Width are cleared. 16 In the Tags dialog.

pressure.Mech to make it the active view. click Zoom in Region from the context menu. Finally. 20 If you want to save your work. you use the System Inspector to inspect the low pressure secondary air systems. 2 Right-click in the view. you used the Split tool to split the main into multiple segments.Equal Friction Training for File name. The System Inspector is a unique tool enabling you to inspect each system for airflow. First. select the tag and drag it to a new location. In the next exercise. Inspecting Air Systems In this exercise. you tagged the main to annotate the duct segment sizes. and click Save. You may want to zoom the view for accurate placement. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter Duct Sizing . 3 Draw a zoom region around the lower-right secondary air system in Open 2. Open the m Inspecting Air Systems. Inspecting Air Systems | 97 . 1 In the Project Browser. 21 In the Save As dialog.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder.TIP To reposition a tag. navigate to the folder of your choice. Using this tool. and double-click 2 . you can target problem areas directly in your design and resolve them. click the Training Files icon. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and then you sized the duct run using the Equal Friction sizing method. The low pressure secondary air system duct run is sized and tagged. you use the System Inspector to check flow and pressure in the secondary air system that you just sized. you sized low pressure secondary air system ductwork to more closely meet airflow requirements. and pressure loss by placing the cursor over it. 19 Click Modify on the Mechanical tab to deactivate the Tag tool. click File menu ➤ Save.

select (Inspect). 98 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . A tooltip also displays the system information. 7 Place the cursor over the upper-left flex duct branch of the secondary air system to highlight it. and pressure loss in the highlighted duct segment. Arrows display on the duct indicating the airflow direction for both the main and the branches in the air system. After the System Inspector opens. select any duct segment. 6 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar. and click Inspect from the context menu. the Select System dialog opens enabling you to select a system to inspect. pressure.You will inspect this system. Each selected system highlights in red enabling you to preview it. diffuser. IMPORTANT To select a system. 4 Select the VAV box that you assigned to the secondary air system. NOTE You can also use System Inspector from in the System Browser. or mechanical equipment that you have assigned to a system. click Inspect. An inspection flag dynamically reports the airflow. click Inspect from the System Inspector tab on the Design Bar. RELATED If you select a system component that has been assigned to more than one system such as an AC unit or a VAV box and click . duct fitting. System tools display on the Options Bar. The System Inspector tab opens providing system inspection tools on the Design Bar. Right-click a system from the System Browser. 5 On the Options Bar.

Red information and arrows indicate the highest percentage of pressure loss due to friction. remember that all information is color coded according to pressure. You can continue to use this method to compare inspection information for system components or duct across the selected system. Notice that the secondary air system and the assigned system components highlight and can be selected but you cannot select other secondary air systems or the primary duct run. Inspecting Air Systems | 99 . 12 Click a blank space in the view to close the current inspection flag. Next. These are not logically connected to this system.IMPORTANT As you inspect a system. 9 Place the cursor over the middle duct segment to compare the airflow and pressure information with that of the upper-left duct segment. 11 Move the cursor over the upper-right air terminal to compare its information with that of the middle duct segment. you inspect 2 areas of the air system to compare information. also known as the critical path. Compare system information 8 With the cursor over the upper-left duct segment. click to temporarily place the inspection flag on segment. 10 Click to place the current inspection flag and close the prior one.

click the Training Files icon. you used the System Inspector to inspect the airflow direction. A new view called Copy of Roof is created and becomes the active view. 15 Use the System Inspector to inspect other secondary air systems in the project. and HVAC for Sub-Discipline. you place 2 AC units. click File menu ➤ Save. select Mechanical for Discipline. you place 2 air conditioning roof top units (RTU) on the building. 100 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . and click Rename. enter Inspecting Air Systems Training for File name. The primary is physically but not logically connected. TIP You can also inspect systems in a 3D view. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. Create a new roof plan view 1 In the Project Browser. Ductwork and system components must be connected to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain ductwork (physical connection). Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and click View Properties. 17 In the Save As dialog. airflow. and click OK. 2 In the Project Browser. 3 Enter Roof Mech for Name. You learned that airflow and pressure information is specific to the selected system component. In the left pane of the Open dialog.13 Continue to inspect the remaining secondary air systems in the building. you will create a system for the primary and then you can inspect the primary duct run. the selected system components or duct must be logically and physically connected. 4 Right-click in the drawing area of the new view. You also use create and use new views to precisely locate the AC units. Placing Air Conditioning Units In this exercise. and that all system information is color-coded for either the duct main or the branch. For example. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. right-click Copy of Roof. click Finish Inspector to deactivate the System Inspector. navigate to the folder of your choice. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Architectural ➤ New Construction ➤ Floor Plans. 14 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar. You also compared system information across a system. In this exercise. NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect airflow and pressure inside ductwork. 6 Click OK.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. In the next exercise. In a later exercise. 16 If you want to save your work. under Graphics. Open the m Placing AC Units. you cannot inspect the primary high pressure duct run because you have not created a system for it. and pressure information for various systems in the project. and click Save. right-click Roof.

9 In the Type Selector. 12 Click to place the AC unit. and sketch a zoom region around Men’s Room (located below the Mechanical/Electrical room). Placing Air Conditioning Units | 101 . Notice that the level 2 system components and ductwork display as an underlay. Also notice that the Roof Mech view is now located under the Mechanical HVAC floor plans in the Project Browser. Zoom in if necessary to locate the lower end point snap. and press Spacebar 3 times to rotate the unit. The AC unit supply connection is now located at the top. 8 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. Add the AC Unit that services level 2 7 In the Roof Mechanical view. and then click Modify on the Design Bar. 10 Move the cursor over the Men’s Room. enter ZR. You need to place the AC unit that services level 2 on the roof above the Men’s Room. select M_Rooftop AC Unit 15 .This specifies halftone for all architectural elements in the Roof Mech view. click Mechanical Equipment.Bottom Return Connection : M_15 Ton.25 Ton . 11 Snap to the lower end point of the horizontal partition wall in the Men’s Room as shown.

expand Mechanical ➤ ??? ➤ Sections (Building Section). 17 In the Project Browser. and click OK. and click to specify the section start point. and click Properties. 19 Select the section tail to display the drag handles. A new section view named Section 2 is created and located in the Project Browser under ???. and after the cursor is past the AC unit. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. select HVAC for Sub Discipline. The section relocates under HVAC ➤ Sections (Building Section). Create a new section view 13 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. you create a section view to precisely relocate the AC unit.Next. click Section. click to specify the section end point. 15 Place the cursor below the AC unit and over the Office 8 VAV box. under Graphics. 16 Move the cursor to the right. 102 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . right-click Section 2. 14 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

notice that the unit is located on the roof level and not on the roof surface. Relocate the AC unit to the roof surface 22 Double-click the section head to open the Section 2 view. To place the AC unit on the roof surface. You may need to scroll the view up to access the top shape handle. NOTE As with air terminals and VAV boxes. This changes the duct display from single line to 2-line. you must relocate it. click Modify. 25 Select the AC unit. Notice that the roof level is not referencing the roof surface but the underside of the roof. and click (Move) on the Edit toolbar. 21 On the Design Bar. 24 Zoom in on the AC unit and watch the level indicators. click Medium for Detail Level. The section should partially capture the VAV on the left. Placing Air Conditioning Units | 103 . AC units are level-based components. 23 On the View Control Bar.20 Drag the top shape handle to adjust the depth view clip plane just past the AC unit.

Remember to relocate the view in the Project Browser as you did with the Section 2 view. (Remember to select the reference edge first). 104 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . use the Align tool (on the Tools toolbar) to align the left edge of the level 1 AC unit to the left edge of the level 2 AC unit.25 Ton . and after the intersection and centerline snaps display at the roof surface. ■ Create a new section view above the AC unit as shown below. (300mm directly above the start point). and adjust the depth view clip plane to capture the level 1 AC unit only. 27 Move the cursor up along the left edge of the AC unit. TIP You can also specify the offset level in the Element Properties dialog. click to specify the move start point.26 Move the cursor over the bottom-left corner of the AC unit. place an AC unit for the level 1 supply air system according to the following specifications and procedures: ■ Work in the Roof Mech view. First rotate the unit so that the return connection is at the top.Bottom Return Connection : M_15 Ton above the Mechanical/Electrical room. This specifies the AC unit offset level of 300mm which moves the AC unit to the roof surface. The AC unit placement is shown below. Place the level 1 AC unit 28 Using the methods that you learned. Note that you must locate this AC unit above the Mechanical/Electrical room to allow the supply and return air duct riser to pass through the level 2 Mechanical/Electrical room and into the level 1 plenum space below. and after the end point snap displays. Next. and move the top edge of the AC unit 500mm down. Then snap the top edge of the AC unit to the upper mechanical room wall and click to place it. Use the Move tool. and place a M_Rooftop AC Unit 15 . click to specify the move end point.

you draw the duct to physically connect AC units to the high pressure primary supply air ductwork.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. and double-click 3D Mech to make the view active. Modify the 3D Mech view 1 In the Project Browser. navigate to the folder of your choice. The 2 AC units and the section headers are as shown. you added 2 rooftop AC units to the design. In the next exercise. enter Placing AC Units Training for File name. Open the m Completing Supply Air Systems. ■ 29 If you want to save your work. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ 3D Views. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 Select the section box. you connect the AC units to the high pressure primary supply air ductwork. Then. click File menu ➤ Save.■ Using the new Section 3 view with Medium detail level. relocate the AC unit 300mm above the roof level to place the AC unit on the roof surface. you complete the supply air systems that you began in previous exercises. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Completing the Supply Air Systems In this exercise. In this exercise. Completing the Supply Air Systems | 105 . click the Training Files icon. 30 In the Save As dialog. First. You created 2 section views and used the Move and the Align tools to relocate the AC units to the roof surface. and click Save. you create the systems to logically connect the VAV boxes to the AC units. and drag the center drag handle up to move the crop boundary past the roof.

click (Dynamically Modify View). you tile the Roof Mech and the 3D Mech views so that you can work on and validate your system design simultaneously. 3 On the View toolbar. if you do this. If you like. you will need to reset this boundary to validate the level 1 supply air system later. the active view is the only open window. Tile the views 5 With the 3D Mech view active. Next. Note that if this option is unavailable. you can drag the bottom set of drag handles up above the level 1 system to hide that system. drag the mouse to spin the model as shown. and while pressing the middle mouse button. This closes all windows that you previously opened during the current design session. 106 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems .The entire building including the AC units display. TIP You can also press Shift-middle mouse button. click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. Remember that. 4 Use the Spin button on the Dynamic View dialog. and drag the mouse to spin the model.

double-click Roof Mech to make it the active view. and offset parameter to match that of the selected start point object. click Duct. Enter -750 for Offset. under Mechanical. 14 On the Options Bar. 11 In the Roof Mech view. do the following: ■ Enter 1700 for W: (width). the active view is tiled to the left. 10 In the Type Selector. 8 Zoom the view in both windows as shown. and press Tab. select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows / Taps. you did not begin drawing duct before pressing Spacebar You should always verify the duct type in the Type Selector. Draw the supply duct riser from the AC Unit to the level 2 plenum space 9 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. ■ ■ Verify that Auto Connect is selected.6 In the Project Browser. 7 Enter WT to tile both windows. TIP When drawing duct. and 500 for H: (height). 13 Move the cursor up to begin drawing duct and press Spacebar to match the duct size and offset to the AC supply connection size and offset. This specifies the proper dimensions for the duct. the connector snap displays. TIP When tiling 2 views. place the cursor over the center of the level 2 AC unit (lower unit) supply duct connection. press the Spacebar after you specify your start point and move the cursor to begin drawing duct. You are ready to create the duct riser for the level 2 supply air system. 12 Click to specify the duct riser start point. If a warning appears informing you that the line is too short. This automatically specifies the duct diameter or width and height. Completing the Supply Air Systems | 107 .

connections are automatically created. Note that Auto Connect must be selected on the Options Bar. The duct riser is drawn down from the AC unit to 2900mm from level 2. Notice that the duct riser is offset from the Roof reference level and not from the roof surface which is the location of the AC unit. Notice that a green supply duct riser symbol displays to indicate that a supply duct riser exists. 17 Validate the duct riser geometry in the 3D Mech view. and after listing dimensions display. 16 Click Modify on the Design Bar. and then the duct continues horizontally for 1050mm. 2900mm. IMPORTANT When setting offset parameters for system components. If the 2 are different. enter 1050 and press Enter to specify the end point. 15 Move the cursor up. 108 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . Revit MEP offsets the selected component from the reference level and not its location.The -750mm offset creates the supply duct riser from the Roof reference level down into the level 2 plenum space and places the riser at the same level as the level 2 supply air system.

Mech view to more accurately draw the duct in order to connect the primary supply duct to the duct riser. Connect the primary duct to the duct riser 19 In the Project Browser. TIP When zooming or reorienting a view that uses Medium or Fine for Detail Level. and zoom in on the duct riser in the 2 .Notice that the mitered elbow fitting is automatically inserted. double-click 2 . but for this exercise you only need to see the riser. You now switch to the 2 . 18 Close the Roof Mech view. Completing the Supply Air Systems | 109 .Mech view. This is because the AC unit is beyond the top view range of the 2 . On the View Control Bar. Notice that only the duct riser displays. You can change the Top view parameter to see the AC unit. You can also specify the Detail Level to Coarse for viewing a single line display.Mech view. change the Model Graphics Style to Wireframe to improve performance. 20 Click Window menu ➤ Tile to tile the 2 views. This allows you to continue to use the 2-line display.Mech to make it the active view. You can also validate the duct riser geometry in the 3D Mech view. you may experience performance issues depending on the size and complexity of the system geometry.

select the adjoining elbow. click Duct. select Round Duct : Taps. select 450. click to specify the start point.21 Zoom out the view to show the duct riser and the left primary duct segment. 23 Press DELETE to delete the selected duct segment and elbow. For Offset. 110 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . and after the mid point snap displays. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For D: (diameter). The selected items display in red. verify that 2900 is specified. Verify that Auto connect is selected. The horizontal primary duct segment needs to be removed as it was an approximate location and it is no longer needed. select the horizontal primary segment. 27 Place the cursor over the left edge of the duct riser. 26 On the Options Bar. 22 In the 2 Mech view. and while pressing CTRL. 25 In the Type Selector. 24 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar.

29 Press ESC to deactivate the Draw tool. The left primary is connected to the AC unit.28 Move the cursor over the primary. 30 Validate the geometry in the 3D Mech view. Completing the Supply Air Systems | 111 . click to specify the end point. and after the centerline snap displays.

112 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . you connect the right primary duct to the AC unit. 31 Spin the 3D Mech view around and zoom as shown to validate the right primary connection. You will also use this view to validate endcap placement. and place the cursor over the end connector.Next.Mech view. 33 Select the right primary duct. 32 In the 2 . pan the view to the right to show the duct riser and the right primary segment.

36 On the Edit toolbar. click to specify the duct segment end point. and past the Mechanical/Electrical room wall. NOTE When drawing duct either by using Duct draw tool on the Design Bar. you should always verify that the duct type is correct in the Type Selector. then all connector parameters and the type of the selected object are matched. . click and draw the primary to the left over the wall. This eliminates the need to verify the type in the Type Selector each time you create duct. click (Create Similar). 37 Place the cursor over the end of the primary.34 Drag the connector to right. However. and after the centerline snap displays. Notice that the Draw tool opens (pencil icon) as you drag the duct and closes after you release the mouse button to specify the end point. and after the connector snap displays. 35 Select the primary duct. if you use the Create Similar tool. or by right-clicking a connector. Completing the Supply Air Systems | 113 .

39 Draw the primary to the edge of the AC duct riser.38 Draw the primary down 1000mm. and click to specify the segment end point. and click to specify the end point. 114 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . 40 The primary duct is created and connected to the riser.

You physically connected the primary duct to the AC unit. 42 Validate the geometry in the 3D Mech view. Check connectivity 43 In the 2 . you still need to check connectivity to make certain that all duct and duct fittings are connected. place the cursor over the duct riser and press Tab twice.41 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Create Similar tool.Mech view. Completing the Supply Air Systems | 115 . However.

Mech view. after the endcap snap aligns to the duct edge and the centerline snap displays. 47 Place your cursor over the top edge. 46 In the Type Selector. zoom in on the duct riser. 45 On the Mechanical Tab of the Design Bar.The entire primary supply air duct run including the VAV box connections highlight indicating that they are connected. Add endcaps 44 In the 2 . You may want to zoom out to see the entire primary duct run. click Duct Fitting. select M_Rectangular Duct Endcap : M_Standard. click to add the endcap. You now need to add endcaps to the left primary and to the duct riser to close the ductwork. Notice that the endcap snap follows the cursor. 116 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems .

The endcap snap aligns with the duct edge to indicate proper placement. click to add the endcap. 49 In the Type Selector. select M_Round Duct Endcap : M_Standard.. TIP It is a best practice to zoom in close for accurate endcap placement. move the view to the left to show the end of the primary where you deleted the duct segment and elbow. 51 Press Esc twice to deactivate the Duct Fitting tool. Verify endcap placement 52 Place the cursor over the primary duct round endcap to verify endcap placement. Completing the Supply Air Systems | 117 .48 With the Duct Fitting tool open. 50 Place the cursor over the end of the primary duct segment and after the endcap snap aligns and the centerline snaps displays.

drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a pick box around the entire level 2 floor plan. 54 Using the 2 views. and enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the window. 57 Place the cursor outside of the building at the upper left corner. Additionally endcap edges display enabling you identify the endcap. 55 Press Tab to check connectivity. verify the duct riser endcap. 118 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems .Mech view to make it active. Next. use the same method to validate the endcap geometry. and then validate its geometry. 56 With the 2 views tiled. you finish the level 2 supply air system by creating a system to logically connect the level 2 VAV boxes to the AC unit. Create the high pressure supply air system. You physically connected the AC unit to the level 2 VAV boxes by drawing ductwork.A tooltip and the Status Bar (located at the lower left under the Design Bar) confirm the endcap. 53 In the 3D Mech view. click in the 2 .

Mech view range. and click OK. click (Filter Selection) to filter the selected elements. 60 On the Options Bar. You can verify the selected VAV boxes in the 3D Mech view. This is because they are the only mechanical equipment on level 2. and select the level 2 AC unit. In this case. and then select Mechanical Equipment. (Create Supply Air System) to create a supply air system and assign the 61 Click (Select Equipment for System) to assign the AC unit to the system.Notice that all of the selected elements highlight. click Check None. only the level 2 VAV boxes are within the 2 . Completing the Supply Air Systems | 119 . 59 In the Filter dialog. 62 Click the 3D Mech view title bar to make the window active. 58 On the Options Bar. All level 2 VAV boxes are selected. Remember that when drawing a pick box or using cross-picking (right to left dragging) all elements visible in the view range of the current view are selected. click selected VAV boxes to it.

However. IMPORTANT The system components (air terminals and VAV box) that you assigned to a system are organized in a hierarchy from upstream (parent) to downstream (child). 63 Press Esc or click in the drawing area to deactivate the Create Supply Air System tool. These calculations are used during duct sizing and can be viewed using the System Inspector.Bottom Return Connection : M_15 Ton to display the Mechanical Supply Air 24 system listing.You just created the high pressure primary supply air system to logically connect the level 2 VAV boxes to the rooftop AC unit. or even without ductwork. 65 In the System Browser. After you assign the level 1 system components to a primary supply air system. and notice that the rooftop AC unit is listed 66 Expand M_Rooftop AC Unit 15 -25 Ton . all supply air system components will be assigned and the Default Supply Air category will be empty. ductwork must exist for Revit MEP to perform system calculations such as airflow and pressure. notice that only level 1 VAV boxes are listed in the Default Supply Air category. This is because you have assigned all level 2 VAV supply air connectors to the secondary and primary supply air systems. all system components must be logically connected by a system. IMPORTANT Although you can draw duct to physically connect system components. expand Mechanical. Remember that systems can be created before or after you draw ductwork. 120 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . and click Select. This is the system that you just created. Validate the primary supply air system 64 Press F9 to open the System Browser. 68 Right-click Mechanical Supply Air 24. In the Unassigned folder. Supply Air. 67 Expand Mechanical Supply Air 24 to view the VAV boxes.

73 Move the cursor over the primary supply air system duct run to inspect the air flow and pressure within the duct. move the cursor down. Verify the duct riser geometry in the 3D Mech view. right-click Mechanical Supply Air 24. 70 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar. click Finish Inspector to deactivate the tool. Inspect the primary supply air system 69 In the System Browser. duct fitting. and press Enter to specify the duct end point. or mechanical equipment that has been assigned to a system. Next. 2900mm. and click Inspect. 72 Click a blank space in the 2 .The new level 2 primary supply air system highlights in red. draw the supply duct riser using Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows / Taps and specify a 1700mm width. Specify the offset to -4400mm. ■ ■ Completing the Supply Air Systems | 121 . Click the supply connector. 71 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar. If you select a system component that has been assigned to multiple systems such as an AC unit or a VAV box.Mech drawing area to make the view active. Ductwork must exist to access the System Inspector. you complete the level 1 primary supply air system. and a 500mm height. 75 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar. and enter 1050mm. IMPORTANT Another way to select a system is to select any duct segment. You can then use system tools from the Options Bar. click Inspect. 76 You have completed the level 2 high pressure primary supply air system. complete the level 1 primary supply air system to the following specifications: ■ In the Roof Mechanical view. click Inspect. This offset routes the duct through the level 2 Mechanical/Electrical room and into the level 1 plenum space terminating at the same level as the level 1 supply air system. the Select System dialog opens enabling you to select the system to inspect. Complete the level 1 supply air system 77 Using the methods that you learned in this exercise. The System Inspector tool opens. diffuser. Next. you inspect the system. 74 Make the 3D Mech view active and continue to inspect the primary supply air system. Remember that you can click to place a temporary inspection flag in the view enabling you to compare inspection information.

Mech view (if open). ■ Close the Roof Mech view and the 2 . select the left primary horizontal duct segment and elbow. Notice that the duct riser passes through level 2 as confirmed by the green supply riser symbol in the 2 -Mech view. open the 1 . In the 1 . This is because the location of the supply and return connections are reversed due to rotating the AC units at placement. ■ 122 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . and drag them down to align with the centerline of the right primary duct. Watch for the centerline snap as shown. and tile it to the left of the 3D Mech view.This is the opposite of what you did with the level 2 AC unit.Mech view.Mech view.

add an endcap on the end of the duct riser. Use M_Rectangular Duct Endcap : M_Standard. and remember to zoom the view. Use Tab to check duct connectivity. select the left primary duct segment. and after the edge highlights. ■ Completing the Supply Air Systems | 123 . The level 1 primary duct run is connected to the AC unit. ■ Drag the right primary duct connector to the right edge of the AC duct riser.■ Connect the primary to the AC.Mech view. ■ In the 1 . release the mouse button. Instead of drawing duct. The edge snap displays when the connector is over the edge. and validate the duct geometry in the 3D Mech view. and drag the end connector over the left edge of the duct riser to open the Draw tool.

In this exercise. and inspect the system with the System Inspector. These systems allow Revit MEP to perform calculations such as flow and pressure on the primary supply air systems. In this exercise. Using tiled windows. and for duct sizing.■ Create a system for the level 1 primary supply air system. enter Completing Supply Air Systems Training for File name. you check the systems in your project. Checking Air Systems Revit MEP uses both the duct geometry and logical system to perform calculations such as airflow and pressure. and assign the VAV boxes and the AC unit to it. Because both the logical (system) and physical (ductwork) connections play a vital role in the overall systems design. you need to validate them. Validate the system using the System Browser. you connected the level 1 and level 2 high pressure primary supply air duct runs to separate rooftop AC units. and validated these logical connections. you drew the AC duct risers and then you physically connected each AC unit to its respective primary duct run. click File menu ➤ Save. You have completed the high and low pressure (primary and secondary) supply air systems for the building. and quickly target those systems that need attention. The completed level 1 primary supply air system is as shown. 124 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . 79 In the Save As dialog. ■ 78 If you want to save your work. and click Save. You then created 2 systems to logically connect the AC units to their VAV boxes. you use the Check Duct Systems tool to immediately check these connections for all systems throughout your project. In the next exercise. navigate to the folder of your choice.

the Unassigned folder will be empty and Check Duct Systems will no longer display “not empty” warnings. These warnings can refer to both physical connection issues (such as a disconnected or problematic duct) or logical connection issues (such as an improperly assigned system) in a system. The duct geometry is used for system airflow and pressure calculations. Open the m Checking Air Systems. thus assigning the components to a system. Notice that no warnings refer to the supply air systems indicating that they are valid. and click Select to view all of the unassigned system components. click Check Duct Systems. the VAV is listed in the assigned system and associated with the Default Return Air system in the Unassigned folder. Then.Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. For example. These warnings direct you to check the Unassigned folder in the System Browser. In the System Browser. NOTE The Check Duct Systems warnings contain a system type and a description. 5 Right-click Default Return Air.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. Remember that after you create ductwork to physically connect a system. After you have assigned all system components for the project to their systems. you open the System Browser to view the unassigned system components in the Unassigned folder. Revit MEP lists the system components that are associated with each warning. 3 Expand the Unassigned folder and notice that both Default Return Air and Default Exhaust Air systems are listed. Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (duct) connections of each system throughout the project. you can click in the drawing area to close the message window and continue designing other systems. you confirm that the assigned system components are in their proper systems. IMPORTANT The most common Check Duct Systems warning is the “default system is not empty” warning. and for duct sizing. So. The default system is placed in the Unassigned folder until you select the system components and create a system for them. click the Training Files icon. as a tutorial exercise. Revit MEP creates a default system and assigns them to it in order to perform system calculations. Note that a system component may be listed in both its assigned system and in the Unassigned folder. Ductwork that is associated with a default system (located in the Unassigned folder) is not checked. and you have not assigned the component to the other systems. Perform a systems check 1 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. Checking Air Systems | 125 . However. This occurs because the assigned system component can be connected to multiple systems (it contains different system connectors). Revit MEP places them in their assigned systems folder and removes them from the Unassigned folder. As you learned when placing air terminals and VAV boxes. These Check Duct System warnings refer to different systems that you have yet to design. As you view the warnings. Warnings report that the Default Exhaust Air and Default Return Air systems (for levels 1 and 2) and are not empty. 4 Expand Default Return Air and notice the air terminals and mechanical equipment that were automatically assigned to the Default Return Air system. If you place air terminals and VAV boxes without assigning them to a system. you assigned a VAV to a supply air system but the same VAV has a return air and another supply air connector that you have not assigned to system. Note that only physical connections associated with an assigned system are checked. After you assign the system components to a system. all system components must be assigned to a system immediately after placement. the duct is now associated with that system. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Use the System Browser to confirm duct system assignments 2 Click Window menu ➤ System Browser to open the System Browser.

designing piping systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward and intuitive process. Notice that each system contains a system type and an assigned number. enter Checking Air Systems Training for File name. In this lesson.The red lines represent the default logical connection. 8 Right-click Supply Air. such as Mechanical Supply Air 3. otherwise click Close. You confirmed all of the unassigned default systems in the Unassigned systems folder. In the next lesson. placing a circulator pump. you create hydronic piping systems. 126 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . open the m Completed Mechanical Systems. To view the completed mechanical systems for this tutorial including the supply air system. Designing Piping Systems As with designing air systems. 10 If you want to save your work. You have validated both the unassigned and the assigned system components and their systems. Depending on your air systems design. You will use many of the same methods and practices that you learned while designing the air systems. 6 Using the same methods. Then. You have completed the supply air systems for the building. You begin your piping systems design by placing fin-tube radiators in rooms and adding a boiler. and click Save. and inspecting the piping system. 7 Collapse the Unassigned folder and expand the Mechanical systems folder.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder under Training Files. 11 In the Save As dialog. you create the systems and pipe runs to logically and physically connect the system components. You now confirm the systems that you created. and click Expand All to view all systems that you created including their assigned diffusers (air terminals) and mechanical equipment. and click Select Press to view it and its assigned system components. you may need to assign these system components to their proper systems. navigate to the folder of your choice. you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to switch between views. TIP If you have multiple views open. You also confirmed that the air terminals and mechanical equipment for the return and exhaust air systems were unassigned as they were located in their respective default systems in the System Browser and “not empty” warnings were generated by Check Duct Systems. you used the Check Duct Systems tool and the System Browser to validate the supply air systems that you created. In this exercise. click File menu ➤ Save. confirm the unassigned system components in the Default Exhaust Air system. You continue designing by resolving pipe interference. you design a hydronic piping system for the building. 9 Right-click a system.

This allows you locate the boiler and connect to it from one view. and enter -3500 for Offset. a boiler. you will have been introduced to concepts and practices that you will use to design the hydronic piping systems. and click OK. A new view called Copy of 2 . Modify the view properties 4 With the 2 . Create the level 2 piping floor plan view 1 In the Project Browser. 2 In the Project Browser. click the Annotation Categories tab. verify that Associated Level (Level 2) is selected. right-click 2 Mech. Click Edit for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. right-click Copy of 2 . enter 2 . In the left pane of the Open dialog.Mech. After completing the air systems lesson. 3 In the Rename View dialog. under Graphics. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. This hides the grid lines to make it easier to place the fin-tube radiators. and the systems to logically connect the system components. verify that Associated Level (Level 2) is selected. you change the view range. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. click the Training Files icon. and click Edit for View Range.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. scroll down to the Extents category. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and click Rename. Enter 950 for Cut plane Offset. circulator pump. For Bottom. 7 Click OK. 6 In the Visibility Graphics dialog. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. clear Grids.Piping for Name. and enter -3500mm for Offset. Creating Piping Views In this exercise. The hydronic piping systems consist of wall mounted hydronic fin-tube radiators. 9 In the View Range dialog. and under Visibility. do the following: ■ ■ ■ (Properties) to modify the view Verify that Mechanical is specified for Discipline. Next. you begin designing the level 2 hydronic piping systems for the building. Open the m Creating Piping Views. for Level. and enter 950mm for Offset. First. Delete HVAC and enter Piping for Sub-Discipline. under Primary Range do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Top. This specifies the top view range above the radiators on level 2 and a bottom view range below the return connection of the boiler on level 1. 8 In the Element Properties dialog.Mech is created and becomes the active view. you create new views in which to design the piping system. click properties. pipes. Under View Depth. verify that Associated Level (Level 2) is selected.IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you complete the air systems part of this tutorial before creating hydronic piping systems. Creating Piping Views | 127 .Piping view selected in the Project Browser.

and click OK. you can add and activate filters. you can enter 2600 and press Tab for 2600mm. just enter the value. 11 You use this view to create the pipe run that services level 2. You can use the system filters for tasks such as color-coding your systems. and enter VG. You can use the level 1 ductwork as a reference to avoid interference with the level 2 pipe run. 10 Click OK twice. (New). 18 Under Filter Rules. So the pipe will not interfere with the duct. the pipe run will be located near the outer walls. and verify that equals is selected. it will be best to create filters. click the Filters tab.Piping view. under Filters. You could use the system filters to filter some duct and duct fittings. 128 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . click in the drawing area to make the view active. and the vertical pipe run from the boiler will be routed in the Mechanical /Electrical room. IMPORTANT You can create and define filters in the Filters dialog. Next you create a series of filters to hide the level 1 duct and system components. 17 Under Categories. For example. Considering this. click 16 Enter VAV Boxes for Name. 14 Click Edit/New. Notice that some predefined filters are listed under Name. and press Tab. These system filters show or hide certain system elements that share the same system type. However. Also notice that 2 . the system filters are not used. Notice that filters are already created and listed under Filters. they will not filter all system elements needed. 13 In the Visibility Graphics dialog.Piping view displays all architectural elements in halftone and it displays the level 1 air systems. On the Filters tab. do the following: ■ Select Family Name for Filter by. 15 In the Filters dialog.NOTE When entering a value. Create and define filters 12 In the 2 . So. you do not need to type measurement symbols.Piping is now located under Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans in the Project Browser. however. The 2 . In this lesson. select Mechanical Equipment. You can then use these filters to hide or show objects in other views. you can hide the level 1 duct and system components to make it easier to view the pipe run.

click (Properties). 27 In the Element Properties dialog. return. Note that if you are filtering multiple categories or multiple types in one category. Then you can view the common filter criteria from the Element Properties dialog. Depending on the filter criteria. under Filters. 26 On the Options Bar. 19 In the Filters dialog. You do not have common filter criteria for the supply. This is the same rule for using formulae. Verify that none is selected for And. NOTE When entering filter criteria and assigning it to a family. However. system type. common (shared) instance parameters will display even if other instance parameters are different (the different instance parameters do not display). select Description for Filter by. you must spell both verbatim. and exhaust air terminals but they all have a Description type parameter. The new VAV Boxes filter is listed in the Filters list. you must select filter criteria that is common and shared by all selected components that you want to filter. Next. So. such as family name. This adds a description for all Exhaust Air Grill air terminals of the type M_600 x 600 Face 300 x 300 Connection. To do this. A quick way to determine common filter criteria is to draw a pick box around all components in a view. 25 In the Type Selector. you create a filter to hide all 3 types of air terminals. 23 Enter Air Terminal for the description. This filter will hide all parallel fan powered VAVs in the view after it is added and activated. Note that if at least one type parameter is different amongst the selected components. . 28 In the Type Properties dialog. 21 Under Categories. 22 Under Filter Rules. Creating Piping Views | 129 . Next.■ ■ ■ Select M_Parallel Fan Powered VAV for the family name. you need to assign the new description to all 3 air terminal types that you use in the project. and click on the Options Bar to view certain components. 24 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. IMPORTANT You can filter by many types of criteria. enter Air Terminal for Description. and click OK twice. click Air Terminal. select M_Exhaust Air Grill : M_600 x 600 Face 300 x 300 Connection. You can create filters that are either general or specific in scope depending on the filter criteria. click Air Terminals. otherwise the filter will not work. you may want to select each component type separately. NOTE The Description type parameter is applied to all components of that type. It also creates common criteria that associates all of these exhaust air terminal types to the Air Terminal filter. and verify that equals is selected. under Identity Data. then no type parameter will display in the Type Properties dialog. This is different from the Comment instance parameter which only affects the selected component (or instance). click 20 Enter Air Terminals for Name. you create a description as the common filter criteria. click Edit / New. 29 Click Apply. Click Apply. you need a define common filter criteria. type name. or even a description that you define.

You want to view only the rectangular duct with mitered elbows because this the duct riser which is in the Mechanical /Electrical rooms and you want to avoid it when routing the pipe from the boiler. ■ Remember that you must click Apply after defining each filter and before defining the next one in order to create the filter. Rectangular Ducts Mitered Elbows/Taps. you will not see the Description type parameter. and select Air Terminal. NOTE If you drew a pick box and filtered to select all air terminals. For Type. And: Type Name. Filter by: Family Name. 34 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Air Terminal tool. 31 Under Identity Data.Round. you specify a family and a type name. Remember. you add a description for the supply air diffusers.Piping view to make it active. and remember to click Apply in the Filters dialog after you define each filter to create it: ■ Supply Air . Next.200 Neck. Category: Flex Ducts. To filter multiple duct fitting types. select M_600x600 . By selecting each air terminal type separately. you can select it. click Edit/New. 39 Click OK. and enter VG. and select Mitered Elbows / Taps for the type name. return. Category: Ducts. you need to define the filter again. verify that equals is selected. and enter Supply Air for system type name. This is because the selected supply. verify that equals is selected. 33 Click OK twice. you have 2 types of rectangular duct. create the following new filters according to the specifications. and select Round Duct for the family name. Category: Ducts. you need a common filter criteria. So. ■ ■ Rectangular Ducts Radius Elbows/Taps. 36 In the Visibility Graphics dialog. click in the Value column for Description. Round Ducts.Round Connection. 38 Using the methods that you just learned. and click Apply. Remember to click Apply. Next. 37 On the Filters tab. 130 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . do the following: ■ ■ For Family. Category: Ducts. and select Radius Elbows / Taps for the type name. So. Filter by: Family Name. Filter by: System Type. click the Filters tab. if differences exist in the selected elements. Category: Duct Fittings. verify that equals is selected. you can view the Description type parameter and identify it as common to all air terminal types. 30 In the Type Properties dialog.Next. And: Type Name. verify that equals is selected. and select Flex Duct Round for the family name.Duct Fittings. Filter by: Family Name. and select Rectangular Duct for the family name. then the type parameters will not display. 32 Repeat the method that you learned to add a description to the return air diffusers. and select Rectangular Duct for the family name. you continue to create and define the filters. verify that equals is selected. ■ Flex Ducts . select M_Rectangular Diffuser . verify that equals is selected. Because you already entered the description. Filter by: Family Name. 35 Click in the 2 . and exhaust air terminals have at least one different type parameter. If you did not click Apply. you filter duct fittings by system type. All duct fittings in your project have a System Type instance parameter defined as Supply Air in the element properties. verify that equals is selected.

Piping for Name. Add and activate filters 40 In the Visibility Graphics dialog. do the following: ■ Verify that Mechanical is specified for Discipline. and click OK. All filtered components hide from view except for the duct riser in the Mechanical/Electrical room. right-click Copy of 1 . You will use the duct riser as a reference to avoid interfering with it when routing the pipe run from the boiler. and click OK. 47 Right-click in the drawing area. It also improves viewing performance because geometry that would normally be regenerated is hidden. 48 In the Element Properties dialog. Notice that you have visibility controls similar to visibility categories on other Visibility Graphics dialog tabs. clear all check boxes except for Rectangular Ducts Mitered Elbows/Taps. you activate the filters. under Graphics. Create the level 1 piping view 44 In the Project Browser. You now define the view properties. A new view called Copy of 1 . This is because you have not added them. 45 In the Project Browser. 46 Enter 1 . 42 Under Visibility. click Add. You can also set the Detail Level to Wireframe to increase viewing performance. you create the level 1 piping view in order to place the boiler. 43 Click OK.Mech. Next.You defined and created all of the filters that you will need to create the hydronic piping system. TIP Filters allow you hide geometry making visibility clearer. Notice that the Filters tab in the Visibility Graphics dialog does not list the new filters even though you created them. you add and activate the filters. right-click 1 Mech. select all of the filters that you created. and click Rename. Next. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.Mech is created and becomes the active view. You used this duct to create the duct riser. Creating Piping Views | 131 . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. and click View Properties. The new filters are listed on the Filters tab of the Visibility Graphics dialog. Next. 41 In the Add Filters dialog.

you change the view range. As you create the pipe runs. under Primary Range. 59 In the Visibility Graphics dialog. and to create the level 1 piping system. you will want to validate the geometry. and under Visibility. You use this view to place the boiler that services level 2. 132 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . 50 Click OK. click the Filters tab. right-click 3D Mech. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Next. Next. You need to use the filters that you created earlier so that you can view only the pipes and the level 1 duct riser. you create the 3D piping view to be able to validate this geometry. 52 In the View Range dialog. 51 In the Element Properties dialog. The new view is created using the view properties from the 3D Mech view. ducts. and fin-tub radiators from displaying. Create the 3D Piping view 54 In the Project Browser. 58 In the Element Properties dialog.■ ■ Select Piping for Sub-Discipline. and click Rename. Select Piping for Sub-Discipline. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Mechanical is selected for Discipline. scroll down to the Extents category.Piping view displays the new view settings. Unlike the 2 . If you turn off ducts visibility. verify that Associated Level (Level 1) is selected and that 3000 is specified for Top Offset. under Graphics. 53 Click OK twice. and click View Properties. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ 3D Views. 49 In the Visibility Graphics dialog. you will be unable to view the duct riser. You do not need to use filters to place the boiler. The 3000mm top offset prevents the level 2 pipes (except for the boiler pipe connection). Click Edit for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. such as halftone architecture. and click OK. 55 In the Project Browser. The 1 .Piping view. 56 Enter 3D Piping for Name. right-click Copy of 3D Mech. clear Grids. and click Edit for View Range. click the Annotation Categories tab. this view only displays ducts and pipes on its level. Click Edit for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. 57 Right-click in the drawing area.

right-click the Design Bar. select all of the filters that you created. you created and modified 2 floor plans and a 3D view. 64 In the Element Properties dialog. click Add. 3 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar. In this exercise. Notice that the duct fittings are filtered. and click Save. Placing Radiators and a Boiler In this exercise. 67 In the Save As dialog. The duct risers and AC units display in the view. 2 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. and click OK. NOTE If the Piping tab is not available on the Design Bar. In the next exercise. navigate to the folder of your choice.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. you place the radiators and a boiler. enter Creating Piping Views Training for File name. You also created filters to display certain system components. You want to view it to avoid interfering with it when routing the pipe run from the boiler. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans. 61 In the Add Filters dialog. 63 Click OK. select M_Hydronic Fin-Tube Radiator : M_25 NPT. This is fine because you are using the riser as a reference to avoid interference with the boiler piping. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 66 If you want to save your work. and click Piping. 62 Under Visibility. 1 In the Project Browser. you place the fin-tube radiators on level 2 and the boiler on level 1 that services the level 2 radiators. Open the m Placing Radiators and Boiler. Placing Radiators and a Boiler | 133 . clear Section Box to turn it off. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click the Training Files icon. click Mechanical Equipment. and double-click 2 .Piping to make it the active view. clear all check boxes except for Rectangular Ducts Mitered Elbows/Taps. under Extents. 65 Click OK. The selected filters are listed on the Filters tab.60 On the Filters tab. You used this duct to create the duct riser. The AC units display because you did not create a filter to hide them. 4 In the Type Selector. click File menu ➤ Save.

7 Place the cursor over the top exterior wall. and center a fin-tube radiator under the upper-right window as shown. except for the windows on the radius wall. This is because the fin-tube radiator is a wall-hosted family and can only be placed on a wall. and notice that the connectors and temporary dimensions display. A tooltip and the Status Bar (located at the lower left under the Design Bar) confirm the room name and number. 8 Click to place the radiator. 134 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems .5 Move the cursor over a wall and notice that an outline of the radiator and listening dimensions display only if the cursor is over the wall. you can identify a room by placing the cursor over the room component. 6 Zoom in on Office 6 located in the upper-left corner of the floor plan. 9 Continue placing radiators centered under all windows on level 2 as shown. TIP Although room tags were not copied when you created this view.

IMPORTANT If you select multiple objects and then view their properties. TIP Remember to zoom the view to accurately place the radiators. The flow rate changes for all radiators on level 2.25 for Flow. If so. right-click a radiator. Modify radiator flow rate 11 In the drawing area. for Flow. If the same type of component exists on another level. Next.25 L/s is specified for all of the selected radiators. and click Select All Instances. NOTE Note that Select All Instances selects all components of the same type in the entire model. verify that 1. and you do not want to include it. All level 2 radiators display in red. click . under Mechanical Loads. The existing radiator flow rate needs to be changed. you modify the radiator flow rate. Place the boiler 15 In the Project Browser. you place the boiler. If parameters are blank. then these are different across the selected objects. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. Placing Radiators and a Boiler | 135 . 12 On the Options Bar. then it would be better to use other selection methods such as drawing a pick box. the parameters that display are common to all of the selected objects.Piping to make this the active view. Your design specification recommends a flow rate of 0. The boiler that services the level 2 radiators will be located on level 1. 10 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Mechanical Equipment tool.25 L/s for all fin-tube radiators in the building. Do not delete the section as you will reuse it later in this lesson. 14 Enter . and click OK. double-click 1 . Next.You may need to move the Section 1 head and tail to place the Office 6 upper-left radiator. drag the section tail. You selected all instances of the level 2 radiators because Flow is an instance parameter and must be applied to each instance that you want to modify.

and sketch a zoom region around Mechanical/Electrical room. The boiler maximum flow rate complies with the design specification. 19 Press Esc twice to deactivate the Mechanical Equipment tool. and select M_Boiler : M_Standard from the Type Selector.16 Enter ZR. 136 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . Notice that the connectors and temporary dimensions display after you place the boiler. right-click the boiler. click Mechanical Equipment. and click to place the boiler 1200mm from the right vertical wall and 400mm from the horizontal wall in Open 1 as shown. 20 In the drawing area. watch the listening dimensions. You can filter the air terminals to make it easier to see the dimensions. Next. 17 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar. under Type Parameters. you verify the boiler flow rate. verify that 14. 21 In the Element Properties dialog.50 L/s is set for Max Flow. and click Element Properties. 18 Move the cursor to the right of the duct riser.

In the next exercise. and the boiler that services those radiators on level 1. Notice that all of the mechanical equipment that you added are located under Default systems categories in the Unassigned folder. IMPORTANT In the System Browser. So. after you placed the radiators and boiler.Piping to make it the active view. click System Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. This occurred because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed. Creating the Piping Systems In this exercise. analyses cannot be performed. If the System Browser does not respond. and expand the Default Hydronic Supply and the Default Hydronic Return systems to view the level 2 radiators and the boiler that you placed in the building. 23 If you want to save your work. you create the supply and return piping systems. if all system components are assigned. During this exercise. Explore the System Browser 3 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar. physical connections (pipes) are not required for systems creation. Open the m Creating Piping Systems. 24 In the Save As dialog. you also use the System Browser to confirm your systems. enter Placing Radiators and Boiler Training for File name. Thus. 1 In the Project Browser.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. You can create pipes to connect system components but without a corresponding system. and then create the logical connection between these system components. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according to the system that you assigned to them. you placed wall mounted fin-tube radiators on level 2. and double-click 2 . click in the drawing area to make it active. each Default system category would not contain any system components and would be considered empty. In this exercise. and so on) to a system either by creating a logical connection (or system) between the system components or by assigning a system component to an existing system. the assigned radiators move from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder. TIP You can also press F9 (or Window menu ➤ System Browser) to open or close the System Browser. click File menu ➤ Save. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans. The System Browser is a powerful tool that allows you to validate and confirm systems. A system is the logical connection between system components such as fin-tube radiators and a boiler. you create the systems to logically connect the system components. 2 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the window. You assign a system component (mechanical equipment. They remain in the Default systems category until you assign them to their proper system. 4 Expand the Unassigned folder. Creating the Piping Systems | 137 . Unlike logical connections (systems). navigate to the folder of your choice. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including flow and pressure. You also modified the radiator flow rate and verified the boiler flow rate so that they complied with design specifications. This is the recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Hydronic Supply and Default Hydronic Return system category located in the Unassigned folder. you then create pipes to physically connect the system components.22 Click OK. and click Save. click the Training Files icon. As you assign radiators to systems. After creating the logical connection. You create piping systems by placing mechanical equipment and other system components. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. then press F9. It is not a pipe system but only a physical connection.

all other components are unavailable. right-click. and click Select All Instances. 7 On the Options Bar. click supply system. click (Create Hydronic Supply System). All level 2 radiators display in red.Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create your systems. Create the supply hydronic piping system 5 Select a fin-tube radiator. 6 On the Options Bar. (Select Equipment for System). the hydronic supply system is immediately created and listed in the System Browser along with the fin-tube radiators that were assigned to it. and select the boiler to assign it to the Notice that you can select only valid system components. 138 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . Notice that after you click .

TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears. and click Select All Instances to select all level 2 radiators. Notice that is does not display. IMPORTANT The new system named Hydronic Supply 1 is now listed in the System Browser under Hydronic Supply in the Piping folder. This display indicates that the new system is selected.The supply system that logically connects the radiators to the boiler displays in red. You can also right-click the Hydronic Supply 1 listing in the System Browser. and select the system. This is because the selected components already have a hydronic supply system assigned to them. Next. you create the return piping system. Select All Instances is an appropriate selection tool. So. Creating the Piping Systems | 139 . click . click (Create Hydronic Return System) to create the hydronic return system and assign the selected fin-tube radiators to it. the Default Hydronic Supply system is empty and does not display. Create the return hydronic piping system 8 Select a radiator. Notice that the Default Hydronic Supply category no longer displays. the boiler (the parent) to downstream. The organization is from upstream. This indicates that you have assigned all hydronic supply system components in the model. 10 On the Options Bar. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. Remember that the only radiators that exist in the project are on level 2. press Tab. and select the boiler to assign it to the return system. Thus. right-click. place the cursor over a radiator or the boiler. 9 On the Options Bar. and click Select to select the system. the radiator (the child) with the connecting system between them.

navigate to the folder of your choice. select one of the radiators that you added to the system to display this tool and the other Options Bar system tools. or even without pipe being drawn. These listings represent the systems that you just created. you create the level 2 pipe runs to physically connect the system components. you created the supply and return piping systems to logically connect the radiators and boiler. 16 Repeat this method to validate the Hydronic Return System logical connection. and click Select. in the next exercise. The hydronic supply system highlights in red indicating the logical connection. and click Expand to view the boilers and the Hydronic Supply 1 and Hydronic Return 1 system listings. Now that you logically connected the piping system components. 18 In the Save As dialog. and click Save. Confirm and validate the systems 12 In the System Browser. IMPORTANT Although you can draw pipe to create the physical pipe connections. expand Piping. you must create a system for Revit MEP to perform calculations such as flow and pressure. and you used the System Browser to confirm and validate the newly created systems. 14 Expand Hydronic Supply 1 to view the radiators. You can now view the supply system hierarchy: Hydronic Supply 1 logically connects the boiler (parent) with the radiators (children). Remember that systems can be created before or after pipe. 13 Right-click each category. 15 Right-click Hydronic Supply 1. 140 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . You learned how the System Browser organizes system components and systems. and cleared from the Options Bar. click File menu ➤ Save. and notice that Hydronic Supply and Hydronic Return systems categories are listed. 17 If you want to save your work. enter Creating Piping Systems Training for File name. In this exercise.11 The return system displays in red TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area.

expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and double-click 2 . you design 2 pipe layouts and then create the supply and return pipe runs based on these layouts.Piping to make it the active view.Piping view range highlight. click (Filter Selection) to filter the selected elements. 4 In the Filter box. click Check None. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Create the level 2 supply pipe layout 2 Place the cursor outside of the building at the upper left corner. Open the m Creating Pipe Runs. Creating Pipe Runs | 141 . In a later exercise. click the Training Files icon. you connect the boiler to the pipe runs. drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a pick box around the entire floor plan.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. 3 On the Options Bar. and click OK.Creating Pipe Runs In this exercise. The pipe runs physically connect the level 2 radiators. and then select Mechanical Equipment. Notice that all components that are in the 2 . 1 In the Project Browser.

5 On the Options Bar. click Layout Path. select Hydronic Supply 1. You can click each system in the Select a System dialog to view it. (You can see the level 1 boiler in the 2 . You will need to select a system to create the layout. Notice that the radiators. IMPORTANT If you select system components to create a pipe layout and the selected system components are already connected to more than one system (because they have multiple system connectors).Piping view) TIP Instead of selecting all components and filtering. The Layout Path tool and the Select a System dialog open. You can select each system in the dialog to view it.The level 2 radiators and the level 1 boiler are selected (and display in red). the boiler. the return system that logically connects the components display in red. 7 Click OK. 6 In the Select a System dialog. you are selecting all components within the view range of the active view. press Tab to highlight the system and select it. Then. This occurs because when you draw a pick box to select components. then the Select a System dialog will open. The system displays in red. 142 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . you can place the cursor over a radiator. you can click Layout Path on the Options Bar.

■ Click (Next Solution). This option slopes the entire pipe layout. 9 On the Options Bar. Later in this exercise. ■ Verify that 0.00° is specified for Slope. you modify the layout segments that are tangent to the radius wall. ■ Enter 300 for Inset. 10 On the Options Bar.The Layout Path tool activates providing various layout tools. The inset is the distance from the pipe to the connection on the selected system component. click Settings. verify that Main is selected. verify that Solutions is selected. NOTE Notice that the Perimeter layout solution inset modifies the layout path. 8 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. Creating Pipe Runs | 143 . 12 Under System Type: Hydronic Supply do the following: ■ ■ Verify that Pipe Types: Standard is selected for Pipe Type. NOTE The Perimeter solution creates a layout that runs parallel (along a perimeter) to the connectors of the selected system components. Next. The layout path solution displays with the main in blue and the branch in green. and select solution 5. You can also view all possible layout path solutions by pressing the left and right arrow keys on your keyboard. Enter -375mm for Offset. you specify the pipe conversion settings that you use to convert the layout path to a pipe run. You want the pipes to run along the perimeter of the radiators. you create the supply pipe run 300mm from the radiator pipe connections (not from the outside wall). do the following: ■ Select Perimeter for Solution Type. 11 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. Using this inset. It does not reference the architecture.

or architecture. refer to Help. and other obstacles. Modify the level 2 supply pipe layout 16 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar.This negative offset elevation places the pipe main at 3275mm in the level 1 plenum space. 144 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . For more information. NOTE Configuring the pipe conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. zoom the view. 17 In the drawing area. select Branch. You now modify the layout paths that are tangent to the radius wall. 15 Click OK. you now modify the layout path. 14 Under System Type: Hydronic Supply. Enter -375 for Offset. duct. You can also configure these settings by clicking Mechanical Settings on the Piping tab of the Design Bar (or Settings ➤ Mechanical Settings). click Modify. After configuring the pipe conversion settings. Remember that you are working in the level 2 piping view. 13 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. IMPORTANT The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main. and select the lower layout path main that is tangent to the radius wall. The layout path is located under the radiators. This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. structural beams. do the following: ■ ■ Verify that Pipe Types: Standard is selected for Pipe Type.

A drag control displays. Creating Pipe Runs | 145 . drag the main to the right at approximately the same inset as layout path. 18 Using the drag control.

Pipes are a physical not a logical connection. This is because the System Browser lists system components and systems. Either relocate the system components. This pipe run physically connects the supply side (supply connectors) of the system components. and is not part of the system. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. You will address the cause of this warning later in this exercise. The most common cause of these errors is that the pipe usually has insufficient space to be created. or manually modify the pipe. IMPORTANT Errors may occur while attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. Notice that the pipes are not listed in the System Browser. Ignore the no auto-route solution warning. or offset elevations are incorrect. 146 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . select a different layout solution. For example. you can delete pipes and pipe fittings and the system remains unaffected. 20 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. The supply pipe run (main and branches) is created and all required pipe fittings are automatically inserted.19 Repeat the process to modify the upper layout path tangent to the radius wall. click Finish Layout.

Notice that the pipes and symbolic fittings display in single line. Some pipes are hidden causing a gap. Creating Pipe Runs | 147 . 22 On the View Control Bar (located at the lower left of the drawing area). This is caused by the hidden line setting. In the Mechanical Settings dialog. Also notice that a rise/drop symbol displays indicating the pipe riser. The Hidden Line mechanical setting is not to be confused with the Hidden Lines Model Graphics Style located on the View Control Bar. IMPORTANT Creating Hydronic Piping Systems uses a hidden (haloed) line display.Change the geometry display 21 Enter ZR and draw a zoom region around the Office 6. The pipe geometry displays in 2-line enabling you to better see it. To turn off hidden lines. click Mechanical Settings on the Piping tab of the Design Bar (or click Settings menu ➤ Mechanical Settings). select Fine for Detail Level. If a pipe is hidden by an object. a gap displays indicating the hidden geometry. select Hidden Line and specify the inside and outside gap to 0.

Instead of moving the pipe. The selected pipe and pipe fittings display in red. the pipe run needs to be changed to a 25mm diameter. and click to select them. A single pipe does not conform to the hydronic piping design. On the View Control Bar. or Fine for 2-line pipe display. it is easier to delete the pipe and fittings and draw a new one later. Additionally. you modify the pipe run so that it better fits in with the design. 148 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems .23 Zoom the view and notice that the symbolic fittings and rise/drop symbol have been replaced by fitting geometry and a green pipe riser symbol. You use the 2-line display to design the piping system. The deletion also divides the pipe run into left and right sides. Medium for 2-line duct display. The design requires 2 zones. If you experience slower viewing performance while using the higher detail settings. So. TIP You can easily change the pipe geometry representation by changing the Detail Level. 25 Place the cursor over the pipe. and press TAB twice to highlight the pipe and the adjacent pipe fittings. change the Model Graphics Style to Wireframe and/or turn off component visibility in the Visibility Graphics dialog. select Coarse for single line display. Modify the pipe run 24 Zoom in on the pipe connecting the boiler to the supply pipe run. you will need 2 pipes connecting the boiler to the supply pipe run. Next.

Creating Pipe Runs | 149 . Next. 28 Place the cursor over the left side of the supply pipe run (left of the split that occurred after deleting the boiler connecting pipe). you modify the supply pipe run diameter. select 25mm for D: (diameter). 29 On the Options Bar. and press TAB twice to highlight the pipe run (main and branches but not the radiators). and click to select it. Remember that although the physical connection from the boiler to the radiators has been deleted. and click Modify on the Design Bar. 27 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area.26 Press Delete to delete the selection. the logical connection (or system) is still intact.

All radiators and pipe highlight indicating that they are physically connected. 30 Repeat this method to change the right side of the supply pipe run to the same diameter. If the entire network does not highlight. you check to make certain that the pipe run is physically connected to the radiators. fittings. The diameter on the Options Bar displays as 25mm indicating that all pipe for the selected pipe run have been modified to the specified diameter. width.The diameter of the main and branches change to 25mm. This disconnect will be located at the point where the highlighting stops. Typically the disconnect results from not having sufficient room to make the connection. You can repair the connection by dragging the pipe segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect. Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected pipe and pipe fittings up to the first piece of connected equipment. or you may need to convert a fitting and draw pipe. 33 Place the cursor over the right side of the supply pipe run and after it highlights. Check connectivity 32 Right-click in the view and click Zoom to Fit from the context menu. If the pipes had different diameters. the diameter would not display. and equipment. then you know that a disconnect exists. the pipe run and click to select each side of the pipe run. NOTE It is important to recognize that changing the diameter. Next. Sizing is performed using the Sizing tool (Sizing dialog) and sizes the pipe based on a series of parameters and calculations. press Tab 3 times. the branch to which the pipe is connected highlights. Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected pipes. 31 Verify the diameter changes by pressing TAB twice to highlight. 150 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . IMPORTANT When pipes and fittings are connected. or height of pipe on the Options Bar is not sizing. The first time you press Tab. you check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of pipe so that it highlights and then press Tab.

Creating Pipe Runs | 151 . This disconnect caused the no auto-route solution warning message to display after creating the piping layout. This allows you to better see disconnects. Notice that the lower-left radiator did not highlight or display in red indicating that it is disconnected. You need to correct the disconnect. Correct a piping disconnect 35 Zoom in on the radiator in Office 8 located in the lower-left corner. 34 Repeat this method to check the connectivity of the left supply pipe run.After the pipe run and radiators are highlighted. you can click to select them.

36 Zoom in on the upper-right elbow. These controls convert the selected fitting to the next possible fitting for the piping context. You need to correct this disconnect by converting an elbow fitting to a tee and then drawing pipe to connect to the tee fitting. These plus signs are fitting conversion controls. You may need to zoom the view closer to better see the fitting conversion controls. Fitting control locations indicate the orientation of the fitting connection. Notice that 2 plus signs and 2 connectors display. Each control converts the elbow fitting into a tee fittings but with either a vertical or horizontal orientation.Notice that the branch did not connect to the main when the pipe run was created. 152 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . 37 Click the plus sign located to the left. and select it. IMPORTANT Fitting conversion controls display as plus or minus signs that are located near a selected pipe fitting.

and click the right plus sign.The elbow converts to a tee with a horizontal orientation. a tooltip displays indicating the next possible fitting. This fitting conversion control allows you to return to the previous fitting. 39 Click the minus sign to convert back to the elbow fitting. TIP If you place the cursor over a fitting conversion control. 38 Click the tee fitting. A minus sign displays. Creating Pipe Runs | 153 . 40 Click the elbow fitting.

The Draw tool activates enabling you to create pipe. select Pipe Types : Standard. 43 In the Type Selector. Draw pipe to correct disconnects 41 Zoom out the view to display the disconnected pipe segment and the tee fitting. Notice that the cursor changes to a pencil to indicate that the Draw tool is active.The elbow converts to a tee with a vertical orientation. click Pipe. click to specify the pipe segment start point. 44 Place the cursor over the end of the tee fitting. and after the fitting end point snap displays. You can now draw the pipe to connect the radiator to the supply pipe run. 42 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar. 154 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems .

you can press the Spacebar after you specify your start point and begin drawing. to locate a connector and create the connection. Remember to always check connectivity after drawing the pipe segment. a tooltip appears confirming the connector. TIP When drawing pipe. If you do not use the connector snap. If you pause briefly. . use the connector snap. you should always verify the pipe type in the Type Selector. you specify a start point then move the cursor to create the pipe segment. 45 Move the cursor down toward the tee to begin drawing the pipe. click to specify the segment end point. and then specify an end point. If drawing contiguous segments. Creating Pipe Runs | 155 . NOTE When drawing pipe. This automatically specifies the pipe diameter and offset (elevation) to match that of the selected start point object. a connection may not occur. If a warning appears informing you that the line is too short. and after the connector snap displays. the end point of current segment will be the start point of the next segment. 46 Continue drawing the pipe segment down toward the tee fitting. and press Spacebar to match the offset (-375) and diameter (25mm) to that of the selected tee connector.TIP When using the Draw tool to create pipe. you did not begin drawing before pressing Spacebar Note that although the diameter and offset are specified automatically.

expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ 3D Views. you validate the pipe geometry. use the Zoom. 52 In the Dynamic View dialog. 51 On the View toolbar. and double-click 3D Piping to make it the active view. Next. 156 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . and press TAB twice to check connectivity. specify the Detail Level to Fine to display the pipes in 2-line.The pipe segment is created connecting the radiator to the supply pipe run. 48 Place the cursor over the pipe segment. The pipe branch including the tee fitting highlight indicating that they are physically connected. 47 Press ESC to deactivate the Draw tool. click (Dynamically Modify View). and Spin buttons to verify that the level 2 supply pipe run geometry is as you expected. Scroll. Validate the pipe geometry 49 In the Project Browser. 50 On the View Options Bar.

Delete the pipe and the 2 fittings that connect the boiler to the return pipe run. you create the return pipe run. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Creating Pipe Runs | 157 .Next. Verify that 0.Piping view.00° is specified for Slope. Validate the pipe geometry using the 3D Piping view. Enter 600 for Inset. This places the pipes at a 3125mm elevation in the level 1 plenum space. verify that Pipe Types: Standard is selected. create the level 2 return pipe run according to the following specifications: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the 2 . Select Perimeter solution 3. ■ In the Layout Path tool. The deleted pipe divides the return pipe run into left and right sides. modify the 2 layout path mains that are tangent to the radius wall to approximately the same inset as the other sides of the return layout path. For pipe conversion settings. and enter -525mm for both the main and branch offsets. Use the same method to correct any disconnects. Create the level 2 return pipe run 53 Using the methods that you learned to create the supply pipe run. Check connectivity and inspect the corner connections for disconnects. Remember. do not select the radiators when selecting the return pipe runs. Change the diameter of each return pipe run side to 25mm. create a layout for the Hydronic Return 1 system.

enter Creating Pipe Runs Training for File name. You also modified the pipe runs so that they were a better fit with the systems design. and click Save. In this exercise. you create new views to confirm this interference and then modify the pipe run to resolve it. 54 If you want to save your work.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. 55 In the Save As dialog. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click the Training Files icon. navigate to the folder of your choice. Open the m Resolving Pipe Interference. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you resolve interference issues with the new pipe runs. you used the Layout Path tool to design the supply and return pipe layouts. click File menu ➤ Save.The level 2 return pipe run is as shown. converted fittings. and validated the pipe geometry in the 3D view. In the next exercise. In this exercise. 158 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . You checked connectivity. Resolving Pipe Interference The supply and return pipe runs that you created seem to interfere with the 2 staircases in the building. You then converted these layouts to create the supply and return pipe runs that physically connect the radiators. corrected disconnects.

you can flip the view direction or modify the extents of the view. and click to specify the section head location. click Section. The first click specifies the section head. 4 Place the cursor over the left wall of the room that is below the stairwell (Conference Room 31). and double-click 2 . You need to create a section view to confirm pipe interference. click Zoom in Region. and the second click specifies the section tail. Resolve pipe interference with the lower staircase 2 Right-click in the drawing area. Adding a section view is a 2-click process. and draw a zoom region around the right stairwell.Piping to make it the active view. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans. Create a section view to confirm interference 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Resolving Pipe Interference | 159 . Notice that the supply and return pipe runs seem to interfere with the 2 staircases.1 In the Project Browser. After you add the section.

5 Move the cursor to the right and click just past the exterior wall of the building to specify the section tail. 160 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . 6 Use the drag handles to modify the clip planes so that you capture the pipe run and the stairwell. A new section view named Section 4 is created and located in the Project Browser under ???.

Resolving Pipe Interference | 161 . and click Properties. You can also open the section view from the Project Browser under Sections. The section head and tail display. select Fine for Detail Level. right-click Section 4. similar to the level heads in the elevation view. 10 Double-click the section head to open the Section 4 view. All section heads link directly to their corresponding section view. The geometry displays with shading and outlined edges. 7 On the Design Bar. and click OK.NOTE Make certain that the clip planes do not capture the pipe branch above. 8 In the Project Browser. click Modify. under Graphics. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. and Shading with Edges for Model Graphics Style. 11 On the View Control Bar. The section relocates under Piping. expand Mechanical ➤ ??? ➤ Sections (Building Section). 12 Draw a zoom region around the staircase. select Piping for Sub Discipline.

place the cursor over the top connector. Next. 15 Click the return pipe segment that is interfering with the stairs. you modify the pipe runs around the staircase. Modify the pipe runs around the staircase 13 Click Window menu ➤ Floor Plan: 2 . TIP Sections are very useful in visualizing and validating your designs. and after the connectors display. mechanical equipment placement. You will usually create many sections to both inspect and modify pipe runs. 14 Zoom in on the stairwell. 162 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . They offer immediate accessibility to all floors and areas.The section view confirms that the pipe runs do interfere with the right staircase. and other aspects of your systems design.Piping to make it the active view.

16 Zoom in on the top pipe connector to view the tee fitting. This is another way to use the Draw tool to create pipe. and after the fitting end point snap displays. release the mouse button to reconnect it.These connectors connect to the tee fittings. Resolving Pipe Interference | 163 . The tees connect the radiator return branches to the return pipe run. 17 Drag the top pipe connector down and notice that the cursor changes to a pencil to indicate that the Draw tool is active. 18 Drag the pipe connector up to the tee fitting.

and select the return pipe segment again. or mechanical equipment after a snap displays. The cursor changes to a knife to indicate that the Split tool is open. fittings. 22 Place the cursor over the supply pipe run above the stairwell. You drag the pipe segment instead of splitting it because you will convert the vertical tee fitting to a horizontal tee fitting. 164 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . Remember to always check connectivity after connecting. If you split the pipe. 21 On the Edit toolbar. 23 Watch the listening dimensions. Usually a connector snap displays but other snaps may display such as an end point snap. always connect to pipe segments. You may need to zoom the view to get the correct snap dimensions. you split the supply pipe segment. Next. 20 Drag the top pipe segment connector down to 3000mm above the bottom pipe segment connector as shown. and click to split the pipe at 2160mm from the supply pipe segment connector above. 19 Zoom out. a small pipe segment will be created that will need to be removed. click (Split).NOTE When modifying pipe.

Zoom out the view. and split the supply pipe segment 1400mm from the bottom pipe segment connector. and draw the pipe around the stairs. This indicates that a pipe fitting was automatically inserted at the split. 24 With the Split tool open. and press Delete to delete it. Notice that the fittings that were inserted at the splits have been deleted. move the cursor down.Zoom the split and notice that a line displays across the pipe. you convert a tee fitting. 25 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Split tool. 26 Select the pipe segment that is over the staircase. 27 Zoom in the return tee fitting above the stairs. You can place your cursor over the fitting and a tooltip and the Status Bar confirm the pipe fitting. Next. Resolving Pipe Interference | 165 .

29 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar. 31 Place the cursor over the end of the return tee fitting that you just converted. and press Spacebar to automatically specify the pipe diameter and offset to that of the pipe run. 166 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . 30 In the Type Selector. 32 Zoom out the view. Notice that the return pipe is hidden under the supply pipe due to the hidden (haloed) line mechanical setting. and after the end point connector snap displays. convert the tee fitting from a vertical orientation to a tee fitting with a horizontal orientation.28 Using the fitting conversion methods that you learned in the previous lesson. click to specify the start point for the first pipe segment. and click to specify the pipe segment end point and specify the start point for the second pipe segment. verify that Pipe Types : Standard is selected. click Pipe to open the Draw tool. and move the cursor to the left. 33 Draw the pipe 4000mm to the left.

NOTE When drawing pipe. and after the connector snap displays. and after a snap displays aligning with end of the return pipe run. Consider that pipe geometry may be larger and additional fittings may be inserted after performing sizing. especially when connecting to mechanical equipment. 35 Draw the pipe to the return pipe run on the right. click to specify the segment end point. Resolving Pipe Interference | 167 . click to specify the end point and the start point of the third segment.34 Draw the pipe down. always make certain that you provide sufficient space for segment and fitting geometry.

36 Press Esc to deactivate the Draw tool.The return pipe run is connected as shown. 168 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . and click Draw Pipe from the context menu. 38 Right-click the lower connector. and automatically matches the pipe diameter and offset of the selected pipe. 37 Select the supply pipe segment above the stairs to display its connectors. This activates the Draw tool.

Move a pipe segment to correct a routing issue 41 Zoom on the top horizontal pipe segment. specify the move destination or end point. 42 Click the pipe segment to select it. IMPORTANT Using the Move tool is a 2-click process. Notice that the pipe segment is routed in the stairwell wall.39 In the Type Selector. the pipe diameter. specify the reference or start point of the object that you want to move. 44 Place the cursor over the pipe segment and after the centerline snap displays. Second. Resolving Pipe Interference | 169 . This needs to be corrected. First. verify that Pipe Types : Standard is selected. 43 On the Edit toolbar. click to specify the move start point. or width and height. 40 Using the pipe drawing methods that you learned. draw the supply pipe run around the stairs as shown. click (Move). and offset automatically match that of the selected connector. you should always verify the pipe type in the Type Selector. NOTE If you right-click a connector and click Draw Pipe on the context menu. However.

Each pipe run and their respective tee fittings highlight indicating that they are physically connected. Notice that the adjacent pipe segments and fittings parametrically adjust to the move but the rest of the pipe run and the radiators remain unchanged. 170 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . This moves the pipe segment up 100mm away from the wall but still allowing space for sizing. enter100. you confirm and resolve pipe interference with the left staircase. and after the listening dimensions appear. The interference has been resolved. 46 Place the cursor over each pipe run and press TAB twice to check connectivity. and press ENTER to specify the move end point. Resolve pipe interference with the upper staircase 47 Click the Section 1 tail (located on the upper-left of the building).45 Move the cursor up. Next.

NOTE If you use a section view to check pipe interference. you may get a false positive result. Resolving Pipe Interference | 171 . 57 Using the methods that you learned. and double-click the section head to open the section view. 49 Press ESC. 50 On the View Control Bar. Otherwise. 53 Zoom in on the stairwell. 56 Use the same procedure to split the return pipe run at 1500mm from its left connector. 52 Click Window menu ➤ Floor Plan: 2 . modify the supply and return pipe segments as shown. 48 Drag Section 1 to the left of the stairwell. click (Split). 55 Move the cursor to the left of the stairs and over the supply pipe.Piping to make it the active view. 51 Zoom in on the staircase and notice that the pipes do interfere with the stairs. select Fine for Detail Level. watch the listening dimensions. and split the supply pipe at 3600mm from its left connector. and adjust the view clip planes as shown. you must adjust the section view clip planes to capture only the stairs and not the pipes beyond the stairs. 54 On the Edit toolbar.The section displays in red. Although this section was used for air systems. you reuse it to confirm pipe interference with the stairs instead of creating a new section.

Remember to watch for connector snaps. draw the supply and return pipe segments as shown. using the methods that you learned. 58 Again.You can either drag the pipe segments to the right past the stairs or split and delete them. 172 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems .

Remember that after you create pipe. and double-click 3D Piping to make it the active view. Connecting the Boiler In this exercise. You can also drag a pipe connector to modify a segment. In this exercise. 61 In the Save As dialog. (3) Verify the pipe type in the Type Selector (not necessary with Create Similar). you connect the boiler to the level 2 supply and return pipe runs. In the next exercise. Another method to create pipe is to select the pipe to create. and offset are automatically specified. always: (1) Provide sufficient space for segment and fitting geometry. you used section views to confirm pipe interference with the stairs. 60 If you want to save your work. and offset elevation to that of the selected pipe connector. preferably a connector snap. the start point. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Then. and Move tools to modify the pipes that interfered with the stairs. and click Save. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ 3D Views.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. Open the m Connecting Boiler. click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. (2) Connect to a snap.59 The level 2 supply and return pipe runs are as shown. click the Training Files icon. the pipe type is also matched. diameter (or width and height). click File menu ➤ Save. 1 In the Project Browser. Using these 2 methods. and click (Create Similar) on the Edit toolbar. You also tile 2 views to simultaneously create the pipe connections and validate the pipe geometry. You can click Pipe from the Design Bar and press Spacebar to match the diameter (or width and height). you used the Split. enter Resolving Pipe Interference Training for File name. IMPORTANT You have learned 3 different methods to create pipe using the Draw tool. and (4) Check connectivity after making a connection. You can right-click a connector and click Draw Pipe from the context menu. Using Create Similar. and rerouted pipes to resolve the interference. navigate to the folder of your choice. you connect the boiler to the pipe runs. Tile the views 2 With the 3D Piping view active. Draw. Connecting the Boiler | 173 .

7 Click each pipe segment and drag the connectors to adjust the pipe segments to provide ample space to connected the boiler connector pipes as shown. 5 Adjust the view in both windows to view the boiler and the pipe runs as shown. Remember that these pipe runs split as a result of deleting the pipe that connected the boiler to the pipe runs. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans. TIP When tiling 2 views. 4 Enter WT to tile both windows.Piping view and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D Piping view. You are ready to connect the boiler to the supply and return pipe runs. and double-click 2 . the active view is tiled to the left.Piping to make it the active view. Note that if this option is unavailable.This closes all windows that you previously opened during the current design session. You will design in the 2 . 174 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . Connect the boiler to the supply pipe run 6 Zoom in on the split supply and return pipe runs located above the boiler. the active view is the only open window. 3 In the Project Browser.

This negative offset is based on level 2 because you are designing in the level 2 view. Connecting the Boiler | 175 . ■ Verify that Angle is cleared. Notice that the boiler connector offset is at -2176. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Verify that 80mm is specified for D: (diameter) Verify that Auto Connect is selected. 10 In the Type Selector. 14 Move the cursor to the left.8mm. verify that Pipe Types : Standard is selected.8 Zoom in on the boiler. watch the listening dimensions. Enter -1500 for Offset. and after the connector snap displays. 13 On the Options Bar. 11 Place the cursor over the supply connection on the boiler. click to specify the first pipe segment start point. and press Spacebar to match the pipe diameter and the offset elevation to that of the boiler connector. and click to specify the pipe segment end point at 460mm from the boiler connection. click Pipe. 9 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar. This offset places the horizontal pipe segment at 2150mm from level 1. 12 Draw the pipe to the left.

and after the centerline and intersection snaps display. and click to specify the end point. click to specify the pipe segment end point. TIP After entering a value in Options Bar. 15 Draw the pipe up to 900mm.) to separate snap increments.A green pipe riser symbol displays to indicate a pipe riser. 3275mm from level 1. TIP When drawing pipe. 17 Draw the pipe segment straight up toward the supply pipe run. after listening dimensions display. This creates a pipe segment at the same offset as the supply pipe run. you will place a circulator pump on this pipe segment. enter -375 for Offset. In a later exercise. 16 On the Options Bar. zoom the view and try again. You can also add a dimension snap increment in the Snaps dialog (click Settings menu ➤ Snaps). 176 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . TIP If the exact dimension snap increment does not display. you may need to press TAB to make the drawing area active. Remember to always use a semi-colon (. you can enter a dimension and press Enter instead of drawing to the preferred dimension.

21 Drag the right connector toward the boiler connector pipe. release the mouse button to connect to it. and after the connector snap displays. Connecting the Boiler | 177 . 18 Click Modify on the Design Bar.The boiler supply connector pipe is created. 19 Zoom in on the left supply pipe run segment and the boiler connector pipe. 20 Click the left supply pipe run segment to display the connectors.

178 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . 23 Validate the geometry in the 3D Piping view. The connector pipe and the left supply pipe run segment highlight indicating that they are physically connected.The boiler is connected to the left supply pipe run. 22 Place the cursor over the boiler connector pipe and press Tab.

you connect the boiler to the right supply pipe run. right-click the right connector. Notice that the fitting is selected in the floor plan view and remains selected in the 3D view. 26 Using the fitting conversion method that you learned. convert the elbow to a tee fitting with a horizontal orientation. 27 In the 3D Piping view. click in the 3D Piping view to make it active. 29 Zoom in on the tee. Connecting the Boiler | 179 . and click it. click the tee to display the connectors.Next.Piping view to make it active. and click Draw Pipe from the context menu. 25 Zoom in on the elbow fitting above the boiler. 24 With the windows tiled. 28 Click in the 2 .

32 Draw the pipe 600mm to the right and click to specify the segment end point. 180 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . 33 Draw the pipe up. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Auto Connect is selected. Verify that -1500 is specified for Offset. This creates a 900mm pipe segment. 30 In the Type Selector. verify that Pipe Types : Standard is selected. enter -375 for Offset. draw the pipe segment straight up toward the supply pipe run. 37 Using the same method that you used to connect the left supply pipe run. 34 On the Options Bar. enter 900 and press Enter. In a later exercise. 31 On the Options Bar. and after the intersection and centerline snaps display. connect the right supply pipe run. 35 With the Draw tool activated. click to specify the end point. Verify that Angle is cleared. 36 Press ESC twice to deactivate the Draw tool. and after listening dimensions display. and the start point is automatically specified.The pipe diameter and offset are specified to that of the selected connector. you will place a circulator pump on this segment.

38 Check connectivity. 39 Validate the pipe geometry. Connecting the Boiler | 181 .The right supply pipe run is connected to the boiler.

and click Draw Pipe. 41 Select the boiler. verify that 80mm is specified for D: (diameter). zoom in on the boiler. you connect the boiler to the return pipe run. enter -525 for Offset. This places the return connection 250mm above level 1. and click to specify the end point. This places the next pipe segment at an elevation of 3125mm from level 1. Connect the boiler to the return pipe run 40 With the windows tiled. and enter 150 and press Enter. and right-click the return connector. 182 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . and the 2 . Next.Piping the active view. verify that Pipe Types : Standard is selected. 46 Draw the pipe up from the boiler 600mm. 43 On the Options Bar. 44 Move the cursor up.Next. you draw a 150mm pipe segment at this elevation and then create a pipe riser. and that Auto Connect is selected. 45 On the Options Bar. Notice that the return connection is at an offset elevation of -3396mm from level 2. 42 In the Type Selector.

the connection is not made. the left return pipe is routed under the supply pipe. you draw the return pipe to the left. an automatic connection is made. This routing situation provides an opportunity to learn more about the Auto Connect behavior. verify that Auto Connect is selected. and after the intersection and centerline snaps display. 48 Draw a pipe segment to the left and under the supply pipe.Piping and 3D Piping views are tiled to clearly view the Auto Connect behavior. If Auto Connect is not selected. It is important that Auto Connect is not selected. 47 On the Options Bar. IMPORTANT Auto Connect allows you to connect an object that you are drawing to an object that is located on a different level or plane. As you draw. Auto Connect is available on the Options Bar only when the Draw tool is active. Connecting the Boiler | 183 . click to specify the end point. If Auto Connect is selected and your selection point overlaps an object on a different level or plane. Make certain that the 2 .Next.

184 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . clear Auto Connect. click to specify the end point. 49 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Draw tool.Notice that a green pipe riser symbol displays in the floor plan view. and the pipe is automatically connected to the supply pipe above. 50 Press CTRL+Z to undo the connection and return to the pipe segment. and after the intersection and centerline snaps display. draw the pipe to the left and under the supply pipe. You see it clearly in the 3D view. and right-click the top connector. 51 Select the return pipe segment. 52 On the Options Bar. and click Draw Pipe. 53 Again.

You now have a better understanding of the Auto Connect. The Hidden Line mechanical setting is not to be confused with the Hidden Lines Model Graphics Style located on the View Control Bar. To turn off hidden lines. IMPORTANT Creating Hydronic Piping Systems uses a hidden (haloed) line display. In the floor plan view. 56 Draw the pipe to the left. click the specify the end point. 54 Press ESC twice to deactivate the Draw tool. On an open pipe segment or run. In the Mechanical Settings dialog. notice that part of the return pipe is hidden as it passes under the supply pipe. press ESC once to deactivate the Draw tool. 55 Select the return pipe segment. TIP When drawing pipe. and specify the inside and outside gap to 0. right-click the left connector and click Draw Pipe. click Mechanical Settings on the Piping tab of the Design Bar (or click Settings menu ➤ Mechanical Settings). If a pipe is hidden by an object. and twice to deactivate the Draw tool. and after pipe segment aligns with end of the left return pipe run located above. press it once to stop drawing the current object. press ESC to deactivate the tool. select Hidden Line. you finish connecting the boiler to both return pipe runs. a gap displays indicating the hidden geometry. Next. If the pipe segment or run is closed. Connecting the Boiler | 185 .Notice that this time the pipe did not connect to the supply pipe above and a green pipe riser symbol did not display. This is caused by the hidden (haloed) line mechanical setting.

60 Using the fitting conversion methods that you learned. convert the elbow to a tee with a horizontal orientation. and click the elbow fitting on the return pipe above the boiler to display the fitting conversion controls.57 Draw the pipe up toward the return pipe run. 186 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . 59 Zoom in on the boiler. and after the connector snap displays. click to connect to the left return pipe run. The boiler is connected to the left side of the return pipe run. 58 Press ESC to deactivate the Draw tool.

61 Select the tee fitting. Connecting the Boiler | 187 . click to specify the end point. and click to specify the end point. and after the intersection and centerline snaps display. 63 Draw the pipe toward the return pipe run. and click Draw Pipe. 62 Draw the pipe 300mm to the right. right-click the right connector.

The boiler is connected to the right side of the return pipe run. Remember that hidden lines display when the pipe display is obstructed. Check connectivity and validate pipe geometry 66 Place the cursor over the return pipe before the tee fitting.64 Using the method that you learned. and press TAB 3 times to check connectivity for both sides of the return pipe. drag the right return pipe segment and connect it to the boiler connector pipe. 65 Click Modify on the Design Bar. The return pipes highlight indicating that they are physically connected. 188 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems .

draw a section view. Connecting the Boiler | 189 . 68 Using the section view creation method that you learned. Next.67 Validate the return pipe geometry in the 3D Piping view. and adjust the view as shown. you create a section view to verify the clearance between the return pipe riser and the boiler.

click Fine for Detail Level. select Piping for Sub-Discipline. 71 Right-click in the drawing area. under Graphics. You can also double-click the section head to open the section view. 74 Zoom on the boiler return pipe to validate the pipe geometry and check the clearance between the pipe riser and the boiler. click View Properties. This locates the Section 5 view under Piping in the Project Browser and removes the ??? label. 72 In the Element Properties dialog. double-click Section 5 to open the Section 5 view. 73 On the View Control Bar. 70 In the Project Browser.69 Click Modify on the Design Bar. and click OK. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ ??? ➤ Sections. and click Shading with Edges for Model Graphics Style. 190 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems .

click to specify the alignment reference point. 78 Place the cursor over the left supply pipe. zoom in on the boiler and supply and return connector pipes. in the 2 . click Window menu ➤ Toolbar ➤ Tools. click (Align). Align the boiler supply and return connector pipes. and then you select the point to align.Piping view. 76 With the 2 . First.Piping and the 3D Piping views tiled. IMPORTANT Using the Align tool is a 2-click process. Next. select the reference point where you want to align.75 Close the Section 5 view but keep the 2 tiled views open. you align the boiler return connector pipes with the supply connector pipes. If the Tools toolbar is not available. Connecting the Boiler | 191 . 77 On the Tools toolbar. and after highlights.

and after the centerline highlights. 79 Move the cursor over the left return pipe. click to specify the point to align.NOTE Make certain to click the supply pipe and not the return. 192 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems .

The left return pipe is aligned with the left supply pipe. Notice that the return pipe parametrically adjusts. 81 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Align tool. align the right return pipe with the right supply pipe. Connecting the Boiler | 193 . 80 Using the alignment method you just learned.

82 Place the cursor below the tee fitting. This is because they are connected to the return boiler connector pipes that we aligned. 194 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems .The aligned return pipes are as shown. 83 Validate the geometry in the 3D Piping view. and press Tab 3 times to check connectivity. Notice that the return pipe runs also parametrically adjusted.

rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. You used the Split tool to create 2 separate supply and return pipe runs. You then drew pipes that had different offset elevations to connect the boiler to the supply and return pipe runs.Piping to make it the active view. 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click 2 . click File menu ➤ Save. connected the boiler to the supply and return pipe runs. and after it highlights. and click Save. and click to select them. press Tab 4 times to highlight both the supply and return pipe runs including the radiators and the boiler. enter Connecting the Boiler Training for File name. you used the Align tool to align the return pipes to the supply pipes. In the next exercise.Friction & Velocity. It also allowed you to better understand the Auto Connect behavior. Sizing the Pipe Runs: Friction & Velocity Methods You created the level 2 supply and return pipe runs to physically connect the boiler to the radiators. click the Training Files icon. In the left pane of the Open dialog. navigate to the folder of your choice. Next. In this exercise.The boiler is physically connected to the radiators and the hydronic piping system is now a closed loop. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you size the supply and return piping runs. you size the pipe runs using both Friction and Velocity sizing methods. You worked in 2 tiled views enabling you to design and validate geometry simultaneously. 2 Place the cursor over the boiler. 84 If you want to save your work. Open the m Pipe Sizing . Sizing the Pipe Runs: Friction & Velocity Methods | 195 . 85 In the Save As dialog. Finally.

Match Connector Size matches the pipe to the connector size of the mechanical equipment to which the branch is connected. or manually modify the pipe.5 m/s for Velocity. and enter 250. 4 In the Pipe Sizing dialog. ■ Click OK. and that Restrict Size is cleared. 196 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . The most common cause of these errors is that the pipe usually has insufficient space to be created. and enter 2. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. Select And. 5 Zoom in and confirm the pipe sizing. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. IMPORTANT Errors may occur while attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. select Friction. click Sizing. IMPORTANT Remember that the Pipe Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. The sized pipe runs are sized. Under Constraints. Either relocate the system components.The selected pipe runs and mechanical equipment display in red. select a different layout solution. 3 On the Options Bar.00 Pa/m. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected pipe segment or pipe run. select Match Connector Size for Branch Sizing.

You also specified branch sizing that was different than the main pipe sizing. you place 2 in-line circulator pumps on the hydronic supply pipe runs that you sized. This is because you selected Match Connector Size for branch sizing. In the next exercise. In this exercise. enter Pipe Sizing . you sized the supply and return pipe runs using both the Friction and Velocity sizing methods. Placing Circulator Pumps In this exercise. 8 If you want to save your work.Notice that the branch sizing used the size information from the connector on the fin-tube radiator and not from the connector on the main pipe. you place the circulator pumps for the supply pipe runs. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ 3D Views. 9 In the Save As dialog. Placing Circulator Pumps | 197 . navigate to the folder of your choice. and click Save.Friction & Velocity Training for File name. 7 Validate the sized pipe geometry. 6 In the Project Browser. and double-click 3D Piping to make it the active view. click File menu ➤ Save.

1 In the Project Browser. TIP When tiling 2 views. 4 Enter WT to tile both windows. This closes all windows that you previously opened during the current design session. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans.Piping view. the active view is the only open window. 3 In the Project Browser.Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. zoom in on the boiler and the 2 supply pipes to the left and right of the boiler. and double-click 3D Piping to make it the active view. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ 3D Views. click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. Note that if this option is unavailable. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and double-click 2 .Piping to make it the active view. Tile the views 2 With the 3D Piping view active. You place the pumps in the 2 . click the Training Files icon.Piping view and validate the geometry and rotate the pumps in the 3D Piping view. the active view is tiled to the left. Place in-line circulator pumps 6 In the 2 . Open the m Placing Circulator Pumps. 5 Adjust the view in both windows to view the boiler and connecting pipes as shown.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. 198 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems .

Notice that the pipe fittings that were automatically inserted are also deleted. Notice that a pipe fitting is automatically inserted at each split. and press Spacebar to rotate the pump. 11 Press Delete to delete the pipe segment. 8 Watch the listening dimensions. You can place your cursor over one and a tooltip and the Status Bar confirm the fitting. 12 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar. 14 Place the cursor over to the left of the pipe opening. and make 2 splits on the left pipe 160mm from the upper and the lower elbow fittings as shown. 10 Click the pipe segment between the 2 splits. select M_In-line Circulator : M_Standard. 15 Move the cursor over the pipe opening. click to place the circulator pump. 9 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Split tool.7 On the Edit toolbar. The selected pipe segment displays in red. Placing Circulator Pumps | 199 . click (Split). 13 In the Type Selector. and after the centerline snap displays. click Mechanical Equipment.

drag the pump away from the pipe. 16 Press ESC twice. and then move it over the pipe opening. notice that the pump is not located near the selection point. 17 In the 3D Piping view. 200 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . You can also use the Move tool for precise placement. and watch for the centerline snaps.TIP If you want to reposition the circulator pump.

18 In the 2 . Placing Circulator Pumps | 201 . Next. under Constraints. click the pump. You can also right-click the pump. TIP Sometimes a selected object remains selected (displays in red) after an action upon it has finished. You can also open the Element Properties dialog to view the offset. TIP To quickly view the pipe offset value. click the upper pipe segment to display the connectors. release the mouse button to connect the pipe to the pump. or press ESC. enter -1500 for Offset. To clear the selection. You need to specify the pump offset.Actually.Piping view. The offset appears on the Options Bar and in the drawing area. click Modify on the Design Bar. click in the drawing area to clear the selection. you can click in the drawing area.Piping view. The circulator pump is placed at the same offset as the horizontal pipe segment. 22 In the 2 . and after the connector snap displays. you connect the pump. If the pump remains selected. 21 Click OK. 23 Drag the pipe connector down toward the pump. and select Element Properties. the pump is on the selection point but at the default offset elevation. 19 On the Options Bar. click the pipe segment. click . The selected pump displays in red. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. This is the offset elevation of the horizontal pipe on which you are placing the pump.

Also notice that the modified pipe segment remains selected after connecting to the pump. you need to check connectivity. and press TAB.Notice that the necessary pipe fittings are automatically inserted. After connecting the pump. 26 Place the cursor over the pump. 24 Press ESC to clear the selection. 202 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . 25 Repeat this method to connect the lower pipe segment to the pump above.

Make certain that you align the right pump to the left.Piping and the 3D Piping views tiled. Next. connect the circulator pump the services the right side of the supply pipe. 29 Adjust the view so that both circulator pumps are in the view. and check connectivity. you rotate the pumps so that the motor is located as the top. 28 With the 2 . click in the 3D Piping view to make it active. Placing Circulator Pumps | 203 . 27 Using the methods that you just learned.The pump and the pipe segments highlight indicating that they are physically connected.

30 Click the left pump to display rotation controls. The pump rotates 90 degrees to the right. 31 Click the rotation control on the right. 32 Using the method that you just learned. 204 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . rotate the right pump so that motor is at the top.

After you assign the components to a system. Placing Circulator Pumps | 205 . System tools display on the Options Bar. you must assign all system components (mechanical equipment. and so on) that you placed to a system.The in-line circulator pumps are rotated. click System Browser. select the left supply pipe riser. You can also press F9. right-click Hydronic Supply and click Expand All to view all of the system components assigned to Hydronic Supply 1 system. Notice that the 2 circulator pumps are in the Unassigned folder. they move to their respective system folder. do the following: ■ ■ Expand the Unassigned folder. Immediately after placement. Revit MEP associates the unassigned components with a default system in order to perform calculations. Expand the Piping folder. As you learned in previous exercises. 35 In the 3D Piping view. These unassigned components are located in the Unassigned folder in the System Browser. 34 In the System Browser. Assign the pumps to the supply system 33 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar. You need to assign the 2 circulator pumps to the hydronic supply system.

In this exercise. Using the System Inspector. and click Save. boilers and AC units. and by clicking the rotation controls. Finally. you used tiled floor plan and 3D views to place 2 in-line circulator pumps for the hydronic supply piping system. 206 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . System components that were not assigned for this system are grayed out. navigate to the folder of your choice. 40 If you want to save your work. click (Edit System). 36 On the Options Bar.TIP You can select any system component or piping that has been assigned to a system to access system tools on the Options Bar. you assigned the circulator pumps to the supply hydronic system and confirmed the assignments in the System Browser. such as VAV boxes. 41 In the Save As dialog. 39 On the Edit System tab of the Design Bar. click File menu ➤ Save. 37 On the Edit System tab of the Design Bar. 38 Click the left and right circulator pumps to add them to the supply hydronic system. pressure. click Add To System. the boiler will be considered unassigned and it will move to the Unassigned folder. you use the System Inspector to inspect the level 2 hydronic piping system. Notice that the cursor changes to indicate that Add To System is active. This indicates that the pumps have been assigned to the supply hydronic system. you can immediately target problem areas directly in your design and resolve them. In the next exercise. click Finish System. and pressure loss by placing the cursor over a pipe or mechanical equipment that you assigned to the system. You used the Split tool to open the pipe segments to accommodate the pumps and then you connected the pumps. Inspecting Piping Systems In this exercise. The System Inspector is a unique tool enabling you to inspect each piping system for flow. They are now logically connected to the boiler and radiators. If you use this tool. enter Placing Circulator Pumps Training for File name. You rotated the pumps in 2 different ways by pressing the Spacebar. you inspect the hydronic piping systems for flow and pressure. NOTE Do not click . You use this tool to add mechanical equipment that is located upstream in a system. Notice that the pumps moved from the Unassigned folder in the System Browser to the Hydronic Supply 1 system listing in the Piping folder. The Edit System tab appears on the Design Bar providing various system editing tools.

System tools display on the Options Bar. click Inspect from the System Inspector tab on the Design Bar.Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Arrows display on the pipe indicating the flow direction for both the main and the branches in the pipe system. NOTE To select a system. You can click a system in the dialog and the system highlights in red enabling you to preview it. 1 In the Project Browser. and pressure information including pressure loss. flow. The boiler highlights and an inspection flag dynamically reports the section number. 2 Right-click in the view. Inspecting Piping Systems | 207 . You select the boiler because you assigned it to the hydronic supply system. 6 In the Select a System dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click Inspect from the context menu.Piping to make it the active view. 5 On the Options Bar. select Hydronic Supply 1. and click OK. 8 Place the cursor over the boiler to inspect system information pertaining to the boiler.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. and so on that you have assigned to a system. 7 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar. mechanical equipment. and double-click 2 . click the Training Files icon. After the System Inspector activates. click (Inspect). A tooltip also displays this system information. click Zoom in Region from the context menu. NOTE You can also use System Inspector from within the System Browser. Right-click a system from the System Browser. fitting. 3 Draw a zoom on the boiler in the Mechanical/Electrical room. select any pipe segment. You will inspect the hydronic supply system. click Inspect. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans. 4 Select the boiler. IMPORTANT If you select a system component that has been assigned to multiple systems such as a boiler. Open the m Inspecting Piping Systems. The System Inspector tab opens providing inspection tools on the Design Bar. the Select System dialog opens enabling you to select the system to inspect. System tools appear on the Options Bar.

Next. As you inspect. notice that the assigned system components highlight and can be inspected but you cannot inspect system components that have not been assigned to the selected system. 208 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . 10 Move the cursor over the right pipe segment above the pump to compare the flow and pressure information with that of the left pipe segment. and click to temporarily place the inspection flag on the segment. you inspect 2 areas of the selected piping system to compare system information.IMPORTANT As you inspect a system. remember that all information is color coded according to pressure. Compare system information 9 Place the cursor over the left pipe segment above the pump. also known as the critical path. Red information and arrows indicate the highest percentage of pressure loss due to friction.

click Finish Inspector to deactivate the System Inspector. You noticed that flow and pressure information is specific to the selected system component. In the next exercise. 12 Move the cursor over one of the circulation pumps. you check the piping systems. Checking Piping Systems Revit MEP uses both the pipe geometry and the system to perform calculations such as flow and pressure. you use the Check Pipe Systems tool to immediately check these connections for all systems throughout your project. click and compare its information with that of the right pipe segment. 15 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar. navigate to the folder of your choice. NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect flow and pressure inside pipe. and click Save. you used the System Inspector to inspect the flow direction. Continue to use this method to inspect and compare inspection information for system components and pipe across the selected Hydronic Supply 1 system. In this exercise. You can also inspect systems in a 3D view. In this exercise. and quickly target those systems that need attention. 16 Using the methods that you learned. the selected system components and pipe must be logically and physically connected. 13 Click in the view to close the current inspection flag. and for pipe sizing. 14 With the System Inspector activated and the Hydronic Supply 1 system selected. and that all system information is color-coded for either the main or the branch. 17 If you want to save your work. enter Inspecting Piping Systems Training for File name. double-click the 3D Piping view.11 Click to place the current inspection flag and close the prior one. Because both the logical (system) and physical (pipe) connections play a vital role in the overall systems design. Checking Piping Systems | 209 . flow. you need to validate them. use the System Inspector and inspect the return piping systems in the project. click File menu ➤ Save. and inspect a fin-tube radiator. and pressure information for the hydronic supply system in the project. The pipe and the system components must be connected to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain pipe (physical connection). Remember that you can switch between the floor plan and 3D views without closing the System Inspector. 18 In the Save As dialog. You also compared system information across a system.

the pipe is now associated with that system. the Unassigned folder will be empty and Check Pipe Systems will no longer display “not empty” warnings. then press F9. and for pipe sizing. After you have assigned all system components for the project to their systems. However. click Check Pipe Systems. These warnings can refer to both physical connection issues (such as a disconnected or problematic pipe) or logical connection issues (such as an improperly assigned system). Pipe that is associated with a default system (located in the Unassigned folder) is not checked. As a tutorial exercise. all system components must be assigned to a system immediately after placement. A message appears indicating the no warning were found. TIP You can press F9 (or Window menu ➤ System Browser) to open or close the System Browser. This occurs because the assigned system component can be connected to multiple systems (it contains different system connectors). As you learned when placing fin-tube radiators. and you have not yet assigned the component to the other systems. Warnings display. Remember that after you create pipe to physically connect a system. double-click the 2 . Revit MEP places them in their assigned systems folder and removes them from the Unassigned folder. you assigned a fin-tube radiator to a supply hydronic system but the same radiator has a return system connector that you have not assigned to a system. If you place radiators without assigning them to a system. 210 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . The default system is placed in the Unassigned folder until you select the system components and create a system for them. right-click the Design Bar. 3 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. Open the m Checking Piping Systems. and click Piping. For example. click the Training Files icon. After you assign the system components to a system. Notice that these warnings indicate that the default systems are “not empty. Next. you confirm the system component assignments. IMPORTANT The most common check systems warning is the “default system is not empty” warning. Note that only physical connections associated with an assigned system are checked.” 4 NOTE The check systems warnings contain a system type and a description. you confirm the validity of the assigned piping system components and systems. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans. Perform a systems check 1 In the Project Browser. Revit MEP creates a default system and assigns them to it in order to perform system calculations. NOTE If the Piping tab is not available on the Design Bar.Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. If the System Browser does not respond. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. Use the System Browser to confirm piping system assignments 5 Click Window menu ➤ System Browser to open the System Browser. you check the air systems to view check systems warnings. 2 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar. The piping system is logically and physically valid. click in the drawing area to make it active. Then. Pipe geometry is used for system flow and pressure calculations. In the System Browser. the fin-tube radiator is listed in the assigned system and assigned to the Default Hydronic Return system in the Unassigned folder. you open the System Browser to view the unassigned air system components and the associated default air systems. check system warnings may occur.Piping to make it the active view. click Check Duct Systems. Next. Note that a system component may be listed in both its assigned system and in the Unassigned folder. thus assigning the components to a system. Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (pipe) connections of each piping system throughout the project.

double-click 2 Mech to make it the active view. Now that you confirmed all of the unassigned component for the default air systems. 9 Right-click Default Return Air. you confirm the piping system assignments. 7 Expand the Unassigned folder and notice that both Default Return Air and Default Exhaust Air systems are listed. click Close. you will check the unassigned air system components to learn how to use the System Browser to confirm default system assignments. 13 Right-click Hydronic Supply. collapse the Unassigned folder and expand the Piping folder. you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to switch between views.Piping to make it the active view. fin-tube radiators and the circulator pumps that you assigned to this system. 12 In the System Browser. The red lines represent the default logical connection.Because you assigned all piping components. 8 Expand Default Return Air and notice the air terminals and mechanical equipment that were automatically assigned to the Default Return Air system. otherwise. Hydronic Supply 1 is listed along with the boiler. 6 In the Project Browser. 10 Using the same methods. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. and click Expand All. and click Show to view all of the unassigned system components. Notice that the system contains a system type and an assigned number. The supply system that you created. TIP If you have multiple views open. 11 Click Window menu ➤ Floor Plan: 2 . confirm the unassigned system components in the Default Exhaust Air system. Checking Piping Systems | 211 .

it is a valid system without problems. and click Save. and click Select to confirm this system and the assigned system components. In the lesson. enter Checking Piping Systems Training for File name. 212 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . You inspected the logical systems using System Inspector and the System Browser. In this exercise. click File menu ➤ Save. you created a supply air system and a hydronic piping system. Use the same piping system components that you used for level 2. This is the power BIM (Building Information Modeling). and see the results dynamically in views and design documents. and section views. the creation and modification methods remained the same. 17 In the Save As dialog. You have completed the level 2 piping systems for the building. Finally.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder under Training Files.Piping view and filter the visibility of objects as needed. 16 If you want to save your work. 15 Using the methods that you learned. a boiler. This is the future of systems designing—Revit MEP 2008. parametrically modify those designs.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder under Training Files. open the m Completed Mechanical Systems. This completes the Designing Piping Systems lesson. For pipe offset. To view the completed mechanical systems for the tutorial including the level 2 hydronic piping system. Each was a completely different mechanical system that consisted of different system components however. You validated rigid pipe connections and geometry using floor plan. navigate to the folder of your choice. You also learned the difference between creating rigid physical duct or pipe connections and creating logical systems. You have confirmed and validated both unassigned and assigned system components and their systems. Depending on your air systems design. specify 2975mm for the supply and 2825mm for the return pipe offset elevation. Explore different system designs. and fin-tube radiators. you used the Check Pipe Systems tool and the System Browser to validate the level 2 supply and return hydronic piping systems that you created. In this tutorial.14 Right-click Hydronic Supply 1. Design the system in the 1 . you checked the logical and physical connections for the system using Check Pipe Systems. you created a hydronic piping system consisting of a supply and return pipe runs. circulator pumps. The piping system that you designed did not return any check system warnings. Feel free to modify the systems or create entirely new mechanical systems. use the methods that you learned and create the level 1 hydronic piping system. confirm the system and the system assignments for the hydronic return system. You also confirmed that the air terminals and mechanical equipment for the return and exhaust air systems were unassigned as they were located in their respective default systems in the System Browser and “not empty” warnings were generated by Check Duct Systems. you may need to assign these system components to their proper systems. The completed mechanical systems are included in the m Completed Mechanical Systems. 3D. For additional practice.

However. you can choose to save your work. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. If the tutorial datasets are not present. This dataset includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. The first lesson consists of exercises that prepare your project for the types of systems that you will design in the following lesson. After finishing each exercise. go to http://www. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the dataset that Autodesk provides.autodesk. you learn to create electrical systems within the architectural model of a building project. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. The building contains a variety of spaces where you will design lighting and power systems.com/revitmep-documentation and download them.Electrical Systems 3 In this tutorial. The datasets that you use to complete these exercises are located in the Training Files directory. 213 . You can search the Training Files ➤ Metric directory to verify that the datasets have been downloaded.

Specify Electrical Settings 1 Electrical settings let you specify the voltages. wiring. and demand factors that are applied in the design. Open Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ m Creating Electrical Views. Revit MEP provides families of common electrical components that you place in your power and lighting plans. wiring. and demand factors that you will use in your project. you can customize components and expand the library of electrical families. Connectors allow Revit MEP to maintain information about the systems that you create. then applying the appropriate template to each plan. analyze. You load the families that comprise the specific components that will be used in your electrical system. In the left pane of the Open dialog. This allows the illuminance of the lighting fixtures to be considered when calculating required lighting levels. load the families containing the electrical components that will make up your electrical system. in the Element Properties dialog for Rooms. and make it possible for Revit MEP to perform calculations to assist you with your design. the connectors for the ceiling-hosted lighting fixtures that you will place in rooms are above the ceiling level. All of Revit MEP’s electrical (and mechanical) components are designed with connectors. in the left pane. click the Training Files icon. create views for the power and lighting systems at each level in the building. Revit MEP checks to assure that those components are compatible with voltages and distribution systems that you specify here. the Limit Offset. Lighting Plans where you will design lighting circuits.Planning Electrical Systems In this lesson you specify electrical settings. apply templates to your views.rvt. distribution systems. 2 In the Electrical Settings dialog. as you place components and create circuits in your electrical plan. and prepare the electrical views that you will need to design the electrical system for your project. 4 Specify the following parameters for this wire type as follows: Parameter Name Material Temperature Rating Value CU-THWN Copper 75 214 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . and click Add. Click Settings menu ➤ Electrical Settings. and modify your lighting and electrical systems in later exercises. power distribution systems. 3 Click Wiring Types. Preparing the Electrical Plan In this exercise you define the basic parameters for your electrical system. For example. By creating views that are specific to the electrical system you will be able to design. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. For this reason. As you develop more advanced skills working with Revit MEP. It is important that the connectors associated with components that you place in a view are within the View Range or level offset. has been set to 2300 mm for the building used with these exercises. and select the component families that you will use in the plan. Later. The electrical settings determine the voltages. The lighting and power plans are created by copying and renaming architectural views. expand Wiring. You will create the following views for Level 1 and Level 2: ■ ■ ■ Power plans where you will place electrical devices and equipment and design power circuits. and in the right pane. Electrical Ceiling Plans where you will place lighting fixtures.

00 V Preparing the Electrical Plan | 215 . click Voltage Definitions.00 V 280. For example.00 V 277. many components intended for use in a 120V circuit are rated anywhere from 110V to 130V.00 V 208. you allow circuits to be created between components with rated voltages that do not precisely match the voltage definition value.00 V 220.00 V 490. the numeric value in the Value column is the actual voltage used for calculations involving this definition.0 selected Hot Conductor Steel 5 In the tree view. Verify that voltage definitions have been specified with the following parameters: Name 120 208 277 480 Value 120.00 V 200.Parameter Insulation Max Size Neutral Multiplier Neutral Required Neutral Size Conduit Type Value THWN 500 1.00 V 480. By specifying a range.00 V Maximum 130.00 V 260.00 V 460.00 V Minimum 110. 6 The Voltage Definitions table is where you specify a range of voltages that will be used with your Voltage Definitions. Regardless of the Name value for a voltage definition.

For example. 8 In the right pane. you could specify a distribution system with a L-L Voltage value of 120 and an L-G Voltage value of 480.Voltage definitions can be deleted only if they are not currently in use with any distribution system. 7 In left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. or Wild leg) is currently not supported in Revit MEP because there is no way to specify the high leg voltage. click Distribution Systems. NOTE Revit MEP does not prevent specifying unfeasible voltage values. Red. 9 Click Demand Factors. 216 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . even though this is physically impossible. verify that distribution systems have been specified with the following parameters: Name 120/208 Wye 480/277 Wye Phase Three Three Configuration Wye Wye Wires 4 4 L-L 208 480 L-G 120 277 Distribution systems can be deleted only if they are not currently assigned to any devices. this type of system (High. NOTE Although it is possible to specify a distribution system with a Configuration value of Delta and a Wire value of 4.

You can Split the default range to create several load ranges for a particular system and apply a different demand factor to each range. and click Rename. right-click Level 1. Power. and a 30% demand factor for loads greater than 10. at any given time.000VA. and click OK. Demand Factor (%) specifies the anticipated a percentage of full rated load that will exist at any given time for the specified range.000VA Demand Factor 100% 50% 30% The settings in this example apply a 100% demand factor to loads less than 3000VA.000VA 3. 10 Click OK. a 50% demand factor to loads between 3000VA and 10. You can specify one or more Demand Factors. leave the default settings as shown here.000VA. and rename them as follows: ■ ■ 2-Power 2-Lighting Preparing the Electrical Plan | 217 . HVAC. 12 Right-click Copy of Level 1. you can specify the following parameters for a building lighting system: More Than Less Than 3. or Other systems in your project based on their load. For example. enter 1-Power. Less Than specifies the upper limit of a range of loads.000VA 10. for Name.000VA 10. 14 Using the same method. 13 In the Rename View dialog.Demand factors let you adjust the rating of the main service for a building based on the expectation that. A new view called Copy of Level 1 is created. only a portion of the electrical equipment will be drawing at its full rated load. Create views for your electrical plans 11 In the Project Browser. and rename it 1-Lighting. create another copy of level 1. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. The particular system for which Demand Factors are applied is selected from the Load Classification drop-down list. Create 2 copies of the level 2 floor plan. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Architectural ➤ New Construction ➤ Floor Plans. applying different Demand Factors to Lighting. ■ ■ ■ More Than specifies the lower limit of a range of loads. For this exercise.

select Power Plan from the list of templates. The templates also specify the sub-discipline for each view. select the following families: ■ ■ M_Lighting Switches. which further defines their position in the project browser. and the view range. 23 In the Project Browser. View templates let you easily control view properties. 19 In the Project Browser. expand Ceiling Plans. 18 Repeat the previous 3 steps to create a 2-Ceiling Elec ceiling plan. Apply templates to views Each of the templates that you will apply to your new views specify Electrical for the view discipline. and click OK. Lighting Plan. The 1-Power view is placed under a newly created Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans branch in the project browser. right-click Level 1. 30 In the Project Browser. 21 In the Project Browser. which are available from view templates. 25 Using the same method. 15 In the Project Browser. right-click 1-Ceiling Elec. In the following steps you will create a ceiling plan for each level by copying and renaming the ceiling plans that the architect has already created. The Power Plan. 27 In the Open dialog. and click OK. Load component families 26 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. expand Families. expand Electrical ➤ Devices. The 1-Ceiling Elec view is placed under a newly created Electrical ➤ Ceiling ➤ Ceiling Plans branch in the project browser. 20 In the Select View Template dialog. click Lighting Plan. you need to apply settings. and click OK. enter 1-Ceiling Elec for Name. Now that you have created views specifically for electrical information. and Electrical Ceiling templates that you will apply to your new views control the visibility of component categories. apply the Lighting Plan template to the 2-Lighting view. and click Rename. 17 In the Rename View dialog. which places the view under the Electrical branch in the project browser. 16 Right-click Copy of Level 1.Create views for your electrical ceiling plans Ceiling grid patterns (only visible in ceiling plans) let you correctly lay out lighting fixtures. and click Apply View Template. select Electrical Ceiling from the list of templates. 22 In the Select View Template dialog.rfa 29 Click Open. right-click 1-Lighting. and causes the architectural components to be dimmed in the view. 28 While pressing Ctrl. the view discipline.rfa M_Receptacle. 24 In the Select View Template dialog. TIP The Select View Template dialog can also be accessed from the View menu. and click Apply View Template. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing. The 1-Lighting view is placed under a newly created Electrical ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans branch in the project browser. and click Apply View Template. right-click 1-Power. and click OK. 218 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . apply the Power Plan template to 2-Power. and apply the Electrical Ceiling Plan template to the 2-Ceiling Elec view.

because the key is linked to your new project parameter. 33 You can save the open file if you wish. voltages. as described below. You begin by adding a new Project Parameter (Required Lighting Level). Particular lighting levels are generally specified for different types of rooms (offices. conference rooms. A Lighting Devices ➤ M_Lighting Switches folder. 2 In the Project Parameters dialog. enter Required Lighting Level for Name. and so on). In this exercise.rfa 32 Open the Electrical folder again and load the M_Troffer Corner Insert.rfa M_208V MLO Lighting and Appliance Panelboard .Notice that an Electrical Fixtures ➤ M_Receptacle folder containing receptacles has been added to the families currently available for your design. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ Verify that Project parameter is selected for Parameter Type. you will use the new parameter again to compare the value for Required Lighting Level against the actual illumination provided by fixtures that you place in the plan. containing several switch types. selected components for your electrical systems. Before you can specify a lighting requirement for the rooms within your project. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. distribution systems. Key schedules provide an efficient way to create an instance parameter that can be used to map specific parameter values to particular key styles.rfa electrical family from the Lighting Fixtures folder. and established the parameters for your wiring. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rfa M_480V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . click the Training Files icon.rvt. Under Parameter Data. 35 Proceed to the next exercise. “Defining Required Lighting Levels” on page 219. its value becomes to the Required Lighting Level.Surface. 31 Using the same method. has also been added under Lighting Device.Surface. restrooms. Defining Required Lighting Levels In this exercise you specify the lighting levels that are required for the different spaces within the building. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. in the Creating a Room Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels exercise. Open the provided dataset. In this case the key style is the type of room and. they were added to the Families in the Project Browser. and load the following electrical families from the Equipment folder: ■ ■ ■ M_480-120-208V Dry Type Transformers. then you create a Key Schedule that links your new parameter to the various types of rooms in your project. reopen the Electrical folder. click Add. Create a Required Lighting Level parameter 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. Later. and demand factors. you must first create a parameter that will hold the value for the lighting requirement. As you loaded each of the component families. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. Defining Required Lighting Levels | 219 . you prepared views specifically for your power and lighting plans. 34 Click File menu ➤ Close. Open Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ m Defining Lighting Levels.

For Name. Select Instance. You could use your new parameter to enter a Required Lighting Level value in the Element Properties dialog for each room. click to select the room. For Group. enter Room Lighting Requirements.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Discipline. there are many rooms in this project that have similar lighting requirements. For Type. select Electrical-Lighting. 6 Zoom in on the upper-left corner of the plan. 220 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . Create a key schedule 9 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. you can look at the properties for one of the rooms. select Rooms. and when the cross-hairs display. select Electrical. your new Required Lighting Level parameter is now listed under Instance Parameters in the Electrical . 10 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ Select Rooms for Category. In the Element Properties dialog. move the cursor over the room in the upper-left corner.Lighting category. 8 Click Cancel. The new parameter you have just created applies to all rooms in the project. double-click 1-Lighting to make it the active view. However. The new Required Lighting Level parameter is added to the list in the Project Parameters dialog and is now an instance parameter for Rooms under Electrical-Lighting in the Room Element Properties dialog. ■ Click Schedule keys. and it is more efficient to create a key schedule and use it to assign Required Lighting Level values based on room type. Verify the new parameter 5 In the Project Browser. 7 On the Options Bar. select Illuminance. This name will appear as the title for the resulting schedule. Under Categories. click (Properties). 4 Click OK twice. To verify this.

12 Click OK. Enter a room type in the Key Name column and a corresponding lighting level in the Required Lighting Level column for the different types of rooms in the project. one for each type of room in the building. The new rows are added with 1 through 7 as the default Key Names. 11 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. Lighting Levels is added as a new instance parameter for the Room component. the Key Schedule should looks like this: Defining Required Lighting Levels | 221 .■ For Key Name. according to the values in the following table: Room Type Private Office Open Office Lounge Restroom Conference Mech/Elec Stair/Circulation Lighting Level (lx) 325 540 270 325 375 215 215 When completed. NOTE Schedules can be used as a design interface (Key schedule) as well as a documentation tool (Schedule building components). enter Lighting Levels. ■ Click OK. Enter lighting level requirements in the key schedule 14 On the Options Bar. select Required Lighting Level from the Available fields list. and click Add to add this field to the Scheduled fields (in order) list. The key schedule displays in the drawing area. The value that you specify for each Key Name in the schedule will be used to determine the required lighting level for each room type. You determine the type of schedule by clicking Schedule building components or Schedule keys in the New Schedule dialog when creating a new Schedule/Quantities view. 13 Drag column borders horizontally to the desired column width. click New 7 times to add 7 rows in the key schedule.

continue applying Lighting Level keys to the remaining rooms in the project according to the following table: TIP You can select multiple rooms of the same type and set the Lighting Level parameter from the same Element Properties dialog. 19 Scroll up to the Electrical . NOTE Generally. and click Element Properties. The value is grayed out and cannot be edited because you associated this parameter with the Key Name specified by the Room Lighting Requirements key schedule. the value that you entered for this room type in the key schedule. and notice that the value for Required Lighting Level is now 540 lx. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Architectural ➤ New Construction ➤ Floor Plans. the Level 1 floor plan would be thought of as the architect’s view. this view might well be part of a workset checked out by the architect. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. In the Project Browser. select multiple rooms of the same type (for example. click . assume you would have full access to this view. For tutorial purposes. In a worksharing environment. then right-click one of the selections. 20 Click OK. 21 Using the same method. While pressing Ctrl. and other users would not be able to perform operations covered in this exercise. in the Element Properties dialog. and click Element Properties to open the Element Properties for the selected rooms. 16 Zoom in on the large open area in the center of the floor plan. then right-click. You can change the sort keys for the schedule.TIP Your entries are automatically sorted alphabetically by Key Name. click Properties and. 17 Move the cursor over the room until a cross-hair displays. right-click in the Room Lighting Requirements schedule. and select Open Office.Lighting category. under Instance Parameters. under Instance Parameters edit the Sort/Grouping parameter. scroll down to the Identity Data category. Assign room keys to the rooms in the project 15 In the Project Browser. Level Level 1 Level 1 Level 1 Level 1 Level 1 Level 1 Level 1 Level 1 Level 1 Level 1 Level 1 Level 1 Level 1 Level 1 Number 1 3 4 5 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Name Open 1 Office Office Office Office Office Office Office Office Office Stairwell Office Office Office Key Name Open Office Private Office Private Office Private Office Private Office Private Office Private Office Private Office Private Office Private Office Stair/Circulation Private Office Private Office Private Office 222 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . and for Lighting Level parameter. double-click the Level 1 floor plan to make it the active view. Office).

and select both Required Lighting Level and Temperature as parameters. if required. Now the key schedule will have one column for Required Lighting Level and another for Temperature where you can specify values according to room type. Room color fills can be helpful as a design tool and as a design communications document. Assigning Room Color Fills According to Required Lighting Levels Revit MEP lets you add color fills to rooms based on specific room parameters. Consequently. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. Open the provided dataset. 24 Proceed to the next exercise. as described below. For example. 23 Click File menu ➤ Close. In this exercise you will create a room color fill using the lighting levels that you specified in the previous exercise. Room color fills can be used with any parameter that exists on the room components. you could create a key schedule named Room Variables. selecting a room type for your new Room Variables parameter in a room’s Element Properties dialog will specify values for both parameters according to the key schedule. You can use a key schedule to specify more than one parameter for a component.Level Level 1 Level 1 Level 1 Level 2 Level 2 Level 2 Level 2 Level 2 Level 2 Level 2 Level 2 Level 2 Level 2 Level 2 Level 2 Level 2 Level 2 Level 2 Level 2 Number 19 20 21 2 6 7 8 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 Name Rest Room (Men) Rest Room (Ladies) Mechanical/Electrical Open 2 Office Office Office Rest Room (Men) Rest Room (Ladies) Mechanical / Electrical Lounge Office Office Office Office Stairwell Conference Room Office Office Key Name Restroom Restroom Mech/Elec Open Office Private Office Private Office Private Office Restroom Restroom Mech/Elec Lounge Private Office Private Office Private Office Private Office Stair/Circulation Conference Private Office Private Office 22 You can save the open file if you wish. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. In this exercise you created a new project parameter and used it in a key schedule to specify a parameter value (Required Lighting Level) for the rooms in your project. “Assigning Room Color Fills According to Required Lighting Levels” on page 223. Assigning Room Color Fills According to Required Lighting Levels | 223 .

for Title. 15 Drag the color scheme legend preview to the lower-left corner of the plan. enter Required Lighting Levels. and place it in the drawing.rvt. and click OK to dismiss the alert message. click Edit/New. select Required Lighting . select Required Lighting Level. 4 In the New Color Scheme dialog. 10 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. and click (Duplicate). select Required Lighting Level. Activate color fill 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. select Rooms for Category. 11 Right-click the color scheme legend. enter Required Lighting. Open Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ m Room Color Fills. specify the following Type Parameters: ■ ■ Under Graphics. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 224 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . 7 Click OK. and click Element Properties. select Underline.Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click the Training Files icon. double-click the Level 1 floor plan to make it the active view. for the Color. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. 5 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 14 Click OK twice. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Color Fill Schemes. and click OK. Under Title Text. select Show Title. The color scheme for the Level 1 floor plan should now look something like the image below. and click OK. 3 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 9 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. click Color Scheme Legend. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. 8 On the Drafting tab on the Design Bar. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Architectural ➤ New Construction ➤ Floor Plans. 6 For Color. for Name.

16 Make the Level 2 floor plan the active view. 17 Using the same method, activate the color scheme as you did for Level 1. Notice that the color scheme you created is still in effect. This is because the color scheme is a type within the project. You can have more than one color scheme in the project, but only one per plan. 18 You can save the open file if you wish; a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 19 Click File menu ➤ Close. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. 20 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating a Room Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels” on page 225. Color fill plans can be useful as design documents and as communication documents to show other team members design intent while the project is in the design phases. Color fills can be applied for any parameter that already exists for rooms, or for any parameter that you want to create for a room (such as the Required Lighting Level parameter you created in the previous exercise).

Creating a Room Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels
In this exercise you create a room lighting analysis schedule that you will use as a check document rather than as a construction document. Your schedule will compare the actual lighting levels in each room against the required lighting levels that you specified in the Defining Required Lighting Levels exercise. As you place lighting fixtures in the spaces in your project, you will refer to the schedule to assure that the lighting level falls within the +/- 55 lx range specified in the schedule. Open the provided dataset, as described below. Dataset:
■ ■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon. Open Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ m Room Schedule Lighting Requirements.rvt.

Creating a Room Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels | 225

Create room lighting analysis schedule
1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 2 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

Under Category, select Rooms. For Name, enter Room Lighting Analysis Verify that Schedule building components is selected. Click OK.

3 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, scroll down the Available fields list, double-click the following fields to add them to the Scheduled fields (in order) list:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Number Name Required Lighting Level Average Estimated Illumination Ceiling Reflectance Wall Reflectance Floor Reflectance Lighting Calculation Workplane

Create a new schedule parameter
4 In the middle of the Schedule Properties dialog, click Calculated Value. 5 In the Calculated Value dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter Lighting Delta. For Discipline, select Electrical. For Type, select Illuminance. For Formula, enter Average Estimated Illumination - Required Lighting Level.

NOTE Formulas are case sensitive 6 Click OK. The Lighting Delta parameter is added to the Scheduled fields list. 7 On the Sorting/Grouping tab:
■ ■ ■

For Sort by, select Number. Verify that Ascending is selected. Verify that Itemize every instance is selected.

8 On the Formatting tab, under fields, select Lighting Delta. 9 Click Conditional Format. 10 In the Conditional Formatting dialog:
■ ■ ■

For Field, select Lighting Delta. For Test, select Not Between. For Value, enter -55 lx and 55 lx in the text boxes.

226 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems

11 Click the Background Color chip. 12 In the Color dialog, under Basic colors, click the red color chip. 13 Click OK twice. 14 On the Formatting tab, under Fields, select Ceiling Reflectance, and click Field Format. 15 In the Format dialog:
■ ■ ■

Clear Use default settings. For Units, verify that Fixed is selected. For Rounding, select 2 decimal places.

16 Click OK. 17 Using the same method, specify rounding to 2 decimal places for the Wall Reflectance and Floor Reflectance fields. 18 Click OK.

19 You can save the open file if you wish; a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 20 Click File menu ➤ Close. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. 21 Proceed to the next lesson, “Designing the Electrical System” on page 228. The schedule that you have just created shows the Average Estimated Illumination level for all of the rooms as 0. This is because you have not yet added lighting fixtures to any of the rooms. You can also see that the Lighting Delta has been calculated for each room, and in every case the Lighting Delta field is red. This is because the value is not within the range that you specified in the Conditional Formatting dialog. In this exercise, you created a schedule that you will refer to as you add lighting fixtures to the project. The schedule will be used to check the actual design against the design requirements that were specified in a previous exercise. This type of schedule can be useful as a method for checking design components in the project.

Creating a Room Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels | 227

Designing the Electrical System
In this lesson you use the views and schedules that you created in Lesson 1 to place electrical devices, electrical equipment, and lighting fixtures throughout your building project. Once the equipment is in place, you will create power and lighting circuits, and make connections to electrical equipment.

Adding Lighting Fixtures
In this exercise you add lighting fixtures throughout your project. As you select and place lighting fixtures, the key schedule that you created in the previous lesson serves as a tool to verify that the design meets each room’s lighting requirement. Open the provided dataset, as described below. Dataset:
■ ■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon. Open Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ m Adding Lighting Fixtures.rvt.

Place the initial lighting fixture
1 In the Project Browser, expand Schedules, and double-click Room Lighting Analysis to open the schedule created in the previous lesson. 2 Right click in the Required Lighting Level column, and click Hide Column(s) to hide that column. 3 Repeat the previous step to hide the Ceiling Reflectance, Wall Reflectance, Floor Reflectance, and Lighting Calculation Workplane columns. Only the Number, Name, Average Estimated Lighting, and Lighting Delta columns should remain visible in the schedule. NOTE Right-click a heading, and click Unhide All Columns to restore the hidden columns. 4 On the Windows menu, click Close Hidden Windows. 5 Resize the view containing the schedule to show only the 4 remaining columns. 6 In the Project Browser, under Ceiling Plans, double-click 1-Ceiling Elec to make it the active view. You need to add lighting fixtures in a ceiling plan because you want to align the lighting fixtures to the ceiling grid, and the ceiling grid is not visible in a floor plan view. 7 On the Windows menu, click Tile, and arrange the windows as shown.

228 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems

8 In the 1-Ceiling Elec view, zoom in to the upper-left corner of the plan. 9 On the Basics tab on the Design Bar, click Light Fixture. 10 In the Type Selector, select M_Troffer Corner Insert : M_600x1200 3 Lamp, and move the cursor into the ceiling plan view. NOTE A preview of the lighting fixture is not displayed until you move the cursor over a ceiling. You cannot place this type of lighting fixture in a non-ceiling location. 11 With the cursor in the room in the upper-left corner of the plan, click to place the lighting fixture in the ceiling as shown. It is not necessary to align the lighting fixture to the grid in this step. In the next step you will use the Move command to snap the fixture to a ceiling grid intersection.

12 Click Modify. 13 Zoom in on the lighting fixture, select it, and on the Toolbar, click (Move).

14 Move the cursor over the lower-left corner of the lighting fixture, and when Endpoint displays, click to specify the start point.

Adding Lighting Fixtures | 229

15 Move the cursor over an intersection of the ceiling grid lines where you want to place the fixture, and click when Intersection displays.

In the Room Lighting Analysis Schedule, the Lighting Delta for room 3 is changed from -325 lx to -118 lx, closer to the required +/- 55 lx. The current line weight settings for the lighting fixture and ceiling grid make it difficult to distinguish the outline of the lighting fixture from the ceiling grid lines. Adjusting the line weight for the lighting fixtures will make it easier to place the remaining lighting fixtures.

Change line weight to adjust lighting fixture visibility
16 Right-click anywhere on the view background, and click View Properties. 17 In the Element Properties dialog, under Instance Parameters, click Edit for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. 18 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphic Overrides for Reflected Ceiling Plan: 1-Ceiling Elec dialog, scroll down to Lighting Fixtures, click in the Projection/Surface-Lines column, and click Override. 19 In the Line Graphics dialog, under Lines, for Weight, select 5. 20 Click OK 3 times.

230 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems

The fixture you placed now displays as shown.

Copy and place additional lighting fixtures
21 Select the lighting fixture, and on the Toolbar, click 22 On the Options Bar, select Multiple. This will let you place multiple copies of the lighting fixture after selecting a start point. 23 Select the lower-left Endpoint of the lighting fixture as the start point, and then select ceiling grid intersections as the destination move endpoints to place 5 copies of this fixture in the 3 offices in the upper left area of the level 1, as shown. (Copy).

Check the illumination levels against the Room Lighting Analysis schedule
24 Check the Average Estimated Illumination and Lighting Delta in the Room Lighting Analysis schedule.

Adding Lighting Fixtures | 231

The Average Estimated Illumination for rooms 3, 4 and 5 is now nearer the required lighting level target of 325 lx, but is still not within the +/- 55 lx range, so the Lighting Delta column remains red for these rooms.

To adjust the illumination level downward, you decide to replace one of the 3-lamp fixtures in each room with a 2-lamp fixture. NOTE Average Estimated Illumination levels are calculated using the lumen method for lighting calculations. Point by point analysis is not currently supported.

Change lighting fixture type
25 In the 1-Ceiling Elec, select one of the lighting fixtures in each room, and in the Type Selector, select M_Troffer Corner Insert : M_600x1200 2Lamp. TIP You can select multiple components by pressing Ctrl while selecting components in a drawing. If you select a component inadvertently, press Shift while clicking the component to remove it as a selection. 26 Again, check the Average Estimated Illumination and Lighting Delta in the Room Lighting Analysis schedule, and verify that the lighting levels are now within the specified range.

The Average Estimated Illumination is now within the +/- 55 lx range. You can perform the following steps to complete this exercise, placing lighting fixtures in the remaining Level 1 and Level 2 spaces or you can close this dataset, and go on to the next exercise. The lighting fixtures are all placed in the next dataset. 27 Using the same method, continue placing 2-lamp and 3-lamp lighting fixtures in the remaining spaces in the 1-Ceiling Elec and 2-Ceiling Elec views. Use the Room Lighting Analysis schedule to determine when the lighting levels are within the specified range. When you are finished, only the Mechanical/Electrical rooms (without ceilings) will have a red background in the Room Lighting Analysis schedule. Completed lighting layouts for Level 1 and Level 2 are shown below along with the Room Lighting Analysis schedule.

232 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems

Level 1

NOTE Ceiling grids were not added to the Mechanical/Electrical rooms; therefore, you cannot add lighting fixtures to these rooms.
Level 2

Adding Lighting Fixtures | 233

28 In the Room Lighting Analysis schedule, right-click one of the headings, and click Unhide All Columns.

With the exception of the 2 Mechanical/Electrical rooms, your Lighting Delta column for all of the rooms should be white. 29 You can save the open file if you wish; a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 30 Click File menu ➤ Close. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. 31 Proceed to the next exercise, “Placing Lighting Switches” on page 234. In this exercise, you learned how to place lighting fixtures in ceiling plans, and how to verify the lighting layout using the schedule that you created as a design tool in “Creating a Room Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels” on page 225.

Placing Lighting Switches
In this exercise you add switches for the lighting fixtures in your project. The procedure for placing switches is the same as for placing any hosted components in Revit MEP. Open the provided dataset, as described below. Dataset:
■ ■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon. Open Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ m Placing Switches.rvt.

Place switches in rooms
1 In the Project Browser, double-click 1-Lighting to make it the active view. 2 On the Basics tab on the Design Bar, click Device. 3 In the Type Selector, select M_Lighting Switches : M_Single Pole. 4 On the Options Bar, verify that (Place on Vertical Face) is selected.

5 Zoom in on the upper-left corner of the building and move the cursor along the right wall of room 3.

234 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems

Because the switch requires a wall to serve as the host, it is only previewed when the cursor is over a wall. 6 Position the switch preview on the interior wall of the room as shown, and click to place the switch.

7 Continue placing switches of this type in the remaining rooms in the 1-Lighting view as shown.
Level 1

8 On the Basics tab on the Design Bar, click Device, and in the Type Selector, select M_Lighting Switches : M_Three Way. 9 Zoom in on the upper-left corner of the plan, and place a 3-way switch on the open office side of the upper restroom wall as shown.

Placing Lighting Switches | 235

10 Zoom in on the stairwell at the lower-right corner of the plan, and place one 3-way switch on the wall inside the stairwell near the door to the open office, and place another 3-way switch on the wall of the open office outside of the stairwell, as shown.

11 In the Type Selector, select M_Lighting Switches : M_Four Way. 12 Place a 4-way switch near the exit door on the right side of the stairwell as shown.

236 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems

13 In the open office area, place a 4-way switch near each end of the curved wall as shown.

14 In the Project Browser, double-click 2-Lighting to make it the active view. 15 In the Type Selector, select M_Lighting Switches : M_Three Way, and place a switch on the open office wall near the stairwell in the upper-left corner of the plan as shown.

Placing Lighting Switches | 237

16 Zoom in on the stairwell at the lower-right corner of the plan, and place a 3-way switch on the wall inside the stairwell near the door to the open office, and place another 3-way switch on the wall of the open office outside of the stairwell, as shown.

17 You can perform the following steps to complete this exercise, placing lighting switches in the remaining Level 1 and Level 2 spaces or you can close this dataset, and go on to the next exercise. The lighting switches are all placed in the next dataset. On the Basics tab on the Design Bar, click Device, in the Type Selector, select M_Lighting Switches : M_Single Pole, and place single pole switches in second-floor offices and restrooms as shown.

238 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems

Level 2

18 You can save the open file if you wish; a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 19 Click File menu ➤ Close. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. 20 Proceed to the next exercise, “ Placing Power Receptacles” on page 239.

Placing Power Receptacles
In this exercise you will be placing receptacles that will be hosted by architectural components in the project. The process is similar to placing switches as you did in the previous exercise. Open the provided dataset, as described below. Dataset:
■ ■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon. Open Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ m Placing Receptacles.rvt.

Place wall-hosted receptacles
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click 1-Power to make it the active view. 2 Zoom in to the upper-left corner of the view. 3 On the Basics tab on the Design Bar, click Device. 4 In the Type Selector, select M_Receptacle : M_Standard.

Placing Power Receptacles | 239

5 On the Options Bar, verify that

(Place on Vertical Face) is selected.

6 In the left side of the plan, place receptacles along the walls in the offices as shown.

7 Continue placing receptacles throughout the offices on Level 1 and Level 2 approximately as shown, including the wall-based receptacles in the open office areas.

240 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems

1-Power

2-Power

Placing Power Receptacles | 241

Place floor-hosted receptacles
8 In the Project Browser, double-click 1-Power. 9 On the Basics tab on the Design Bar, click Device. 10 In the Type Selector, select M_Receptacle : M_Standard. 11 On the Options Bar, click (Place on Work Plane), and verify that Level : Level 1 is selected for Plane.

NOTE You can select a work plane from the Plane drop-down list on the Options Bar. The current level is selected by default. 12 Zoom in on the upper-right corner of the Open Office, and place a receptacle on the floor as shown.

When placing a receptacle on a workplane, its connector is located below the level of the workplane. Just as it was for ceiling hosted lighting fixtures, it is important that the connector be within the Room to allow Revit MEP to maintain information about the electrical system and perform calculations for spaces in your design. In the next steps, you will flip the workplane of the receptacle to locate the connector above the workplane. Then you will create copies of the flipped receptacle to place the remaining floor-based receptacles.

13 Select the receptacle and click the room). 14 On the Toolbar, click (Copy).

(Flip WorkPlane) to locate the connector above the workplane (within

15 On the Options Bar, select Multiple. This will let you place multiple copies of the receptacle after selecting a start point. 16 Select an Endpoint on the receptacle as the start point, and then place 3 copies of the receptacle in the upper right area of the first floor, as shown.

242 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems

17 Draw a pick box around the four floor-based receptacles, click , select Multiple on the Options Bar and using the previous procedure, place 3 copies of the flipped receptacles throughout the Level 1 open office, as shown.

18 Using the same procedure, place receptacles on the floor of the open office in 2-Power as shown. TIP You can select all of the floor hosted receptacles in the 1-Power view, then copy and paste them in the 2-Power view. Select all 1-Power floor receptacles, click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard, open 2-Power, and click Edit ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Current View. 19 You can save the open file if you wish; a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 20 Click File menu ➤ Close.

Placing Power Receptacles | 243

NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. 21 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating Power & Lighting Usage Reports” on page 244. In this exercise you placed wall-hosted receptacles on the walls and floor-hosted receptacles on the floor. It is good to be familiar with this concept of placing hosted components, because it is quite common in Revit MEP.

Creating Power & Lighting Usage Reports
In this exercise you will create a consumption usage report for power and lighting in this project. With the introduction of local energy codes, the amount of electricity consumed by different systems within the building is becoming increasingly important to the design. When the HVAC designer asks what the wattage/SF amounts are for different spaces, you can refer to this report rather than having to measure rooms and count fixtures. Open the provided dataset, as described below. Dataset:
■ ■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon. Open Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ m Creating Usage Reports.rvt. 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 2 In the New Schedule dialog, scroll down the Category list, and select Rooms. 3 Verify that Schedule building components is selected, and for Name, enter Power & Lighting Usage. 4 Click OK. 5 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available Fields, select and add the following fields to the Scheduled fields (in order) list in the order shown:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Number Name Area Actual Lighting Load Actual Power Load Actual Lighting Load/Area Actual Power Load/Area

6 Click OK. A schedule is created similar to the one shown.

244 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems

as described below. Placing Electrical Equipment In this exercise you add the electrical equipment for the distribution systems in your plan. you need to create logical connections to define the topology. and work toward the higher voltage. You start at the low voltage panels (L-1 and L-2). Placing Electrical Equipment | 245 . Open the provided dataset. Although the connections between this type of equipment are not typically shown on plans. 9 Proceed to the next exercise. “Placing Electrical Equipment” on page 245. main distribution panels (H-2 and MDP). The information in this schedule was produced using the data that you entered into the model. 8 Click File menu ➤ Close.7 You can save the open file if you wish. The following diagram shows the connectivity for your electrical equipment. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. Dataset: ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In this exercise you created a schedule that can be used as input for the HVAC engineers or as input for energy analysis and code review.

rvt.■ ■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. Add a panel 1 In the Project Browser. select 480/277 Wye. 6 On the Options Bar. click Electrical Equipment. click Element Properties. Right-click the panel. 2 Zoom in on the Mechanical/Electrical room between the 2 restrooms. and place the transformer in the Mechanical/Electrical room to the right of the panel as shown. click . 246 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . 4 In the Type Selector. TIP The Distribution System Types parameter is also accessible in the Element Properties dialog. Open Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ m Placing Electrical Equipment. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. under Instance Parameters. and for Panel Name. 11 In the Type Selector. and click to place the panel as shown. 5 On the Design Bar.Loads category. select Electrical Equipment. click the Training Files icon. Name the new panel 7 With the panel still selected. Add a transformer 10 On the Basics tab on the Design Bar. enter MDP to indicate Main Distribution Panel. 3 On the Basics tab on the Design Bar. and double-click 1-Power. click Modify and select the panel you just placed. scroll down the Instance Parameters and. select 480/277 Wye for Distribution System Types. select M_480-120-208V Dry Type Transformers : M_45kVA. 9 Click OK.Surface : M_250A. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans. under Electrical . This will be where the primary electrical service enters the building. select M_480V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . for Distribution Sys. scroll down to the Electrical .Loads.

select 120/208 Wye. under Instance Parameters. 16 Click OK. Placing Electrical Equipment | 247 . under Instance Parameters. and for Panel Name. scroll down to the Electrical . and on the Options Bar.Loads category. enter L-1. 21 On the Options Bar. Add another panel 17 On the Design Bar. select 120/208 Wye. 14 On the Options Bar. select M_208V MLO Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . select 480/277 Wye. scroll down to the Electrical . 19 Click Modify. select Electrical Equipment. 23 Click OK.12 Click Modify 13 Select the transformer. enter T1. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. click . click .Loads category. and place the panel to the right of the transformer. For Panel Name. for Distribution Sys. for Distribution Sys.Surface : M_100A. 20 Select the panel you just placed. Since this is a transformer. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. you must also specify a Secondary Distribution System parameter. and specify the following: ■ ■ For Secondary Distribution System. and on the Options Bar. 18 In the Type Selector.

select panel L-2. and select panel H-2 for Panel. because the circuit on the mains of this panel is connected to a transformer rather than to another panel. select T2 for Panel to establish the connection between the L-2 panel and T2 transformer. click (Create Power Circuit). The Bounding Box expands to enclose the transformer and panel L-2 and you will see temporary circuit indicating that the panel has been connected to the transformer.Surface : M_100A named L-2 NOTE Remember to select the appropriate Distribution System Types parameter values for each equipment component. 248 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . including the Secondary Distribution System for T2. A Bounding Box displays as a dashed box surrounding the components that make up the circuit. click . 26 On the Options Bar. The temporary circuit displays as shown. and click 30 On the Options Bar.Surface : M_250A named H-2 M_480-120-208V Dry Type Transformers: M_45kVA named T2 M_208V MLO Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . 29 Select the transformer T2. 27 Click (Select Panel). Create logical circuits between equipment 25 In the 2-Power view. 28 On the Options Bar.Add panels and a transformer to second floor 24 Using the same method. In this case you are going to select something other than the panel. . add the following components in the Mechanical/Electrical room in the 2-Power view: ■ ■ ■ M_480V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard .

and on the Options Bar. and select the MDP panel.31 Close all open views except 1-Power and 2-Power 32 Click Window menu ➤ Tile to display both views in the drawing area. and select the T1 transformer as the panel. and maximize the 1-Power view to make it easier to work with. A circuit is created between H-2 and MDP. 33 Zoom in on each view and scroll as necessary to display the Level 1 and Level 2 Mechanical/Electrical rooms side-by-side. 34 In the 2-Power view. select the H-2 panel. select the L-1 panel. The temporary circuit is displayed as shown. indicating that a connection has been made between H-2 and MDP. click . 38 On the Options Bar. 36 Click anywhere in 1-Power view to make it the active view. . . click 35 On the Option Bar. 37 Close the 2-Power view. and click 39 Click . Placing Electrical Equipment | 249 .

click . Open Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ m Creating Power Circuitry. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 1 In the Project Browser. “Creating Power Circuitry” on page 250. and select the MDP panel. 44 Proceed to the next exercise. Circuits are used for power. The concept of grouping similar functions into systems is used to show logical connections between different components in the system. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset.40 Select the T1 transformer. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. lighting. 42 You can save the open file if you wish. Open the provided dataset.rvt. . You also defined how the pieces of electrical equipment are connected by creating logical connections between the different pieces of equipment. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans. and double-click 1-Power to make it the active view. as described below. In this exercise you placed the electrical distribution equipment required for the project. click the Training Files icon. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. Creating Power Circuitry In this exercise you will learn methods for creating power circuits (circuit groups). 250 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . 43 Click File menu ➤ Close. and data systems. and click 41 On the Options Bar.

leave the circuit as a temporary logical circuit. load (180 VA). click . Creating Power Circuitry | 251 . You will add permanent wiring in a later exercise. 3 While pressing Ctrl. A question mark is displayed for this receptacle because no Label has been specified in the Type Properties for this particular receptacle type. The generate wiring controls ( ) let you create permanent wiring for the circuit. and voltage (120 V). 4 On the Options Bar. Temporary circuits are display as dashed lines between the components to indicate the interconnection of the devices that you selected for this circuit.2 Zoom in on the upper-left corner of the plan. and observe that the information displayed indicates the number of poles (#1). 5 Select one of the receptacles in the corner room. For now. Creating an electrical circuit to connect the devices (receptacles) in this view is similar to creating the electrical circuits in the previous exercise. select all the receptacles in the corner room. The difference here is that you will have several components in the circuit.

click circuit. 252 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . (Select a Panel for the Circuit). The drop-down list on the Option Bar lists only those panels that are compatible with the circuit’s distribution system and have an available circuit. 7 Move the cursor over one of the receptacles in the corner room so that it is highlighted. and click to select the circuit again. 8 On the Options Bar. press Tab. 10 Click to select the circuit and all of the devices on the circuit. and select panel L-1 as the panel for this NOTE You can click a panel in the drawing area or select the panel name from the drop-down list on the Options Bar. 6 Click Modify. 9 Highlight one of the receptacles in the room.Revit MEP will only let you make a connection between compatible components. and press Tab. You cannot connect components having a different number of poles or a different voltage specified for the distribution system types.

11 On the Options Bar.Loads category. 14 Scroll back up to the Rating parameter. Creating Power Circuitry | 253 . and then scroll back down to Wire Size. click . 23 Select the receptacle in the stairwell again. Revit MEP displays a warning message indicating that adding this circuit group exceeds the number of available slots on panel L-1. 13 Scroll down to the Wire Size parameter. scroll down to the Electrical . click (Edit Circuit). Add additional slots to panel 20 Right-click panel L-1. select Circuit Properties. The currently specified values are 1-#12. Notice that the Wire Size values have changed to 1-#6. click The circuit is created. . The editable parameters include Wire Type and Rating will be discussed in a later exercise. The Voltage value for the circuit is 120V because all the receptacles and the panel in the circuit are 120V components. under Instance Parameters. 1-#10. respectively for this circuit. In the next 2 steps you will see how parameters interact as Revit MEP calculates values for the circuit. When editing a circuit. You should now be able to create the circuit for the stairwell. 15 Click Cancel to close the Element Properties dialog and cancel your changes. which are the wire sizes for the load. 12 On the Edit Circuit tab on the Design Bar. 1-#12. neutral. and click Element Properties. 18 Select the receptacle in the stair well. and select panel L-1. making it easy to identify the components that are part of the circuit group. 16 On the Design Bar. and add it to panel L-1. notice that most of the Instance Parameter values are grayed out. and ground wiring. 17 Continue selecting receptacles. 19 Close the warning message. If you select L-1 in the drawing. and change the value for Max #1 Pole Breakers from 12 to 18. 1-#6. In the Element Properties dialog for this circuit. creating power circuits. change the value from 20A to 50A. all but the components in the circuit are dimmed. and assigning them to panel L-1 on a room-by-room basis for all of the offices around the perimeter of the building. 21 In the Element Properties dialog. click . The Edit Circuit tab is activated on the Design Bar. click Cancel Circuit. 1-#12. and select panel L-1. These values are calculated based on the Rating and Voltage Drop values. 22 Click OK. Panel L-1 is not listed on the drop-down list. They cannot be edited because they are calculated according to the components in the circuit.

254 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . 26 Continue creating circuits. NOTE Do not create a circuit for the 5 wall-hosted receptacles on the walls in the large open area at this time. click (Edit Circuits on Panel). These will be connected in a later exercise. These will be connected in a later exercise. 27 Using the same procedures. 25 On the Options Bar. and on the Options Bar. click . as previously described. NOTE Do not create a circuit for the 5 wall-hosted receptacles on the walls in the large open area of Level 2 at this time.24 After circuits have been created and assigned for all of the individual offices. create circuits in the 2-Power view and assign them to panel L-2. click . 28 Double-click 1-Power to make it the active view. for the remaining groups of 4 floor-hosted receptacles. and then select panel L-1. and select the 4 floor-mounted receptacles as shown. zoom in to the upper part of the large open office. 29 Select the L-1 panel.

Open the provided dataset. 30 Click OK. 1 In the Project Browser. As you saw in the previous exercise.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Finally. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. Open Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ m Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires. 3 Draw a pick box around the plan to select everything. “Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires” on page 255. then create lighting circuitry and add wiring as the circuits are created. as described below. Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires In this exercise you become more familiar with the wiring settings. and double-click 1-Lighting to make it the active view. You also learned how voltage definitions and distribution systems determine the kinds of electrical systems that you can define for your project. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Although this panel is currently capable of supporting 18 circuits. 2 Zoom out so that the entire plan is visible.In the Edit Circuits dialog. Notice also that all the circuits have been assigned to a location on the panel. 32 Click File menu ➤ Close. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. you learned how to add slots to a panel to accommodate circuits. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Lighting. In this exercise you learned how to create circuit groups (circuits) and assign the circuits to panels. you can create circuits and maintain the information associated with them without adding wiring to the project. Adding wiring to a project is optional. Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires | 255 . notice that circuit descriptions have been automatically created based on information from the devices themselves. 31 You can save the open file if you wish. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. you have assigned only 17. click the Training Files icon.

This should generate a Warning message indicating that the load for the circuit exceeds 80% of the defined rating (20A). click . and click OK.4 On the Options Bar. click (Filter). click Check None to clear all the check boxes. 256 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . as shown. 7 Close the message window and. Only the lighting fixtures and switches on Level 1 should now be selected. 6 On the Options Bar. 5 In the Filter dialog. click (Undo) to undo the circuit creation. 8 Select all the light fixtures and switches in the large open office (Open 1) as shown. re-select Lighting Devices and Lighting Fixtures.

click .9 On the Options Bar. click . you can choose to create either arc or chamfered wiring. as in this step. When creating wires. This changes the temporary wiring graphics into permanent wiring graphics as shown. Chamfered wiring can be used to indicate wiring that is exposed. Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires | 257 . 10 On the Options Bar. click . ceilings. and then select panel MDP as the panel for the circuit. or floors. Arc wiring is sometimes used to indicate wiring that is concealed within walls.

Notice that there are now 4 tick marks on the wire segments on the path between the switches (2 hot conductors. and click OK. Later. Adjust the number of conductors in a path between switches 11 Select the 4-way switch at the left end of the curved wall. and one ground conductor). In the next steps. add a hot conductor to the wire segments between the remaining switches in the large room and between the 2 switches in the Level 1 stairwell. lighting fixtures. and click the switch to select the switches. you created arc type wiring. when you create wiring manually. ground) in the wire run. press Tab. restrooms and stairwell on Level 1. The meaning for each tick mark varies according to the style of the tick mark selected on the Wiring panel in the Electrical Settings dialog. and assign the circuits to panel MDP. click . NOTE The Hot Conductors parameter value will be blank if the path being selected contains wire segments with a combination of both 1 and 2 specified as the value for Hot Conductors. and wire segments on the path between the 2 switches. You can add or remove vertices from wires by right-clicking the wire and clicking Insert Vertex or Delete Vertex. select Wires. 16 Using the same method. for Hot Conductors. one neutral conductor. 17 Create lighting circuits for the private offices. Tick marks (the short lines that intersect a wire run) indicate the number and type of conductors (load. you can specify splined wiring. 14 On the Options Bar. Only the wire segments are selected in the path between the switches. you add a conductor in the wiring path between the 3-way and 4-way switches to allow switching the lights on or off from any of the switches in the open office area. but with an additional vertex.In this step. click . neutral. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. move the cursor to highlight the 4-way switch at the right end of the curved wall. 13 In the Filter dialog. enter 2 as the value. and click OK. enter 2. Splined wiring is similar to arc. and click OK. click Check None. under Instance Parameters. When this occurs. The wiring layout should look similar to the following: 258 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . 12 On the Options Bar.

The wiring layout should look similar to the following: Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires | 259 . 20 Create lighting circuits and wiring for the private offices. “Creating Switch Systems” on page 260. lounge. and restrooms in the 2-Lighting view. continue performing the steps in this exercise using the procedures and tools described previously to create another lighting circuit for the rest of the lighting fixtures and switches on the 1-Lighting view. These will be connected in a later exercise.18 For more practice. close the dataset and go on to the next exercise. then creating lighting circuits in 2-Lighting. NOTE Do not include the two lighting fixtures and 3-way switch in the stairwell in either circuit. assign the circuit to panel H-2. 19 Create a lighting circuit for the open area on Level 2. and assign the circuits to panel H-2. Otherwise. conference room.

assign lighting fixtures to switches. click the Training Files icon. and panel information. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. fixtures. 22 Click File menu ➤ Close. In this exercise you learned how to create lighting circuitry and used the basic methods for adding and editing wires. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and double-click 1-Lighting to make it the active view. 260 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . After creating the switch systems on Level 1. Creating Switch Systems You create switch systems to specify switches that control groups of lighting fixtures in a project. 1 In the Project Browser. and specify switch IDs for switches. click (Create Switch System). Open the provided dataset. Open Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ m Creating Switch Systems. you will create a room schedule with an embedded schedule listing switch IDs. as described below. but does not prevent you from doing so. 3 On the Options Bar. You also learned about the settings that control how Revit MEP performs wire sizing.rvt. In this exercise you will create switch systems on Level 1 and Level 2. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans. “Creating Switch Systems” on page 260. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Select all the lighting fixtures in the large open office (Open 1). a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 23 Proceed to the next exercise. You also saw that the Revit MEP warns you when you try to put too much load on a circuit.21 You can save the open file if you wish.

and on the Options Bar. 5 On the Options Bar. The Options Bar provides the following information about the currently selected switch system. and click the 4-way switch at the left end of the curved wall to designate the switch controlling the fixtures. ■ ■ Switch ID: the identifier for the switch that is currently assigned to the system. With Multiple selected on the Options Bar. When you have selected as many fixtures as you want. you can use a pick box to select several fixtures. 7 Draw a pick box around the 6 lighting fixtures to the left of the restrooms. After creating the switch system. Creating Switch Systems | 261 . click Remove From System.4 Click (Select Switch for System). you decide to assign several fixtures to a different switch in the large open area. Number of Fixtures: the number of components in the system (excluding the switch). click (Edit Switch System). 6 On the Edit Switch System tab. select Multiple. The Edit Switch System tab is activated on the Design Bar. click Finish to confirm your selections.

for Switch ID. for Switch ID. 18 On the Edit Switch System tab. and click the single-pole switch on the right wall of the office to designate the switch controlling the fixtures in the office.West. and click OK. click Select Switch. enter Main Entrance . enter North Stairwell . 20 Click . under Instance Properties.8 On the Options Bar. under Instance Properties. select both lighting fixtures in the corner office. 16 Click Switch Properties. and on the Options Bar. The Number of Fixtures field now displays 26 fixtures remaining in the system. click Finish System. click Finish System. and select the switch on the wall outside the ladies’ restroom. and click OK. 13 On the Options Bar. 9 Click Switch Properties. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. 19 Zoom in on the upper-left corner of the plan. 262 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . 15 On the Edit Switch System tab. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. 11 On the Edit Switch System tab. . 12 Select the 6 lighting fixtures to the left of the restrooms. click . click 14 Click .1st Floor. click Finish.

and for Heading. 23 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. 24 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. enter Room Number. Verify that Schedule building components is selected. Click OK. enter Switch Systems. 27 On the Embedded Schedule tab: ■ ■ ■ Select Embedded Schedule Under Categories. Creating Switch Systems | 263 . select Number. 26 On the Formatting tab. select Lighting Fixtures Click Embedded Schedule Properties. scroll down the Available fields list. create switch systems for the remaining private offices. and restrooms in the 1-Lighting view. double-click the following fields—in the order shown—to add them to the Scheduled fields (in order) list: ■ ■ ■ ■ Switch Id Type Panel Circuit Number 29 Click OK twice. select Rooms. For Name. stairwell. double-click the following fields—in the order shown—to add them to the Scheduled fields (in order) list: ■ ■ Number Name 25 On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. scroll down the Available fields list. Verify that Ascending is selected. Verify that Itemize every instance is selected. 28 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. select Number from the Fields list. Create a switch system schedule 22 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities.21 Using the same method.

Otherwise. and private offices. click the Training Files icon. Open the provided dataset. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The Switch Systems schedule is automatically updated as you specify switch IDs or make changes to the lighting. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. Create a system for all the lighting fixtures in the large open area and assign them to the switch near the east stairwell. Create separate systems for the lounge. Dataset: ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. You will design the power wiring for the 3 offices in the upper-left portion of 1-Power view to serve as an example of the multi-circuit wiring run. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. “Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs” on page 264. 30 For more practice. continue creating switch systems in the 2-Lighting view. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. The embedded lighting fixture content is arranged so that the information about a switch system displays below the room containing that system. Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs In this exercise you will see how Revit MEP deals with wiring runs that contain more than a single circuit. conference room. Specify Open Area .The Switch System schedule displays in the drawing area. restrooms. 32 Click File menu ➤ Close. “Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs” on page 264. 264 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . and is added to the Project Browser under Schedules/Quantities. close the dataset and go on to the next exercise.2nd Floor for the switch ID. 31 You can save the open file if you wish. as described below.

generate permanent wiring for the circuits in the remaining rooms along the left side of the plan. click Wire. and click to select the circuit and all of the components connected to it. 2 Zoom in on the room at the upper-left corner of the plan. 7 Adjust the view so that the 2 upper rooms are visible. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans. 9 On the Options Bar. and delete both home runs. click to generate arc type wiring for the selected circuit. 4 On the Options Bar. and double-click 1-Power to make it the active view. 1 In the Project Browser. 6 Select the home runs that extend out into the open office from the 2 upper rooms. move the cursor over one of the receptacles to highlight it. 8 On the Basics tab on the Design Bar. 3 In the corner room. verify that (Arced Wire) is selected.rvt. press Tab to highlight the entire circuit. 5 Using the same method.■ Open Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ m Creating Multi-Circuit Wiring. Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs | 265 .

10 Click the connector for the receptacle on the east wall of the top room to specify the start point for the wire. 12 Click the connector for the receptacle on the east wall of the middle room to specify the endpoint for the wire. 11 Click in the open space near the door for the room to specify the second point for the wire. 266 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . as shown.

your layout should look similar to the following: Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs | 267 . When completed. if necessary. when the wiring is completed. and using the same method. The direction will be corrected.NOTE When neither of the 2 groups of components on the circuit has a free home run. 13 Adjust the view so that the 2 lower rooms are visible. Revit MEP temporarily assigns a direction to the home run. create wiring between receptacles in the 2 lower rooms.

14 Click Modify. the number of tick marks is increased to show the increase in the number of hot conductors. 16 Drag the center vertex to the left so that it is closer to the receptacle in the lower room as shown. and notice the vertex controls at each end of the wire and another in the center. and a shared safety ground). and click. a shared neutral. 268 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . and drag the new vertex up and to the left to arrange the wire run so that it looks similar to the following image. In the previous steps. Multi-circuit wiring runs appear with multiple arrows on the home run. the number of tick marks and home run arrows is increased such that the final home run has 3 home run arrows and 5 tick marks (3 hot conductors. select Insert Vertex. 18 Drag the vertex at the end of the home run toward the lower restroom. drag the new vertex along the wire run to a point midway between the other vertex and the connector. as each room was added to the wiring run. 17 Right click the wire run.Home run arrows are used to indicate that a wiring run is returning to a panel. As wiring runs are collected into a multi-circuit wiring run. Adjust the home run routing 15 Select the home run extending from the lower room.

or you can close this dataset and go on to the next exercise.Vertices let you route wires in your project views. Examples of completed plans are provided below for reference. The wire behaves like a spline. adjusting its shape according to the vertex location. 19 For additional practice. Completed 1-Power Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs | 269 . you can continue creating permanent wiring for the circuits in the 1-Power and 2-Power views.

Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 22 Proceed to the next exercise. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. “Checking Your Design ” on page 270. 3 Click Window menu ➤ Systems Browser. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 21 Click File menu ➤ Close. Open the provided dataset. as described below. Checking Your Design In this exercise you learn how to use the System Browser to examine the circuitry that you created in previous exercises. 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and double-click 1-Power to make it the active view. you created wiring runs from the circuits that you created in a previous exercise and combined these to form multi-circuit wiring runs. The System Browser is displayed to right of the drawing area. 270 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . You also learn to use the Check Circuits tool to verify that all of the circuits in your plan are connected.rvt. You also learned how to adjust the layout of wiring runs and interpret tick marks and home run arrows. 2 Zoom in on the upper-left corner of the drawing so that the corner room is visible. click the Training Files icon.Completed 2-Power 20 You can save the open file if you wish. Open Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ m Checking Your Design. In this exercise. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset.

The device you selected in the System Browser is also selected in 1-Power. expand Power ➤ L-1 ➤ circuit 1. and when the preview expands to the width of the window. Checking Your Design | 271 . 6 Right-click in a column heading in the System Browser. 8 In the System Browser. release the mouse button. Resolve unassigned electrical components 9 In the System Browser. 7 In the System Browser. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the room in which the devices are located. There are 4 devices connected to circuit 1. This list displays connectors and circuits that have not been assigned to a panel. The list includes the main distribution panel (MDP). and click View ➤ Electrical to limit the information displayed to the electrical discipline. each with a load of 180VA. collapse Power. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to panel L-1. a 3-way switch and 2 lighting fixtures in the Level 2 stairwell. and click Select. and 5 receptacles in the open area of Level 2. drag it to the bottom of the drawing area.4 Click and hold the Title Bar of the System Browser. right-click one of the devices under circuit 1. and expand Unassigned. 5 receptacles in the open area of Level 1. 5 Resize the columns in the System Browser until all of the columns are visible without scrolling.

click to select the circuit. and select both lighting fixtures and the 3-way switch in the Level 2 stairwell. 12 Zoom in on the stairwells in both lighting plans as shown. Add Level 2 components to the existing Level 1 lighting circuit. You need to add the switch and lighting fixtures in the upper level to the same circuit as the switches and lighting fixtures in the lower level. 17 Highlight one of the lighting fixtures in the Level 2 stairwell. 11 Click Window menu ➤ Tile to display both these views in the drawing area. In the System Browser. 13 In the 1-Lighting view. click . and on the Options Bar. The lighting fixtures and 3-way switch in the 2-Lighting view have not yet been connected.10 Open the 1-Lighting and 2-Lighting views and close any windows. the 2 lighting fixtures and 3-way switch have been moved from the Unassigned folder to Power ➤ MDP ➤ Circuit 2. 15 Click the title bar of the 2-Lighting view. 16 Click Finish Circuit. click to create permanent wiring. and on the Options Bar. press Tab. 272 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . 14 On the Edit Circuits tab on the Design Bar. click Add to Circuit. select one of the lighting fixtures in the stairwell.

19 On the Options Bar. Checking Your Design | 273 . Assign remaining receptacles to circuits 23 In the Project Browser. enter 2. 18 In the 1-Lighting view. Only the wire segments are selected in the path between the switches. 20 In the Filter dialog. select the unassigned receptacles in the open area. double-click 1-Power to make it the active view.Add a Hot Conductor to the wiring for the stairwell lighting circuit. click Check None. select Wires. arrange the view so that the System Browser and the 5 unassigned receptacles are visible. press Tab. click . 21 Click . for Hot Conductors. the only remaining unassigned components should be the MDP and the receptacles in the 2 open areas. under Instance Parameters. click the title bar of the 2-Lighting view. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. click to create a power circuit for these receptacles. and click OK. 25 On the Options Bar. 24 In the drawing area. highlight the 3-way switch in the Level 2 stairwell. select the 3-way switch in the stairwell. and click to select all of the components in the path between the 2 switches. and click OK. In the System Browser.

The MDP panel is now the only component listed in the Unassigned category. create a power circuit for the 5 unassigned receptacles in Open 2 in the 2-Power view.26 On the Options Bar. select panel L-1. Check Circuits 29 On the Electrical tab on the Design Bar. click 27 Click . 274 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . click Check Circuits. and in the Mechanical/Electrical room. 28 Using the same method. to create permanent wiring. 30 In the warning window that is displayed indicating an unconnected power connector.

a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise.31 Click to view details of the warning. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 34 You can save the open file if you wish.rvt. Defining Circuit Loads | 275 . click the Training Files icon. Defining Circuit Loads In this exercise you begin by balancing the loads at the Level 1 and Level 2 panels. 32 Expand the warning categories until you can see that the piece of equipment that is not connected is the MDP panel. This warning refers to the feed from the outside power service and can be ignored. you learned how to use the System Browser to examine electrical components in your project and resolve unassigned and unnamed circuits. In the left pane of the Open dialog. “Defining Circuit Loads” on page 275. you verify and adjust wire sizes that Revit MEP recommends for handling the loads on those circuits. 35 Click File menu ➤ Close. In this exercise. You also learned how to use the Check Circuits tool to verify that all of the circuits in your project were connected. Open the provided dataset. then you examine the loads presented at the panels to set your final breaker sizes. as described below. Open Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ m Defining Circuit Loads. 36 Proceed to the next exercise. 33 Close the Warning dialog. Finally.

select panel L-2. 276 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . B. This will reduce neutral current as well as prevent an excess voltage drop due to one phase being overloaded. click Rebalance Loads. 3 On the Options Bar. Balancing loads begins with adjusting the loads at the panels farthest from the power source. 4 In the Edit Circuits dialog. while Phase A provides 4500 VA.Balance circuit loads 1 Circuit loads should be balanced to present as nearly as possible an equal load to each phase. In the Project Browser. Examination of the loads on Phase A. and C shows a slight imbalance with the heaviest load on Phase B (4860 VA). 2 In the Mechanical/Electrical room. click . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans. and Phase C provides 4140 VA. and double-click 2-Power.

click . the load connected to it is less than 15kVA. a load of 12780 VA. The values on the right side shows the load presented by transformer T1 (12780 VA). and the T1 transformer. and for T1. 7 In the Project Browser. 5 Select panel H-2. Had there been a greater imbalance. you can use a 30kVA transformer. the loads would have been moved to different circuits to achieve better balance. and 11 feed panel H-2. 8 Repeat the previous procedures to balance the loads on the Level 1 panels. The lighting circuits connected to MDP are already specified as 20A circuits. Transformer T1 was specified as a 45kVA transformer but. and circuits 7. 6 Click Rebalance Loads to adjust the loads on panel H-2. which will require a 40A circuit breaker. select M_480-120-208V Phase Dry Type Transformer: M_30kVA. 13 In the Type Selector. you may see different values for the loads. select the T1 transformer. the distribution is shifted. NOTE If you have continued to save and use your own dataset throughout these tutorials. 4. click . Defining Circuit Loads | 277 . enter 100A for the Trip value. H-2 is a 100A panel.After re-balancing loads. Therefore. Adjust circuit breaker sizes 9 Select panel MDP. The MDP panel feeds the lighting circuits for Level 1. 12 In 1-Power view. the H-2 panel. 11 Click OK. in the Mechanical/Electrical room. and 6 feed transformer T1. and on the Options Bar. 9. Circuits 2. for panel H-2. a load of 18844 VA. the values for circuits 1 and 3 are the load presented by the lighting circuits on Level 1 (5664 VA). enter 40A for the Trip value. After the loads are balanced. and on the Options Bar. the rating for the breaker feeding panel H-2 should be increased to 100 A. L-1 and MDP. Although the load from panel H-2 is approximately a 40 A load at 480V. double-click 1-Power. 10 In the Edit Circuits dialog. Therefore. This is because you may have selected a different mix of lighting fixtures to attain the required lighting levels. so no further changes are required. but the overall load on the three phases remains the same.

on the Options Bar. Similar to the situation you observed for transformer T1. click the drop-down list on the Options Bar. 100. 23 Click OK. but must be reconnected to the power circuits. 1-#3. 1-#8. select panel L-1. you should verify that the wire sizes for panel L-1 is set correctly. enter 100A for Rating. 24 In the Project Browser. 1-#12. Revit MEP automatically calculates wire sizes based on circuit rating. click Disconnect. enter 40A for the Trip value. the load presented by T2 is less than 14kVA and you decide to change the transformer from 45kVA to 30kVA. 1-#12. 22 Scroll down. 19 With panel L-1 selected. scroll down and verify that the current value for the Wire Size parameter is 3-#12. select panel H-2. 15 In the Mechanical/Electrical room. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. 26 In the Edit Circuits dialog. Notice that it changes to 3-#3. and click the value for the Wire Size parameter. 278 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . 20 In the Element Properties dialog for the circuit. Verify/adjust wire sizes 16 Right-click panel L-1. click (Circuit Properties). scroll down to the Electrical-Loads category. under Instance Parameters. . The transformer is now rated at 30kVA. which will require a 40A circuit breaker. 18 Click OK.00A is the correct size panel for a 30kVA transformer. 25 In the Mechanical/Electrical room. 21 Under Electrical-Loads. and select T1 from Now that you have specified transformer T1 as a 30kVA transformer and restored it to the circuit. click . for transformer T2.00A. and notice that the current value for Mains is 100. and click Element Properties. and on the Options Bar. on the Options Bar. double-click 2-Power to make it the active view.14 In the Error dialog.

NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. 38 On the Options Bar. 28 In the 2-Power view. in the Mechanical/Electrical room. 29 In the Type Selector. . 36 With the MDP panel selected. select panel L-2. click Disconnect. Size the service entrance conductors 35 In the Project Browser. under Electrical Loads. selectM_480-120-208V Phase Dry Type Transformer: M_30kVA. 30 In the Error dialog. 34 Click OK.27 Click OK. scroll down to the Electrical-Loads. and verify that the current value for Mains is 100. enter 225A for the Rating parameter. select T2. but must be reconnected to the power circuits. click . Defining Circuit Loads | 279 . 37 Close the Warning. 31 In the Mechanical/Electrical room. 40 You can save the open file if you wish. double-click 1-Power to make it the active view. . Notice that the value for the Wire Size parameter changes appropriately. select the T2 transformer. A warning indicates that the total connected load exceeds 80% of the defined value of 20A for the circuit you are creating. under Instance Parameters. you should verify that the size of panel L-2 is set correctly. 41 Click File menu ➤ Close.00A. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. and on the Options Bar. The transformer is now rated at 30kVA. Now that you have set transformer T2 to be a 30kVA transformer and restored it to the circuit. 32 Right click panel L-2 and click Element Properties. 39 In the Element Properties dialog for the circuit. This completes the Electrical Tutorial.

280 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems .

each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. you learn system design best practices while understanding how Revit MEP makes systems designing more efficient. you create the plumbing systems for the second floor men’s room in an office building. This dataset includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. As you create the plumbing system. By following this workflow. After finishing each exercise.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the dataset that Autodesk provides. and specific techniques for designing plumbing systems. go to http://www. you follow a series of lessons and exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Revit MEP 2008. hot and cold water piping.autodesk. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design plumbing systems using Revit MEP 2008. you will understand the process.Plumbing Systems 4 In this tutorial. If the tutorial datasets are not present. You can search the Training Files ➤ Metric directory to verify that the datasets have been downloaded. At the end of this tutorial. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. and sanitary piping. The datasets that you use to complete these exercises are located in the Training Files directory. 281 . methodology. you can choose to save your work. including plumbing fixtures. However.

click the Training Files icon. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. Load piping component families 7 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Notice that 2 folders have been added to the families currently available for your design: M_Toilet .rfa 11 Click Open. 4 While pressing Ctrl select the following files: ■ ■ M_Floor-Mounted Flush Valve Water Closet. As you develop more advanced skills working with Revit MEP. You load the families of components that comprise your plumbing systems. All of the loaded families. click the Training Files icon. 8 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Open Metric ➤ Plumbing ➤ m Loading Plumbing Families. 13 Click File menu ➤ Close. you can customize components and expand the library of plumbing families. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click the Training Files icon. you plan each system by loading the fixtures and fittings that you will need to design the plumbing system. 10 While pressing Ctrl select the following files: ■ ■ M_Pipe Glued DWV Bend. are added under Families in the Project Browser. 282 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems .rfa 5 Click Open. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog.rfa M_Pipe Glued Short Reducing Sanitary Tee. 12 You can save the open file if you wish. 6 In the Project Browser. 14 Proceed to the next exercise. “Configuring Plumbing and Piping Systems” on page 283. 9 Expand Metric ➤ Plumbing.Planning Plumbing Systems Creating plumbing systems in Revit MEP is similar to any design project. Load plumbing component families 1 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family.rfa M_Wall Hung Urinal. expand Families ➤ Plumbing Fixtures. In this lesson.rvt. 3 Expand Metric ➤ Plumbing. planning is critical to a successful design. The selected component families are loaded into the project. Preparing the Plumbing Plan Revit MEP provides families of common plumbing components that you place in your plumbing plan.Wall Mounted Flush Valve and Wall Hung Urinal.

1 In the Project Browser. click Duplicate. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. select M_Pipe Glued Short Sanitary Tee: Standard For Tap.Configuring Plumbing and Piping Systems In this exercise. Create new pipe types and specify default pipe fittings 4 Right-click PVC Sanitary. “Add Plumbing Fixtures” on page 284. select M_Pipe PVC Coupling: M_Standard 10 You can save the open file if you wish. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. select M_Pipe Vent Tee: M_Standard For Tap. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Configuring Plumbing and Piping Systems | 283 . 12 Proceed to the next exercise. select M_Pipe PVC Bend: M_Standard For Preferred Junction Type. click the Training Files icon. select Tee For Tee. select Tee For Tee. select None For Cross. and click Duplicate. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Elbow. and click Properties. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. select None For Cross. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click Properties. 7 Rename the new pipe type. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. you create new PVC pipe types and specify the default fittings that will be used with them. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Elbow. and press Enter. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. select M_Pipe PVC Transition Eccentric: M_Standard For Union. Open Metric ➤ Plumbing ➤ m Configuring Plumbing Pipe Systems. PVC Sanitary Vent. select M_Pipe PVC Bend: M_Standard For Preferred Junction Type. under Mechanical.rvt. 3 Right-click PVC 2. right-click PVC Sanitary. enter PVC Sanitary for the new name. select M_Pipe PVC Transition Eccentric: M_Standard For Union. select M_Pipe Glued PVC Cross: Standard For Transition. select M_Pipe Glued PVC Cross: M_Standard For Transition. click Rename. 11 Click File menu ➤ Close. under Mechanical. 8 Right-click PVC Sanitary Vent. select M_Pipe PVC Coupling: M_Standard 6 In the Project Browser. 2 Right-click PVC.

and double-click 2 . click the Training Files icon. 3 sinks. you create systems to logically connect the fixtures.Designing Plumbing Systems Designing plumbing systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward process.Plumbing to make it the active view. Finally. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. You then modify the piping. 3 wall-mounted urinals.rvt. you add plumbing fixtures to physically connect them with piping. click Plumbing Fixture. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and 3 sinks. and a floor drain to the second floor men’s room. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The men’s room is partitioned for 2 toilet stalls. In this lesson. 3 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. 4 Select Floor-Mounted Flush Valve Water Closet : Standard in the Type Selector. 2 Enter the keyboard shortcut. 284 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . 3 urinals. Open Metric ➤ Plumbing ➤ m Adding Plumbing Fixtures. ZR (Zoom Region). and draw a left-to-right pick box around the second floor men’s room. 5 On the Options Bar verify that (Place on Work Plane) is selected. Add Plumbing Fixtures In this exercise. you add 2 toilets. Place floor-mounted toilets 1 In the Project Browser.

(Place on 10 Move the cursor over the upper-left corner of the men’s room.6 Move the cursor over the upper-right corner of the men’s room. verify that Vertical Face) is selected. and when the preview of the urinal is 500 from the left wall. click to place the toilet. click to place the toilet. click to place the toilet. 7 Move the cursor into the stall to the left. and when the preview of the toilet is 160 from the upper wall and 400 from the right wall. 9 Select Wall Hung Urinal : Standard in the Type Selector. click Plumbing Fixture. Add Plumbing Fixtures | 285 . and on the Options Bar. Place wall-mounted urinals 8 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. and when the preview of the toilet is 160 from the upper wall and 460 from the right wall.

and click to place the dimension annotation. 14 On the Options Bar. (The placement is not critical. and Individual 15 Click the centerline of the left wall. Wall centerlines is selected for Prefer. (Aligned) is selected. 18 Working from left to right. 17 Using the same method. as shown and place a third urinal between the other 2 urinals. 286 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . and click to place the dimension annotation. place a dimension annotation for the rightmost toilet. move the cursor over the center of the leftmost urinal. 13 On the Design Bar.11 Place a second urinal near the wall of the leftmost toilet stall. verify that References is selected for Pick. move the cursor up. You will use the Dimension tool to space them evenly along the wall. click Dimension. click the centerline of each urinal. 16 Move the cursor down.) 12 Click Modify. and click.

and press Delete. select Pick a plane. 23 On the Options click (Place on Work Plane). and press the Space Bar twice to rotate the sink into the proper orientation. select Pick. (Equal Control) above the 20 Press Delete to remove the dimension from the drawing. click Plumbing Fixture. and for Plane. The urinal is placed 500 from the wall of the toilet stall. and in the Type Selector. and enter 500. Place sinks 22 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. and click the blue dimension values to space the urinals evenly along the wall. Select the dimension annotation above the urinals. select Sink Single Island : Public. 21 While pressing Ctrl. 25 In the drawing area. Add Plumbing Fixtures | 287 . and click Unconstrain in the warning dialog. under Specify a new Work Plane. 26 Move the cursor over the counter top in the lower-right corner of the men’s room. select the 2 remaining dimension annotations. select the counter top.19 Select the rightmost urinal. click the value for the blue dimension. 24 In the Work Plane dialog. and click OK.

30 On the Design Bar.27 Place the sink 560 from the left wall and 460 from the lower wall. 29 Click Modify. 31 Using the same method you used to evenly space the urinals. and place a third sink between the other 2 sinks as shown. specify the distance between the rightmost sink and the right wall as 560. and then delete the dimension annotations. equalize the space between sinks. click Dimension. 28 Place a second sink near the right wall. 288 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . (The placement is not critical.

and click Edit. under Extents. “Begin Creating the Sanitary System ” on page 289. In the left pane of the Open dialog. as shown. 33 On the Options click (Place on Work Plane). and click View Properties. and for Plane. Begin Creating the Sanitary System | 289 . click the Training Files icon. 38 Proceed to the next exercise. click Plumbing Fixture. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. and double-click 2 . Open Metric ➤ Plumbing ➤ m Starting the Sanitary Piping System. select Level : Level 2. Because most of the piping for the sanitary system will be placed below the floor level. In this exercise. and floor drain.rvt. Prepare for sanitary piping 1 In the Project Browser. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 37 Click File menu ➤ Close.Plumbing to make it the active view. scroll down to View Range. Begin Creating the Sanitary System This is the first of 3 exercises that will guide you through creating the piping for the men’s room sanitary plumbing system. select M_Round Floor Drain : 125. you create a sanitary system consisting of the toilets. 2 Right-click in the drawing area. urinals.Place the floor drain 32 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. 34 Move the cursor to a point where the walls for the toilet stalls meet. 36 You can save the open file if you wish. and click to place the floor drain. you need to adjust the view depth to make the piping visible in the view. You then use Revit MEP‘s Layout Path tools to create sloped piping to connect the fixtures to a sanitary outlet. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. 35 Click Modify. and in the Type selector.

Create the sanitary plumbing system 14 When you are creating systems the System Browser can help you identify components that have not been added to a system. specify Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary For Offset. 21 Click Modify. TIP You can also access the system browser using the F9 keyboard shortcut. select Pipe Sanitary Outlet : Standard. and under View Depth. Click Window ➤ System Browser. specify -300 11 In the left panel. select Sanitary from the System Type list. 17 Expand the Unassigned folder. while coarse and medium display plumbing components as 1-line symbols. 12 In the table: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. click Mechanical Equipment. 290 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . 5 Click OK twice. you can copy the sanitary outlet from this tutorial into your other projects. specify -1500 for Level Offset. and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area. click View ➤ Piping. click Mechanical Settings. 9 In the right panel. and click to place the sanitary outlet approximately as shown. 16 Right-click in the system browser table. 20 Move the cursor over the chase. specify Fine for Detail Level.4 In the View Range dialog. and in the Type Selector. Specify mechanical settings for piping 7 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. and Wireframe for Model Graphics Style. specify -1500 for Bottom Offset. and notice that all of the plumbing fixtures are currently unassigned. 19 On the Mechanical tab on the Design Bar. click Branch. 15 Click the title bar for the browser. and click Main. specify Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary For Offset. 10 In the table: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. NOTE If you do not find the sanitary outlet among any of the families included with Revit MEP. 18 Zoom in on the chase near the top-right corner of the second floor men’s room. The fine setting displays 2-line piping and plumbing components. 6 On the View Control Bar. 8 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. under Primary Range. and select Sanitary from the System Type list. specify -300 13 Click OK.

25 On the Options Bar. 22 The elevation of the sanitary outlet with relation to the other components in the system is critical. (Select Equipment for System). Right-click the sanitary outlet in the view. click area. 26 On the Options bar. and floor drain. enter -1200 for Offset. The urinals. and click Element Properties. under Constraints. and draw a left-to-right pick box around the urinals. click (Create Sanitary System). The elevation will be specified as -1200. as shown. 24 Zoom in on the men’s room. and click the sanitary outlet in the drawing Begin Creating the Sanitary System | 291 . toilets and the floor drain are moved from the Unassigned folder to the newly created Sanitary ➤ Sanitary 1 folder in the System Browser. low enough to allow sloping the sanitary piping in the system. toilets. and click OK.The sanitary outlet is added to the Unassigned folder in the system browser. 23 In the Element Properties dialog.

enter 1. see Layout Paths. 30 Select solution 1 of 6. The layout preview displays the main piping as blue lines and the branch piping as green lines. 31 Select the horizontal branch segment above the leftmost urinal. as needed. click Modify. For more information on Layout Path solutions. The Layout Paths tab is activated on the Design Bar. click Layout Path.The sanitary outlet is added to Sanitary 1 in the System Browser and the sanitary piping system is previewed in the view. to view them. You can click (Previous) and (Next Solution). as shown. 29 Verify that Network is selected for Solution Type. 27 On the Options Bar. and use the (Parallel Movement Control) control to drag the segment into the middle of the chase above the urinals. Up to 6 piping layout solutions are suggested on the Options Bar. and on the Options Bar. 292 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . and on the Design Bar.00 for Slope. 28 Click Solutions.

32 Select the horizontal main segment above the rightmost urinals and toilets. Begin Creating the Sanitary System | 293 . and drag it into the chase. in line with the branch segment. 33 Click Finish Solution.

The first tab highlights the fixture and the branch. as shown. slope. Select each pipe segment in the system. and press Tab 3 times to check connectivity. 294 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems .34 Examine the piping that was automatically placed using the Layout Path tools. When fittings are reversed. The second tab highlights the fixture. ■ ■ Examine the sanitary tees to assure proper orientation. The slope control for every segment should indicate that the slope is toward the sanitary outlet. branch and the fixture connecting it to the main segment. and orientation of fittings: ■ Highlight one of the plumbing fixtures. and check the slope control. The third tab should highlight the entire system. checking for the proper connectivity. select the fitting and click (Flip) to reorient it.

specify Fine for Detail Level. VG (Visibility/Graphics). Enter the keyboard shortcut. expand Plumbing ➤ 3D Views. Begin Creating the Sanitary System | 295 . 36 It is easier to work with Revit MEP components if model categories from other disciplines are hidden in the view. and double-click 3D Plumbing. click Show categories from all disciplines. 37 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 39 On the View Control Bar.35 In the Project Browser. and on the Model Categories tab clear the following categories: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Casework Ceilings Columns Curtain Panels Curtain Systems Curtain Wall Mullions Doors Floors Lines Railings Roofs Shaft Openings Stairs Walls Windows 38 Click OK. and Hidden Line for Model Graphics Style.

Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System In this exercise you continue with the work from the last exercise. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Open Metric ➤ Plumbing ➤ m Connecting Sink Drain Lines. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 296 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . and click the plus sign below the fitting to upgrade the fitting to a tee. and creating the piping that connects them to the sanitary system. click the Training Files icon. and double-click 2 . 41 Click File menu ➤ Close. “Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System” on page 296 to continue creating the sanitary system. 1 In the Project Browser. adding the sinks in the men’s room. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset.40 You can save the open file if you wish. 2 Zoom in on the piping to the right of the men’s room. 42 Proceed to the next exercise.Plumbing to make it the active view. 3 Select the sanitary elbow to the right of the rightmost toilet.rvt.

click Pipe Fitting. When you press the space bar. press the Space Bar once. 5 Verify that Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary is selected in the Type Selector. and click Draw Pipe. and on the Options Bar. and when the extension snap displays. click Options. which automatically sets the length of the pipe to the value entered. you can verify that the slope has been applied in the correct direction: toward the sanitary outlet. Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System | 297 . and press Enter. and select M_Pipe Glued Reducing DWV Wye : Standard in the Type Selector. click to place the fitting. enter 3950. If you select the pipe. Entering a length dimension while drawing pipes activates Revit MEP’s listening dimension tool. 8 Click Modify. the pipe being drawn automatically assumes the size and elevation of the fitting.4 Select the tee. and click OK. 10 Move the cursor over the open end of the pipe. enter 1. Pressing Return completes the dimensioning. enter 1000 for Slope Run.00 for Slope Angle. 6 In the Layout Options dialog. 7 Drag the preview of the pipe down parallel to the wall. right-click the connector on the open leg. 9 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar.

enter 50. click to specify the end of the pipe. 17 In the Layout Options dialog. 16 Verify that the Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary is selected in the Type Selector. and press Enter. highlight the wye. 12 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. 15 Select the wye fitting.00 for Slope Angle. and on the Options Bar. right click the connector on the open leg. and when the wall centerline snap displays. and select M_Pipe PVC Plug : M_Standard in the Type Selector. verify that the slope is specified as 1. 14 Using the method learned earlier.11 Select the fitting. 18 Drag the end of the pipe to the left and down toward the centerline of the wall below the sinks. 298 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . click to place the fitting. click Options. and click OK. click Pipe Fitting. press the Space Bar once so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. and when the extension snap displays. and click Draw Pipe. and press Tab 3 times to check connectivity. click the size for the wye leg. 13 Move the cursor over the straight leg of the reducing wye.

Changing the Offset while drawing pipe creates a vertical segment. click to specify the end of the pipe. Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System | 299 . expand Plumbing ➤ 3D Views and double-click 3D Plumbing to view the piping just added. In this case. 20 On the Options Bar. and click Modify. click Apply.19 Continue this section of pipe by dragging the preview along the centerline of the wall. and when the snap for the center point of the middle sink displays. 21 In the Project Browser. enter 150 for Offset. the vertical pipe extends 150 above the level of the floor.

28 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. enter 45. 26 Select the double wye fitting. 30 In the Layout Options dialog. 23 Zoom in on the vertical segment behind the middle sink. The double wye is added to the vertical segment as shown above. 31 Drag the pipe to the right.00 for Slope Angle. specify 200 for Offset. 300 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . 24 On the Plumbing tab. 32 Click Modify. clear unwanted components from the 3D view using the Visibility/Graphics dialog as described in the previous exercise. check the slope and connectivity for the added piping as described previously. and in the Type Selector select M_Pipe Glued Double DWV Wye : Standard. click to specify the end of the pipe. press Space. and click to place the fitting. Add pipe stubs to the double wye 27 Zoom in on the double wye. 29 Click the connector snap on the right leg.If necessary. In the next steps you add 2 short pipe segments to the double wye. 25 Move the cursor near the open end of the vertical pipe. and on the Options Bar. This is best done by carefully following these steps. click Pipe. 22 In the 3D view. click Pipe Fitting. click Options. press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. and when Horizontal and Extension displays. and when the Extension snap displays and the end is outlined in blue. and on the Options Bar. and click OK.

click the connector snap. leaving only the short pipe segment connected to the double wye. 46 Right-click the connector for the sink drain. expand Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. click to specify the end of the pipe. and click Draw Pipe. and click Apply. 35 Click the connector snap on the left leg. click Pipe again. press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. and select the leftmost sink. 41 Move the cursor over the center leg of the fitting.Plumbing. 43 Click Modify. click Pipe again. and click OK. and on the Options Bar. specify 400 for Offset. and press Delete. and when Horizontal and Extension displays. leaving only the short pipe segment connected to the double wye. and another segment of pipe. 44 In the Project Browser.This adds a short segment of pipe from the wye. 34 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. 37 Drag the pipe to the left. Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System | 301 . 36 In the Layout Options dialog. 38 Click Modify. and press Delete. 45 Zoom to a level that lets you view all 3 sinks. click Options. verify that 45. and double-click 2 . an elbow.00 for Slope Angle is specified. 42 On the Options Bar. 33 Select the elbow and horizontal pipe segment just added. 39 Select the elbow and horizontal pipe segment just added. 40 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar.

double-click 3D Plumbing. 302 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . specify 0. press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the sink drain. specify 40 mm for Size. 48 In the Layout Options dialog. expand Plumbing ➤ 3D Views. and click to specify the end of the pipe. and on the Options Bar. 49 On the Options Bar. and click OK. drag the pipe preview down to a point between the sink and the wall. specify 450 for Offset.00 for Slope Angle. select the 3 short segments of pipe connected to the double wye. 51 Select Pipe again. 53 Zoom in to a level that allows you to view all 3 sinks and the double wye fitting. 54 While pressing Ctrl. 52 In the Project Browser. click Options.47 Drag the pipe preview a short distance from the drain. and on the Options Bar. and use the same method to connect drain pipes to the other 2 sinks. 50 Click Modify.

Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System | 303 . 61 Click Finish to create piping for the third sink. 63 On the Options Bar. select the short pipe connected to the center leg of the double wye and the horizontal pipe from the drain of the middle sink. click Routing Solutions. Routing Solution tools are activated on the Options Bar that let you (Add Control Points) or (Remove Control Points). Specify slope for the sink sanitary piping 62 Draw a right-to-left pick box to select the elbow and adjoining 2 pipes between the double wye and the sink drain for the rightmost sink as shown. and on the Options Bar. select the pipe connected to the left leg and create the piping by selecting solution 3 of 3. 59 Select solution 2 of 2.Using Routing Solutions to finish the sanitary piping 55 While pressing Ctrl. You use (Previous) and (Next) buttons to cycle through the up to 6 proposed solutions. You use the plus and minus buttons to add vertex controls to pipe segments. click Routing Solutions. Transitions and fittings are automatically added to maintain connections. and select a proposed solution. 58 While pressing Ctrl. 60 Using the same method. and click Finish to create piping for the middle sink. click (Slope) to activate the slope tools on the Options Bar. select the short pipe connected to the right leg of the double wye and the horizontal pipe from the drain of the rightmost sink. 57 Select solution 3 of 3. and click Finish to create piping for that solution. 56 On the Options Bar.

67 On the Options Bar. The sinks are added to the Sanitary 1 system in the System Browser. You could have entered a negative value for slope and clicked to specify the end closest to the sink as the reference (with the arrow pointing toward the double wye). expand Sanitary ➤ M_Pipe Sanitary Outlet : M_Standard. select M_Pipe Glued DWV Bend : Standard. M_Pipe PVC Bend : M_Standard components were used because the shorter size of this fitting works well with the automated Routing Solutions. Make minor adjustments to the sanitary system 70 Zoom in and select the double wye fitting for the sink drains. select the 2 bends connecting the 45-degree legs of the double-wye to the horizontal pipe segments. Now that the routing is completed. click (Pick Aligning Element) to toggle the reference end for the slope.64 Enter 1. The fitting moves up and at the same time the piping attached to its legs automatically adjusts and maintains connectivity. you can change these to the more commonly used M_Pipe Glued DWV Bend : Standard. The arrow points away from the reference end of the slope. and click Finish System. you can make minor adjustments to the system. 304 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . click (Edit System). 71 Press the down arrow on the keyboard twice to return the fitting to its original location. 72 While pressing Ctrl. click Add to System. there is a smaller movement. and click Finish. and in the Type Selector. When zoomed in close. modifying offset values. With the piping created and the slope and connectivity properly defined. 65 Using the same method. 69 One at a time. or by using the arrow keys on your keyboard. specify the slope for the piping for the remaining sinks. The amount of adjustment with each keystroke depends is proportional to the zoom level. 68 On the Design Bar. select all 3 sinks.00 for Slope. right-click Sanitary 1. When the piping was created for the sink drains. and click Select. and press the up arrow on your keyboard twice. 66 In the System Browser. such that the arrow is pointing away from the double wye fitting. You can move fixtures by dragging.

77 Click File menu ➤ Close. highlight the leftmost sink. 76 You can save the open file if you wish. and press Tab 3 times to check connectivity. skip the next 2 steps. 74 Using the method learned earlier. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. the entire system should be highlighted. Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System | 305 .) 75 If you want to save your work. and select M_Pipe Glued DWV Bend : Standard in the Type Selector.73 Select the 2 elbows in the section of piping between the double wye fitting and the reducing sanitary wye. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. (After the third tab. otherwise. click File menu ➤ Save As.

and select the horizontal pipe. click (Move). 2 Zoom in on the elbow at the upper end of the vertical pipe connected to the sanitary outlet. 7 Drag the preview approximately 200 along the horizontal line away from the elbow. 6 Click on the sanitary outlet to specify a start point for the move as shown. adjusting the sanitary stack. 3 Click the pipe’s connector snap at the elbow. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ 3D Views. “Refining the Sanitary Stack” on page 306 to continue creating the sanitary system. and double-click 3D Plumbing to make it the active view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 1 In the Project Browser. 306 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . 4 Select the upper elbow. and press Delete. and click to specify the endpoint for the move as shown. and carefully drag it away from the elbow.rvt. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. while maintaining the same angle. Open Metric ➤ Plumbing ➤ m Refining Waste Stack Connection.78 Proceed to the next exercise. 5 Zoom in on the sanitary outlet. select it and on the toolbar. click the Training Files icon. Refining the Sanitary Stack In this exercise you continue with the work on the sanitary system.

Refining the Sanitary Stack | 307 . press the Space Bar once (so that the fitting assumes the elevation of the end of the pipe). Add a reducing wye to the stack 9 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. 10 Move the cursor over the center of the open end of the vertical pipe. and when the Extension snap displays. click Pipe Fitting. and select M_Pipe Glued Reducing DWV Wye : Standard.8 Select the elbow and vertical pipe segment. specify 150 for D (diameter). and click to place the fitting. and on the Options Bar.

draw a section to the right of the sanitary outlet as shown. enter 100 to change its size. and click Modify. and click piping. If necessary. click the value for the 45 degree leg. double-click 2 . Create a Section view to complete the stack connections 13 Expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. and press Enter. The wye is added to the vertical segment. 308 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . to rotate the 45 degree leg until it is pointing toward the sanitary 12 Select the wye. click Section. and zoom in on the sanitary outlet.11 Click Modify. 14 On the View tab on the Design Bar.Plumbing. select the wye.

and click to specify the end of the pipe. click Pipe. press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the fitting.15 Double-click the section view symbol in the drawing area to open the new section view. 16 On the View Control Bar. double-click 3D . and select the reducing wye fitting. 20 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. specify Fine.00 for Slope Angle. parallel to the main segment of pipe from the toilets. 21 Click the connector on the 45 degree leg. enter 45. 17 Zoom in. for Detail Level. and press Enter. 19 In the Project Browser. 22 In the Layout Options dialog. and on the Options Bar. 23 Drag the pipe to the left and down. and click OK. Refining the Sanitary Stack | 309 . This places the wye at a level that will allow creating a routing solution that will not change the slope of the main segment. 18 On the Options Bar. click Options. and when Vertical and Extension displays. enter -750 for Offset.Plumbing.

leaving only the short pipe segment connected to the wye. an elbow.24 Click Modify. 310 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . and another segment of pipe. select the short pipe segment and the main pipe. and on the Options Bar. This adds a short segment of pipe (from the wye). 26 While pressing Ctrl. 25 Select the elbow and horizontal pipe segment just added. and press Delete. 27 Select solution 2 of 2. and click Finish to create piping for that solution. click Routing Solutions.

Refining the Sanitary Stack | 311 . and in the Type Selector select M_Pipe Glued DWV Bend : Standard. specify 1200 for Offset. 33 Check slope and connectivity as described previously. and click the connector snap. 31 On the Options Bar. and click Apply. 29 On the Plumbing tab. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. 30 Move the cursor over the open leg of the reducing wye. 35 Click File menu ➤ Close. click Pipe. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise.28 Select the elbow created by the routing solution tool. 34 You can save the open file if you wish. 32 Click Modify.

Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. “Refining the Urinal Lines” on page 312 to continue creating the plumbing system. click the Training Files icon. then down to connect with the sanitary main. and drag it to the right to a point midway between the toilet and urinal.Plumbing to make it the active view. and double-click 2 . (If necessary. use the Filter tool to select only piping. 312 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . Refining the Urinal Lines The waste piping from the urinal extends down through floor directly beneath the urinals before connecting to the sanitary main piping. Open Metric ➤ Plumbing ➤ m Refining Urinal Waste Lines.rvt.) 3 Press Delete. 1 In the Project Browser. and draw a left-to-right pick box around the piping above the urinals as shown. In the left pane of the Open dialog. running it inside the wall. 2 Zoom in on the piping behind the urinals. click the connector snap. 4 Select the pipe connected to the wye above the leftmost toilet. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. In this exercise you change the routing for the waste piping from the urinals.36 Proceed to the next exercise.

and click to specify the end of the pipe. 5 Right-click the connector at the open end of the shortened pipe. verify that Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary is selected in the Type Selector.The next 4 steps draw a series of pipe segments. specify 1.Plumbing to make it the active view. starting at the level of the original pipe. 6 On the Options Bar. specify 50 for D (diameter). expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ 3D Views. and finally connecting to the sanitary drain on the left urinal. 12 In the Project Browser. double-click 3D. drag the preview to the left approximately 200. and click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northeast. and click Options. then placing a vertical segment and continuing the run at 300. Refining the Urinal Lines | 313 . enter 300 for Offset. click Draw Pipe. and move the cursor along the center line of the chase. 11 Click Modify.00 for Slope Angle. and when the snap displays. 7 In the Layout Options dialog. to a point in line with the center of the leftmost urinal. click once to specify the end of the pipe. press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the existing pipe. click to specify the end of the pipe at the sanitary drain connector. 9 On the Options Bar. 8 On the Options Bar. press Tab until the Sanitary connection displays on the status bar at the bottom of the window. 10 Drag the preview over the urinal drain.

press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation properties of the existing pipe. and click OK.13 Click the new pipe segments and check the slope. 21 Right-click the section of pipe that you just added. and click Create Similar.Plumbing. 23 Click to specify the start of the pipe. 314 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . 17 Click to specify the start of the pipe. click Pipe. 18 In the Layout Options dialog. 20 Click Modify. 19 Drag the preview down to the sanitary connector on the middle urinal. 25 In the Project Browser. Connect the remaining urinals 14 In the Project Browser.00 for Slope Angle. and click to specify the end of the pipe at the sanitary drain connector.Plumbing to make it the active view. 24 Click Modify. 15 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. and check the slope and connectivity as described previously. 16 Move the cursor over the intersection of the branch pipe above the middle urinal and the centerline snap for the urinal. and click to specify the end of the pipe at the sanitary drain connector. and on the Options Bar. and zoom in on the urinals. click Options. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ 3D Views. 22 Move the cursor over the intersection of the branch pipe and the centerline snap for the rightmost urinal. verify that the slope is specified as 1. double-click 2. drag the preview down to the sanitary connector on the urinal. double-click 3D.

double-click 2 . specify 80 for D (diameter). first you must temporarily resize the pipe to the urinal. So. and draw a left-to-right pick box around only the main piping (including the short 100 mm segment) as shown. and on the Options Bar. In the next steps you will change the elbow behind the left urinal to a tee to create the cleanout.Resize pipes 26 In the Project Browser.Plumbing to make it the active view. However. 27 Zoom in on the piping above the urinals. you cannot upgrade an elbow to a tee unless all of the connections are the same size. specify 80 for D (diameter). 28 On the Options Bar. Add a cleanout 29 Select the pipe between the 80 elbow and the left urinal. Refining the Urinal Lines | 315 .

36 Select the vertical pipe. 31 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. 316 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . specify 50 for D. 33 Select the pipe to the urinal again. This will provide the space required to change the short elbows to the DWV Bends that allow better sanitary waste flow. and drag it to a point midway between the 2 sanitary tees. Redefine fittings 34 Select the 3 sanitary tees behind the urinals. select M_Pipe Glued Short Reducing Sanitary Tee : Standard. and zoom in on the area between the toilet and the leftmost urinal. and on the Options Bar. 32 Move the cursor over the open connector on the sanitary tee above the leftmost urinal. Select the elbows at each end of the vertical pipe.30 Select the elbow. double-click 3D. This eliminates the need for transitions between the pipes and the tees. click Pipe Fitting. and click the + control on the left to add a leg for the cleanout. and in the Type Selector. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ 3D Views. select M_Pipe PVC Plug : M_Standard. click to place the plug on the tee. and when the extension snap displays.Plumbing to make it the active view. and select M_Pipe PVC DVW Bend : Standard. 35 In the Project Browser. and in the Type Selector.

38 Check slope and connectivity as described previously. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset.37 Click Modify. 40 Click File menu ➤ Close. “Adding Vents to the System” on page 317 to continue creating the plumbing system. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 41 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding Vents to the System | 317 . adding the vent piping at several points in the waste piping. Adding Vents to the System In this exercise you finish the work on the sanitary system. 39 You can save the open file if you wish.

and verify that Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary Vent is selected in the Type Selector. 7 In the Layout Options dialog.00 for Slope Angle. If necessary. 3 Select the elbow at the upper end of the vertical pipe segment.Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Create additional vents 11 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. click the Training Files icon. NOTE You must move the cursor into the drawing area for the new offset value to be recognized. Open Metric ➤ Plumbing ➤ m Creating Sanitary Vent Piping. 10 Click Modify. click Options. 5 Click the connector at the upper end of the tee to specify the start of the pipe. select Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary Vent.rvt. specify 50 for D (diameter). 6 On the Options Bar. expand Plumbing ➤ 3D Views and double-click 3D Plumbing to view the piping just added. 8 On the Options Bar. and click the + control above it to change the fitting to a tee. click Pipe. 318 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . 2 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northeast. and in the Type Selector. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 9 Click Apply. specify 0. and zoom in on the area between the toilets and the urinals. 4 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. and specify 2700 for Offset. and click OK. clear unwanted components from the 3D view using the Visibility/Graphics dialog as described previously. click Pipe.

place another vent between the two rightmost urinals. use the Flip control to make the adjustment.12 On the Options Bar. click a point midway between the tees connecting the first toilet and floor drain to specify the start of the pipe. 16 If either of the tees that were added need to be reoriented according to the slope of the piping. Adding Vents to the System | 319 . 14 Click Modify. and click Apply. 13 On the Options Bar. as shown. 15 Using the same method. specify 50 for D (diameter). specify 2700 for Offset.

select Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary Vent. 20 Select the elbow at the top of the middle vent pipe. specify 3000 for Offset. and press Space. A short section of pipe is added to the tee. 22 Click the connector at the open leg of the tee to specify a starting point for the pipe. 320 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . click Draw Pipe. click Pipe. and click the + control above it to change the elbow to a tee. 25 Select the leftmost vent. 18 Press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the vent pipe. 26 Drag the pipe preview a short distance. and click Draw Pipe. 21 On the Plumbing tab of the Design Bar. 24 Select the tee and click the plus symbol to its left to change the tee to a cross. and click Modify.Connect the individual vents 17 Select the vertical vent between the 2 rightmost urinals. and click to specify the end point. and click the connector at the open end of the middle vent to specify the endpoint for the pipe. and in the Type Selector. click Apply. An elbow is automatically placed at the joint. 23 On the Options Bar. right-click the connector at the open end. right click the connector. 19 Drag the pipe preview toward the middle vent. 27 Continue dragging the preview to the open connector on the tee at the upper end of the middle vent.

specify 50 for D (diameter). click Apply. and verify that Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary Vent is selected in the Type Selector. select the tee and the short pipe segment that connects it to the double wye. Add a vent to the sinks 29 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southeast. 34 On the Options Bar. and click the + control above the elbow to change it to a tee. Adding Vents to the System | 321 . and specify 2700 for Offset. click Pipe. 32 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. 31 While pressing Ctrl. specify 50 for D (diameter). and on the Options Bar.28 Click Modify. 33 Click the connector at the upper end of the tee to specify the start of the pipe. 30 Select the elbow above the double wye for the drain section to the middle sink. and zoom in on the area of the double wye behind the sinks.

a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise.35 Click Modify. 38 Highlight any component in the system and press Tab 3 times to check the connectivity of the system as described previously. 40 Click File menu ➤ Close. and click the snap at the horizontal vent pipe to specify the endpoint for the pipe. 37 Drag the pipe preview. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. 36 Select the vent. while maintaining a 90 degree angle. right-click the connector at the open end. 322 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . toward the horizontal vent segment between the toilets and urinals. 39 You can save the open file if you wish. 41 Proceed to the next exercise. and press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the vent pipe. click Draw Pipe. “Create the Cold Water System” on page 323 to continue creating the plumbing system. A tee is automatically inserted at the joint.

right-click Standard. You now have the cold water piping at 2600 and the hot water piping at 2550. 11 In the left pane. Open Metric ➤ Plumbing ➤ m Creating Cold Water Piping. and specify Pipe Types : Hot Water for Pipe Type and 2550 for Offset.rvt. click Rename. select Domestic Hot Water from the System Type list. specify M_Pipe Cross: M_Standard For Transition. and press Enter. specify Pipe Types : Cold Water for Pipe Type and 2600 for Offset. select Domestic Hot Water from the System Type list. expand Piping ➤ Conversion. 5 Right-click Cold Water. click Branch. specify None For Cross. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click the title bar for the browser and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area. 13 In the left panel. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. 16 Right-click a table heading in the system browser. 2 Repeat the previous step to create another copy of Standard. 8 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. specify Pipe Types : Hot Water for Pipe Type and 2550 for Offset. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. click Mechanical Settings. 15 Press F9 to open the System Browser.Create the Cold Water System In this exercise you create the cold water system and add piping to connect all of the fixtures in the men’s room to the system. specify M_Pipe Elbow : M_Standard For Preferred Junction Type.Plumbing to make it the active view. verify that the following default fittings are specified: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Elbow. click Main. Create new pipe types and specify default pipe fittings 1 In the Project Browser. which avoids potential obstructions and conflicts between systems. and click Properties. specify M_Pipe Tee: M_Standard For Tap. click View ➤ Piping. click the Training Files icon. 3 Right-click Standard 2. 9 In the table. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. and specify Pipe Types : Cold Water for Pipe Type and 2600 for Offset. select Domestic Cold Water from the System Type list. click Rename. Create the cold water system 14 In the Project Browser. in the Type Parameters under Mechanical. enter Hot Water for the new name. specify M_Pipe Transition Eccentric: M_Standard For Union. click Main. specify Tee For Tee. and in the right pane. and double-click 2 . Create the Cold Water System | 323 . 10 In the left pane. in the right pane. and click Duplicate. and press Enter. enter Cold Water for the new name. 4 Right-click Standard 3. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and in the right pane. specify M_Pipe Straight Coupling: M_Standard Specify Mechanical Settings for the cold and hot water systems 7 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. select Domestic Cold Water from the System Type list. click Branch. 12 In the table. in the right pane.

click the floor drain. and click to specify the end the segment. The Domestic Cold Water folder is added in the system browser and all of the fixtures have been added to the Domestic Cold Water 1 system. verify that the slope is specified as 0.17 Draw a left-to-right pick box around all of the plumbing fixtures in the men’s room. 20 On the Options Bar. 26 On the Options Bar. the Options Bar will not have active tools for creating a system. and click to end the run as shown. click Options. 31 In the Select Connector dialog. then select Plumbing Fixtures. 18 In the Filter dialog. 19 While pressing Shift. and on the Options Bar click (Filter). and on the Options Bar. 23 On the Options Bar. click Check None. and click the cold water pipe behind the sinks. click (Create Domestic Cold Water System). specify 750 for Offset. and as long as there is a fixture without a common connector type. 28 Move the preview up to the cold water connector on the sink. and click OK.00 for Slope Angle. The floor drain has neither a hot or cold water connector. 27 Drag the preview to the right until the snap for the cold water connector for the rightmost sink displays. and press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the connector. 22 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. select Pipe Types : Cold Water. and in the Type Selector. 29 Click Modify. 30 Select the middle sink in the view. and click OK. click to specify the starting point for the pipe. 324 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . click Pipe. click (Connect Into). select the domestic cold water connector. 25 Move the cursor over the cold water connector on the leftmost sink. click a point between the sink and the wall to specify the endpoint for the pipe. 24 In the Layout Options dialog. Create piping for the cold water system 21 Zoom in on the area below the sinks.

and click to specify an endpoint for the pipe. and at a point near the vent that rises between the toilets and urinals. 33 Move the cursor over the cold water pipe at a point between the 2 rightmost sinks. 35 On the Options Bar. and verify that the cold water pipe is not obstructed by the vertical vent. 41 Drag the preview to the left. click Pipe. 32 On the Plumbing tab. 34 Click to specify the starting point for the pipe as shown. 40 Move the cursor over a point on the cold water pipe just above the wall. Create the Cold Water System | 325 . 39 On the Plumbing tab. 36 Click Modify. click to specify the end of the pipe. specify 600 for Offset. drag the preview to the center of the wall behind the sinks. (If necessary.) 38 Zoom in on the area between the toilets. click Pipe.A segment of pipe is added connecting the sink to the cold water system. drag the preview up and into the mechanical room above the men’s room. and press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the existing pipe. and use the keyboard left arrow to move the pipe to the left. select the cold water pipe. 37 Zoom in on the area above the toilets. and click Apply. 42 On the Options Bar. and click to end that segment. specify 2600 for Offset. click the snap on the cold water pipe.

select the rightmost toilet. 46 On the Options Bar click (Connect Into). expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ 3D Views. and click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northeast. 47 Select the elbow behind the toilet. Piping is automatically created between the vertical pipe and the toilet cold water connector. and click the + control to change it to a tee. 45 Zoom in on the area behind the toilets.43 Click Modify.Plumbing. click Pipe. 48 On the Plumbing tab. double-click 3D. 326 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . and then click the vertical cold water pipe. 44 In the Project Browser.

53 Select the rightmost urinal. 52 Select the leftmost toilet.49 Click the open connector on the tee. Piping is automatically created between the vertical pipe and the toilet cold water connector. and on the Options Bar click . and press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the fixture. and click to specify the endpoint behind the left toilet as shown. Create the Cold Water System | 327 . 51 Click Modify. 50 Drag the preview to the left. and click the horizontal cold water pipe Piping is automatically created between the vertical pipe and the toilet cold water connector. and click the vertical cold water pipe. . 54 Use the same method to connect the remaining urinals to the horizontal cold water pipe. and on the Options Bar click that you added to the tee.

feeding the toilets (including the tees. 57 On the Options Bar. and then select the horizontal segments as shown. 56 While pressing Shift. as shown.All of the cold water piping is in place. specify 50 for D (diameter). 328 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . click (Dynamic Modify View) or enter the keyboard shortcut. drag the cursor to spin the 3D Plumbing view to allow selecting the main cold water piping from the mechanical room. F8. Adjust cold water pipe sizes 55 On the toolbar. 58 Select the cold water branch piping from the main. The final steps in this exercise will adjust the size of several sections of the piping. but leaving the branch to the urinals as is).

specify 40 for D (diameter). 62 On the Options Bar. specify 20 for D (diameter). 64 You can save the open file if you wish. 65 Click File menu ➤ Close. 63 Highlight a segment of cold water pipe in the system and press Tab to check the connectivity of the system as described previously. 60 Spin the 3D Plumbing view as needed to see the piping behind the sinks. 61 Select the main and branch pipe segments as shown (including the tee behind the middle sink). a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. Create the Cold Water System | 329 .59 On the Options Bar.

and click to place the water heater as shown.NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. Create the hot water system 1 In the Project Browser. and on the Options Bar. 4 Draw a left-to-right pick box around the 3 sinks in the men’s room. create the hot water system. 9 Expand Metric ➤ Plumbing. and in the Type Selector. double-click 2 . click the title bar for the browser. 6 On the Options Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click (Filter). 12 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. click the Training Files icon. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and zoom in on the sinks. and click OK. select Plumbing Fixtures. and add piping to connect the sinks in the men’s room to the system. 2 Press F9 to open the System Browser. 3 Right-click a table heading in the System Browser. Open Metric ➤ Plumbing ➤ m Creating Hot Water Piping. to the left of the main cold water pipe. 13 Move the water heater preview into the mechanical room. 10 Double-click M_Water Heater. 5 In the Filter dialog. 11 Zoom in on the mechanical room above the men’s room. press the Space Bar 3 times to orient the water heater with the electrical connections to the left. and click View ➤ Piping. Add a water heater to the hot and cold water systems 7 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 330 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . The Domestic Hot Water folder is added in the system browser and all of the fixtures have been added to the Domestic Hot Water 1 system.rfa. click Plumbing Fixture. click (Create Domestic Hot Water System). select M_Water Heater : 40Gallon. click Check None. click the Training Files icon. Create the Hot Water System In this exercise you add a water heater. and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area.Plumbing.rvt. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. 8 In the left pane of the Open dialog. “Create the Hot Water System” on page 330. 66 Proceed to the next exercise.

click Add to System. right-click Domestic Hot Water 1. 22 Select the open end of the main cold water pipe. 19 On the Edit System tab. and click Select. and click Select. select Connector 2 : Domestic Cold Water : Round : 20. and click the main cold water pipe. A segment of pipe is added connecting the water heater to the cold water system. click (Edit System). 17 In the System Browser. The Edit System tab is activated on the Design Bar. click Add to System. right-click Domestic Cold Water 1. click Draw Pipe. expand Domestic Hot Water. and click Finish System. select the water heater in the view. expand Domestic Cold Water. Create the Hot Water System | 331 . click (Edit System). and click Finish System. 15 On the Options Bar. and on the Options Bar.14 In the System Browser. 16 On the Edit System tab. 21 In the Select Connector dialog. right-click the connector. click (Connect Into). 20 Select the water heater in the view. select the water heater in the view. 18 On the Options Bar. and add 2 segments extending the main cold water piping into the chase.

25 On the Options Bar. and in the Type Selector. 30 On the Options Bar. 24 Move the cursor over the water heater. 27 Click Modify. specify 800 for Offset. click to specify the starting point for the pipe. 332 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . click Pipe. 29 Move the cursor over the hot water connector on the leftmost sink. select Pipe Types : Hot Water. click Pipe. select Pipe Types : Hot Water. 28 On the Plumbing tab. and press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the connector.23 On the Plumbing tab. and in the Type Selector. specify 2550 for Offset. and then drag the pipe preview down to a point to the right and just above the middle sink. click when the hot water connector displays. and press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the connector. 26 Specify an end point for the pipe between the water heater and the cold water pipe to the right.

and click the hot In this case. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ 3D Views. click Apply.31 Click a point between the cold water piping and the wall to specify the endpoint for the pipe.Plumbing. 32 Move the preview up to the hot water connector on the sink and click to end the run as shown. and press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the connector. (Connect Into). and zoom in on the area behind the sinks. Create the Hot Water System | 333 . drag the preview to the right until the snap below the hot water connector for the rightmost sink displays. and on the Options Bar. and click to end that segment. 37 Drag the preview down into the center of the wall below the sinks. 39 Click Modify. and click to specify the end of the segment. specify 800 for Offset. 35 Select the hot water piping from the water heater. 33 Click Modify. 36 Right-click the open connector. the Select Connector dialog was not displayed because the only possible connection was to the hot water system. click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southeast. 38 On the Options Bar. 34 Select the middle sink in the view. 40 In the Project Browser. double-click 3D. click water pipe below the sinks. click Draw Pipe.

drag the preview to the piping connecting the hot water connectors for the sinks. 42 While maintaining a 90 degree angle. press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the connector. 45 Highlight a fixture in the view. 334 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . 46 You can save the open file if you wish. press Tab 3 times to check connectivity as described previously. This concludes the tutorial for plumbing systems. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset.41 On the Plumbing tab. click the connector at the open end of the vertical hot water pipe. double-click 2 .Plumbing. 47 Click File menu ➤ Close. click Pipe. 44 In the Project Browser. and click. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. 43 Click Modify.

NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. At the end of this tutorial. you learn the best practices for designing systems with Revit MEP. and specific techniques for designing fire protection systems. By following the recommended workflow. The datasets that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Metric directory. 335 .Fire Protection Systems 5 In this tutorial. However. This dataset includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. go to http://www. methodology. you can choose to save your work.autodesk. you design a wet and dry fire protection system for an office building. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided dataset. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design a fire protection system using Revit MEP 2008. After finishing each exercise. you will understand the process. As you create the systems. you follow a series of exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Revit MEP 2008. If the tutorial datasets are not present. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. You can search this directory to verify that the datasets have been downloaded.

and click OK. Expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Ceiling Plans. TIP Working in different views for each discipline allows you to view only the system components for that discipline and makes system design more efficient. you begin work on the project that contains both the wet and dry fire protection systems. verify that Mechanical is selected. right-click the view named 2 . and click View Properties. You create views and pipe types. insert fittings. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. 2 In the Project Browser. you can then select that discipline or sub-discipline from the list.Ceiling Mech view.Fire Prot view active. 7 Using the method that you just learned. 4 With the 2 .Designing Fire Protection Systems Designing fire protection systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward process.Ceiling Fire Prot. do the following: ■ ■ Create a level 1 floor plan view based on 1-Mech view.Fire Prot.Mech. manually modify the pipes and fittings. you will create both wet and dry fire protection systems for the second floor of an office building. Then.Mech is created and becomes the active view. under Graphics. right-click Copy of 2 . 3 Enter 2 . Next. and size and tag the pipes. you create views and pipe types. you create a system to logically connect the sprinklers. and finally. You begin each fire protection system design by placing sprinklers in the rooms.Fire Prot for Name. do the following: ■ ■ For Discipline. click the Training Files icon. In this lesson. This view is based on the 2 Mech view properties. Create new views 1 In the Project Browser. You will also draw the supply pipe for the fire protection systems. right-click in the drawing area. ■ 336 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . A new view called Copy of 2 . Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Open the m Starting the Fire Protection Project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you modify the view properties. TIP After you enter a discipline or sub-discipline for the first time. naming it 1 . This new sub-discipline creates a Fire Protection view category in the Project Browser. create schedules. naming it 2 .Mech. Starting the Fire Protection Project In this exercise. 5 In the Element Properties dialog.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Fire Protection ➤ folder. you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. enter Fire Protection. Notice that the 2 Fire Prot view is now relocated under Fire Protection. Expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ 3D Views. and create a new ceiling plan view based on the 2 . 6 Click OK. and create a new 3D view based on the 3D HVAC view. and click Rename. During the fire protection design process. For Sub-Discipline. naming it 3D Fire Prot. and then you configure conversion settings that you will use when you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers.

select Carbon Steel. select Main. select Fire Protection Wet. 23 Under System Type. Configure pipe conversion settings 20 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. for Material. click Duplicate. Next. click Modify. NOTE You can also create. 15 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. Notice that the new dry pipe type inherits the same type properties from the wet pipe type. 22 For System Type. click Pipe. and click OK. 16 With the Type Properties dialog open. double-click the HVAC listing to collapse it because you will no longer use those views in this lesson. Create new pipe types 9 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. click (Properties). 12 In the Element Properties dialog. including the new material property. or verify pipe types from the Project Browser. The new pipe type is created based on the Standard pipe type. under Mechanical. 14 For Name. click Duplicate. 11 On the Options Bar. 18 In the Type Selector. click Edit/New. right-click a pipe type and use the context menu. click Mechanical Settings. 8 In the Project Browser. enter Fire Protection Wet. verify that Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet and Pipe Types : Fire Protection Dry are listed. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. NOTE If the Fire Protection tab is not available on the Design Bar. 17 Click OK twice to create the new wet and dry pipe types. Starting the Fire Protection Project | 337 . 13 In the Type Properties dialog. Next. You can also press Esc. you create 2 new pipe types for the wet and dry systems. You can also click Settings menu ➤ Mechanical Settings.Remember to specify Fire Protection for sub-discipline so that all views will be listed under Fire Protection in the Project Browser. The conversion settings for the Fire Protection Wet system type display. modify. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. In the Project Browser. and enter Fire Protection Dry for the new pipe type name. the command in progress terminates. you modify the pipe type properties. Next. 10 In the Type Selector. you need to configure the pipe conversion settings. 19 On the Design Bar. do the following: ■ For Pipe Type. Next. verify that Pipe Types : Standard is selected. you create a pipe type based on the new pipe type that you created. and click Fire Protection. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. 21 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. right-click the Design Bar. TIP When you click Modify.

select Fire Protection Wet. You now specify the conversion settings for the pipe branches. the pipe main will be offset from level 2. 26 Under System Type. refer to Help. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 2750 mm above the referenced level for the views. For Offset. Notice that the cursor changes to a magnifying glass indicating that the Zoom tool is active. verify that 2750 is selected. select Branch. double-click the 1 . TIP If a view does not contain room tags. This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. This offset elevation places the pipe branches at 2750 mm above the referenced level for the views. do the following: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet.■ For Offset. 338 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . Configuring the Conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. IMPORTANT The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. So. and sketch a zoom region around Stairwell 30 (located in the lower-right corner of the building). verify that 2750 is specified. However. 29 Enter ZR. 27 Click OK. 25 For System Type. For more information. You can configure the Conversion settings at the beginning or during your project. structural beams. NOTE Conversion settings are mechanical settings that are used when you convert the pipe layout path to physical piping.Fire Prot floor plan view to make it active. You can also configure these settings by clicking Settings on the Options Bar when the Layout Path tool is open. 24 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. Draw the supply pipe 28 In the Project Browser. you begin the design by drawing the supply pipe for the fire protection systems. Level 2 is the referenced level for the views that you will be designing in. The room name and number display in a tooltip and on the Status Bar (located at the lower left under the Design Bar). Next. duct. you can easily identify a room by placing the cursor over the room component (indicated by 2 diagonal intersecting lines). you should configure or verify the Conversion settings before you convert a layout path. or architecture.

do the following: ■ ■ For D. click (Thin Lines) to display the geometry in thin lines. 32 In the Type Selector. and click Apply to specify the pipe end point. 31 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. click Pipe. For Offset. Thin Lines allows you to view the true thickness of lines relative to the zoom of the view.30 On the View toolbar. Starting the Fire Protection Project | 339 . enter 0. NOTE You can press Tab after specifying the Offset to confirm the value. You will need to reactivate it. This line thickness is used for plotting purposes giving the effect of line weights. 35 On the Options Bar. and click in the approximate area to specify the pipe start point. if you reopen Revit MEP. NOTE The Thin Lines display is not saved during your design session. The new pipe displays. enter 6400. select 150 mm. for Offset. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. 34 Place the cursor in the lower-left corner of the stairwell. 33 On the Options Bar.

and Shading w/ Edges for Model Graphics Style. you verify the pipe geometry in the 3D view. you can enter 2600 and press Tab for 2600 mm. you create a schedule to identify the required number of sprinklers per room. The conversion settings for both wet and dry fire protection systems were also configured. You then created 2 new pipe types for the wet and dry fire protection systems and modified their type properties. you will learn various methods to quickly and precisely place sprinklers into the ceiling plan. it is highly recommended that you always begin each exercise by opening the dataset provided. However. use the Zoom. Notice that the supply pipe extends from the floor in level 1 into level 2. 340 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . 39 In the Dynamic View dialog. and click Save. you do not need to type measurement symbols. Then. enter Starting the Fire Protection Project Training for File name. This dataset includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. navigate to the folder of your choice. For example. 36 In the Project Browser. First. 38 On the View toolbar. IMPORTANT After finishing each exercise. you place the wet system sprinklers and create a schedule.TIP When entering a value. and Spin buttons to verify that the supply pipe geometry is as you expected. double-click the 3D Fire Prot view. 37 On the View Control Bar (located at the lower-left of the drawing area). 40 If you want to save your work. Creating Schedules and Placing Sprinklers In this exercise. The pipe geometry displays in 2 line and shaded allowing you to better see it. click File menu ➤ Save. just enter the value. In the next exercise. As you place the sprinklers. you drew the supply pipe for fire protection systems. click (Dynamically Modify View). 41 In the Save As dialog. you place the sprinklers. using this information. you created new views and modified view properties. Scroll. and press Tab. Next. Finally. you place the fire protection wet system sprinklers in the ceilings of the rooms. select Fine for Detail Level. you can choose to save your work. In this exercise.

click Schedule/Quantities. Scheduled fields display as columns in the schedule. enter Min. 8 In the Calculated Value dialog. verify that Number is selected. select Rooms. Notice that the schedule name and the phase are automatically added. Open the m Placing Sprinklers. For Formula. Click OK. 6 Select a field. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. and click Remove. The fire protection code requires one sprinkler for every 12. select Area. Create a calculated value parameter 7 Click Calculated Value. Verify that Formula is selected. select it.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Fire Protection ➤ folder. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Sprinklers. 1 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar.Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click the Training Files icon. do the following: ■ Under Category. ■ ■ Verify that Schedule building components is selected. Define columns 3 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. select the following fields from the Available fields list: ■ ■ ■ Level Name Number 5 Click Add to add the fields to the Scheduled fields list. 4 While pressing Ctrl. Creating Schedules and Placing Sprinklers | 341 . To remove a field. and click Add. you create a calculated value parameter to indicate the minimum number of sprinklers required per room. Define a schedule type 2 In the New Schedule dialog. under Available fields. verify that Common is selected. enter Area/12. For Type. and use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to arrange the Scheduled fields list as follows: ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Name Level Area Next.1 square meters.1. For Discipline. This information is based on the project specification and the fire protection codes. This adds the Area field to the list of scheduled fields to include in the schedule.

For And. You can change editable entries in the schedule to modify your system. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Filter by. 12 On the Formatting tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. do the following: ■ ■ Under Fields. select Fixed. Notice that only the data for the level 2 rooms displays. Click OK twice. select 2 decimal places. You can refer to the minimum number of sprinklers per room data as you place sprinklers in order to satisfy the design and code requirements. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. Sprinklers calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the bottom of the list). For Field formatting. This calculated value parameter allows you to immediately determine which rooms meet the sprinkler design and code requirements. you will want to round all decimals up to the next whole number. you place the wet system sprinklers in the level 2 rooms. Each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project as if you had used the Element Properties dialog. and sketch a zoom region around Office 6 (located in the upper-left corner of the building). Place a sprinkler 14 In the Project Browser. click Field Format. select Number. 15 Enter ZR. Although you rounded the data to one decimal place. This is because you are modifying the digital database of building information. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Sort by.Ceiling Fire Prot to make it the active view. select Level. The Min. Verify that equals is selected. sorted according to room number. Sprinklers. For Then by. 9 Click OK. Next. Under Level. 11 On the Sorting/Grouping tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. and double-click 2. select Min. For Units. including spaces. This digital database information source is the central concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). Organize the data 10 On the Filter tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. verify that (none) is selected. 13 In the Format dialog. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ Ceiling Plans. Verify that Grand totals is cleared and Itemize every instance is selected. select Level 2. IMPORTANT A schedule in Revit MEP is not only a construction document but also a design tool. 342 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . A new view called Room Schedule opens and is located under Schedules/Quantities in the Project Browser. verify that (none) is selected. For Rounding.NOTE You must enter the formula verbatim. Verify that Ascending is selected.

click Name. This specifies Level 2 as the work plane for the reference lines. Creating Schedules and Placing Sprinklers | 343 . verify that Lines is selected. click to specify the line end point. and after the intersection snap displays. 21 Draw the line diagonally to the opposite grid intersection. and specify Level : Level 2. verify that Level : Level 2 is selected. under Specify a new Work Plane. ■ Verify that (Draw) and (Line) are selected. Verify that Chain and Radius are cleared. 16 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. you draw 2 reference lines to help you accurately place the sprinklers in the center of the ceiling tiles. 19 On the Options Bar. 18 Click OK. do the following: ■ ■ ■ In the Type Selector. 20 Place the cursor at the ceiling grid intersection as shown. 17 In the Work Plane dialog. For Plane. click Lines. and after the intersection snap displays.Next. click to specify the line start point.

The line is created. for Underlay. right-click in the drawing area. a warning displays indicating that the line is not visible in the ceiling plan view. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. 24 Click OK. 344 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . However. and click View Properties. 25 Using the same method. Notice that the Lines tool remains active. under Graphics. draw a second diagonal line that intersects the first at the center of the ceiling tile. You need to specify an underlay for this view to display the reference lines. 22 With the Lines tool active. select Level 2. The line displays.

click (Place on Face) to place the sprinkler on the ceiling tile face. and after the mid point snap displays. click Sprinkler.26 Press ESC twice to deactivate the Line tool. place the cursor over the intersection of the 2 lines. 29 In the Type Selector. 27 Zoom in on the lines to verify them. 28 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. you place a sprinkler. Creating Schedules and Placing Sprinklers | 345 . 31 With the view zoomed. click to place the sprinkler. Next. 30 On the Options Bar. select M_Sprinkler-Pendent-Plane_Hosted : 15mm Pendent.

and click View Properties. Next. select None. you delete the reference lines. The sprinkler is centered in the ceiling tile. and click OK. This removes the Level 2 underlay from the ceiling plan view. 346 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . Grid snapping ensures accurate placement in the ceiling tiles. The selected sprinkler displays in red. 34 Right-click in the drawing area. Next. you continue placing sprinklers. snap to the ceiling grid intersections rather than entering placement dimensions. 35 In the Element Properties dialog. 33 While pressing CTRL. The underlay was used only to display the reference lines. 37 On the Edit toolbar.32 Click Modify on the Design Bar. click both reference lines. you delete the reference lines. Continue placing sprinklers 36 In the drawing area. click (Copy). for Underlay. select the sprinkler that you placed. and then press Delete. NOTE When placing sprinklers. You use this sprinkler to place the other sprinklers. under Graphics. Next.

Notice that the copy selection border follows the cursor. click to specify the copy end point. Creating Schedules and Placing Sprinklers | 347 . and after the intersection snap displays. and listening dimensions display to aid in placement. and after the intersection snap displays. click to specify the copy start point. A copy of the sprinkler is immediately placed after you specify the end point. 38 On the Options Bar. Also the cursor changes indicating that the Copy tool is open. TIP Using the Copy tool is a 2-click process. 40 Select the upper-left corner of the ceiling grid. verify that Constrain and Multiple are cleared. First specify the start point on the element that you want to copy and then specify the end point (or destination). 41 Move the cursor diagonally to the lower-right as shown. You can also enter CO to activate the Copy tool.Notice that a border displays to indicate the copy selection. 39 Zoom out so that the entire Office 6 ceiling grid is visible. and that Copy is selected.

TIP If you have difficulty displaying an intersection snap because of other snaps interfering. 348 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . 46 On the Options Bar. click (Copy). place the cursor over the upper-left ceiling grid intersection immediately above the sprinkler that you selected. verify that Copy is selected. Copy and array sprinklers 42 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the window. and select Multiple. This allows you to place multiple copies of an object without reactivating the Copy tool after each placement. 43 Enter ZR. Next. 47 In Office 6. You can also deactivate snaps in the Snaps dialog (click Settings menu ➤ Snaps). 45 On the Edit toolbar. you copy and array sprinklers in Office 7. Note that snap overrides deactivate after you make a selection. and after the intersection snap displays. and sketch a zoom region around Office 7 (located immediately below Office 6). 44 Select the lower-right sprinkler in Office 6. you can enter SI to override all other snaps and display only intersection snaps. click to specify the copy start point.

specify the copy end point for the first sprinkler. and after the intersection snap displays.48 Move the cursor down and to the right into Office 7. Creating Schedules and Placing Sprinklers | 349 .

49 Move the cursor directly down. 350 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . and after the intersection snap displays. specify the copy end point for the second sprinkler.

You first specify an array start point. 50 On the Design Bar. Verify that Constrain is cleared. Furthermore. Next. click Modify. 53 On the Options Bar. Rather than copy and place the rest of the sprinklers. For Move To. NOTE Similar to the Move or Copy tool. select the 2 sprinklers that you placed in Office 7. do the following: Verify that (Linear) is selected for a linear array.The sprinklers are placed. because all of the sprinklers in Office 7 are equally spaced. creating an array is a 2-step process. then you move the cursor to the second or last location (if you have more than 2 arrays). ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group And Associate. Verify that 2 is specified for Number (of arrays). Creating Schedules and Placing Sprinklers | 351 . select Last. it is an ideal situation to use an array. 51 While pressing CTRL. click (Array). TIP You can also enter AR to activate the Array tool. A border displays around the 2 sprinklers. you can use the Array tool to finish the job. 52 On the Edit toolbar. you array the other Office 7 sprinklers. to specify array end point.

click to specify the array start point. 55 Move the cursor to the left along the same horizontal ceiling grid. click to specify the array end point as shown. and after the intersection snap displays.54 Move the cursor over the upper-left ceiling grid intersection directly above the upper Office 7 sprinkler. and after the intersection snap displays. 352 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . Notice that an outline follows the cursor to aid in placement.

The Office 7 sprinklers are placed. Creating Schedules and Placing Sprinklers | 353 . 56 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the window. Next. you place sprinklers in Office 8.

click (Filter Selection) to filter the selected elements. and draw a pick box around Office 6. drag the cursor to the lower-right. Notice that all elements in the 2 .Ceiling Fire Prot view range are selected. and click OK. 59 In the Filter dialog.57 Starting outside the upper-left corner of the building. click Check None. select Sprinklers. 354 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . 58 On the Options Bar.

clear Multiple. 60 On the Edit toolbar. adjust the view so that you can see both Office 6 and Office 8. 62 Using the mouse scroll wheel. 63 Place the cursor in the center of the selection border. by cross-picking (drag right to left). Creating Schedules and Placing Sprinklers | 355 . Notice that a border around the selected sprinklers displays indicating the copy selection. IMPORTANT When selecting components either by drawing a pick box (drag left to right). 61 On the Options Bar. and after the mid point snap displays. you can clear it by filtering. click to specify the copy start point. If the selection contains an unwanted component. click (Copy). you are selecting all components that are visible in the active view (within the view range). or by pressing SHIFT and selecting the component. or by selecting individual components.The Office 6 sprinklers are selected.

NOTE If you have difficulty locating the mid point snap.64 Move the cursor directly down along the same vertical ceiling grid and into the center of Office 8. click to specify the copy end point. and after the mid point snap displays. 356 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . enter SM to override all other snaps and display only mid point snaps.

66 Select the lower-right Office 8 sprinkler. click (Copy). Remember to watch for the intersection snap. click to specify the copy end point at the ceiling grid intersection. you place sprinklers in the large common space. 67 On the Edit toolbar. 70 Move the cursor to the right into Open 2 as shown. Next. Open 2. You copy this sprinkler to Open 2 and use it to create a sprinkler array. and after the intersection snap displays. 69 Specify the copy start point at the upper-left ceiling grid intersection directly above the sprinkler. Open 2. verify that Multiple is cleared. Creating Schedules and Placing Sprinklers | 357 . Create multiple sprinkler arrays 65 Zoom to show Office 8 and the part of the adjacent common area. 68 On the Options Bar.You have now placed the sprinklers for the 3 offices.

73 On the Options Bar. For Move To. 74 Specify the ceiling grid intersection to the upper-right of the sprinkler as the array start point. 72 On the Edit toolbar. For Number. Verify that Group And Associate is cleared. select 2nd. but creating an array is quicker. 358 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . 71 Select the sprinkler that you copied. Verify that Constrain is cleared. You could copy sprinklers. Next. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that (Linear) is selected for a linear array. enter 6 for the number of arrays.The Office 8 sprinkler is copied to Open 2. click (Array). you array this sprinkler to place multiple sprinklers in the lower section of Open 2.

and after the intersection snap displays. The array is created. undo the step and try again. click to specify the array end point as shown. 76 While pressing CTRL. If you make a mistake placing the array. Creating Schedules and Placing Sprinklers | 359 . Next.75 Move the cursor along the same horizontal ceiling grid to the right. you create multiple arrays based on this array. select all Open 2 sprinklers except for the far left sprinkler. refer to Help. This is because 2nd was selected for Move To on the Options Bar. Zoom out to display the array. For more information about arrays. This indicated that the specified end point would be the placement location for the second array. IMPORTANT When specifying array start and end points make certain that the array is placed accurately. Any misplacement has a multiplier effect as the array propagates. Notice that 4 arrays were created after the end point.

and after the intersection snap displays. Verify that Constrain is cleared. click to specify end point for the second array. select the object to remove while pressing SHIFT. For Move To. For Number. 79 Specify the array start point at the ceiling grid intersection directly to the upper-left of the left sprinkler that is within the array selection. click (Array). 360 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . enter 4 for number of arrays. verify that 2nd is selected. 77 On the Edit toolbar. do the following: Verify that (Linear) is selected for a linear array.If you need to remove an object from a selection. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Group And Associate is cleared. 78 On the Options Bar. 80 Move the cursor directly down along the same vertical ceiling grid.

84 Open the M_Sprinkler-Upright-Non_Hosted. and so on) in the RFA (Revit Family) file. and then to edit the family in the Family Editor. you will use non-hosted sprinklers. Creating Schedules and Placing Sprinklers | 361 . To modify a family type. and an error message displays informing you that 3 sprinklers do not lie on the host face (ceiling tiles). Families are loaded and saved in the current project (dataset). first. Sprinkler placement for the lower section of Open 2 is complete Next. Notice that 3 sprinklers are located outside of the building. 81 In the Revit MEP 2008 dialog. You need to remove these sprinklers to resolve the errors. IMPORTANT A family contains one or more family types (different sizes. Load a new sprinkler family 82 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. click the Training Files icon. you place sprinklers in the Mechanical/Electrical room. 83 In the left pane of the Open dialog. However. click Delete Element(s) to delete the 3 sprinklers. The sprinkler family loads into the project. Because this room does not have a ceiling. select an instance of the family type in the drawing area.The arrays are created. These family types can be selected in the Type Selector or under Families in the Project Browser. you need to load them in the project. click Edit Family on the Options Bar.rfa file located in the Metric ➤ Fire Protection folder.

You can also right-click. 91 In the Project Browser. Notice that the Mechanical/Electrical room sprinklers do not display. This occurred because the sprinkler offset elevations are beyond the view range of the active ceiling view. and sketch a zoom region around the Mechanical/Electrical 24 room (located between the Men’s and the Ladies’ rooms). click Sprinkler. 92 Zoom in on the Mechanical/Electrical room. and notice that the sprinklers display in the Mechanical/Electrical room. double-click 2 . click (Properties). This specifies the elevation for the selected sprinklers. you change the sprinkler offsets. 87 In the Type Selector. 89 Move the cursor near the left wall. You address this warning after placing the other sprinkler. 88 In the Mechanical/Electrical 24 room. and double-click 2 . move the cursor toward the right wall. and while pressing CTRL. for Offset. 86 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. A warning may display informing you that the sprinkler is not visible in the ceiling plan view. 95 In the Project Browser. and notice that the temporary dimensions reference the right wall.Ceiling Fire Prot. 362 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . and click OK. and click to place a sprinkler 1200 mm from the center of the left wall. Next.Place non-hosted sprinklers 85 With the 2-Ceiling Fire Prot view active. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ Floor Plans. select both sprinklers. select M_Sprinkler-Upright-Non_Hosted : 15mm Upright. 94 In the Element Properties dialog. under Constraints.Fire Prot to make it the active view. enter 2900 mm. click to place a sprinkler 1200 mm from the center of the right wall. and using the listening dimensions for reference. You can also use the Mirror tool to place the left sprinkler by drawing a mirror axis at the mid point of the top and bottom walls of the Mechanical/Electrical room. and click Element Properties from the context menu. enter ZR. 93 On the Options Bar. 90 Press the Spacebar to change the listening dimension reference to the left wall.

97 If you want to save your work. In this exercise. and click Save. Use sprinkler type: M_Sprinkler-Pendent-Plane_Hosted : 15mm Pendent for all rooms. complete the level 2 sprinkler placement according to the following criteria and floor plan: ■ Refer to the room schedule to verify the required number of sprinklers for each room. you created a room schedule to calculate the minimum number of sprinklers required for each room based on the building specifications and the fire protection code. navigate to the folder of your choice. click File menu ➤ Save. ■ ■ NOTE When placing sprinklers. Grid snapping ensures accurate placement. snap to the ceiling grid intersections rather than entering placement dimensions. Remember to click to place the sprinkler on the ceiling tile face. 98 In the Save As dialog. Remember to always round decimals up to the next whole number. You placed 2 types of sprinklers using various placement Creating Schedules and Placing Sprinklers | 363 . enter Placing Sprinklers Training for File name.Complete the level 2 sprinkler placement 96 Using the placement methods that you have learned.

sprinklers. All system components that you place are initially located under a default system category in the Unassigned folder. click the Training Files icon. You create fire protection systems by placing sprinklers. Connect sprinklers with a system 5 Draw a pick box (from left to right) around the lower half of the building as shown. You assign a system component (such as mechanical equipment. 364 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . if all system components are assigned. piping is necessary to perform calculations that reference the physical pipe geometry such as sizing. In the next exercise. After creating the logical connection. IMPORTANT In the System Browser. This occurs because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed in order to perform calculations such as flow. click System Browser. Thus. This is the recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation in Revit MEP. the assigned sprinklers move from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder. Connecting the Sprinklers In this exercise. click in the drawing area to make it active. Unlike logical connections (systems). They remain in the Default systems category until you assign them to their proper system. So. Open the m Connecting Sprinklers. and use the System Browser to confirm your systems. and physically with piping. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. As you assign sprinklers to systems. A system is the logical connection between system components such as sprinklers. modify pipe branches. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you also convert and place pipe fittings.methods and loaded a new sprinkler family into the project. you then create pipes to physically connect the system components (piping is not considered a system). a Default system category would not contain any system components. after you placed the sprinklers. and then creating the logical connection between these system components. and double-click 2 . 4 Expand the Unassigned folder. and so on) to a system either by creating a logical connection (or system) between the system components or by assigning a system component to an existing system. it would be considered empty. you create a system and piping to connect the sprinklers that you placed. During this exercise. Empty Default system categories do not display in the System Browser. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create your systems. and expand the Default Fire Protection Wet system to view the level 2 sprinklers that you placed in the building. In the left pane of the Open dialog. However. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including flow and pressure. Explore the System Browser 3 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. The System Browser is a powerful tool that allows you to validate and confirm systems. 2 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the window. If the System Browser does not respond. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ Floor Plans.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Fire Protection ➤ folder. physical connections (piping) are not required for systems designing. you connect the sprinklers both logically by creating a system.Fire Prot to make it the active view. Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Fire Protection Wet system category located in the Unassigned folder. 1 In the Project Browser. then press F9. TIP You can also press F9 (or click Window menu ➤ System Browser) to open or close the System Browser. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according to the system that you assigned to them.

You select only half of the sprinklers on level 2 because it makes connecting the sprinklers more manageable. 7 In the Filter box.Make certain to include the lower sprinklers in Office 8 and Office 28. 6 On the Options Bar.Ceiling Fire Prot view range are selected. select Sprinklers. click Check None. and click OK. click (Filter Selection) to filter the selected elements. Notice that all elements within the 2 . and provides more layout path solutions to choose from when creating pipes. Connecting the Sprinklers | 365 .

click (Create Fire Protection Wet System) to create a fire protection wet system. All sprinklers in the system are listed under the system connecting them. The wet system that logically connects the sprinklers displays in red. and assign the selected sprinklers to it.All sprinklers in the lower half of the building are selected and display in red. 8 On the Options Bar. Notice that after you click . After you assign the remaining sprinklers. IMPORTANT The new system named Fire Protection Wet 1 is now listed in the System Browser under Fire Protection Wet in the Piping folder. the default system category will not contain any sprinklers. Notice that system tools display on the Options Bar. you use the System Browser to confirm and validate the system. Now that the sprinklers are logically connected. the system is immediately created and listed in the System Browser. Note that this display indicates that the new system is selected. Notice that the Default Fire Protection Wet system category no longer contains these sprinklers because you have assigned them to a system. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. 366 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . and will be considered empty.

click Layout Path on the Options Bar. 11 Right-click Fire Protection Wet 1. The selected fire protection wet system highlights in red indicating the logical connection. and click Expand to view the Fire Protection Wet 1 system listing. You can now view the fire protection system hierarchy: the Fire Protection Wet 1 system logically connects the sprinklers. verify that Solutions is selected. do the following: ■ Verify that Network is selected for Solution Type. This listing represent the system that you just created. 10 Double-click the Fire Protection Wet 1 system listing to view the sprinklers. Connecting the Sprinklers | 367 . right-click Fire Protection Wet. Next. you must create a system for Revit MEP to perform calculations such as flow and pressure. press Tab. and click Select to select the system. you can a system component to access the Layout Path on the Options Bar. NOTE You do not need to select a system or have system components connected to a system to access the Layout Path tool. and select solution 2. Connect the sprinklers with piping 12 With the Fire Protection Wet 1 system selected. The Layout Path tools are provided on the Design Bar and Options Bar. You want the Network layout solution because it connects the sprinklers to a central main. place the cursor over a sprinkler. After placing a system component. The main will connect to the supply pipe in the stairwell. TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears. and select the system. IMPORTANT Although you can draw pipe to create the physical pipe connections. 13 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. expand Piping. and click Select. Remember that systems can be created before or after creating pipe is drawn. Click (Next Solution).Confirm and validate the system 9 In the System Browser. you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. 14 On the Options Bar. The layout path solution displays with the main in blue and the branch in green. You can also right-click the Fire Protection Wet 1 listing in the System Browser. ■ You can also view possible layout path solutions by pressing the left and right arrow keys.

20 Click OK.0 is specified. 17 Under System Type: Fire Protection Wet. you verify the pipe conversion settings that you configured earlier in this tutorial. select Branch. Modify the layout path 21 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 2750 mm above level 2. 16 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. do the following: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. IMPORTANT The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. or architecture. verify that 2750. This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. 18 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. you modify the layout path. structural beams. click Modify. 368 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . 19 Verify that the above pipe type and offset settings are the same for Branch. 23 Select the vertical layout path segment. 22 Zoom in on the vertical main. click Settings. verify that Main is selected. 15 On the Options Bar. You now modify the vertical main layout that will be the main pipe.Next. verify that Pipe Types: Fire Protection Wet is selected. A drag control displays. duct. You use pipe conversion settings to convert the layout path to physical piping. Next. For Offset.

24 Using the drag control. 25 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. drag the main to the left as shown. click Finish Layout. Connecting the Sprinklers | 369 .

Notice that all of the fittings required to connect the pipes to the system components are automatically inserted. IMPORTANT Errors may occur when you attempt to create pipe geometry during layout path conversion or pipe sizing. Either relocate the system components. under Fire Protection ➤ 3D Views. or that offset elevations are incorrect. select a different layout solution.The pipe run geometry (main and branches) is created. or manually modify the pipe. 27 Enter VG. Next. Modify the pipe runs 26 In the Project Browser. double-click 3D Fire Prot to make it the active view. You can delete pipes and pipe fittings. Notice that the pipes are not listed in the System Browser. This is because they constitute a physical rather than a logical connection. and the system remains. Always check pipe connectivity after modification. 370 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . You hide these elements to allow you to easily snap to the sprinklers and the pipe. you modify the pipe run to consolidate the branch lines and simplify the design. Notice that the cursor snaps to various building elements in the 3D view. and are not part of the system. The most common causes of these errors are that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. This pipe run physically connects the wet system sprinklers for the lower half of level 2.

29 Click OK. Ceilings. 30 Zoom in and place the cursor over the branch pipe that services the Office 8 sprinkler. and click to select them. and Windows. do the following: ■ ■ Select Show categories from all disciplines. and after it highlights. Walls. Lines. Roofs. The selected pipe and sprinkler display in red.28 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility Graphics Overrides dialog. Rooms. 31 With the pipe and sprinkler selected. Floors. Doors. clear Casework. Railings. enter ZR. press TAB to highlight the branch pipe and sprinkler. and draw a zoom region around the Office 8 sprinkler. The building elements are hidden. Under Visibility. Stairs. Connecting the Sprinklers | 371 .

33 Press Delete to delete the selected elements. Remember that although the physical (pipe) connection to the sprinkler has been deleted. select the sprinkler to remove it from the selection. and draw a zoom region around the Open 2 sprinkler (located to the lower-right of the Office 8 sprinkler. the logical (system) connection is still intact. 35 Enter ZR. The Office 8 sprinkler is shown circled). to zoom out the view to fit the window. 34 Enter ZF.32 While pressing SHIFT. 372 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems .

Fitting control locations indicate the orientation of the fitting connection. IMPORTANT Fitting conversion controls display as plus or minus signs that are located near a selected pipe fitting. Convert a fitting 36 Select the elbow fitting at the end of the branch above the sprinkler. You may need to zoom in closer to better see the fitting conversion controls. Connecting the Sprinklers | 373 .Next. 37 Click the plus sign on the right. These are fitting conversion controls which allow you to convert the elbow fitting to a tee fitting in either a vertical or horizontal orientation. These controls convert the fitting to the next possible fitting type for the piping context. you convert the elbow fitting at the end of the branch in order to connect the Office 8 sprinkler to it. Notice that 2 plus signs display.

A minus sign displays. 374 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . 38 Select the tee fitting. This fitting conversion control allows you to return to the previous fitting.The elbow converts to a tee with a vertical orientation.

39 Click the minus sign to convert the tee back to the elbow fitting. and click the left plus sign. a tooltip displays indicating the next possible fitting.TIP If you place the cursor over a fitting conversion control. 40 Select the elbow fitting. Connecting the Sprinklers | 375 .

you draw the pipe to connect the Office 8 sprinkler to the branch. 376 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . When drawing pipe.The elbow converts to a tee with a horizontal orientation. pipe fittings. NOTE You must place the cursor over the connector to connect to pipe. Connect the Office 8 sprinkler 41 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. use the end point snap. Notice that the pipe diameter is larger than the existing pipe. and after the end point snap displays. to quickly and accurately locate a connector. 43 Using the mouse scroll wheel. a tooltip appears confirming the connector. click Pipe. use the connector snap. or equipments. 44 Begin to draw the pipe diagonally to the upper-left pipe along the same axis as the existing pipe and toward the Office 8 sprinkler. If you pause briefly. Next. . When connecting pipe to some elements. . 42 Place the cursor over the open end of the tee fitting. such as pipe fittings and equipment in a 3D view. zoom out the view so that the tee fitting and the Office 8 sprinkler are visible. click to specify the pipe start point. if a connector snap does not display.

You should always verify the pipe type from the Type Selector on the Options Bar. enter 300 and press Enter to specify the length of the pipe segment. you pressed Spacebar before you began drawing pipe. Connecting the Sprinklers | 377 . verify that Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet is selected. Note that the Spacebar does not automatically specify the pipe type. 46 In the Type Selector. If a warning appears informing you that the line is too short. TIP When drawing pipe. and as the listening dimensions display. This automatically sets the pipe diameter or width and height. and the offset parameter to match those of the selected connector. press the Spacebar after you specify the start point and move the cursor to begin drawing pipe.45 Press the Spacebar to match the pipe diameter and offset values to those of the tee fitting. 47 Continue to draw the pipe.

press Tab 3 times. 49 Select the Office 8 sprinkler. and select the pipe segment that you just drew.The pipe segment is created. 50 On the Options Bar. click (Connect Into). 48 Click Modify on the Design Bar. The sprinkler connects into the pipe. and after the pipe segment highlights. Check connectivity and validate geometry 51 In the 3D view. you check the connectivity of the pipe branch to make certain everything is connected and validate the pipe geometry. Next. Notice that all pipe fittings are automatically added. place the cursor over the pipe branch that you modified. 378 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems .

The lower section of the pipe run displays in red. press TAB the required number of times. This disconnect will be located at the point where the highlighting stops. and after the objects highlight. the branch to which the pipe is connected highlights. check the connectivity in the 2 -Fire Prot floor plan view. and verify that the physical pipe geometry is as expected.The pipe branch including the sprinklers and the pipe fittings highlight. fittings. and equipment. Connecting the Sprinklers | 379 . Typically a disconnect results from not having sufficient room to make a connection. or you can use the Trim (Extend) tool. Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected pipes. The first time you press Tab. allowing you to better see the connections. you validate the piping geometry. 52 Using the same method. then you know that a disconnect exists. 53 In the 3D Fire Prot view. When pipes and fittings are connected. you can click to select them. IMPORTANT Understanding TAB behavior is very important when designing piping systems in Revit MEP. After the pipe run and sprinklers highlight. Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected pipe and pipe fittings up to the first piece of connected equipment. To use the TAB behavior for selecting highlighted objects. you can check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of pipe so that it highlights and then press Tab. indicating that they are physically connected. You can repair the connection by dragging the pipe segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect. If the entire network does not highlight. zoom in on the pipe and fittings. or you may need to convert a fitting and draw pipe. click to select them. Next.

The pipe branch and fittings are deleted. and click Delete. 58 Place the cursor over the selected pipe run. 56 On the Options Bar.Continue pipe branch modification 54 In the Project Browser. and after it highlights. 57 In the Filter dialog. under Fire Protection ➤ Floor Plans. right-click.Fire Prot to make it the active view. This clears the Office 28 sprinkler from the selection. click . and click OK. 380 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . 55 Zoom the view and draw a pick box (drag left to right) around the upper-right pipe branch (include fittings and sprinkler) that services Office 28. double-click 2 . clear Sprinklers.

and click OK.59 Place the cursor over the upper-left Office 29 sprinkler. 60 Click to select the branch. Both selected branches display in red. and after it highlights. select the highlighted pipe branch. 61 With the branch selected. including the pipe fittings and lower Office 29 sprinklers. 63 On the Options Bar. and after it highlights. Connecting the Sprinklers | 381 . click . press TAB twice to highlight the pipe branch. place the cursor over the lower-left Office 29 sprinkler. press TAB twice to highlight the pipe branch. including the pipe fittings and the upper 2 Office 29 sprinklers. 62 While pressing CTRL. 64 In the Filter dialog. clear Sprinklers.

This clears the Office 29 sprinklers from the selection. click . 68 In the Filter dialog. Next. 382 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . 66 Draw a pick box around the 2 upper-right sprinklers in Open 2. 67 On the Options Bar. 69 Press Delete to delete the pipes and pipe fittings. you draw pipe to connect a sprinkler. 65 Press Delete to delete the 2 pipe branches including the pipe fittings. you need to delete the pipes connected to the upper-right Open 2 sprinklers. Next. Notice that only the pipes and pipe fittings are selected. clear Sprinklers. and click OK.

71 Right-click the connector located on the right end of the pipe. click to connect to the sprinkler. All other pipe properties match those of the selected connector. and click Draw Pipe. Connecting the Sprinklers | 383 . and after the connector snap displays over the sprinkler.70 In Open 2. 75 Press ESC to exit the Draw tool. click to specify the first pipe segment end point. and draw the pipe to the right toward the upper-right Office 29 sprinkler. 73 Zoom the view. 72 In the Type Selector. and after the centerline snap displays. select the upper-right pipe branch to display the pipe segment connector. verify that Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet is selected in the Type Selector. 74 Draw the pipe down toward the sprinkler.

76 Select the lower Office 28 sprinkler (located above Office 29). The Office 28 and Office 29 sprinklers are connected to the branch. 78 Using the same method. click (Connect Into). and select the pipe segment that you just drew. The sprinkler connects into the pipe and all pipe fittings are automatically added. Next.The upper-right Office 29 sprinkler is connected. 79 Place the cursor over the horizontal pipe branch. you connect 2 more office sprinklers to the branch. 77 On the Options Bar. and press TAB twice. connect the upper-left Office 29 sprinkler. Next. you check connectivity. 384 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems .

Remember to delete the end pipe segment before drawing pipe. Next. including sprinklers and pipe fittings. However. Modify the pipe main 83 Place the cursor over the branch that services the lower Office 29 sprinklers. and then click to select the highlighted objects. connect the 2 lower Office 29 sprinklers to the pipe branch located on the left. Connecting the Sprinklers | 385 .The entire pipe branch highlights. you make additional pipe modifications. notice that the 2 sprinklers in Open 2 do not highlight. 82 Using the pipe branch modification methods that you learned. and after it highlights. press TAB twice. These sprinklers are not physically connected. You need to connect these sprinklers. 81 Check connectivity. 80 Use to connect each of the Open 2 sprinklers to the branch. The branch including the Open 2 and office sprinklers highlight indicating that they are physically connected. This indicates that the branch and office sprinklers are connected.

If you move the cursor. and sprinklers display in red. 86 Drag the lower pipe connector down over the end of the lower pipe segment. and after the connector snap displays. making them easier to view. 386 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . 85 Select the upper pipe segment to display the 2 pipe connectors. branch. This indicates 2 disconnects. Notice that the highlighting stops at 2 areas along the main pipe. These branches were deleted during branch consolidation. you can click to select all highlighted objects.The connected main. You need to resolve the disconnects. TIP After using TAB to check connectivity. 84 Enter ZR. The highlighted objects display in red. release the mouse button to connect the 2 pipe segments. These disconnects resulted from deleting the 2 tee fittings that connected the branches to the main. and draw a zoom region around both disconnects. the connection continues to display for easy reference.

use TAB to check connectivity after making any modifications to pipe. 90 Select the pipe segment below the disconnect as the extend end point. First. Trim/Extend is especially useful in modifying pipe and duct. Connecting the Sprinklers | 387 .TIP When dragging a pipe connector. 88 On the Options Bar. Instead of dragging the pipe connector. You can also enter TR to activate the Trim/Extend tool. then select the object as the trim/extend end point. 89 Select the pipe segment above the disconnect as the extend start point. you use the Trim tool to resolve the disconnect. Notice that the cursor changes indicating that the Trim/Extend tool is active. As always. click (Trim/Extend). NOTE Trim/Extend is a 2-click process. notice that cursor changes to a pencil indicating that the Draw tool is active. or in resolving disconnects. 87 Zoom in on the lower disconnect. select the object as the trim/extend start point.

388 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . 92 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the window. indicating that they are connected.The 2 pipe segments connect. The main and branches highlight. 91 Click Modify on the Design Bar. you tile 2 views and modify the lower end of the pipe run. 93 Check connectivity. Next.

Fire Prot to make it the active view. and draw a zoom region around the elbow fitting at the lower end of the main. including the sprinkler to the right. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ 3D views. TIP When you tile 2 views. 96 In the Project Browser. This closes all windows previously opened during the current design session. Next. you tile 2 views to work in them simultaneously.Work in 2 views simultaneously 94 In the 2 -Fire Prot view. Notice that all pipe fittings display in their symbolic representation when you are viewing pipes in coarse or medium (single line) Detail Level. enter ZR. the active view is the only open window. 98 Enter WT to tile both windows. 99 Adjust the view in both windows to view the elbow fitting and the left sprinkler as shown. and double-click 3D Fire Prot to make it the active view. click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. Note that if this option is unavailable. 97 Click Windows menu ➤ Floor Plan : 2 . You will work in the floor plan view and validate the geometry in the 3D view. 95 With the 2 . the active view is tiled to the left. Connecting the Sprinklers | 389 .Fire Prot view active.

all pipe fittings display in their symbolic form. 105 Move the cursor over the end of the open end of the tee fitting. select M_Pipe Endcap : M_Standard. 104 Zoom in on the tee. click to place the endcap.Fire Prot view. When snapping to fittings in single line Detail Level. and using the fitting conversion method that you learned earlier. convert the elbow to a tee with a vertical orientation. 103 In the Type Selector. This endcap will provide pipeline cleanout access. The pipe geometry displays in 2 line. especially when symbolic fittings are displayed. 101 On the View Control Bar located at the lower left of the drawing area. you place an endcap on the tee. it is important to remember that the fitting connectors are located in the actual location of the fitting and not in the end of the symbolic representation. 390 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . 100 In the 2 . click Pipe Fitting. This symbolic representation is exaggerated and is larger than the actual fitting size. 102 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. you can change the Model Graphics Style to Wireframe or turn off component visibility or filter objects in the Visibility Graphics dialog. First. and after the mid point snap displays. Changing the Detail Level to Fine (2 line) will display the fittings in their actual size. Remember to zoom the view to better see the fitting conversion controls. select Fine for Detail Level.NOTE When you are viewing pipes in single line display (coarse or medium Detail Level). If you experience slower viewing performance while using the higher detail settings. you change the view detail level to display pipes in 2 line. You should always zoom in on the fitting when working with a fitting. Next. select the elbow.

107 Place the cursor over the endcap. Connecting the Sprinklers | 391 . validate the endcap geometry.106 Click Modify on the Design Bar. press TAB once. 108 In the 3D Fire Prot view. and after it highlights. The endcap and tee fittings highlight indicating that they are connected.

use the View Control Bar to change the view detail level to Medium. So. 111 In the 3D Fire Prot view. this tee fitting endcap is connected to the tee connector. their connectors are located in their actual location. However. As stated earlier in this exercise. and pipe fittings display in red. draw a pick box around the sprinkler and the connecting pipe branch. you modify the sprinkler branch connection. all fittings and other elements are represented in their symbolic form. click . 392 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . 113 In the Filter dialog. The pipes and fittings display in single line. 110 Adjust the floor plan and 3D views to view the sprinkler that is located to the right of the tee and endcap. clear Sprinklers. Notice that the endcap displays as centered in the tee fitting. You can also select the sprinkler while pressing SHIFT to clear it from the selection. pipe.109 In the 2 . in single line display. Next. and click OK.Fire Prot view. 112 On the Options Bar. The sprinkler. 114 Press Delete to delete the pipes and pipe fittings.

The sprinkler connects into the pipe. and select the right pipe segment above the sprinkler. 117 In the 2 . release the mouse button to reconnect the pipe branch. You need to resolve the disconnect. zoom in and select the left pipe segment. and after the connector snap displays. 116 On the Options Bar. 118 Drag the right pipe segment connector to the right. click .115 Select the sprinkler.Fire Prot view. Connecting the Sprinklers | 393 . and all pipe fittings are automatically added.

You will check connectivity later in this exercise. and press Delete. Next. The dry fire protection system will service the server room. notice that the wet pipe segment is located over this room.Note that the end of the right pipe segment (and its connector) might be located in the symbolic fitting. Remove a pipe segment 119 In the 2 . However. you remove the pipe above Server Room 32. 120 Select the pipe segment that is above Server Room 32. zoom out and locate the pipe segment that is above Server Room 32 (located to the left of Conference Room 31). You can validate the geometry in the 3D view. You need to remove this pipe segment to follow good design practice. Watch for the end point snap as you drag the pipe segment. 394 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . You can also snap to the end point of the tee fitting to connect the pipe.Fire Prot view. You resolved the disconnect.

123 Zoom out. and draw a zoom region around the sprinkler that you recently modified. 121 Enter ZR. Connecting the Sprinklers | 395 . convert the tee to an elbow. Next. Remember to zoom the view to locate the fitting conversion control. 122 Using the conversion methods that you learned. you need to convert a sprinkler tee fitting to an elbow in order to close the pipe connection.You will reconnect the Conference Room 31 sprinklers when you later finish this pipe run. You will close the right end when you finish modifying the lower section of the wet system pipe run. and check connectivity. This closes the left pipe segment end.

finish consolidating the branches that service Conference Room 31 (located at the lower-right corner of the building) as shown. Next.Notice that the lower conference room sprinklers are not connected. Finish modifying the lower section of the pipe run 125 Using the methods that you learned. validate the pipe geometry. You connect these after you validate the pipe geometry. 124 In the 3D view. you connect the lower conference room sprinklers. 396 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems .

check connectivity. Notice that system tools display on the Options Bar. select a pipe segment. close the 3D Fire Prot view. For System Equipment. such as VAV boxes. For Number of Elements. radiators. 129 Click (Edit System) to edit the selected system. verify that None is specified. This allows you to modify the system (logical connection). and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D view. and number of elements in the system. You add the remaining sprinklers to the current wet system to logically connect them. IMPORTANT After system components (sprinklers. NOTE Do not click (Select Equipment for System). and pipe or duct is created. or a system component to display system tools on the Options Bar. You use this tool to add mechanical equipment that is located upstream in a system.Fire Prot view. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ For System Name.Remember to resolve disconnects. Next. system equipment. 130 On the Edit System tab of the Design Bar. air terminals. Notice that the Options Bar allows you to verify or modify the system name. and maximize the 2 . 131 On the Options Bar. Connect the upper section of the level 2 wet system 127 If the windows are tiled. verify that Fire Protection Wet 1 is specified. Select Multiple. you complete the level 2 wet fire protection system. and so on) are logically connected by a system. and AC units. and then you create piping to physically connect them. boilers. verify that 30 is specified. Connecting the Sprinklers | 397 . 128 In the 2 . click Add To System. 126 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the window. fitting. mechanical equipment. or sprinkler that is connected to the current wet system. you can select the pipe or duct. The Edit System tab appears on the Design Bar providing various system editing tools.Fire Prot view.

You are going to select multiple elements to include into the wet system. Do not worry about including sprinklers that are already connected. The selected sprinklers display in red. You cannot select them. The sprinklers in the upper half of the building are assigned to the Fire Protection Wet 1 and no longer display as an underlay. Notice that system components that are not connected to the Fire Protection Wet 1 system display as an underlay (they are grayed out). 133 Draw a pick box from upper-left to lower-right around all of the sprinklers that need to be connected. Notice that the cursor has changed to indicate that Add To System is active. You can confirm the sprinkler system assignment in the floor plan view or in the System Browser. 135 On the Edit System tab of the Design Bar. click Finish System. 134 On the Options Bar. Notice that the Options Bar now reports that there are 66 Number of Elements (sprinklers) in the system. 132 Place the cursor outside Office 6 in the upper-left corner of the building. click Finish. 398 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems .This information reports that there are 30 sprinklers currently connected to the wet system.

140 Right-click Fire Protection Wet 1. and click Select. right-click Fire Protection Wet. Next. and press TAB once to confirm the upper half of the system. Also notice that the Unassigned folder is not listed. and click Expand All. you confirm the system in the System Browser.Confirm the level 2 wet system 136 In the 2 _Fire Prot view. click System Browser. press TAB twice to confirm the entire system. 139 Under Systems. expand Piping. 138 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. place the cursor over a newly added sprinkler. 137 With the cursor over the sprinkler. Notice that all of the sprinklers have been assigned to the Fire Protection Wet 1 system. This is because you assigned all of the sprinklers that you had placed to a system. Connecting the Sprinklers | 399 . Notice that the upper section of the system connects to the lower section.

Create piping for upper section of the wet system 141 Click Modify on the Design Bar. 144 On the Options Bar. After placing system components. Click . 142 Click Layout Path on the Options Bar. select any system component to access Layout Path on the Options Bar. The Layout Path tool activates.The logical connection displays in red confirming the level 2 wet system. verify that Solutions is selected. TIP You do not need to select a system or have system elements (such as sprinklers) logically connected to a system to access the Layout Path tool. 143 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. The newly added sprinklers are logically connected. NOTE Remember that when you confirm systems. and select a newly added sprinkler. not piping which is the physical connection. you are confirming the logical connection between system elements. and select solution 5. Next. do the following: ■ Verify that Network is selected for Solution Type. ■ 400 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . you physically connect these sprinklers with piping.

146 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. do the following: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. verify that Main is selected. 148 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. as there is a vertical main and horizontal branches. Next. 149 Verify that the pipe type and offset settings are the same for Branch as for Main. select Branch. Connecting the Sprinklers | 401 . 151 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. click Finish Layout. verify that 2750.The layout path solution displays with the main in blue and the branch in green. you verify the pipe conversion settings that you use to convert the layout path to a physical pipe run. The selected solution is consistent with the design of the existing pipe run. verify that Pipe Types: Fire Protection Wet is selected. 150 Click OK. For Offset.0 is specified. Notice that the main connects to the open end of the cross fitting. 147 Under System Type: Fire Protection Wet. 145 On the Options Bar. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 2750 mm above level 2. click Settings. You now verify the conversion settings that you specified in an earlier exercise.

If a No auto-route solution found warning displays after you create the pipe run. modify the upper pipe run to consolidate the branches and simplify the piping design according to the following criteria and floor plan: ■ ■ Use Pipe Type : Fire Protection Wet. and place an endcap on the cross fitting at the top end of the main. Next. you complete the pipe run. this is because the pipe run (most likely the main) is disconnected. and validate the geometry. Use M_Pipe Endcap : M_Standard. Remember to resolve disconnects. 402 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . check connectivity. This pipe run physically connects the upper wet system sprinklers to the lower wet system sprinklers at the cross fitting.The fire protection pipe geometry (main and branches) is created. Complete the level 2 wet system pipe run 152 Using the methods that you learned on the lower pipe run. You will resolve these disconnects when you consolidate the branches.

click File menu ➤ Save. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ Floor Plans. You also converted pipe fittings and placed endcap fittings. and pipe geometry was confirmed in the 3D view. and then you create a system and piping to logically and physically connect the sprinklers. In this exercise. Open the m Creating the Dry System. Creating the Fire Protection Dry System | 403 . After creating the system. The pipes in this system do not contain water until a valve opens enabling water flow through the pipes to the sprinklers in order to extinguish the fire. navigate to the folder of your choice. you created piping to physically connect the sprinklers. You confirmed the system and the assigned sprinklers in the System Browser. click (Copy). 1 In the Project Browser. As with the wet system.You have completed the level 2 fire protection wet system. 4 On the Edit toolbar. 3 Select the lower sprinkler in Office 33. you created a system to logically connect the sprinklers. 154 In the Save As dialog. TIP You can also enter CO to activate the Copy tool. Creating the Fire Protection Dry System In this exercise. click the Training Files icon. Finally. you create a dry fire protection system for Server Room 32. and double-click 2 . and draw a zoom region around Server Room 32. you create the dry system by placing sprinklers. Connectivity was checked. enter Connecting the Sprinklers Training for File name. Notice that a border around the selected sprinklers displays indicating the copy selection. 153 If you want to save your work. you used various methods to modify pipe segments to bring the system design more in line with the specifications. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Place sprinklers 2 Enter ZR.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Fire Protection ➤ folder.Ceiling Fire Prot to make the view active. The dry system prevents any water discharge onto sensitive computer equipment. you create the dry fire protection system. In the next exercise. and click Save.

and after the intersection snap displays. click to specify the copy end point for the first sprinkler. Select Multiple to place multiple sprinkler copies in the ceiling. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Constrain is cleared. and after the ceiling grid intersection snap displays. 6 Move the cursor to the upper-left corner directly above the sprinkler.5 On the Options Bar. 404 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . and after the ceiling grid intersection snap displays. click to specify the copy start point. 8 Move the cursor diagonally to the upper-left. click to specify the copy end point for the second sprinkler. 7 Move the cursor to the right along the same horizontal ceiling grid and into the Server Room 32. Verify that Copy is selected.

Expand Unassigned to view the 2 dry sprinklers that you placed. TIP If you have difficulty displaying an intersection snap because of other snaps interfering. you change the sprinkler type. you create the dry system to logically connect the 2 sprinklers. The System Browser opens.9 Click Modify. Creating the Fire Protection Dry System | 405 . select M_Sprinkler-Dry_Pendent-Plane_Hosted : 15mm Dry Pendent. select both Server Room 32 sprinklers. 10 While pressing CTRL. Next. Create the dry system 12 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. select both sprinklers. you can enter SI to override all other snaps and display only intersection snaps. Next. Note that snap overrides deactivate after you make a selection. 14 In the drawing area. 11 In the Type Selector. click System Browser. while pressing CTRL. 13 Under Systems. The sprinklers are placed in the ceiling. You can also turn off snaps in the Snaps dialog (click Settings menu ➤ Snaps).

21 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar.0 is specified. 24 On the Options Bar. right-click. 22 In the Type Selector. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Dry. verify that 15mm is selected. In the System Browser. verify that 2750. you use the System Browser to confirm and validate the system. The dry system that logically connects the sprinklers displays in red. for Slope Angle. 23 On the Options Bar. click Pipe.15 On the Options Bar. 20 Zoom in on Server Room 32. and after the intersection snap displays. Notice that the Default Fire Protection Dry system category no longer displays. sprinkler size. Confirm and validate the system 16 In the System Browser. Next. Verify that Auto Connect is selected. 26 Place the cursor outside Office 33 and over the vertical main pipe that services the wet system. 18 Expand Fire Protection Dry 1. All sprinklers in the system are listed under the system connecting them. 406 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . double-click 2 . This creates a slight slope for the dry system pipe run. you can view system information including flow. and click OK. you create the pipe run to physically connect the sprinklers. and for each sprinkler. expand Piping ➤ Fire Protection Dry. and click Select The selected system displays in red. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For D: (diameter). and so on. Remember that this display indicates that the new system is selected. For Offset. and the Default Fire Protection Dry system category is considered empty. You have confirmed and validated the system. click Options. the dry system is immediately created and listed in the System Browser. click the sprinklers to it. (Create Fire Protection Dry System) to create the dry system and assign Notice that after you click . Each selected sprinkler displays in red. Next. 17 Right-click the Fire Protection Dry 1 system category. Create the dry system pipe run 19 In the Project Browser. 25 In the Layout Options dialog. click to specify the start point for the first pipe segment.Fire Prot to make it the active view. enter 0. This indicates that you have assigned all of the dry sprinklers to a system. and click Select.15. The sprinklers are logically connected. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. IMPORTANT The new system named Fire Protection Dry 1 is now listed in the System Browser under Fire Protection Dry in the Piping folder.

Creating the Fire Protection Dry System | 407 . you connect the upper sprinkler to the pipe. 30 On the Options Bar.27 Draw the pipe run to the right. 29 Select the unconnected Server Room 32 sprinkler. click . and connect to the lower sprinkler as shown. Next. Watch for the centerline and connector snaps. You can confirm this in the 3D Fire Prot view or by checking connectivity. and select the pipe segment above the sprinkler. Notice that the pipe passed over but did not connect to the upper Server Room 32 sprinkler. 28 Press ESC to exit the Draw tool.

38 On the Options Bar. expand 3D views. indicating that they are connected. 408 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems .The sprinkler connects into the pipe. and double-click 3D Fire Prot. Notice that the slope displays next to the slope control. the pipe is sloped toward the main for drainage purposes. click Options. you check connectivity and validate the pipe geometry. under Fire Protection. and select each pipe segment to verify the slope. 36 Select the vertical main pipe. Next. 37 On the Edit toolbar. Check connectivity and validate pipe geometry 32 In the Project Browser. 35 Zoom in on the pipe to validate that the pipe geometry is as expected. You can click the slope control to change the slope direction. you connect the fire protection system pipe run to the supply pipe. 33 Zoom in on Server Room 32. and press TAB 3 times. To follow good design practice. Next. click (Create Similar). and all pipe fittings are automatically added. 31 Zoom the view. The dry system pipe run and the wet system pipe run highlight. 34 Place the cursor over a pipe segment.

Modifying Pipe Diameters In this exercise. checked pipe connectivity. . Modifying Pipe Diameters | 409 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. you confirmed the systems in the System Browser. you created the dry system and a pipe run to logically and physically connect the sprinklers. and click Add to add the field to the list. you connected the fire protection pipe run to the supply pipe that provides water to the fire protection system. or by right-clicking a connector. You have completed the dry fire protection system. select Count. First. Notice that you did not need to verify the pipe type because Create Similar matches the connector parameters and the type of the selected object. and in the 3D view validate the pipe geometry. This clears the slope. However. do the following: ■ Under Category. Define a schedule type 2 In the New Schedule dialog. 1 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. In this exercise. Additionally. click the Training Files icon. you created the fire protection dry system that services Server Room 32. always verify that the pipe type is correct in the Type Selector. Then.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Fire Protection ➤ folder. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. if you use the Create Similar tool. for Slope Angle. This eliminates the need to verify the type in the Type Selector each time you create pipe. you modify the diameter of the pipes so that the pipes are a better fit with the design specifications. Click OK. Scheduled fields display as columns in the schedule. select Family and Type. under Available fields. In this case. 43 In the Save As dialog. then all connector parameters and the type of the selected object are matched. navigate to the folder of your choice. and click Add. 41 Using the methods that you learned when consolidating branches. Open the m Modifying Pipe Diameters. you placed dry system sprinklers. ■ ■ Verify that Schedule building components is selected. the pipe type and other properties match the vertical main that you selected. enter 0. After the system was completed. Notice that the schedule name and the phase are automatically added. and click OK. select Sprinklers. draw the pipe to the left and connect it to the main as shown. 4 Under Available fields. click Schedule/Quantities.39 In the Layout Options dialog. enter Creating the Dry System Training for File name. 42 Check connectivity. Define columns 3 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. you also create a sprinkler schedule to report the number of level 2 sprinklers. Because the pipe diameters depend on the number of sprinklers. and click Save. This adds the Count field to the list of scheduled fields to include in the schedule. 40 Zoom in on the supply pipe located in Stairwell 30. and validated the pipe geometry in the 3D view. IMPORTANT When drawing pipe either by using the Pipe draw tool on the Design Bar.

TIP When you tile 2 views. 11 Adjust the view in both windows to view the entire fire protection pipe run as shown. 9 In the Project Browser. You will work mainly in the floor plan view and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D view. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. You can refer to this sprinkler total as you modify the pipe diameters in order to satisfy the design and code requirements. A new view called Sprinkler Schedule opens and is located under Schedules/Quantities in the Project Browser. and that it is sorted according to family and type. you tile the floor plan and 3D views. and double-click 3D Fire Prot to make the view active. and use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to arrange the Scheduled fields list as follows: ■ ■ Count Family and Type Next. you specify how the data will be organized in the schedule.Fire Prot to make the view active. You may need to drag the column dividers to modify the column width. and clear Itemize every instance. 410 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ Floor Plans. 10 Enter WT to tile both windows. Next. Next. 5 Select a field. you modify the pipe diameters. For Then by. Select Grand totals. Notice that only the data for the level 2 sprinklers displays. Tile the views 7 In the Project Browser. There is a grand total of 68 sprinklers on level 2.If you need to remove a field from the list. Verify that Ascending is selected. This closes all windows previously opened during the current design session. and double-click 2. 8 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. the active view is tiled to the left. verify that (none) is selected. and click Remove. select Family and Type. Click OK twice. select it. Note that this option is not available if the active view is the only open window. Organize the data 6 On the Sorting/Grouping tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ 3D views.

14 In the Filter dialog. or width. height.Fire Prot view. Modify the diameter of the fire protection pipe run 12 In the 2. click . and click OK. starting at the upper-left corner of the building. This selects the entire level 2 pipe run. draw a pick box around the entire level 2 fire protection pipe run.NOTE It is important to recognize the distinction between sizing and manually changing the diameter. or height. select the supply pipe in the stairwell to remove it from the selection. 15 Click in the 3D Fire Prot view to make it active. width. Changing the diameter. Sizing is performed using the Sizing tool (Sizing dialog) to size the pipe based on a series of parameters and calculations. width. select Pipe Fittings and Pipes. and while pressing SHIFT. 13 On the Options Bar. click Check None. or height of pipe on the Options Bar is not considered sizing in Revit MEP. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 411 . The calculated size of a pipe is the result of the Sizing tool and not the result of a manual change of diameter.

412 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . 17 Select any pipe segment and verify the 25mm diameter on the Options Bar. and the design specifications require a 25mm diameter for these pipes. Modify the diameter of the main 19 In the 2 -Fire Prot view. The entire fire protection pipe run highlights. draw a narrow pick box around the main pipe. select 25mm. and press TAB twice. For D: (diameter). Next. You changed the diameter for the pipe run because the majority of the pipe segments service no more than 2 sprinklers. verifying that it is connected. All pipes and pipe fittings change to a 25mm diameter except for the supply pipe. you modify the diameter the main. 18 Place the cursor over a pipe segment.16 On the Options Bar.

NOTE Do not include branch pipe segments. If branch segments are selected. and the supply pipe. draw a pick box around the horizontal main. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 413 . 20 With the main selected. The selected main pipe displays in red. while pressing CTRL. you can SHIFT-select to remove them from the selection. the pipe fittings.

especially around the pipe fittings. select the supply pipe to remove it from the selection. 23 On the Options Bar. and on the Options Bar. select the supply pipe. 25 Validate the pipe run geometry.You want to maintain the original supply pipe diameter. for D:. select 100mm. The diameter of the fire protection main changes. 21 Click in a blank space in the 3D Fire Prot view to make it active. 22 In the 3D view. 24 In the 3D view. while pressing SHIFT. 414 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . verify that the diameter is 150mm. so you need to exclude the supply pipe.

Notice that some branch pipe segments service more than 2 sprinklers. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 415 . and draw a zoom region around the lower 3 rooms in the building. 27 Enter ZR.Modify the diameter of branch pipes 26 Click in the 2 .Fire Prot view to make it active. 28 Select the first pipe segment that services Conference Room 31 and directly connects to the main. You need to change the diameters of these segments to conform to the code requirements.

Tag the pipes 34 In the 2 . You can verify this selection in the 3D view. verify that M_Pipe Size Tag is loaded.Fire Prot view. Next. 36 On the Options Bar. Click Tags. Notice that an outline of the tag displays and follows the cursor for accurate placement. The pipe diameter is modified. 33 On the Options Bar. 30 Select the next pipe segment to the right. press TAB twice to highlight the pipe segments and fittings. 37 In the Tag dialog. 32 Place the cursor over the pipe segment that connects the conference room sprinklers to the Open 2 sprinkler. 29 On the Options Bar. click Tag ➤ By Category. The 25mm pipe diameter complies with the design criteria. 35 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. Next. 416 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . Later in this exercise. select 50mm. you tag some of the pipes enabling you to identify their diameters. and click to select them. This segment services 5 sprinklers. for D:. zoom in on the branch that you modified. 38 Click OK. under Category. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Horizontal is selected. for D:. The specifications requires a diameter of 50mm for this pipe segment. select 40mm to comply with the design criteria. and after the segment highlights. you will complete the branch diameter modification. Clear Leader. for D:. select 40mm. The pipe segments including the elbow and 2 tee fittings display in red. for Pipes. and 2 in the open space). The rest of this pipe branch services 2 sprinklers. click to place the tag.This pipe segment services 6 sprinklers (4 in the office and conference room. you continue to modify the pipe branch. 39 Place the cursor over the left pipe segment that connects the conference room branch to the main. 31 On the Options Bar.

select Leader. Next. 41 Place a tag on the supply pipe in the stairwell. and finish placing the pipe tags. 40 On the Options Bar. you finish modifying the pipe run diameters. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 417 . you place a tag and include a leader line. 43 Drag the horizontal control to the upper-left to relocate the tag. They display only in the view in which they were placed. Next.NOTE Tags are view specific. 42 Click the tag to display end controls (blue dots) and horizontal controls (arrows).

and sizing as opposed to manually modifying a pipe diameter. In this tutorial. finish modifying pipe run diameters according to the following criteria. Finally. you created a wet and a dry fire protection system consisting of sprinklers and piping. For additional practice. This completes the Designing Fire Protection Systems lesson. The pipe run now complies with the design criteria. The completed fire protection system is included in the m Completed Fire Protection System. Sprinklers Serviced 1. You learned the difference between pipe sizing and manually changing the diameter of a pipe.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Fire Protection folder under Training Files. Finally.Complete pipe diameter modification and tag placement 44 Using the methods that you learned in this exercise. Feel free to modify the systems or create entirely new fire protection systems. each system was completely different. you tagged the pipes. enter Modifying Pipe Diameter Training for File name. You validated rigid pipe connections and geometry using a floor plan and the 3D view. Use the same system components and parameters as you did for level 2. and finish tagging the pipes. you confirmed the logical systems using the System Browser. In this exercise. In the lesson. Although the creation and modification methods remained the same. you used various selection methods to modify the level 2 fire protection pipe run diameters. navigate to the folder of your choice. 2 3 4. You also learned the difference between creating rigid physical pipe connections and creating logical systems. 418 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . use the methods that you learned and create the level 1 fire protection wet and dry systems. and click Save. you created a wet and a dry fire protection system. allowing you to immediately verify the pipe diameters. 5 6-10 Pipe Diameter 25mm 32mm 40mm 50mm 45 In the Save As dialog. Explore different system designs and discover the power of Revit MEP.

you learn to create construction documentation in Revit MEP 2008. and a roof garden. the Freighthouse Flats project is an exciting renovation of an historic three-story warehouse into new urban luxury loft living spaces. balconies. BNIM Architects was selected to convert the existing building into a 22-unit condominium featuring concrete floors. The additional 4th floor and non-historic north facade will be modernized to include a 4th floor penthouse. lofty ceilings. Located in Kansas City’s popular Crossroads Arts District. 419 . the existing building shell will be maintained and restored. a Kansas city based architectural firm for providing their Freighthouse Flats renovation project to use for the tutorial datasets in this section. and north facing balconies for the 2nd and 3rd floor units. As the building is slated to receive historic tax credits. exterior fire stairs. We wish to thank BNIM Architects.Documenting Your Projects 2 In this section of the tutorials.

NOTE For training purposes. 420 | Chapter 6 Documenting Your Projects . slight modifications to the building design have been made.

section. and detail views Modify the appearance of tags and other annotation on plans Set visibility and graphic controls in views to produce different presentation effects Create projects sheets that contain project views ■ 421 . including plan.Adding Views and Sheets to a Project 6 In this tutorial. elevation. you begin the construction documentation for the Freighthouse Flats project. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ Create new project views.

You also duplicate the project site plan to create a vicinity plan. how to create section and elevation views. you learn how to create views from a building model. Level 1 Furniture Plan created from the Level 1 floor plan Vicinity Plan created from the Site plan Dataset ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. You duplicate the Level 1 and Level 2 floor plans to create Level 1 and Level 2 furniture plans. you create new plan views of the building model by copying existing views and then modifying the copied views. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise.Creating Views In this lesson. You learn how to create new views from existing views. and how to create views from callouts that you place in other views. 422 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

and right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. double-click Level 2 Furniture Plan. and click OK. under Floor Plans. Duplicating Plan Views | 423 .■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. right-click Copy of Level 1 ➤ Rename. 9 In the Project Browser. 2 In the Project Browser. 8 In the Rename View dialog. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan. Use an alternate method of view duplication to create a Level 2 furniture plan 5 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 6 Click View menu ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 furniture plan 1 In the Project Browser. select Level 2. 3 In the Rename View dialog. under Floor Plans. 4 In the Project Browser.rvt. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views. expand Floor Plans. 7 In the Project Browser. enter Level 2 Furniture Plan. right-click Copy of Level 2 ➤ Rename. enter Level 1 Furniture Plan.

click the current scale. under Floor Plans. enter Vicinity Plan. 424 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . double-click Vicinity Plan. 12 In the Rename View dialog. right-click Copy of Site ➤ Rename. right-click Site ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. hide the display of the elevation markers in the view. 14 On the View Control Bar. 13 In the Project Browser. 15 Select the body of the south elevation marker.Duplicate a view and change the scale as required 10 In the Project Browser. Next. and click OK. and click 1: 1000. 11 Under Floor Plans.

16 Right-click. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 425 . 17 Click File menu ➤ Save As. All of the elevation markers on the plan are hidden.rvt. and click Hide in view ➤ Category. 18 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. you create an additional section and elevation view of the building model. Creating Elevation and Section Views In this exercise.

rvt. 426 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Add an elevation marker to the Level 1 floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Type Selector. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 4 On the Options Bar. 5 Specify a point in the drawing in front of the angular wall to place an elevation marker. select Elevation: Building Elevation. select1:100. double-click Level 1. for Scale.South East elevation view Section view Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. under Floor Plans. NOTE Elevation markers are context sensitive and will automatically try to align parallel to model geometry. click Elevation.

and select the head of the elevation marker that you just placed. 11 In the Project Browser. click Modify. 7 Select and move the upper horizontal line of the elevation until it extends past the upper-left corner of the building. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 427 . under Elevations. under Elevations (Building Elevation). double-click South East. 8 On the Design Bar. 10 In the Rename View dialog. enter South East. click Modify. and click OK. Rename and view the new elevation 9 In the Project Browser.Modify the elevation extents 6 On the Design Bar. right-click Elevation 1-a ➤ Rename.

for Scale. expand Floor Plans. Modify the section line 17 Click the blue arrows below the section line head to reverse the direction in which the section is cut through the building. 14 In the Type Selector. under Views (all). 428 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 15 On the Options Bar. click Section. and specify the section line endpoint between the endpoints of grid lines 2 and 3. 13 On the View tab of the Design Bar. ■ Move the cursor down. select Section: Building Section. and double-click Level 1.Draw a section line on the Level 1 floor plan 12 In the Project Browser. select 1:100. 16 Draw a section line through the building: ■ Specify a point above the top wall of the building between grid lines 2 and 3.

Creating Elevation and Section Views | 429 .18 Select the blue triangular grips on the left side of the section extents. Click the midpoint of the section line. and move them to just outside of the left side of the building. click Split Segment. and click to place it. drag it to the right until it cuts through the stair. 19 Click the blue arrows below the section tail twice to cycle through the section tail options and add a section head to the section line endpoint. 20 Add a jog to the section line: ■ ■ On the Options Bar.

expand Sections (Building Section). 430 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 24 Select gridline F. and double-click Section 1. and drag the top segment of gridline F to the right.21 On the Design Bar. click Modify. click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium. View the new section 22 In the Project Browser. select the blue break mark that displays under the grid bubble. 23 On the View Control Bar.

Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress.Enlarged Stair Plan Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. you draw a callout around the geometry in another view to specify the contents of the each new callout view. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save.25 On the Design Bar.rvt. Creating Callout Views In this exercise. you create new views: an enlarged stair plan view and a detail view. To create each view. Stair callout on the Level 1 floor plan Resulting callout view . Creating Callout Views | 431 . click Modify.

select 1:50. 5 Draw the callout around the large stair in the center of the plan: ■ Specify a point to the upper-right of the stair. double-click Level 1. ■ Move the cursor to the lower-left of the stair. click Modify. and move it to the left side of the callout boundary. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 432 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. click Callout. 3 In the Type Selector. under Floor Plans. for Scale. Select the grip on the leader line that is closest to the callout head. and select the callout boundary. 6 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. 4 On the Options Bar. select Floor Plan. and specify a point to complete the callout.

9 In the Rename View dialog. Open the callout view 10 Double-click the callout head. 7 On the Design Bar. and drag it down slightly to create a jog in the leader line. enter Enlarged Stair Plan. 8 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. Creating Callout Views | 433 . and click OK. click Modify. The Enlarged Stair Plan view displays.■ Select the middle grip. right-click Callout of Level 1 ➤ Rename.

and specify a point above and to the right of the roof overhang. for Scale. 434 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 13 In the Type Selector. 14 On the Options Bar. click Callout. ■ Move the cursor diagonally down. double-click Section 1. under Sections (Building Sections). select Detail View: Detail.Create a detail view callout 11 In the Project Browser. 15 Create the callout: ■ Zoom in to the upper-left corner of the building. and specify a point to the left and below the roof overhang. 12 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select 1:50.

and right-click Detail 0 ➤ Rename. and click OK. double-click Roof Overhang Detail. under Detail Views (Details). 17 In the Project Browser. Creating Callout Views | 435 . Open the detail callout view 19 In the Project Browser. expand Detail Views (Details). enter Roof Overhang Detail. 18 In the Rename View dialog.16 Modify the callout leader as shown.

20 Click File menu ➤ Save. Modifying View Tag Appearance In this exercise. and the callout head and boundary that you placed in previous exercises. You change the appearance of the section mark head. Existing stair callout head and boundary 436 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . the elevation markers. you modify the appearance of tags in a view so that they conform to office CAD standards.

select Custom-Section Head. and click OK. 12 For Section Tag. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. . 7 In the Type Properties dialog. 8 In the Name dialog. 4 On the Design Bar. The Custom-Section Head family is now loaded in the project. clear any others. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. Section Tail – Filled. click Load into Project. select Custom-Section Head: Section Head – Open. Modify the section mark head 1 In the Project Browser.rfa. click Edit/New. click Training Files. 6 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Section Tags. 14 In the Object Styles dialog. The new section mark head that you want to apply to either endpoint of the section line displays.Modified stair callout head and boundary Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. 5 In the Load into Projects dialog. and click OK. select the section line. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. and can be applied to the section line. Modifying View Tag Appearance | 437 . click Duplicate. 15 Under Category.Filled. double-click Level 1. and click 11 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. click the Annotation Objects tab. under Floor Plans.rvt. Modify the line weight of the section line and mark 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. open Metric\Families\Annotations. for Section Head. and click Open. 2 Click File menu ➤ Open. select the current project. enter Section Head – Custom. and click OK twice. 10 On the floor plan.Custom. select Section Head . Section Tail . scroll to Section Line.

notice the updated section marks that display at each endpoint of the section line. 18 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. 27 Click OK twice.rfa. 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog. select 12. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. and select 3. 17 Under Category. under Graphics: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Shape. and select 2. The new callout head that you want to apply to the callout displays.16 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. 26 In the Type Properties dialog. open Metric\Families\Annotations. scroll to Section Marks. Modify the shape and weight of the elevation markers 20 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Elevation Tags. enter 12. 438 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .5mm Square. click Edit/New. click Load into Project. select Custom-Callout Head. and on the Options Bar. and click OK. . and click OK. click Training Files. for Elevation Tag. click 25 In the Element Properties dialog. 19 Click OK. select 3. select the current project. and click Open. On the floor plan. 32 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Callout Tags. 22 In the Name dialog. 24 Select an elevation marker in the drawing. For Line Weight. clear all others. notice the square elevation markers that display. enter 12. 30 On the Design Bar. click Duplicate. For Dimensions ➤ Width. Modify the callout head 28 Click File menu ➤ Open. select Square.5mm Square. On the floor plan.5 mm. Click OK. 23 In the Type Properties dialog. 31 In the Load into Projects dialog.

click the Annotation Objects tab. and select 4. select Dash. 48 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. 46 Under Category. 34 In the Name dialog. 49 Click OK. 44 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. 36 In the drawing.33 In the Type Properties dialog. The new callout boundary displays on the floor plan. 40 Press ESC. click 37 In the Element Properties dialog. 45 For Line Pattern. 42 In the Objects Styles dialog. click Edit/New. for Callout Tag. 47 Select Callout Leader Line. 35 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Callout Head. expand Callout Boundary. For Corner Radius. and select 7. 38 In the Type Properties dialog. The custom callout head displays on the floor plan. 43 Under Category. scroll down to Callout Boundary. Custom – Callout Head w/ 6mm Corner Radius. Modify the callout boundary 41 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. Custom – Callout Head w/ 6mm Corner Radiusand click OK. select . Click OK. 39 Click OK twice. select Custom – Callout Head: Callout Head. select the callout. enter 6 mm. click Duplicate. . enter . Modifying View Tag Appearance | 439 . and on the Options Bar.

Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views In this lesson. you create presentation views that feature elevations of the building. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Creating a View Template In this exercise. Set a crop region for the view 1 In the Project Browser.50 Click File menu ➤ Save. you create a view template containing specific presentation quality visibility settings. You learn to create view templates. and apply it to multiple elevation views.rvt. and features blue triangular grips and break marks. filters. click Training Files. The crop region displays as red. 2 Select the outer crop region that displays around the view. masking regions. View templates provide and easy way to transfer visibility settings to multiple drawings. view regions. 440 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . under Elevations. To accomplish this. you learn how to control the visibility and graphic characteristics of elements in views. and double-click East. and visual overrides. Presentation view Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG.

13 Under Visibility. right-click East. 11 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. 5 On the View Toolbar. 10 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click Modify to hide the crop region grips and display it as black. under Elevations. clear: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Callouts Elevations Grids Levels Sections Creating a View Template | 441 . clear Entourage. 8 Click OK. 6 On the Project Browser. under Visibility. under Extents. click Zoom to Fit. Create and apply a view template to an elevation drawing 9 On the View Control bar. 12 Click the Annotation Categories tab.3 Select and move the blue triangular grips to resize the crop region as shown. click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium. clear Crop Region Visible. 4 On the Design Bar. and click Properties.

and click OK. and click Apply View Template. The settings in the view template create a presentation-quality elevation view. and section lines are now hidden in the view. 15 On the View Control bar. right-click East. and click Create View Template From View. click Shadows Off ➤ Shadows On. select Black and White Presentation Elevation. elevation markers. enter Black and White Presentation Elevation. under Elevations. Callouts. 442 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . double-click North.14 Click OK. 20 In the Project Browser. grids. click OK. 19 In the Project Browser. levels. click Apply. under Elevations. and click OK. 21 In the Select View Template dialog. 17 In the New View Template dialog. right-click North. 18 In the View Templates dialog. 16 In the Project Browser.

rvt. as this structure has not yet been documented in any of the views. Adjust the view range of the Penthouse plan 1 In the Project Browser. You want to display the exterior roof terraces from Level 4 on the penthouse and roof plan. select Penthouse. and the exterior area on the south side of the building. under Floor Plans. for View Range. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. View Range and Plan Regions | 443 . select Level Below (Level 4).22 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 2 In the Project Browser.rvt. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. under Extents. and click Properties. click Edit. select Level Below (Level 4). 4 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. double-click Penthouse. Under View Depth. Click OK twice. for Level. you modify the view range and create view plan regions to adjust the display of elements in the building Penthouse and Roof Plan. for Bottom. 23 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. right-click. NOTE The Penthouse plan now shows the level below to provide additional context to the view. View Range and Plan Regions In this exercise. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress.

select Level 4. click Edit. and click Properties. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. right-click. for Level. select Roof Plan.Adjust the view range of the Roof plan 5 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. for Bottom. for View Range. under Extents. 444 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 6 In the Project Browser. 8 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. select Level 4. double-click Roof Plan. Click OK twice. Under View Depth.

click Edit. In the left corner of the building. 10 On the Design Bar. for Level. 15 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. click Plan Region. for View Range. View Range and Plan Regions | 445 . Under View Depth. select the left endpoint of the outer wall. 17 On the Design Bar. select Unlimited. click 12 Sketch a plan region: ■ ■ (Rectangle). select Unlimited.Create a plan region to show exterior space on the south side of the building 9 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 16 On the Design Bar. for Bottom. Move you cursor diagonally. click Finish Sketch. and select the endpoint the gridline shown below. NOTE A Plan Region allows you to modify the view range of a specified area defined by the extents of the Plan Region. Click OK twice. 13 On the Design Bar. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. 11 On the Options Bar. under Extents. click Region Property. click Lines. click Modify.

enter Rated Walls. 7 In the Filters dialog. and click OK. Using Filters to Control Visibility In this exercise. and double-click Level 1. the fire-rated walls on the floor plan display with a solid red fill. click the Filters tab. 3 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 6 In the Filter Name dialog.18 Click File menu ➤ Save. under Categories. After you apply the filter. under Views (all). 8 Under Filter Rules: ■ For Filter by. click Edit/New. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. select Fire Rating. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. expand Floor Plans. in this case.rvt. under Filters. select Walls. 4 At the bottom of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 1 In the Project Browser. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. 446 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . You use a filter to quickly apply visual changes to the walls based on defined parameters. you visually audit the drawing to make sure the fire-rated walls are placed correctly. 5 In the Filters dialog. click (New). the fire rating of the walls.

but the overrides associated with the filter must be reapplied as well. The fire-rated walls now display without the solid red fill. 16 Click OK. 19 Remove the filter: ■ ■ Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and click OK. On the Filters tab of the Visibility Graphics dialog. under Projection/Surface. and click OK. under Basic colors. apply the red solid fill override to Cut Patterns as well. 18 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save. To accomplish this.■ ■ Select contains. click OK. Masking Portions of a View In this exercise. and click OK. The Rated Walls filter can be reapplied to the drawing at any time. 9 Click OK. 17 Using the same method. 11 Select Rated Walls. 13 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. select Solid Fill. 12 On the Filter tab. click Add. click No Override. for Rated Walls. for Pattern. you use masking regions that you sketch over the areas that you want to hide. click Override under Patterns. for Color. Enter Hr. Masking Portions of a View | 447 . select the red color. click Remove. you obscure or ''wipe out'' geometry in portions of a view. 10 On the Filter tab. 15 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. 14 In the Color dialog.

1 In the Project Browser. as shown.rvt. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. 2 Select Copy of Level 1.Masking regions sketched over the upper corners of a view Unit plan view with upper corners masked Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. enter Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. under Floor Plans. 3 In the Rename View dialog. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. 4 On the View Control Bar. right-click. and click Rename. right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 448 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click Show Crop Region. and click OK. 6 Modify the crop region to get close to the desired view at the bottom left. 5 On the View menu.

9 On the View Control Bar. select Invisible lines. Masking Portions of a View | 449 .7 On the View menu. 11 In the Type Selector. 12 On the Options Bar. click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region. NOTE This specifies the line type for the border of the masking region. and adjust the view again until it displays as shown. click (Rectangle). click Masking Region. Use a masking region to hide additional model geometry that does not need to be shown 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 8 Select the crop region. 13 Sketch 2 masking regions as shown. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit.

and apply different visual overrides to create presentation effects.rvt. 1 In the Project Browser. click Finish Sketch. right-click Unit 18 Plan . Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing.14 On the Design Bar. 15 View the effects of the masking regions on the floor plan. 450 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .Level 1. you create a presentation plan of one of the residential units on the Level 1 floor plan. under Floor Plans. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. You create poche for the walls and you hide and modify the display of certain elements on the presentation plan. Working with Visual Overrides In this exercise. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress.

and click OK. 10 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. 7 Under Cut. right-click. 3 In the Rename View dialog. for Pattern. click in the Patterns field. Working with Visual Overrides | 451 . for Color. click No Override. enter Presentation Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. Create poche for walls 5 Select the diagonal bottom wall. and click 1: 50. 4 On the View Control Bar. click black. 8 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. 11 Click OK twice. select Solid fill. right-click. under Pattern Overrides. 9 On the left side of the Color dialog. select Walls. and click Rename. and click Override. 6 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. under Visibility. 2 Select the Copy of Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. click the current scale.NOTE Duplicate with Detailing is selected so that the masking regions are retained in the new view. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category. and click OK.

16 Under Visibility. and click OK. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 15 Click the Annotation Categories tab. 12 On the Design Bar. under Visibility.Set the visibility and graphics of other categories in the view. Hide elements in the view by category 17 Select the lamp on the table on the floor plan as shown. clear Grids. 13 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click Modify. 452 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . clear Floors.

18 Right-click. 19 Select 1 of the chairs around the long table on the floor plan as shown. and click Hide in View ➤ Category. Working with Visual Overrides | 453 .

28 For Color. select the sofa. click Projection Lines. click No Override. 21 Under Projection/Surface. 29 In the Color dialog. and click OK twice. click a purple color. select a bright green color. 23 In the Color dialog. select Dash. Modify visibility and graphics by element 26 On the floor plan. click By Category Override. 25 Click OK twice. the Visibility/Graphics dialog opens to the category of the object (Furniture) selected by default. 454 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 24 In the Line Graphics dialog. under Lines.20 Right-click. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. right-click. 27 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog. and click OK. 22 In the Line Graphics dialog. By using the previous method to make the selection. for Pattern. click Override. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category. for Color.

32 Select one of the lamps. click . Reveal hidden elements in a view 31 On the View Control Bar. The hidden crop region is also revealed. and click Unhide in view ➤ Category. The lighting fixtures and grid lines that you hid previously display in a dark red color. click . 33 On the View Control Bar. right-click. click Modify. Working with Visual Overrides | 455 .30 On the Design Bar.

456 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . TIP If the View tab is not displayed in the Design Bar. right-click. select A0 metric. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. Creating Drawing Sheets In this exercise. Create a project sheet 1 On View tab of the Design Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click View. how to add views to the sheets. click Training Files. you create project drawing sheets that report the project information in the sheet titleblocks.34 Click File menu ➤ Save. and how to make changes to the building model from a view on a sheet. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project In this lesson.Creating Sheets. and click OK. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats. click Sheet.rvt. you learn how to create sheets within a Revit MEP project.

expand Sheets (all). The text fields in the titleblock family (shown below) contain labels that associate the project information parameters with the appropriate text fields. For Sheet Number. enter Site Plan. 5 When the title block highlights. click Modify. The title block that you selected is a family that has already been loaded into the project. Creating Drawing Sheets | 457 . click 6 In the Element Properties dialog. The new sheet is displayed in the Project Browser with the name A102 . and select the title block. For Sheet Name. on the Options Bar.A title block and drawing borders are displayed on the drawing sheet. under Identity Data: ■ ■ (Properties).Unnamed. Change the sheet name and number 4 On the Design Bar. 3 In the Project Browser. NOTE The vertical time and date stamp in the lower-right corner of the sheet view automatically updates every time the project file is saved. enter A101.

enter 15 May. for Project Address. 14 Click OK. For Project Number. The new project information displays in the titleblock. enter the following address: ■ ■ 123 Main Street Anytown. 8 Zoom in to the lower-right corner of the title block. 458 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . enter For Approval. click Edit. 2007. enter Freighthouse Flats. Display additional project information in the sheet title block 9 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information. For Project Status. 11 In the Edit Text dialog. MA 12345 12 Click OK. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. For Project Name. Smith.■ Click OK. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. Site Plan displays in the title block as the sheet name and is appended to the sheet name in the Project Browser. enter J. 7 On the Design Bar. For Client Name. enter 2007-1. The Sheet Number has been updated to display A101. continue to add project information: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Project Issue Date. click Modify. under Other.

double-click A102 . select the new sheet name. 3 Move the cursor to position the lower-right corner of the view in the lower-right corner of the sheet. click Modify. Adding Views to Sheets In this exercise.Stairs In the following exercise. 4 On the Design Bar.Elevations A107 . The border of the view displays as red to indicate that you can reposition it on the sheet. and click OK. and click to place the view.rvt. select A0 metric. Drag the Level 1 floor plan onto a sheet to create a floor plan 1 In the Project Browser.Elevations A106 . right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet. Adding Views to Sheets | 459 . and click Save. 16 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. under Sheets (all). you add views to these sheets. create the following new project sheets: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A103 . for Name. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress.Elevations A105 .rvt. you add views to the sheets that you created in the previous exercise.Floor Plan. and drag it to the sheet.Create a floor plan sheet 15 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. and click OK.Layout Plan A104 . select Level 1. right-click. 21 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. 18 In the Sheet Title dialog. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson.Sections A108 . 17 In the Project Browser. 2 In the Project Browser. enter Floor Plan. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Create additional sheets 19 Using the same method as you did in the previous steps. and click Rename.

align it with the East elevation. Add elevation views to the A104-Elevation sheet 5 In the Project Browser. 460 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . under Sheets (all).The red border around the view no longer displays. click Modify. double-click A104 . 8 On the Design Bar. and click to place it. 6 In the Project Browser. 7 Drag the North elevation to the lower-right corner of the sheet. drag East to the upper-right corner of the sheet. and click to place it.Elevations. under Elevations (Building Elevation).

Change the scale of the detail view 13 Select the Roof Overhang Detail on the sheet. under Sheets (all). and click OK. 10 Under Sections (Building Sections). and on the Options Bar. 12 On the Design Bar. . drag Roof Overhang Detail to the left of the Building Section view on the sheet. click 14 In the Element Properties dialog. 11 Under Detail Views (Detail). click Modify. and use the blue endpoint grips to resize it so that it spans the length of the view. and click to place it. Notice the title bar also needs to be resized. 16 Select title bar. and click to place it. 15 Drag the view to reposition it next to the Building Section view. select 1:5. Adding Views to Sheets | 461 . drag Building Section to the upper-right corner of the sheet.Sections. double-click A107 .Add the Building Section view to the A107-Sections sheet 9 In the Project Browser. for View Scale.

and press TAB until it highlights. zoom in to the grip. under Sheets (all). Create a sheet with stair and stair detail views 17 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 19 On the Design Bar. and click to place it. double-click Level 1. 18 Under Floor Plans. View updated annotation on referenced views 20 In the Project Browser.NOTE If you find it difficult to select the left grip on the title bar. move the cursor over it.Stairs. 462 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Notice that the callout tag has been automatically updated to reference the correct sheet. 21 Zoom to the stair callout. double-click A108 . click Modify. drag Enlarged Stair Plan to the upper-right corner of the sheet.

and then make changes and deactivate the view. you learn how to modify a building model directly from the drawing sheets that you created from its views.22 Zoom in to the section line heads and the east and north elevation markers. under Sheets (all). Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View In this exercise. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. In order to do this. double-click A107 . Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. Change the roof elevation 1 In the Project Browser. you must first activate the view on the sheet.Sections. 23 Click File menu ➤ Save.rvt. Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View | 463 . and notice they also reference the correct sheet numbers.

click Modify. and press ENTER. 8 Click File menu ➤ Save. 464 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and click Deactivate View. and click Activate View. 7 In the Project Browser. right-click. double-click North. under Elevations (Building Elevation). enter 16700 mm.2 Select the building section view. 6 Right-click. Notice that the Roof Plan elevation has been updated. zoom in to the name and elevation of the level. 5 On the Design Bar. 3 At the right end of the Roof level line. 4 Double-click the Roof elevation height.

you create a title sheet for your drawing set. enter Title Sheet. select the new sheet name. You modify the view to hide the view title. right-click. Create a view of the building to place on the title sheet 5 In the Project Browser. 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Camera. 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Sheet Number. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. For Sheet Name. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. 3 In the Project Browser. Click OK. and click Properties.rvt. select A0 metric. After you create the sheet. and click OK. double-click Level 1. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 465 . Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. enter T.Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet In this exercise. Create a new sheet 1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 7 Place the camera as shown. you create a perspective view of the building and place it on the sheet. as it is not necessary to display it on the title sheet. The camera view displays. right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet.

double-click T . 466 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Click OK. 10 Select the crop region and adjust the view to fit the building. click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region. click 9 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . and click to place it in the center of the sheet. drag 3D View 1 onto the sheet. 12 On the View Control Bar. under Sheets (all). enter 1500 mm. 14 Under 3D Views. Under Camera.Title Sheet. For Far Clip Offset. enter 18000 mm For Target Elevation. 11 On the View Control Bar. select Far Clip Active. click Shadows off ➤ Shadows on. for Eye Elevation. Under Extents.8 On the Options Bar. 13 In the Project Browser. enter100000 mm.

The title bar no longer displays on the sheet. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 467 . under Graphics. for Show title.15 With the view selected. click Duplicate. 23 In the Type Properties dialog. Click Apply. click 20 In the Element Properties dialog. click Size. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. 24 Click OK twice. 19 Select the view on the sheet. select Scale (locked proportions). 16 In the Crop Region dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Change. 22 In the Name dialog. for Height. 25 On the Design Bar. click Modify. enter Viewport/no title mark. and click OK. enter 635 mm. Under Model Crop Size. and on the Options Bar. and then click OK. select No. click Edit/New. 17 Reposition the view on the title sheet. . Remove the title bar on the view 18 On the Design Bar. click Modify. on the Options Bar.

26 Click File menu ➤ Save. 468 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and close the exercise file.

you learn how to tag rooms and other components of floor plans. such as room and window schedules. 469 . in your Revit MEP 2008 projects. You also learn to create different types of schedules. such as doors and windows.Tagging and Scheduling 7 In this tutorial.

Add room separations 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click Unit 18 Plan .Level 1. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Adding room separation lines breaks up an open space to make it easier to add rooms. The Room command with the Tag on placement option selected allows you to place and tag rooms with one command. you sequentially place and tag the rooms on the floor plan. You learn how to ■ ■ ■ ■ Sequentially tag rooms on a floor plan Tag doors and windows Modify tag placement and mark text Tag other objects. expand Floor Plans.rvt. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects. and click Room and Area. 2 Zoom in to the upper area of the floor plan. you need to create room separation lines to define the rooms to be tagged. such as furniture Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms In this exercise. 3 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. 470 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . right-click in the Design Bar. NOTE If the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar is not active. Because of the open style floor plan. you learn how to use some of the annotation features included in Revit MEP. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.Tagging Objects In this lesson. click Training Files. click Room Separation.

4 Click the endpoint of the short horizontal wall on the left. move the cursor to the right. as shown: 5 Use the same method to create a vertical separation to divide the kitchen from the entry area on the right. and click the opposite wall to create a horizontal room separation dividing the kitchen from the dining area (top area of the drawing). Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 471 . as shown: 6 Use the same method to create a horizontal separation above the stair to divide the dining area from the living area.

472 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . and click to place the room and tag. and the rectangle contains the room tag. indicating that it can be edited. click Load. click Modify. click Training Files. 10 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 13 On the Options Bar. click Modify. 9 In the Tags dialog. verify that Tag on placement is selected. click Room. 15 On the Design Bar. 14 Move the cursor to the room at the upper right of the plan view. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Room Tag. click OK.7 On the Design Bar. The crosshair graphic represents the room area being tagged. The room tag number displays in blue.rfa. Tag rooms sequentially 12 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. 11 In the Tags dialog. and select the room tag. Load room tag annotation family 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags.

■ Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 473 . and press ENTER. click it. 18 On the Design Bar. enter U18-1. click Modify.16 Zoom in on the tag number. Align the tags by moving the cursor until a dashed green line displays between the placed tag and the one that displays at the tip of the cursor. 17 Click the room text label. Click to place the new room and tag. enter Entry. 19 Place another room and tag: ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. Move the cursor into the room to the left of the one previously tagged. and press ENTER. click Room.

Sequential letters are also supported.NOTE The second tag that you place displays the sequential number U18-2. Dining. enter Kitchen. 20 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 474 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . and press ENTER. and Living): Hide the room separations 23 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 22 Use the same method to place rooms and tags. and edit the tags as shown (Toilet. 21 Click the room text label.

You learn how to add tags to the floor plan and how to simultaneously tag multiple untagged doors and windows. expand Floor Plans. clear Room Separation. 29 Click File menu ➤ Save As. in the Project Browser.Level 2. 30 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. you learn how to place door and window tags. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . and moving clockwise. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. 27 Starting with the Balcony (area near the stair). and click OK. The rooms are already placed.rvt. expand Lines. click to place a room tag in each of the 5 rooms. click Room Tag.Level 1. but they need to be tagged. 26 On the Design Bar. Tag rooms on upper level 25 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. Model Categories tab.24 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog.rvt. Tagging Doors and Windows In this exercise. Tagging Doors and Windows | 475 . Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. click Modify. 28 On the Design Bar. Tag Level 1 doors 1 If necessary. double-click Unit 18 Plan .

3 On the Options Bar. click Modify. 6 Click the door tag for the entry door. 7 Select the kitchen pantry door to the left. click Tag ➤ By Category. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. click (Properties). and click OK. enter U18-1. enter U18-2. 4 Select 5 doors in the upper area of the floor plan: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Entry door Kitchen pantry door Pocket door in toilet Closet door in dining room Living room door 5 On the Design Bar. under Identify Data. and press ENTER.2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. clear Leader. for Mark. 476 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . and on the Options Bar.

13 On the Design Bar. and drag it down to center it in the doorway.9 Using one of the methods you just learned. 14 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. Tag Level 2 doors 12 In the Project Browser. select Door Tags. 11 Select the tag for the closet door and move it to the right of the door.Level 2. rename the other 3 door tags to match the corresponding room tags. double-click Unit 18 Plan . click Tag All Not Tagged. 10 Select the tag for the pocket door on the right. under Category. Tagging Doors and Windows | 477 . and click OK.

rfa. click Load. 23 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. 20 In the left pane of the Open dialog.15 Move the door tags to center them in the doorway. expand Floor Plans. 478 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . 19 In the Tags dialog. click Tag All Not Tagged. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Window Tag. 18 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. select Window. click Training Files. and double-click Level 1. 16 Edit the numbers of the door tags as shown: Place window tags 17 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 21 Click OK.

and click OK. 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt.Level 1. click Tag ➤ By Category. click Tag All Not Tagged. 26 On the View toolbar. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Furniture Tag.rfa. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 4 Select a dining room chair. Window tags are placed in the Level 2 plan view. click Yes to load a tag. select Leader. 29 Click File menu ➤ Save. 7 Select each of the chairs and the table to place tags. click Zoom To Fit to see the entire drawing. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. click Training Files. you learn how to tag furniture objects. double-click Level 2.24 Zoom to the lower-right area of the drawing to view the window tags. 3 On the Options Bar. 28 Select Window Tags. Add furniture tags 1 In the Project Browser. Tagging Other Objects | 479 . and double-click Unit 18 Plan . 25 Under Floor Plans. expand Floor Plans. Zoom flyout. 27 On the Design Bar. Tagging Other Objects In this exercise. and modify the tag placement and display. 5 At the confirmation prompt.

modify the position of the chair tags to move them closer to the chairs. 480 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . Modify tag placement 10 Zoom to the dining table. 13 Optionally. 12 Click the elbow control. 15 Select the tag for the table (TBL-1). Notice that the chair and table tags overlap. 9 Click Modify. and on the Options Bar. 14 Click Modify. and drag it up to form an angled leader. and drag it above the chair tag.8 Select the furniture in the living room. clear Leader. 11 Select the tag for the table.

18 On the Design Bar. 20 On the Options Bar. under Floor Plans. click Tag All Not Tagged. select M_Furniture tag : Standard.16 Drag the table tag to the center of the table. and click OK. and on the Design Bar. All furniture in the floor plan is tagged. Tag furniture on Level 2 17 In the Project Browser. click (Filter Selection). click Modify. Tagging Other Objects | 481 . double-click Unit 18 Plan . Change tag style 19 Draw a selection box around the top area of the drawing to select the furniture.Level 2.

you learn to add schedules. 23 Click File menu ➤ Save. Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams In this lesson. 482 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . click Check None. Schedule keys allow you to define common items that can be used by multiple objects within a schedule. You also learn to add schedule keys to a project by creating a room schedule and room color diagram. Creating a Window Schedule In this exercise. and click Modify. and click OK. 22 In the Type Selector. select Furniture Tags. you create a window schedule for the building model shown below. select Furniture Tag: Boxed.21 In the Filter dialog.

You begin by creating a window instance schedule. Creating a Window Schedule | 483 . You then select a window in the instance schedule and use the Show command to locate it in a view of the building model. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. in which windows are listed by window type.rvt. you change the window instance schedule to a type schedule. click Training Files. a schedule that lists every window in the building. you group and sort the windows in the instance schedule. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Finally. Next. that is.

select Comments and click Add. 9 Click OK. The Comments field is moved under Scheduled fields. 6 Under Available fields. click the Fields tab. add the following fields to the schedule: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Count Height Level Type Mark Width 8 Under Scheduled fields. select Windows. click Schedule/Quantities. and click OK. 3 In the New Schedule dialog. right-click in the Design Bar. enter Building Window Schedule. and double-click Level 1. and click View. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. expand Floor Plans. under Category.Create a window schedule 1 In the Project Browser. Define the fields to display as columns in the window schedule 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. 484 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . 4 For Name. order the fields as shown in the following illustration by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down. 7 Using the same method.

12 In the Show Element(s) in View dialog. for Sort by. Creating a Window Schedule | 485 . However. under Other. NOTE By clicking Show.A schedule is created that contains every window in the building model. you can display other views of the building model that include the selected window. and double-click Building Window Schedule to redisplay the window instance schedule. click Edit. you are prompted to open one that does. expand Schedules/Quantities. and on the Options Bar. click OK to search through relevant views of the building model. and click OK twice. Group and sort the window schedule by type mark 14 In the drawing area. 16 On the Sorting/Grouping tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. Select a window in the schedule and locate it in the building model 10 Select a cell in the window schedule with the C14 Type Mark. in large building models with many views. 13 In the Project Browser. this can be a time-consuming process. click Close. click Show. If no open view shows the selected element. and click View Properties. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. The window that corresponds to the information in the schedule row is displayed in a relevant view of the building model. for Sorting/Grouping. right-click the schedule. select Type Mark. 11 If the confirmation dialog displays.

The window type schedule is displayed. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. 18 Click OK to confirm that you want to change the type mark for all windows of this type. and press ENTER. 22 Click OK twice. Change the schedule from an instance schedule to a type schedule 19 Right-click on the schedule. so that the types are sequentially named from A to H. as shown: 24 In the Project Browser. for Sorting/Grouping. change the Type Mark in the first row from 19 to A. clear Itemize every instance.The window schedule is displayed. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 2. 21 In the Schedule Properties dialog. The type mark is changed to A and the schedule is resorted. under Other. 486 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . and click View Properties. Change type mark from the schedule 17 In the window schedule. sorted by type mark. 23 Change the Type Mark for the other window types. click Edit.

4 In the Parameter Properties dialog. For Group parameter under. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save As. expand Schedules/Quantities. click OK. click Add to create the new parameter. you cannot use them to tag objects. 5 Click OK. and double-click Building Window Schedule. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. and sill conditions for a window can be found. select Type. select Windows to associate the parameter with the Windows category. jamb. These parameters cannot be shared with other projects and. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser. 6 Use the same method to create 2 more window parameters: Jamb Detail and Sill Detail. enter Head Detail. select Construction. you add schedule columns for parameters that are not standard for the scheduled object. you want to add columns to the window schedule to describe the detail where head. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. unlike shared parameters. 7 In the Parameter Properties dialog. for Name. Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule In this lesson. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Categories. The new project parameter Head Detail is displayed in the Project Parameters dialog. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. and save the exercise file as m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. For Discipline.25 Zoom to the lower area of the floor plan to see that the window tags have changed.rvt. Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule | 487 .rvt. Under Parameter Data. In this case. 3 In the Project Parameters dialog.

TIP To select all 3 headers. under Available fields. under Other. so that they are listed before Comments. 488 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . click Group. click Edit. 15 In the grouping field above the detail headers in the schedule. for Fields. right-click Building Window Schedule. click in the Head Detail header. 10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog.Add project parameters to the schedule 8 In the Project Browser. and click Properties. and while pressing the left mouse button. select Head Detail. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. select the following fields. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ Head Detail Jamb Detail Sill Detail 11 Use the Move Up control to move the new parameters up in the list. enter Window Details. 14 On the Options Bar. Jamb Detail. 12 Click OK twice. Group headers in the schedule 13 In the schedule. and Sill Detail. move the cursor over the Jamb Detail and Sill Detail headers.

rvt. 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog. for Head Detail. 4 Click OK. For example. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save. for Jamb Detail. click the Fields tab. click Schedule/Quantities. enter Unit 18 . You then hide the column used for the filter. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter | 489 .16 You can add values for the new project parameters directly in the schedule. expand Floor Plans. enter 2/A107. and specify the following values for Filter by: ■ ■ ■ Select Mark in the first field. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category.Level 1. and for Sill Detail. Select contains in the second field. enter 3/A107. View Level 1 of the building 1 In the Project Browser. 6 Under Available fields. and place the unit-based door schedule on a sheet with the unit plans. and produces a schedule that includes only the doors in Unit 18. Create a new door schedule for Unit 18 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 3 In the New Schedule dialog.Door Schedule. Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter In this exercise. select Doors. enter 1/A107. under Type Mark A. Verify Schedule building components is selected. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. Verify the Phase is Phase 1. This filter checks each door in the project to see which unit it is associated with. select the following fields. Under Name. Enter U18 in the third field. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Count Family and Type Head Height Sill Height Width Mark 7 Click the Filter tab. you create a unit-based door schedule and use a filter to limit the selection of doors to a single unit.

13 In the Project Browser. 490 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . Place the schedule on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser. select Hidden Field. click Modify. Clear Itemize every instance (to group the like door types into one row). but is not included as a column in the schedule. and double-click A102 .Door Schedule.Unit 18. click Unit 18 . and specify the following options: ■ ■ For Sort by. 15 On the Design Bar. expand Sheets (all). 11 Under Field formatting. select Family and Type. The Mark field is used to filter the entries in the schedule. 9 Click the Formatting tab. The schedule includes the count and type for doors in Unit 18 only. 16 Zoom in to see the details of the door schedule. and drag it to the sheet. 14 Click to place the schedule in the upper-left corner of the sheet. select Mark.8 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. 10 Under Fields. and click OK.

rvt. and click OK. 7 To the right of Header text. add the following fields to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ Name Level Area 6 Click the Appearance tab. Creating a Room Schedule In this exercise. under Floor Plans. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. and click Add. under Category. Creating a Room Schedule | 491 . under Available fields. and click View. click Schedule/Quantities. select Number. double-click Level 1. 3 In the New Schedule dialog. partial schedules are shown for illustration purposes. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. select Bold to display the schedule headers in bold font. 8 Click OK. Create a room schedule 1 In the Project Browser. The wider column makes it easier to read the door descriptions.Modify the width of a schedule column on the sheet 17 Select the door schedule on the sheet. 18 Select the control at the top of the schedule for the Family and Type column and drag it to the right to expand the column width. You also add programmed rooms to the schedule for the public spaces in the building. 19 On the Design Bar. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save. Select the fields to display as columns in the room schedule 4 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. The Number field is moved under Scheduled fields. right-click in the Design Bar. 5 Using the same method. Notice that several rooms have been defined in the floor plan. select Rooms. you create a room schedule for the first floor plan. NOTE In some cases in this tutorial. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Modify.

492 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . The bold header is not noticeable until you place the schedule on a drawing sheet. for Name. For 105. 12 Edit the room names in the schedule: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the schedule. A new row is displayed at the bottom of the schedule. and press ENTER. and press ENTER. click New.NOTE The Appearance settings only take effect when the schedule is placed on a drawing sheet. select Corridor. For 103. select Storage. For 102. 11 Using the same method. add 5 more rooms. enter Corridor. next to Rows. The rooms are displayed at the bottom of the list and numbered sequentially. 10 Edit the number to be 101. and the Level and Area values are displayed as Not Placed because the room is not placed in the floor plan. and press ENTER. 101-106. enter Building Entry. For 104. for room 101. enter Storage. The room Number is U17-9. Add new rooms to the schedule 9 On the Options Bar.

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 4 Click OK.rvt. select 9. and press ENTER. click Override. 6 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar.■ For 106. For Room Separation. click the bright green swatch. Add room separation lines 5 Zoom in to the center of the building. enter Stair. you add room separation lines. place rooms from a program list. under Visibility/Graphics Overrides. In the Lines field. You also change the bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas of the plan. and click OK. and click OK. For Weight. under Floor Plans. Specify style for room separation lines 1 In the Project Browser. 13 Click File menu ➤ Save. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. click Room Separation. Under Custom colors. under Projection/Surface. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 493 . 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. double-click Level 1. In the Line Graphics dialog. 3 Change the display of room separation lines: ■ In the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click the Color field. and modify room names. click the Lines field. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List In this exercise. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. expand Lines.

8 On the Design Bar. 494 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . click Modify.7 Click to add 2 room separation lines to the right side of the drawing in the corridor. Draw a vertical separation line from the wall endpoint to the new corridor separation line. draw the horizontal line. First. Place rooms from a program list 9 On the Design Bar. click Room.

select 102 Storage. select 101 Building Entry. enter 2400 mm. for Room. 13 For Offset. 12 On the Options Bar. for Room. 10 On the Options Bar. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 495 . 11 Click to place the room in the newly-defined entry area (lower-right).Placed rooms are indicated with a crosshair graphic in the drawing.

18 In the Project Browser. double-click Room Schedule. 15 Use the same method to place the following rooms. and zoom in to the Corridor. Place 104 in the space to the left of 103. Place 105 in the lower space to the left of the kitchen. Place 106 in the space with the stairs. under Schedules/Quantities. click Modify. Change the room bounding behavior of walls 17 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1. 16 On the Design Bar.14 Click to place the room in the area to the left of Building Entry. These values will change after you change the room bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas. 496 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . under Floor Plans. Notice the area values for the Storage rooms in the schedule. as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Place 103 in the space above room 101.

click Modify. Create key schedule 24 On the View tab of the Design Bar. while pressing CTRL. 28 Click OK to create the new room style schedule. enter Units. enter As Selected. 27 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 22 On the Design Bar. 29 On the Options Bar. select Base Finish. 30 For Key Name. as shown: 20 On the Options Bar. Notice that the area for the storage rooms has increased as a result of the change in the room bounding behavior of the walls. and for all 3 finishes. 23 In the Project Browser. click (Properties). Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 497 . select the 3 small walls (in the 2 storage areas). under Available fields. 25 In the New Schedule dialog. click New to add a new row. and click OK. click Schedule/Quantities. double-click Room Schedule. clear Room Bounding. and click OK. Floor Finish. 26 Select Schedule keys. The Room Style Schedule displays without data. under Category. and Wall Finish. and click Add. 21 In the Element Properties dialog.19 While pressing CTRL. select Rooms. under Constraints.

for Fields. The Room Style column is added to the Room Schedule. 42 In the Filter dialog. click Check None. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Add. Zoom flyout. click (Filter Selection). and click OK. Specify the Room Style for Level 1 rooms 38 In the Project Browser. 32 In the Project Browser. select Units.31 Using the same method. add 2 more key names: Service and Public. click Edit. 37 Under U17-8. 39 On the View toolbar. click Zoom To Fit. for Available fields. double-click Level 1. double-click Room Schedule. under Floor Plans. 35 Click OK twice. select Rooms. 41 On the Options Bar. under Other. for Room Style. 40 Draw a selection box around floor plan. 34 In the Schedule Properties dialog. under Schedules/Quantities. and click Properties. 36 In the Project Browser. click Room Style. All rooms are selected in the floor plan. right-click Room Schedule. 498 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling .

and click OK. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. 5 For Title. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. 103. click (Duplicate). under Schedules/Quantities. enter Room Type. and apply it to the Level 1 view. 3 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. at the warning prompt. click (Properties). expand Floor Plans. For rooms 102 and 105. click OK. for Room Style. Create a room color scheme 1 In the Project Browser. and 106. double-click Room Schedule. 45 In the Project Browser. for Name. 4 In the New Color Scheme dialog. and double-click Level 1. 46 Edit the Room Style for rooms 101 through 106: ■ ■ For rooms 101. 11 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. select Public.rvt. under Views (all). right-click Level 1.43 On the Options Bar. The Room Style specification will be used later to determine color fill in a room color diagram. 104. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. 7 Since you are creating a new color scheme. and click Properties. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Color Fill Schemes. You also edit the colors used in the color scheme and modify the properties of the color scheme legend. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. click the Color Scheme field. select Room Style. and click OK. under Floor Plans. and click OK. 9 In the Project Browser. Creating a Room Color Diagram In this exercise. select Units. enter Room Type. 8 Click OK. All rooms on Level 1 now have the room style defined. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 499 . under Identity Data. you create a room color scheme (based on the type of the rooms in the floor plan). select Room Type. 6 For Color. Notice that the Room Style is Units for all rooms on Level 1. select Service. 47 Click File menu ➤ Save.

expand Lines. 19 In the first row of the Scheme Definition table (none). and click OK. click Color Scheme Legend. 20 In the Options panel at the bottom of the dialog. select the color legend. click Edit Color Scheme. click Modify. select blue. 13 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. 21 In the second row of the table (Public). click the value in the Color column. 16 On the Design Bar. under Custom color. select Foreground. clear Visible. click Edit. 15 Click in the lower right of the drawing area to place the legend. for Display Color Fill in. and click OK twice. 500 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . 18 On the Options Bar. and clear Room Separation. 22 In the Color dialog. Change the fill colors applied to the rooms 17 In the drawing area. Add a color scheme legend 14 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. A legend displays at the tip of the cursor.12 For Visibility/Graphics Overrides.

click Edit/New. under Graphics. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 501 . on the Options Bar. for Size. 24 Click OK. click 26 In the Element Properties dialog. 28 Under Title Text. 27 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK twice. for Swatch Width. enter 5 mm. enter 25 mm. (Properties).23 Use the same method to change the colors for Service and Units to cyan and gray respectively. Specify properties for the legend colors and title 25 With the legend still selected.

you have already determined the roof configuration for the building. 30 Click File menu ➤ Save. You then add formulas to the material takeoff to produce cost estimates. 502 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling .rvt. 2 Zoom in to the roof area of the building. You learn to change the roof family type and create a material takeoff schedule for the roofing materials. Create a material takeoff 1 In the Project Browser. double-click {3D}. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. Creating a Material Takeoff In this exercise. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. under 3D Views. click Modify.29 On the Design Bar.

add Material: Description and Material: Area to the Scheduled fields. 8 On the Fields tab of the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. select Family and Type. 10 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. Clear Itemize every instance. Select Grand totals. and click OK. select Material: Description. 12 Click OK. select Basic Roof : Wood Joist . 9 Using the same method. under Category. and specify the following values: ■ ■ Under Fields. Under Field formatting. For Then by.EPDM. Creating a Material Takeoff | 503 . 7 In the New Material Takeoff dialog. 4 In the Type Selector. and specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. The Roof Materials Takeoff Schedule displays. select the roof of the building and the smaller roof for the elevator penthouse. under Available fields.3 While pressing CTRL. click Family and Type. and click Add. click Modify.Insulation on Plywood Deck . 11 Click the Formatting tab. 6 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Material Takeoff. select Calculate totals. 13 Expand the column widths to see all of the information. select Roofs. 5 On the Design Bar. select Material: Area.

35 The Estimated cost is calculated. click Edit. enter the following values: Material: Description EPDM Plywood Rigid Insulation Wood Joist Value 16 13. and click Properties. 504 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . 19 For Formula. for the Material: Cost field. 23 In the Material Takeoff. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. 20 Click OK. and under Fields. right-click Roof Material Takeoff. 22 For Field formatting. 24 In the Project Browser. and click Add. 17 Click Calculated Value. for Fields. 18 In the Calculated Value dialog. 21 Click the Formatting tab. 16 In the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. The /(1000mm^2) is required to remove the formatting of the fields so the cost estimate value can be calculated. click Estimated Cost. under Other. right-click Roof Material Takeoff. select Calculate totals.TIP Double-click the column dividers to expand the columns to fit the text. enter Estimated Cost. under Available fields. click Material: Cost. for Name. enter Material: Area*Material: Cost /(1000mm^2).40 50. and click Properties. and click OK twice. Add cost information and a formula to calculate estimated cost 14 In the Project Browser.80 5.

28 Click OK 3 times.25 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit. creating a generic tag to tag the family. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and are defined and stored in an external file. and reporting the shared parameters. and schedule the total distance of each path. tag the line. For Units. and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. you learn how to use shared parameters to define additional parameters that are not included in predefined instance and type parameters. ensuring consistency across families and projects. under Fields. 29 Click File menu ➤ Save. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters. select 2 decimal places. Creating a Shared Parameter File In this exercise. An example of the use of shared parameters is the need to add specific parameters to a family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not present by default. You draw a travel path line. In this lesson. Scheduling Shared Parameters | 505 . you create an exiting plan for the building. Adding shared parameters to a family allows you to create a tag and schedule to track this specific information. For Rounding. adding the shared parameters to a family. 26 On the Formatting tab of the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. regardless of category. click Estimated Cost. This lesson demonstrates the solution for this situation and covers the process of setting up shared parameters. for Formatting. Their values may also be aggregated and reported within Revit MEP multi-category schedules. 27 Click Field Format. either within family components or within the project template. click Training Files. Scheduling Shared Parameters In this lesson. you create a shared parameter file. select Fixed. These shared parameters can be added to any family.

enter Travel Distance. 9 Under Parameters. click Create. under Floor Plans. 6 In the New Parameter Group dialog.1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 10 In the Parameter Properties dialog.rvt. click Training Files. enter Path ID. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family In this exercise. and click OK.txt. and save the exercise file as m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress. enter Exiting. for File name. 5 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. double-click Exiting Plan-Level 1. 7 Under Parameters. click New. for Name. for Type of Parameter. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. under Groups. 3 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. NOTE Shared parameter files are typically stored at a network location for use in all projects. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog. enter OfficeStandardsParameters. click New. 12 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 506 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . 11 Click OK. for Name. and click OK. 2 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters. and click Save. You then create a generic tag to tag the family. click New. you add the shared parameters you created to a family file. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. for Name. select Length.rvt. 4 In the left pane of the Save As dialog.

enter Length. for Travel Distance Formula. and click Select. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 10 Use the same method to add Travel Distance as a shared parameter. and click OK. verify that Parameter group is Exiting and that Path ID is selected. 13 On the Design Bar. and click OK. Click Training Files. select Constraints. 11 In the Family Types dialog. 14 If necessary. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family | 507 . 12 Click Apply. group it under Dimensions. 9 In the Family Types dialog. and click OK.2 In the Left pane of the Open dialog. select Shared parameter. click Load into Projects.rvt. in the Load into Projects dialog. under Parameters. 3 On the Design Bar. The Family Types dialog displays the parameters that are currently available for this family category. and click OK. If you have multiple projects open. under Dimensions. the Load into Projects dialog displays for you to select the project. following the equals symbol (=). and select Instance. click Add. Create a tag using shared parameters 15 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Annotation Symbol. click Add. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Travel Line. select m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress. 7 For Group parameter under.rfa. under Parameters. 6 In the Shared Parameters dialog. 4 In the Family Types dialog. click Family Types. 8 Select Instance. otherwise the family loads into the current project.

and click Open. and open Metric\Templates\M_Generic Tag. click Label. 23 In the Shared Parameters dialog. 18 Zoom in to the intersection of the reference planes.rft.rft. 20 Click the intersection of the reference planes in the drawing window to display the Select Parameter dialog. under Parameters. 22 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 26 On the Design Bar. 24 On the Design Bar. 21 In the Select Parameter dialog. 17 Select Generic Tag. 19 On the Design Bar. 508 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . 25 Click above the intersection of the reference planes. click Modify. and click OK 3 times. click Label. and use the same method to select the Path ID parameter. select Travel Distance.16 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. click Select. click Add.

and click Save. You then tag the travel lines and give them a path ID. enter M_Travel Distance Tag.Tagging. 31 On the Design Bar.rvt. for File Name. Create Level 1 exiting travel path 1 In the Project Browser. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 509 . Placing. select Path ID. you create a schedule that totals the travel distances in each exiting plan for each path ID. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress. verify that m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_Progress. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. you place the travel line family in the Level 1 and Level 2 exiting plans. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters In this exercise.Level 1. 29 Click File ➤ Save As.rvt is selected.rfa. double-click Exiting Plan . and move it down. click Load into Projects. 33 Click File menu ➤ Save. 28 Select the Note in the upper-left area of the drawing window. and press DELETE. so that it is positioned just above Travel Distance. 30 In the Save As dialog. and click OK.Tagging. After the lines are tagged. 32 On the Load into Projects dialog.27 In the drawing window. under Floor Plans. Placing.

3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click in the center of the corridor. above the exterior door as shown. 510 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . click Component. 5 Specify a start point for the path at the left end of the corridor as shown. select Chain. 6 Move the cursor to the right. 4 On the Options Bar.2 Zoom in to the corridor.

and click outside of the building. Create Level 2 exiting travel path 15 In the Project Browser. 13 While pressing CTRL. click Component. select the 2 dashed travel lines. under Constraints. 17 On the Options Bar. double click Exiting Plan . 11 Select each of the travel path lines. click Modify. and click OK. clear Leader. 8 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. enter 1-1. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. and click (Properties). 12 On the Design Bar.Level 2. click Tag ➤ By Category. for Path ID. verify that Chain is selected. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 511 . 10 On the Options Bar. Placing. through the door.7 Move the cursor down. 9 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.Tagging.

20 On the Design Bar. move the cursor to the left. 512 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling .18 Click in the horizontal corridor below the door on the right side of the floor plan. click Modify. 21 On the Design Bar. click Component. and click above the door to the stair. move the cursor near the right corner. and click. 22 Click at the center starting point. 19 Move the cursor up through the door. and click to specify the first segment of the path as shown.

and click OK. enter Level 1 Exit Distance. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 513 . click Modify.23 Move the cursor down. 28 While pressing CTRL. 27 On the Design Bar. verify that <Multi-Category> is selected. 32 In the New Schedule dialog. Create a schedule to total the paths on each plan 31 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. under Category.Tagging. 26 Select each of the travel path lines. under Constraints. 30 Use the same method to specify the Path ID for the right exit path to 2-2. click Modify. click Tag ➤ By Category. and click OK. 24 On the Design Bar. 25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select the 2 dashed travel lines for the left exit path. Placing. enter 2-1. 33 For Name. (Properties). for Path ID. and click 29 In the Element Properties dialog. and click in the stair.

and in the third field. 514 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . while pressing CTRL. select Calculate Totals. and click OK twice. and click Properties. The Level 1 Exit Distance schedule displays. enter Level 2 Exit Distance. select Travel Distance. select Path ID. 45 In the Rename View dialog. right-click the Design Bar. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and click Rename. 41 Under Fields. 49 Click File menu ➤ Save. 44 In the Project Browser. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes In this lesson. click Schedule/Quantities. under Available fields. you create a wall schedule that includes columns for the Uniformat Assembly Codes and assembly descriptions of the scheduled walls. enter 2-. click Training Files. Create a wall schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar.rvt. 38 For Sort by. and under Field formatting. The Level 2 Exit Distance schedule displays. for Filter. in the second field. 43 In the Project Browser. 46 In the Project Browser. right-click Copy of Level 1 Exit Distance. click Edit. 47 In the Element Properties dialog. 42 Click OK. and click Add. 39 Clear Itemize every instance. and click View. for Filter by. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions In this exercise. enter 1-. under Schedules/Quantities. in the third field. you schedule Uniformat Assembly Codes as they are applied to Revit MEP components. select contains. 37 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. select Path ID. right-click Level 2 Exit Distance. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active.34 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. select Path ID and Travel Distance. 40 Click the Formatting tab. and click OK. 35 Click the Filter tab. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format. right-click Level 1 Exit Distance. 48 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 36 For Filter by. under Other. In the left pane of the Open dialog. in the first field.

and click Properties.Fixed Partitions.Interiors\C10 . and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Area Volume Width Length Assembly Code Assembly Description 5 Click OK to complete the schedule. 8 In the Choose Assembly Code dialog.2 In the New Schedules dialog. click the Value field. select the following fields. Assign an assembly code to a wall type in the project 6 In the Project Browser. expand Families\Walls\Basic Wall. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions | 515 . 7 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK twice.Interior Construction\C1010 Partitions\C1010100 .152 mm. for Assembly Code. click C1010145 . right-click Generic . and click the browse button. select Walls. 4 Under Available fields. under Categories. expand C . and click OK.Partitions . 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. click the Fields tab.Drywall w/ Metal Stud.

5 Enter RevitDSN for the name of the DSN. click Export ➤ ODBC Database.mdb for Database Name. you learn how to export project information into a Microsoft® Access 2000 database. enter Revit_Project. under Database. 516 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . click OK. 3 Click New. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access In this exercise. Exporting Project Information with ODBC In this lesson. The process that you use to export the database is similar for any other ODBC-compliant database. 4 In the Create New Data Source dialog. under Database Name. 8 In the New Database dialog. click Create. expand the Assembly Description column to see the description. 6 Click Finish. click Training Files. and click Next. Additionally. 10 Close the exercise file. select the Microsoft Access driver (*mdb). 12 Click OK in the remaining dialogs. tables that list instances only are created for levels and rooms because these categories do not have types. 10 When the confirmation displays.rvt. and click OK to create the database. you learn how to export project information to an ODBC (Open DataBase Connectivity) compatible database. click OK in the dialog.9 In the schedule. Revit MEP creates 2 tables for the following categories of elements (see below): one that lists all of the element instances in a project and one that lists all of the element types in a project. and open the database in Microsoft Access. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and click Next. 9 Under Directories. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 In the Select Data Source dialog. 1 On the File menu. click the File Data Source tab. select a location for the database file. 7 In the ODBC Microsoft Access Setup dialog. 11 In the OBDC Microsoft Access Setup dialog. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format.

A unique element ID is used to identify exported elements. 13 Close the exercise file. For example. In addition to the tables for instances and types in a category. which is used for choosing one of the keys from the key schedule. instance tables include a TypeId column containing the ID of the instance’s type. and some instance tables include a RoomId column containing the ID of the room that the instance is in. as long as the category is one of the categories that Revit MEP exports. so that each table of elements includes an Id column. Elements IDs are also used to establish relationships between elements in different tables. Each key schedule gives elements in its category a new parameter. a table is also created for each key schedule in a project. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access | 517 . This table contains one row for each Uniformat Assembly Code. These parameters are also exported and contain the ID of the key element. in addition to the Id column. The exported columns are the same as the columns in the key schedule. The table of types includes an Assembly Code column that references the Assembly Codes table. One final table is also exported: Assembly Codes. The columns of the table are Assembly Code and Assembly Description.

518 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling .

and how to annotate and dimension your Revit MEP 2008 projects. you learn how to change the base elevation of a project. 519 .Annotating and Dimensioning 8 In this tutorial.

You can change the base elevation without changing the elevation value of every other level in the project.Changing the Base Elevation of a Project In this lesson. as the base elevation of most projects is rarely at 0 mm. or you can change the base elevation and add its value to the levels above it. You accomplish this in Revit MEP by defining levels as either project or shared levels. you learn how to relocate the base elevation of a project. Project levels report elevation relative to other levels in the project 520 | Chapter 8 Annotating and Dimensioning .

After you define the building levels as shared and relocate the project. Relocating a Project | 521 . Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt. you relocate the base elevation of a building from 0 m to 10000 m. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Relocating a Project In this exercise. the height of the elevations above Level 1 report height relative to Level 1.

click (Properties). enter8 mm Head . to better demonstrate how shared levels work. Level 1 displays an elevation value of 0 mm. you must set the Elevation Base parameter to Shared. 10 On the View menu. 5 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Click Duplicate. click Edit/New. expand Elevations (Building Elevation).Shared Elevation. 6 Click OK twice. and press ENTER. The south elevation is displayed. The elevation of the other levels remains the same. By selecting the Level 1 line. you specify the point (0 mm) from which you want to relocate the project. 3 On the Options Bar. you specify the new location of the project. 9 Move the cursor above the elevation line. for Elevation Base. and you create a new shared level type for only Level 1. and click OK. so changing the height Level 1 would change it only in relation to the other levels in the project. However. In the Name dialog. The base elevation now reads 10000 mm. the parameter for all the levels in the project would change. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. select Shared. Under Constraints. In order for the levels to report height relative to the new base elevation after the project is relocated. expand Views (all). enter 10000 mm.Define Level 1 as a shared level 1 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. If you did that now. 8 Select the Level 1 line. 522 | Chapter 8 Annotating and Dimensioning . By entering 10000 mm in this step. and double-click South. The levels in the project are not shared. Relocate the project 7 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project. 2 Select the Level 1 line to display it as red. only the Elevation Base parameter of Level 1 is shared at this time.

Relocating a Project | 523 . as well as other views of the building model. 12 In the Type Selector. select Level : 8 mm Head . The changes in elevation have propagated to this view. click Modify. double-click North.Define the remaining project levels as shared 11 Select the Loft level line. under Elevations. The reported value of the Loft level changes to take the new base elevation value into consideration. 14 In the Project Browser.Shared Elevation. 13 On the Design Bar.

click Modify. and the Roof Plan level. 524 | Chapter 8 Annotating and Dimensioning . All the building levels now report elevations relative to the base elevation.15 Define the remaining levels as shared: ■ ■ ■ Press and hold CTRL.Shared Elevation. On the Design Bar. and select Levels 2-4. In the Type Selector. the Penthouse level. select Level : 8 mm Head .

and angular dimensions. Dimensioning | 525 .rvt Place an overall linear dimension 1 In the Project Browser. In this case.16 If you want to save your changes. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. and learn to work with dimensioning constraints to control placement of elements in the model. permanent dimensions are created automatically. Temporary dimensions display automatically when you create and insert components. click File menu ➤ Save As. multi-segmented. In Revit MEP. you learn how to create permanent dimensions to control and document your building models. Linear and multi-segmented dimensions Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Creating Dimensions In this exercise. “Dimensioning” on page 525. and double-click Level 1. radial. you learn how to use dimensioning tools and constraints in Revit MEP to dimension and space planter boxes on the north side of the building. expand Floor Plans. Permanent dimensions must be explicitly created. except when you sketch profiles to complete families. there are 2 types of dimensions: temporary and permanent. Dimensioning In this lesson. and save the exercise file with a unique name. although you must turn on their visibility to view them. 17 Proceed to the next lesson. You place linear. expand Views (all).

and when a green dashed line displays along the right side of the curtain wall. click Dimension. By default. 4 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top right side of the view. snap to wall centerlines.2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 3 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top left side of the view. select it. dimensions are aligned. and when a green dashed line displays along the left side of the curtain. select it. 526 | Chapter 8 Annotating and Dimensioning . The default dimensioning options display on the Options Bar. and are created by selecting individual reference points.

Only aligned and angular permanent dimensions can be constrained in this way. 6 Click the lock that displays on the dimension string to lock the dimension. The lock displays as locked. Place a multi-segmented dimension 8 On the Design Bar. Creating Dimensions | 527 . and click to place the dimension. click Dimension. click Modify. indicating that you cannot change the distance between the curtain walls without first unlocking the dimension.5 Move the cursor above the view. 7 On the Design Bar.

and move the cursor over the left endpoint of the first planter to the right. 11 Using the same method. and select it. for Prefer. 528 | Chapter 8 Annotating and Dimensioning . click to make all the dimension segments equal and reposition the planters equal distances apart from one another. and continue to select the endpoints and faces of the planters.9 Select the left side of the left curtain wall as you did in a previous step. 17 Move the cursor up. 14 Move the cursor to the planter on the right. above the plan view of the building. and click to place the multi-segmented dimension. 15 Move the cursor to the right. select Wall Faces. 12 13 On the Options Bar. Make the dimension segments equal to space the planters at equal distances 18 With the multi-segmented dimension selected. 16 After you select the reference points on the final planter. 10 Press TAB until the left endpoint of the planter displays. but below the first dimension that you placed. select the right endpoint of the planter. and select its left exterior face. select the right side of the curtain wall.

25 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Place a radial dimension with a Typ. 21 On the Design Bar. 27 Select the blue square grip that displays under the dimension value and drag it slightly up and to the right. click Modify. 22 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Radial). suffix 20 Zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4. click Dimension.19 On the Basics tab. For Prefer. select Wall faces. and select it. and specify a point to place the dimension. click Modify. 24 Move the cursor outside the wall. Creating Dimensions | 529 . 23 Move the cursor over the left exterior curved face of the planter until it highlights. 26 Select the radial dimension.

click Modify. on the Options Bar. 30 On the Basics tab.28 With the dimension still selected. and click OK. 32 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click (Properties). For Prefer. 29 In the Element Properties dialog. 530 | Chapter 8 Annotating and Dimensioning . 34 Select the horizontal line. click Dimension. 33 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Angular). enter Typ. for Suffix.. Place an angular dimension 31 Zoom to the planter near grid line 5. verify Wall faces is selected.

38 Proceed to the next exercise. 35 Select the left exterior face of the planter. instead of the wall and each individual opening reference point. you select only the wall. Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions In this exercise. When you dimension the wall. “Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions” on page 531. click Modify. 37 On the Basics tab. you learn to automatically dimension a linear wall and its openings (windows) on the Level 3 floor plan of the building. This automatic dimensioning option provides a convenient way to quickly dimension walls with multiple openings.This line is the edge of a mass that represents the neighboring building. 36 Move the cursor to the left to resize the dimension arc. Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions | 531 . and click to place the dimension.

expand Views (all). You will dimension the short bottom horizontal wall that includes 3 windows. Click OK. 532 | Chapter 8 Annotating and Dimensioning . select Wall centerlines. For Pick.rvt Open the Level 3 floor plan view 1 In the Project Browser. Select automatic dimensioning options 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Click Options. and select Widths. and that the opening widths are referenced in the overall dimension string. 3 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Prefer. select Entire Walls.Automatic wall dimension Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. expand Floor Plans. These options ensure that the wall dimension includes the openings. select Openings. 4 In the Automatic Dimension Options dialog: ■ ■ Under Select References. and double-click Level 3. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. click Dimension.

where the witness lines referring to interior walls would be located on the centerline of each wall. for a multi-segmented dimension. and learn how to change the location of witness lines after you place dimensions. “Controlling Witness Lines” on page 533. 2 Zoom to the planter on which you placed a radial dimension. you learn to override dimension witness line settings as you place dimensions. and double-click Level 1. and click to place the automatic dimension string. Controlling Witness Lines In this exercise. However. When you place dimensions. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. you may want to locate the two outermost witness lines on the exterior face of each wall.Place the dimension 5 Select the bottom exterior wall. expand Floor Plans. 7 On the Basics tab. Controlling Witness Lines | 533 .rvt Override default dimension witness lines 1 In the Project Browser. 6 Move the cursor down below the plan view. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. expand Views (all). click Modify. you may need to override their settings on an instance basis. For example. in some cases. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. you specify their origin on the Options Bar.

move the cursor down. 4 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Prefer. 5 Move the cursor over the left side of the planter. click Dimension. select Individual References. 534 | Chapter 8 Annotating and Dimensioning . 6 Press TAB to cycle through the selection options until the left face of the planter highlights. select the right edge of the planter. and select it.3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click to place the dimension. 7 Using the same method. For Pick. verify Wall centerlines is selected.

11 Move the cursor down. 10 Using the same method. 9 Press TAB until the bottom left endpoint is highlighted.8 Move the cursor over the bottom of the planter on which you placed the angular dimension. Controlling Witness Lines | 535 . select the bottom right endpoint. and select it. and specify a point to place the dimension.

15 Moving the cursor to the right. select it. and zoom in on the right end of the dimension. 536 | Chapter 8 Annotating and Dimensioning . 13 On the Options Bar. select Wall centerlines. select the centerline of each of the 6 remaining partition walls. click Dimension. Adjust the witness line location on the end dimensions to align them to the faces of wall 17 Select the dimension that you just placed.Dimension the partition walls to center lines 12 On the Basics tab. 14 Move the cursor over the left partition wall in the top left corner of the plan. 16 On the Design Bar. select the green grip that displays in the middle of the tick mark. for Prefer. 18 Press and hold SHIFT. click Modify. and click to place the dimension. and drag the dimension down the wall. and when the wall centerline highlights.

and using the same methods. After you create the new family type. 21 Zoom to the partition wall on the left side of the plan. 23 Proceed to the next exercise. and click the blue middle grip until the dimension aligns with the outer face of the partition wall. Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions In this exercise. 20 Release SHIFT. 22 On the Basics tab. create a witness line gap and align the dimension to the outer left face of the wall. “Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions” on page 537. click Modify. select the top blue grip and drag it up to create a witness line gap.19 Release SHIFT. you learn how to duplicate the dimension family type of dimension on the floor plan and then modify its parameters to create an office standard dimension style. you change the Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions | 537 .

3 In the Element Properties dialog. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4. and select the lower dimension. text font. and text size parameters to create dimensions that better conform to your office standards. Under Text. click Duplicate. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. 2 Click (Properties).2 mm. select CityBlueprint. 538 | Chapter 8 Annotating and Dimensioning . for Tick Mark. and click OK. for Text Size. enter Office Standard.dimension tick mark. 5 In the Name dialog. select Arrow 30 Degree. Angular and linear dimensions with office standard text and arrows Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.rvt Duplicate an existing dimension type 1 On the Level 1 floor plan. click Edit/New. Modify the parameters of the new Office Standard type 6 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. enter 3. For Text Font.

If CityBlueprint does not display in the list. ■ Click OK twice. 8 Move the cursor to the planter on the right. select another font. Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions | 539 . click Modify. select Linear Dimension Style: Office Standard. and select the bottom dimension.NOTE Fonts that are available in this list are the Windows fonts installed on your system. 7 On the Basics tab. 9 In the Type Selector. 10 On the Basics tab. The dimension that you selected previously now displays the new Office Standard family type. click Modify.

create a new angular dimension type. “Creating Text Annotation” on page 540.11 Using the same method. You learn how to change the text font and size of text notes. 12 Proceed to the next lesson. 540 | Chapter 8 Annotating and Dimensioning . and how to add leaders to the text notes. and modify it to use the office standard parameters. Creating Text Annotation In this lesson. you add text notes on the Level 1 floor plan of the building. You create a new office standard text note type by duplicating the family type of a note on the floor plan. select the angular dimension on the planter.

click Text.rvt Add a text note 1 On the Level 1 floor plan. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. but below the upper dimension string. Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 541 . 3 On the Options Bar. you add text notes to the Level 1 floor plan. 4 Move the cursor above grid line 4.Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan In this exercise. and click and drag to create a text box. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. click (None). zoom to planter near grid line 5. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. for Leader.

If so. 11 Under Text. enter 6 mm. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit/New. enter EXISTING BUILDING. 542 | Chapter 8 Annotating and Dimensioning . select and drag the top left blue symbol to relocate the text box. and click OK. click Modify. and click OK. You may have to move the text box to avoid overlapping other elements on the floor plan. enter 6 mm Arial Notes. under Graphics. 10 In the Name dialog box. and click OK. and click . 9 In the Type Properties dialog. 7 Select the text box. Create a new text note family type by duplicating the existing type 6 On the Design Bar. 8 In the Element Properties dialog box.5 In the text box. select Arc Leaders. for Text Size. click Duplicate.

15 On the Design Bar. Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 543 . click Text. click Modify. A downward pointing leader displays on the right side of the Planting Bed text box. 17 On the Options Bar: ■ Click (Add Right Arc Leader). and enter Planting Bed.Create a text box with leaders 13 On the Design Bar. 14 Create another text box to the right of grid line 4. 16 Select the Planting Bed text box.

enter Standard Notes. Click OK twice. for New. click Modify. click Edit/New. Under Graphics. 19 Select the blue grip at the end of the left leader. 544 | Chapter 8 Annotating and Dimensioning . Under Text. 20 On the Design Bar.■ Click (Add Left Arc Leader). Another leader displays on the left side of the Planting Bed text box. for Text font. In the Rename dialog. select Arrow 30 Degree. 21 Select the Planting Bed text box to select both the text and leaders. for Leader Arrowhead. and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. 24 On the Design Bar. and click OK. Click Rename. select CityBlueprint. click Modify. and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. Reposition the leaders 18 Select the blue grip at the end of the right leader. and click 22 In the Element Properties dialog. 23 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ .

click Text. click to place the text box. over the Planting Bed text. 27 On the Options Bar. click (Arc). 26 In the Type Selector. select Text: Standard Notes.Add another note using the Standard Note type 25 On the Design Bar. 30 When green dashed lines that indicate it is aligned with the Planting Bed text. for Leader. Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 545 . 28 Click the inside bottom face of the rounded planter near grid line 3. 29 Move the cursor up and to the right.

Wall. 32 If you want to save your changes. and enter 457 mm Conc. click File menu ➤ Save As.31 Click in the text box. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 546 | Chapter 8 Annotating and Dimensioning . 33 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.

You can detail directly in a view of the building information model. you use a separate drafting view in which to create the detail. 547 . The "drafted" detail that you create is not parametrically linked to the building model. and metal studs. you learn how to create details in Revit MEP 2008. These components display at the required scale. like a standard door header condition. plywood. For a detail that you do not want to associate with the model.Detailing 9 In this tutorial. using detail components to represent materials like lumber.

as well as detail lines. You define that view by creating a callout view within a section view. you add notes and dimensions to the detail view. you trace over the building model geometry. you must define the view in which you want to create a detail. You load detail components.Creating a Detail from a Building Model In this lesson. After you add components. click Training Files. and then complete the detail by adding break lines and text notes. you detail the roof overhang of a project building. They are also view specific. In the left pane of the Open dialog. region objects. The detail components that you add to the view are two-dimensional family objects. that you add to the view are visible only in this view. 548 | Chapter 9 Detailing . and use the model as an underlay for the detail. you detail the view of the roof edge. Detailing the View In this exercise. In order to detail from the building model. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. and insulation objects. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the callout view.rvt. which means that all detail components. add detail components.

Load and place a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. You load and place the component so that it is in the project to use in a repeating detail. click Duplicate. click Edit/New. navigate to Metric\Families\m_Corrugated Metal. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. 5 In the alert dialog. 13 In the Name dialog. for Pattern ➤ Detail. enter Corrugated Metal Siding. click Yes to load a Detail Items family. 8 Delete the component. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. 10 On the Options Bar. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK.Display a detail view 1 In the upper left corner of the building model. 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Detail Component. double-click the detail callout head.5mm. 7 In the drawing area. select Corrugated Metal. enter 406. 15 For Spacing. click in the space below the roof overhang to place the component. click the bottom of the exterior wall to select the start point. The roof overhang detail displays. for Graphics ➤ Display Model. 11 In the Element Properties dialog.rfa. Place a repeating detail 9 On the Design Bar. Detailing the View | 549 . select As underlay. 2 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. Exact location is not important. click Repeating Detail. 16 Click OK twice. and click Open. click Training Files. click . 17 In the drawing area.

Select the endpoint of the geometry of the corrugated metal component as the move start point. click (Move). 20 Move the component end point: ■ ■ ■ Select the corrugated metal component. click Detail Component.18 Move the cursor up to generate the graphics for the repeating detail. and press DELETE. 21 Select the original instance of the corrugated metal component. NOTE The detail component endpoint may not coincide with the geometry extents. Add lumber detail components 22 On the Design Bar. and on the Edit toolbar. click Load. click Modify. ■ Click Modify. 550 | Chapter 9 Detailing . 23 On the Options Bar. 19 On the Design Bar. Select the bottom edge of the roof joist as the move end point. Specify a point high enough so the siding reaches the underside of the roof overhang.

click Training Files. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Roof Edge Components.rvt. 29 In the Duplicate Types dialog. Load components as a group 27 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. Detailing the View | 551 . and place it in the detail view as shown. and click Open. press SPACEBAR 3 times. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 06-Wood and Plastic\06100-Rough Carpentry\06160-Sheathing\M_Plywood-Section. you load them as a group from a single file. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 150mm Nominal. click Training Files. Because you still have several components to load. verify that M_Plywood-Section 19mm is selected. and click Open. 30 On the Design Bar.rfa. TIP You may need to use the Move command to adjust the position of the plywood. 33 Click the top right corner of the plywood to select the insertion point. 25 In the Type Selector. 32 To properly orient the component. 26 Place the plywood component to the right of the metal component as shown in the following illustration. click Detail Component. 31 In the Type Selector. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 200mm Nominal.24 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 28 In the left pane of the Load File as Group dialog. click OK. 34 In the Type Selector.

NOTE You can also press SPACEBAR as you place the component to flip the justification. 39 Select the horizontal segment. Add insulation 40 On the Design Bar. 36 On the Options Bar. select Chain. select M_Gypsum Wallboard-Section : 16mm. 552 | Chapter 9 Detailing . and click Modify. 38 Click Modify. 37 Place the wallboard component as shown.Add wallboard detail component 35 In the Type Selector. click the Flip instance arrows. The wallboard segment is now on the underside of the roof joist. click Insulation.

■ Click Modify. and on the Edit toolbar. 46 In the Type Selector. as shown. 43 Click Modify. select to near side. Select the right midpoint of the 50 x 200mm component as the move end point. 44 Move the upper segment: ■ ■ ■ Select the upper segment of insulation. click Detail Component. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 300mm Nominal. For Offset. Select the left midpoint of the 50 x 200mm component as the move start point. 42 Place 2 segments of insulation.41 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Width. Add lumber components 45 On the Design Bar. click (Move). 47 Click to place the component at the lower left corner of the roof overhang as shown. Detailing the View | 553 . enter 140mm.

Adding Detail Lines In this exercise. Add detail lines 1 On the Design Bar. 49 Place the component directly above the 50 x 200mm component. you add lines to your detail. 51 Add the insulation above the plywood you just placed. click Detail Lines. 3 Sketch a detail line from the lower right corner of the 50 x 300mm component to the lower left corner of the 50 x 200mm component. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. select Thin Lines. as shown. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 53 Proceed to the next exercise. meaning they display only in this view. 554 | Chapter 9 Detailing . drag the endpoint up to the top of the 50 x 200mm component. Like detail components.rvt. “Adding Detail Lines” on page 554. 5 Select the vertical plywood component. select M_Rigid Insulation-Section : 63mm. 2 In the Type Selector. 52 Click Modify. they are view specific. 4 Click Modify. Add rigid insulation 50 In the Type Selector. and lock the component.48 In the Type Selector. select M_Plywood-Section : 19mm.

Adding Detail Lines | 555 . 9 Select the lines at the top of the 50 x 300mm component and the roof joist. enter 10mm. and press ENTER. as shown. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). click Detail Lines. Trim and extend the lines as necessary to get the desired result. 11 In the Type Selector. For Offset. 13 Add detail lines around the 50 x 300mm component. click Detail Lines. select Thin Lines. enter 10mm. 10 On the Design Bar. For Offset.Add offset lines 6 On the Design Bar. as shown. 12 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). and press ENTER. 7 In the Type Selector. select Medium Lines.

click (Draw). select Thin Lines. 17 Draw a horizontal line as shown. and draw the detail lines as shown. select Chain. 18 In the Type Selector. 15 Draw a small diagonal line at the bottom left corner of the 50 x 300mm component. and clear Chain. 16 On the Options Bar. 19 Zoom in to the area where the roof joist and the corrugated metal component abut. draw the detail lines as shown. as shown.Draw detail lines 14 On the Options Bar. 556 | Chapter 9 Detailing .

right-click Roof Overhang Detail. and click OK. Add a vapor barrier 25 On the Design Bar. select Vapor Barrier. the model elements such as walls and floors no longer display in this view. Adding Detail Lines | 557 . click Detail Lines. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. 22 In the Project Browser. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). under Views ➤ Detail Views (Detail). select the Penthouse level line. 24 On the View Control Bar. enter 10mm. right-click. What remains are the detail components and lines that you added.20 Move the top horizontal line down so that it overlays the Penthouse level line. 26 In the Type Selector. click ➤ Hide Crop Region. and press ENTER. for Graphics ➤ Display Model. 28 Select the interior edge of the vertical segment of gypsum wallboard. and click Properties. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. Modify display properties 21 In the drawing area. For Offset. When you turn the display model off. and then select the interior edge of the horizontal segment. select Do not display.

Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. press SPACEBAR as necessary. 33 If a break line does not completely mask the portion of the detail that it is intended to mask. select M_Break Line. Add text notes to the detail 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.29 On the Design Bar. 30 In the Type Selector. 32 Click Modify. click Text. click Detail Component. “Adding Text Notes” on page 558. 558 | Chapter 9 Detailing . 31 Add break lines at the bottom and the right of the detail. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding Text Notes In this exercise. TIP To rotate the break line as you place it. select the break line and use the shape handle grips to modify it. you add text notes to complete the detail.rvt.

click Dimension. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. 5 Click the left outer edge of the 50 x 300mm component. and click (Properties). Adding Text Notes | 559 . Click again to specify the location of the text box.2 On the Options Bar. for Text ➤ Suffix. Add a dimension to the detail 4 On the Design Bar. 6 Click Modify. 3 Add the leaders and notes as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click in the detail to specify the location of the arrow. 7 Select the dimension line. Enter the text. and click the left edge of the corrugated metal component.. enter Typ. click (Arc) to create an arced leader. Click in the drawing area to end the text insertion command.

8 Zoom in to the metal coping. Creating Detail Components In this exercise. Remove text notes 4 In the drawing area. select a text note. Create a duplicate drawing 1 In the Project Browser. clear Detail Items and Dimensions. “Creating Detail Components” on page 560. and click OK. right-click. Convert detail lines to components 5 Use a window to select the entire roof detail. and click Rename. and click OK.9 Click File menu ➤ Save. pressing TAB. select all the coping linework. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. and selecting the chain. 560 | Chapter 9 Detailing . 10 Proceed to the next exercise. click Select All Instances.Keynotes. right-click. 2 Select Copy of Roof Overhang Detail. enter Roof Overhang Detail . Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.rvt. click Roof Overhang Detail. while pressing CTRL. under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail). The selected lines need to be replaced with detail components in order for them to accept a keynote. and press DELETE. click 6 In the Filter dialog. right-click. (Filter Selection). 7 Click Modify. You can also select all the linework by highlighting a segment. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing. you modify the previously drawn detail so that you can annotate it with keynotes rather than text notes. and save the exercise file. on the Options Bar. 3 In the Rename View dialog.

rft. 21 To place the component. click the bottom left endpoint of the metal coping. 25 In the Filter dialog. 22 Click Modify. clear Detail Items. 20 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 13 Click the intersection of the reference planes to place the linework. Add components to the detail 19 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. and click Save. click Detail Component. 15 Use a window to select all linework.Keynotes view is not the open view. click . click Load into Projects. select Medium Lines. and click OK. and the component can be placed in the detail. in the Type Selector. enter Roof Edge. double-click it in the Project Browser. click Training Files. 16 Click Modify. 10 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. While pressing SHIFT. 12 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. navigate to your preferred location. for File name. and click Open. Creating Detail Components | 561 . The component family is now part of the roof overhang detail. NOTE If the Roof Overhang Detail . 17 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 23 Using a window. 11 In the left pane of the New dialog. 18 In the Save As dialog. 14 Click Modify. The original linework remains selected. 24 On the Options Bar. navigate to Metric\Templates\Metric Detail Component. deselect any extraneous lines that are also selected. select the coping.9 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard.

In the Keynotes dialog. 2 In the alert dialog. Add keynotes to components 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 4 Add the tag: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the drawing area. click Load. 63mm Rigid Insulation. 31 Using the same method used previously. “Adding Keynotes” on page 562. click Training Files.rvt. navigate to Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Keynote Tag.rfa.B5. The underlying linework is deleted and the detail component remains in the drawing. click Yes to load a Keynote Tag family to the project. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Detail Component. 28 On the Options Bar. and click Open.26 Press DELETE. navigate to 07000 ➤ 07200 ➤ 07210 ➤ 07210. 27 On the Design Bar. click Training Files. click on the upper end point of the drip edge to place the component. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. you place keynotes on objects. and click OK. Click the rigid insulation on the roof to place the tag. 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Click to place the leader arm. and add keynote data to components that do not have data associated with them. 30 In the drawing area. select the rigid insulation as the object to tag. 562 | Chapter 9 Detailing . delete the underlying linework.rfa. and click Open. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Adding Keynotes In this exercise. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Metal Fascia w_Drip Edge. click Keynote ➤ Element.

use keynote 06160.G1. For the 19mm Plywood Siding. 19mm Plywood. 9 In the Type Properties dialog.F1. 10 In the Keynotes dialog. select the metal fascia with drip edge. click Edit/New. use keynote 07645. For the 2 instances of the 16mm Gypsum Wallboard. the keynote is automatically read when you place the tag.D11.C1. use keynote 06160. Assign keynote parameter to a component 7 In the drawing area. FasciaProfile_1.D11. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For the 50 x 300. For the metal coping. use keynote 06110. Roof Edge4. use keynote 09250. use keynote 06110.F1. and click 8 In the Element Properties dialog. 13 Tag components: ■ (Properties). navigate to 07645. Tag the metal fascia with drip edge. 6 Click Modify. 11 Click OK 3 times.I1. For the 50 x 200. use keynote 06110. click Keynote ➤ Element. click in the Value column. 12 On the Design Bar. Adding Keynotes | 563 .D1.5 Tag additional components: ■ ■ For the plywood decking. For the 50 x 150. Because you defined the keynote parameter as part of the component properties. for Identity Data ➤ Keynote.

A8. click Detail Component. 4 In the Type Selector. and click Open. enter m_Medium Line Detail Component. 8 In the Save As dialog. 5 In the drawing area. 564 | Chapter 9 Detailing .rvt. click Training Files. 17 Keynote the component. you convert detail lines to detail components so that you can add keynotes to them. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. using keynote 07460. select Corrugated Metal. and click Save. and click Modify. for File name.20 Ga. navigate to Metric\Templates\Metric Detail Component line based. 7 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Creating Line-based Detail Components In this exercise. Create a detail component 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. 2 In the left pane of the New dialog. and select the right end point. a repeating detail cannot be keynoted. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. select the left end point of the reference line.rft. select the horizontal line under the roof overhang as shown. 3 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. select Medium Lines. click Lines. 6 Lock the line. 15 In the Type Selector. navigate to your preferred location. 18 Save the file. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. “Creating Line-based Detail Components” on page 564. 22mm Corrugated Steel . Convert detail lines to components 10 In the drawing area.14 On the Design Bar. click Load into Projects. You do this in order to keynote the component. 9 On the Design Bar. 16 Place an instance of the component directly on top of the bottom segment of the corrugated metal repeating component.

15 Click Modify. click Edit/New. select m_Light Line Detail Component. click in the Value column. click Detail Component. select m_Hidden Line Detail Component. The deleted line needs to be replaced with a detail component in order for it to accept a keynote. click Detail Component. and click OK. You add the components to the project and keynote them. for Identity Data ➤ Keynote. 14 Add the component in the location of the previously deleted horizontal line. 13 In the Type Selector. enter EPDM Membrane. navigate to 07000 ➤ 07500 ➤ 07530 ➤ 07530. and hidden) used in the view. 19 In the Name dialog. 29 In the drawing area. click the end points at the top of the roof. you create line-based detail components for other line weights (light. select Medium Line Detail Component. 20 Click OK 3 times. 34 In the Name dialog. click Detail Component. 27 On the Design Bar. invisible. click Duplicate. and m_Light Line Detail Component. and click (Properties). and click Open. 37 Click OK 3 times. 24 While pressing CTRL. click Edit/New. click Duplicate. 36 In the Keynotes dialog. 25 Next. 16 Select the component. 22 On the Options Bar.11 Press DELETE. Creating Line-based Detail Components | 565 . 23 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Load line-based detail components 21 On the Design Bar. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. 31 Select the component. 30 Click Modify. click Load. and click . Single-Ply Membrane Roofing. 28 In the Type Selector. click Training Files. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. 35 In the Type Properties dialog. 18 In the Type Properties dialog. Add light line components 26 Zoom to the roof overhang. m_Invisible Line Detail Component.A1. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. 12 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. enter Prefinished Metal Soffit Panel.

and click the lower end at the break line. Add a vapor barrier component 51 On the Design Bar. click 50 Move the air barrier to the right. on the Edit toolbar. (Move). name the component 50 x 200 Framing. 44 On the Design Bar. 39 Add the Light Line Detail Component to the underside of the overhang. 49 With the component selected. 54 Create the component by drawing over the vertical and horizontal dashed detail lines that represent the vapor barrier. 52 In the Type Selector. click Detail Component. and click .G1. 53 On the Options Bar. 42 Using the same method used previously. 46 Click Modify. and click .38 On the Design Bar. click Detail Component. select Chain. and assign it keynote 07260. 47 Select the component. 40 Click Modify. 48 Using the same method used previously. against the 3/4" plywood. name the component Air Barrier.A5. 566 | Chapter 9 Detailing . 43 Zoom to the repeating component. 45 Click the upper end of the repeating detail. 41 Select the component just added. select m_Hidden Line Detail Component. and assign it keynote 06110. click Detail Component.

58 Using the method used previously.55 Click Modify. Creating Line-based Detail Components | 567 . and Vapor Barrier. Add keynotes 59 Zoom to the drawing extents. 50 x 200 Framing. and assign it keynote 07260. 61 In the drawing area. 60 On the Design Bar. name the component Vapor Barrier. and click . leaving the detail component lines. add keynotes for the EPDM Membrane. 56 Delete both dashed detail lines. click Keynote ➤ Element.A4. Air Barrier. 57 Select the vertical hidden line component.

. Add information to the text file 1 In Windows Explorer.rfa. 64 Save the file as m_Invisible Line Detail Component. click Detail Component. 568 | Chapter 9 Detailing . 66 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. in the Type Selector. select the component.A1. 67 In the drawing area.txt. 71 Save the file. 68 Select the component. 69 Using the method used previously. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. The database file opens in a text editor. and click . draw a line in the center of the large vertical segment of insulation. select Invisible Lines. and press TAB. name the component Batt Insul. 65 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. add a keynote for the component. and close the text editor. 2 Add keynote information for the metal soffit: ■ ■ ■ ■ Position the cursor at the end of the line that begins with 07460. You are then able to assign the keynote to the component in the drawing. click Load into Projects. and double-click m_Example_RevitKeynotes. you add keynote information for a detail component to the database text file. navigate to Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2008\Training\Metric.rvt.Create an invisible line component 62 Click Window menu ➤ m_Medium Line Detail Component. Enter 07463. click File menu ➤ Save. Enter Pre-Finished Metal Soffit. and press TAB.rfa. and press ENTER. Enter 07460. 70 In the drawing area. Modifying a Keynote Database In this exercise. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 63 In the drawing area.A4. “Modifying a Keynote Database” on page 568. 3 In the text editor. and assign it keynote 07210.A9. 72 Proceed to the next exercise.

navigate to m_Example_RevitKeynotes. Work with keynotes 8 On the Design Bar. click Settings menu ➤ Keynoting. You can create details in drafting views when you do not need to create callout views from the building model. and click OK.txt. Creating a Drafted Detail In this lesson. and click to place the note. under Path Type. select Absolute. In the Type Selector. 12 Apply various keynote styles: ■ ■ In the drawing area. and click Open. click to place the leader. as there is no parametric linkage to any building model components. 9 In the drawing area. 6 In the Select Keynote File dialog. ■ Change the keynote style back to the boxed number type. click Browse. 11 Click Modify.Update keynote settings 4 In Revit MEP. 10 In the Keynotes dialog. The descriptive text for each keynote displays. select the metal soffit (horizontal line under the overhang). You can create drafted details using the drafting tools in Revit MEP or by importing details from an existing detail library. click Keynote ➤ Element. under Keynote Table. 7 In the Keynoting Settings dialog. Drafted details are created in drafting views and are not directly based on building model geometry. 14 Save the file. Creating a Drafted Detail | 569 . select M_Keynote Tag : Keynote Number. 13 Click Modify. you can reference it within the model and place it on a sheet. ■ Select Keynote Tag : Keynote Text. you learn how to create a drafted detail. Each keynote displays as a simple number.A1. These details do not update with changes to the building model. After you create a drafting view. navigate to 07463. and click OK. 5 In the Keynoting Settings dialog. select all the keynotes.

5 Enter zf to zoom to the detail. and click Rename. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. “Creating a Reference Callout” on page 570. Navigate to Metric\m_Roof Edge Detail.Importing a Detail into a Drafting View In this exercise. and click OK.rvt. Click Open. For Positioning ➤ Automatically place. 7 In the Rename View dialog. and select Drafting View: EPDM Metal Coping. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Creating a Reference Callout In this exercise. for Scale. expand Views (all) ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). Create the callout view 1 In the Project Browser. For Layer/Level Colors. click Training Files. select 1 : 5. select Reference other view. Dataset Use the dataset you used in a previous exercise. 3 On the Options Bar. you place an existing detail in a new drafting view to create a drafted detail. Create a new drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail). you create a callout in the section view of the building model to reference the metal coping detail that you previously imported. The detail that you import is in DWG format.dwg. click Callout. double-click Roof Overhang Detail to open it in the drawing area. The detail is imported as an import symbol. Import a complete detail in DWG format 3 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. enter EPDM Metal Coping. select Black and white. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog. right-click Drafting 1. select Center-to-center.rvt. and click OK. 4 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. 570 | Chapter 9 Detailing . 6 In the Project Browser.

and click OK. right-click EPDM Metal Coping. Modify detail view properties 7 In the Project Browser. click Rename. click Edit/New. Creating a Reference Callout | 571 . 11 In the Type Properties dialog. and click Properties. 10 In the Rename dialog. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. for Graphics ➤ Reference Label. 5 Click Modify. Display the reference view 13 On the Design Bar. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. for New. The callout head no longer displays a reference label. enter Detail . 6 Select the callout. and use the callout grips to move the callout head. delete the existing value. and double-click the callout. 12 Click OK twice. click Modify. The metal coping detail that you imported previously displays.4 Add the callout bubble by dragging a rectangular bubble around the metal coping.No Reference.

drag EPDM Metal Coping onto the sheet. 15 Under Drafting Views (Detail . 19 Proceed to the next exercise. Modeling elements at this level of detail may be time consuming and can reduce the overall performance of the product.Elev. so you use Revit MEP tools to draft the detail./Sect. Create a drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. There is no existing DWG file for this door detail. 16 Click on the sheet above the Roof Overhang Detail to place the drafting view.rvt. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. enter Header @ Sliding Door. 3 On the View Control Bar.Add the drafting view to a sheet 14 In the Project Browser. double-click A105 . 572 | Chapter 9 Detailing . “Creating a Detail in the Drafting View” on page 572 Creating a Detail in a Drafting View In this exercise./Det. 17 Click Window menu ➤ Detail View: Roof Overhang Detail. for Name. and click OK. you create a door head condition in the new drafting view. under Views (all) ➤ Sheets (all). 2 In the New Drafting View dialog. 18 Save the file. verify that the scale is 1 : 5. The callout is updated with the sheet information.No Reference). Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.

for Name. 11 In the Name dialog. 6 Click in the drawing area to place 2 instances as shown. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 573 . Draw a rectangle as shown. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 150mm Nominal. for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern.5mm. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. click Detail Component. enter Gyp. 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 5 In the Type Selector. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. Board.Add a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 15 Draw the region: On the Options Bar. click Filled Region. . 16 Select the left edge of the region. select the left and bottom edges of the region. 17 Click Modify. and click OK. click Duplicate. Press SPACEBAR to rotate the component as you place it. click Edit/New. and enter 20. ■ ■ ■ Select the lower left corner of the 2x6 lumber as the start point. 18 While pressing CTRL. 19 In the Type Selector. 14 Click OK 3 times. click Region Properties. Create a filled region 7 On the Design Bar. select Gypsum-Plaster. click . You sketch filled regions to represent gypsum wall board. click 13 In the Fill Patterns dialog. select the width dimension. select Wide Lines.

click 22 On the Options Bar. Mirror the region 21 Select the filled region. 574 | Chapter 9 Detailing . click Finish Sketch. and on the Edit toolbar. and drag the bottom up to just below the top of the upper 50 x 150. and click above the top of the region as the end point. 24 Select the mirrored region. Move the cursor up. Select the midpoint of the upper 50 x 150 as the start point. click 23 Draw the mirror line: ■ ■ (Mirror).20 On the Design Bar. (Draw).

click (Align). 37 On the Design Bar. 34 Draw the region: On the Options Bar.Finish. 28 In the Element Properties dialog. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 575 . click . click 32 In the Fill Patterns dialog.25 Click Modify. verify that the thickness is 19mm. select Medium Lines. 35 Select all the linework for the wood region. 33 Click OK 3 times. click Finish Sketch. and select the right edge of the wood region. ■ ■ ■ Select the lower left corner of the left gypsum board region as the start point.Finish. 30 In the Name dialog. 36 Align the wood region to the 50 x 150: ■ ■ On the Tools toolbar. click Filled Region. for Name. in the Type Selector. and click OK. 27 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Draw a rectangle as shown. click Duplicate. click Region Properties. Select the right edge of the lower 50 x 150. Add wood filled regions 26 On the Design Bar. for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern. 31 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit/New. . select Wood . 29 In the Type Properties dialog. enter Wood .

38 On the Design Bar, click Filled Region. 39 In the Type Selector, select Medium Lines. 40 On the Options Bar, click .

41 Beginning at the lower right of the wood region, sketch the new region as shown; verify that the width is 19mm and the height is 63.5mm.

42 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

Add a reference plane
43 On the Design Bar, click Ref Plane. 44 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Click

(Pick).

For Offset, enter 6mm, and press ENTER.

45 Select the top of the vertical wood region to place the reference plane above it. You use the reference plane as an alignment reference for the gypsum board region above it.

46 On the Tools toolbar, click

(Align).

576 | Chapter 9 Detailing

47 Click the reference plane, and click the bottom of the gypsum board region. 48 Click Modify.

Add a door panel
49 On the Design Bar, click Filled Region. 50 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Click

(Pick Lines).

For Offset, enter 10mm, and press ENTER.

51 Select the left edge of the horizontal wood region. 52 On the Options Bar: Click (Draw).

■ ■ ■

For Offset, enter 0, and press ENTER. Select Chain.

53 Draw the door panel outline:
■ ■ ■ ■

Click the top endpoint of the offset line. Move the cursor left 25mm, and click to select the point. Move the cursor down 305mm, and click to select the point. Move the cursor right 25mm, and click to select the point.

54 On the Tools toolbar, click

(Trim/Extend).

55 Select the small vertical line of the door panel sketch, and select the bottom horizontal line. 56 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 577

Add mounting/sliding hardware
57 On the Design Bar, click Detail Lines. 58 In the Type Selector, select Medium Lines. 59 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Click

(Pick Lines).

For Offset, enter 3mm, and press ENTER.

60 Select the left, top, and right edges of the door panel region. 61 Click Modify. 62 Select the left detail line, select the height dimension, enter 76.2mm, and press ENTER. 63 Repeat for the right detail line.

Add mounting/sliding hardware
64 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Detail Component. 65 On the Options Bar, click Load. 66 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\M_A307 Bolts-Side.rfa, and click Open. 67 Add the bolt to the right side of the lower wood region as shown.

578 | Chapter 9 Detailing

TIP Press the SPACEBAR as necessary to rotate the bolt to the correct orientation.

68 Click Modify. 69 Select the bolt; drag the left shape handle until the nut is against the detail line.

70 On the Design Bar, click Detail Component. 71 On the Options Bar, click Load. 72 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\M_Expansion Bolts-Side.rfa, and click Open. 73 Add the component to the left side of the lower 50 x 150. NOTE Exact sizes and positioning are not critical when creating the remainder of the detail; use the images as a guide.

74 Select the expansion bolt; drag the right shape handle until the bolt end is just past the midpoint of the 50 x 150.

Add detail lines
75 On the Design Bar, click Detail Lines. 76 In the Type Selector, select Wide Lines. 77 Draw a line at the base of the bolt head as shown.

Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 579

78 On the Design Bar, click Detail Lines. 79 In the Type Selector, select Thin Lines. 80 On the Options Bar, click .

81 Draw the rectangle to the left of the wide line as shown.

82 Select the rectangle, and on the Edit toolbar, click 83 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection. 84 On the Design Bar, click Detail Lines. 85 On the Options Bar, click .

(Mirror).

86 Draw a small rectangle between the mirrored rectangles as shown.

580 | Chapter 9 Detailing

87 Click Modify. 88 Select the detail line to the left of the lower wood region; drag the top end above the mirrored rectangles as shown.

89 On the Design Bar, click Detail Lines. 90 In the Type Selector, select Medium Lines. 91 Draw a small line from the midpoint of the left mirrored rectangle to the left, as shown. Do not extend the line to the vertical detail line.

Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 581

92 Select the line, and on the Edit toolbar, click

(Mirror).

93 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection.

94 Select the mirrored line on the right, select the length dimension, enter 3mm, and press ENTER. 95 On the Design Bar, click Detail Lines. 96 Beginning at the end of the 3mm line, draw a line up to the height of the other detail line. 97 On the Options Bar, click .

98 Click the end of the detail line on the left, and click to place the arc as shown.

582 | Chapter 9 Detailing

99 Click Modify.

Add two break lines
100 Zoom to the drawing extents. 101 On the Design Bar, click Detail Component. 102 In the Type Selector, select M_Break Line. 103 Add two break lines as shown. TIP Rotate and move the break lines as necessary to adjust the masking elements.

Add dimensions
104 On the Design Bar, click Dimension. 105 In the drawing area, select the left edge of the horizontal wood region, and select the right edge of the adjoining vertical region. 106 Click to place the dimension, and click Modify.

Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 583

107 On the Design Bar, click Dimension. 108 In the Type Selector, select Linear Dimension Style : Linear 2.5mm Arial. 109 Add a multi-segment dimension line as shown, and click Modify.

110 Select the dimension line; using the Drag Text grip, drag the text for the smaller dimension.

Add text notes to complete the detail
111 On the Design Bar, click Text. 112 In the Options Bar, click to create an arced leader.

113 In the drawing area, select the gypsum board region on the left, and click to place the text. 114 Enter Gyp. Board, and click Modify.

115 Select the note, and on the Options Bar, click

(Add Right Arc Leader).

116 Drag the end of the new leader to the other gypsum board region.

584 | Chapter 9 Detailing

117 Add leaders and text notes to the detail as shown.

118 On the Design Bar, click Modify to end the command. 119 Save the file.

Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 585

586 | Chapter 9 Detailing

Finishing the Sheets

10

In this tutorial, you perform tasks to provide finishing touches on your project documentation, including:
■ ■

Creating a note block containing typical construction notes Creating a drawing list that is automatically populated based on filter selections Creating the 2 most common types of legends produced for construction: annotation legends and building component legends Tracking and documenting revisions in the project Importing resources from other applications, such as images and text into project sheets

■ ■

587

Using Note Blocks
In this lesson, you create a typical note block to annotate repairs and renovations to the exterior of the building.

Creating a Note Block
In this exercise, you add typical construction notes to sheets and then create a note block to expose the notes text. The note block can be used to schedule parameters assigned to a generic annotation family. Dataset
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats- Finishing-Sheets.rvt.

Load a generic annotation family
1 In the Project Browser, expand Elevations (Building Elevation), and double-click East.

2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Symbol. 3 Click Yes to load a generic annotation family into the project. 4 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Families\Annotations\Sheet Keynote - Hexagon.rfa. 5 On the Options Bar, for Number of Leaders, enter 1. 6 Click in the drawing area to the right of the building to place a hexagon tag.

7 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 8 Drag the endpoint of the leader to position it on the right front door.

588 | Chapter 10 Finishing the Sheets

9 Drag the midpoint of the leader to position it as shown:

Create annotation marks for items requiring notes

10 With the tag selected, on the Options Bar, click

(Properties).

11 In the Element Properties dialog, under Identity Data, for Text, enter Seal existing doors and insulate, and click OK.

12 On the Edit toolbar, click

(Copy).

13 Select the tag, and click above the tag to place a copy.

Creating a Note Block | 589

14 With the copy selected, on the Options Bar, click

(Properties).

15 For Text, enter Repair existing door surround. Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements. 16 For Tag, enter B. 17 Click OK. 18 Use the same method to make another copy of the tag and place it on the left side of the building.

19 On the toolbar, click

(Mirror), and on the Options Bar, clear Copy.

20 Select the tag on the left, and click to create a vertical mirror image of the tag so the leader points toward the building, as shown: NOTE To create a vertical mirror image, position the cursor over the hexagon tag until a vertical bar displays, and click.

590 | Chapter 10 Finishing the Sheets

21 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 22 Optionally, using the table as a reference, and moving counter-clockwise, continue tagging the building as shown in the following illustration:
Tag A B C D E F G H Text Seal existing doors and insulate. Repair existing door surround. Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements. Clean and repair stone parapet cap as required. Clean and repair existing stone trim as required. Remove all existing windows. Clean opening and repair as required for new window installation. Clean exterior brick wall. Tuckpoint as required. Clean existing concrete loading dock. Repair as required. Saw cut existing brick wall. Clean cut and repair wall as required.

Create, format, and place a note block on a sheet
23 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Note Block. 24 In the New Note Block dialog, for Note block name, enter Exterior Construction Notes, and click OK. 25 Specify values in the Note Block Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■

On the Fields tab, under Available fields, select Tag, and click Add. Select Text, and click Add. On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Tag.

Creating a Note Block | 591

■ ■

On the Formatting tab, for Heading, enter Mark, and for Alignment, select Center. On the Appearance tab, For Header text, verify Arial in the first field, enter 6 mm in the second field, and select Bold.

26 Click OK. The Exterior Construction Notes block displays.

27 In the column header (text), enter Description. 28 In the Project Browser, expand Sheets (all), and double-click A103 - Elevations. 29 In the Project Browser, expand Schedules/Quantities, select Exterior Construction Notes, and drag it to the sheet.

30 Click to place the block in the upper-left corner of the sheet, and drag the right column control to expand the column to display the note text. 31 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 32 Zoom in to see the note block.

33 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 34 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress.rvt, and click Save.

592 | Chapter 10 Finishing the Sheets

Using Drawing Lists
In this lesson, you quickly create a drawing list that is automatically generated from the drawings available in the project.

Creating a Drawing List
In this exercise, you create an automatically populated drawing list for placement on the title sheet of the project. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson, Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets_in_progress.rvt. 1 In the Project Browser, under Sheets (all), double-click T - Title Sheet.

2 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drawing List. 3 Specify values in the Drawing List Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■

On the Fields tab, under Available fields, select Sheet Number, and click Add. Select Sheet Name, and click Add. On the Filter tab, for Filter by, in the first field, select Sheet Number, in the second field, select does not equal, and in the third field, enter T. On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Sheet Number.

4 Click OK. The drawing list displays.

5 In the list title field, enter Sheet Index. 6 In the Project Browser, under Sheets (all), double-click T - Title Sheet. 7 In the Project Browser, expand Schedules/Quantities, select Sheet Index, and drag it to the sheet.

Using Drawing Lists | 593

8 Click to place it on the sheet in the lower-right corner, and expand the right column to accommodate the text.

9 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 10 Zoom in to the drawing list.

11 Click File menu ➤ Save.

Using Legends
Legends provide a way to display a list of the various building components and annotations used in a project. The two most common types of legends produced for construction documents are annotation legends and building component legends. Annotation legends are made up of components such as section markers and door tags that are paired with text that identifies them. On construction documents, annotation legends are often referred to as symbol legends. Building component legends list and identify components such as walls, windows, doors, and door frames. On construction documents, building component legends are often called schedules (wall type schedule, door frame schedule, and so on). NOTE A component that is placed in a legend does not count as an additional instance of the component in the Revit MEP building model, and thus is not added to the number of instances of that component listed on a schedule or note block.

Creating a Symbol Legend
In this exercise, you create a legend view and add symbols and text to it using a text type you create by duplicating an existing text type and modifying the type properties. Finally, you add the completed symbol legend to multiple sheets for easy reference. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson, Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets_in_progress.rvt.

Create a legend view
1 On the View menu, click New ➤ Legend. 2 In the New Legend View dialog, for Name, enter Typical Symbol Legend, and click OK.

594 | Chapter 10 Finishing the Sheets

Add symbols to the legend
3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Symbol. 4 Add the following symbols to the legend view, selecting each from the Type Selector and placing it in the legend as shown.
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

M_Section Head - Filled Level Head - Circle M_Door Tag M_Window Tag Sheet Keynote - Hexagon : Tag

Create a text type
5 On the Design Bar, click Text. Because the text size for the symbol legend is not available in the Type Selector, you create a text type with the necessary size. You do this by duplicating the standard text type and modifying the type properties.

6 On the Options bar, click

.

7 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 8 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate, for Name, enter Legend Text, and click OK. 9 For Text Font, select Arial. 10 For Text Size, enter 3mm, and click OK twice.

Add text to the legend
11 In the Type Selector, verify that Text : Legend Text is selected, and click to the right of the first symbol to specify the text start point. 12 Enter Detail Callout for the text note. 13 Working from the top down, enter the following text for the remaining symbols in the legend:
■ ■ ■

Level Indicator Door Tag Window Tag

Creating a Symbol Legend | 595

18 In the Project Browser. drag it to the lower-right corner of the sheet. select Viewport : No Titlemark. under Sheets. click Typical Symbol Legend. click Typical Symbol Legend. 15 In the Project Browser. and double-click A101 . 19 In the Project Browser. click Modify.Site Plan/Floor Plan.■ Sheet Keynote Place the symbol legend on a sheet 14 In the Project Browser. and click to place it. and click to place it.Unit 18. 17 On the Design Bar. expand Sheets (all). 596 | Chapter 10 Finishing the Sheets . expand Legends. double-click A102 . The symbol legend is added to the project sheet. 16 In the Type Selector. drag it to the lower-right corner of the sheet.

click Modify. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress.rvt. select Walls: Basic Wall: 4th Floor Balcony Divider. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ For Family. 22 Click File menu ➤ Save. enter 900 mm. select1 : 50. click New ➤ Legend. and press ENTER. Add components to the legend 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Component Legend In this exercise. You then add the completed legend to a project sheet. 3 For Scale. 21 On the Design Bar. enter 4th Floor Wall Types. select Medium for Detail Level. 7 Click near the top left of the drawing area to specify the insertion point for the wall.20 In the Type Selector. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 5 On the Options Bar. for Name. For View. 8 Click directly below the first wall to place a second wall. click Legend Component. and click OK. select Viewport : No Titlemark. select Section. Creating a Component Legend | 597 . A legend view is unlike any other view and can be placed onto multiple sheets for reference where required. 6 On the View Control Bar. 2 In the New Legend View dialog. You use the text type that you created in a previous exercise to create annotations that identify the material used in each wall component. For Host length. Create a legend view 1 On the View menu. you create a building component legend for the wall types in the building model.

verify that Text : Legend Text is selected. select Walls : Basic wall : 4th Floor Exterior. click Modify. 12 In the Type Selector. click Text. 598 | Chapter 10 Finishing the Sheets . for Family. and on the Options Bar. 10 Select the second wall.9 On the Design Bar. Add titles to the legend components 11 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

click to add text with a single-segment leader. The text note with leader is added to the legend. 17 Click the right side of the Wall Type 1 component to specify the leader start point. 19 Enter the following text.'' 15 Click below the lower wall and enter Wall Type 2 Exterior Wall. and click Modify on the Design Bar: 33mm Decking 50x100 Stud 33mm Decking. and enter Wall Type 1 Patio Divider. 20 Use the following illustration as a guide for entering the text annotations on the lower wall component. 14 Click below the upper wall component to specify the start point for the text. for example to force a line break between ''Wall Type 1'' and ''Patio Divider. for Leader. 18 Click to the right of the wall to end the leader and specify the text start point. pressing ENTER between component descriptions. NOTE Press ENTER to force the text to start on the next line. Creating a Component Legend | 599 . Add text to the legend 16 On the Options bar. click to add text without a leader.13 On the Options Bar.

24 Click to place the floor plan on the right side of the sheet. 22 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. Tile views in the drawing window 27 In the Project Browser. 23 In the Project Browser.Place the legend on a sheet 21 In the Project Browser. right-click Sheets (all). and drag it to the new sheet. The open drawings are both visible. double-click 4th Floor Wall Types. drag it onto the sheet. select 4th Floor Wall Types. click Modify to end the command. 26 On the Design Bar. 29 In the project Browser. 30 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. double-click Level 4. 600 | Chapter 10 Finishing the Sheets . under Legends. select Level 4. under Floor Plans. and click New Sheet. 25 In the Project Browser. and click to place it in the upper left corner of the sheet. allowing you to select a component type in one drawing and then apply the type in the second drawing. under Floor Plans. 28 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. click OK to accept the default titleblock. The floor plan and legend are added to the new sheet.

33 In the floor plan view. enter ZR to zoom to a specific region. Notice that the eyedropper changes to filled.Match a component type 31 On the Tools toolbar. click (Match Type). select the Wall Type 2 component. 32 In the 4th Floor Wall Types Legend view. 34 Draw a rectangle around the lower-right area of the floor plan including the patio divider wall. indicating that it captured the wall type properties. Creating a Component Legend | 601 . The view zooms in to the patio divider wall.

Setting Up a Revision Table There are likely to be changes to your construction documents after you have issued the original set of documents for bid or after you have received a signed contract. you 602 | Chapter 10 Finishing the Sheets . click if you do not want to save the change to the wall type. Changing the detail level displays the hatching for each material of the wall component.35 Select the patio divider wall. You can create a sequence of revisions. 38 Click File menu ➤ Save. In this exercise. and can then display the revisions in schedules that appear in the titleblock of each project sheet. and you can draw revision clouds around elements in your project that have changed. Using Revision Tracking Revit MEP provides tools that enable you to track revisions to your project. contractor inquiries. The wall type in the floor plan matches wall type 2 from the Wall Type Legend. select Medium for Detail Level. 37 Optionally. 36 On the View Control Bar. or changes in building material availability. You can use revision tags to notate the revision clouds. These changes can be due to owner requests. unanticipated changes in construction conditions.

Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. enter Relocate 4th floor partition dividing walls. and you can add data such as release date and description to each revision. double-click Level 4. If Visible is not selected. verify that Cloud and Tag is selected. For example. revision descriptions should be comprehensive. In most instances. If you select By Sheet. 6 Verify that Issued is cleared. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 3 In the Revisions dialog. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence in which they are added to a sheet. 7 Under Visible. verify that By Project is selected for Numbering Method. When Issued is selected. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence of revisions in the Revisions dialog. the revision is locked and issued to the field. if the active revision is number 1. enter a date. 2 On the Settings menu. This is the date the revisions are sent out for review. Add a revision to the project 4 For Release Date. you can specify the numbering method for revisions in a project. Using the table. all tags and schedules display the numeral 1. When you use this option. under Floor Plans. click Revisions. you would turn off visibility only after a revision was issued.rvt. any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in the view in which you create it. Setting Up a Revision Table | 603 . Specify a revision numbering method 1 In the Project Browser.use the Revisions command to open a revision table in which you can add rows that represent a sequence of revisions. 5 For Description. yet as concise as possible. In general.

including revision number and revision date. under Floor Plans. Sketching Revision Clouds In this exercise. You can sketch revision clouds in all views except 3D views. and click to reposition the divider closer to the upper wall. double-click Level 4. 9 Click File menu ➤ Save.rvt. move the cursor up. 604 | Chapter 10 Finishing the Sheets .8 Click OK. you make changes to the project floor plan. You can draw multiple revision clouds for each revision. Revision clouds have read-only properties. which are inherited from the revision table you created for the project. but each cloud is visible only in the view in which it is sketched. 3 Select the divider. 2 Zoom in to the left area of the drawing to see the 4th Floor Balcony Divider. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 4 On the Edit toolbar. 5 Select the partition. click (Move). and then indicate the changes graphically with a revision cloud. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. Modify a wall 1 In the Project Browser.

click near the partition you moved. Revit MEP is now in sketch mode. Add a revision cloud 7 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Sketching Revision Clouds | 605 .6 On the Design Bar. click Revision Cloud. The revision cloud is displayed around the modified partition. and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment of the revision cloud. 11 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. click Modify. 8 In the drawing area. 9 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment. 10 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed.

Tagging Revision Clouds In this exercise. 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 14 In the Object Styles dialog. click Tag ➤ By Category. click the Annotation Objects tab. for Line Weight. under Floor Plans.rvt. The tag number that is displayed in the drawing is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table in a previous exercise. double-click Level 4. select 6. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save. and then apply the tag to the revision cloud in the current drawing. you load a revision tag into the project. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 15 Under the Revision Clouds category. 16 Click OK. 2 Zoom in to the area with the revision cloud. Load a revision tag 1 In the Project Browser. 606 | Chapter 10 Finishing the Sheets .Modify revision cloud style 12 Select the revision cloud.

10 In the drawing area. 11 Click to place the tag. Working with Revisions | 607 . Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Revision Tag. you create a sheet view in your project.rfa. Because there are no tags loaded for revision clouds. click Training Files. under Sheets.Unnamed. After you make the necessary changes to the project and add the revised views to a sheet. click OK. Because a real-world project can undergo several revisions before it is completed. The number is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table. The tag displays the revision number of the cloud. you need to add one.4 On the Options Bar. Tag a revision cloud 9 On the Options Bar. the cloud is tagged as number 1. Working with Revisions In this exercise. 2 Enter ZR and zoom to the revision schedule in the sheet titleblock. 7 In the left pane of the dialog. you create additional revisions in the revision table. 8 In the Tags dialog. Add a revised view to a sheet 1 In the Project Browser. You then issue a revision. 6 Click Load. Because you chose to number by project.rvt. select Leader. If the cursor is just inside the cloud. double-click A107 . and because the revision is the first in the project. on which you place a revised view. 5 In the Tags dialog. In the Tags dialog. the tag is displayed inside the cloud. notice that M_Revision Tag is the loaded tag for Revision Clouds. The information you added to the revision table in a previous exercise is displayed in the revision schedule. which creates a record of the revision and locks it from further changes. You do this by issuing the revision. you prevent further changes to the revision. 12 Click File menu ➤ Save. position the cursor just outside the revision cloud to the left. click Tags. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. scroll down to Revision Clouds.

On the Settings menu.Issue a revision 3 On the Settings menu. click Revisions. Create additional revisions 5 Your project may have several revisions before it is completed. You can continue to add revisions. A new row is added below the existing rows in the revision table. under Add. select None for each issued revision. for Visible. click Revisions. nor can you edit the sketch of the existing clouds. 8 If you want to hide issued revisions in the drawing. 4 For the Sequence 1 revision. select Issued. 6 In the Revisions dialog. NOTE After you issue a revision. 608 | Chapter 10 Finishing the Sheets . you can no longer modify it. and click OK. click New. You cannot add revision clouds to the revision in the drawing area. 7 Enter the appropriate information for this revision.

and spreadsheets.rvt. you learn to import information from other applications. such as images. you import a logo image in JPG format into a project. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson.JPG. and open Common\Freighthouse Logo. under Sheets. double-click T . 10 Click File menu ➤ Save.9 Click OK. and place it on a sheet. into a project. 2 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image. Importing from Other Applications In this lesson. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. text. Importing from Other Applications | 609 . click Training Files. 1 In the Project Browser. Importing Image Files In this exercise. 4 Click in the upper right area of the sheet to place the logo.Title Sheet.

click to add text without a leader. 6 Select the text. under Sheets. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.Title Sheet 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Create a text element on the title sheet 1 In the Project Browser. click Text. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. 4 Click and drag to place a text box on the right side of the sheet. click Modify. 610 | Chapter 10 Finishing the Sheets . m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. you import text from another application using a cut and paste function to populate a text object on a sheet. double-click T . Importing Text Documents In this exercise.doc text file in another window. 7 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy. 3 On the Options Bar. for Leader.rvt. Copy the text 5 Open the Training Files\Common\Bidding Statement.5 On the Design Bar.

under Sheets. Now that you have the worksheet in a raster format. 10 Zoom in to view the pasted text. 8 In the left pane of the Open dialog. for File name. Training Files\Common\Lighting Fixtures. select the document writer. click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. The only way to do this is to convert the spreadsheet file to a raster format (JPG or BMP) and import it as an image. 11 Click File menu ➤ Save.JPG. 3 In Microsoft Excel. you have existing information in a spreadsheet format and would like to use it in the project. with the new text box still selected. NOTE You need to print/export the spreadsheet to a raster format. and click Save.rvt. for Name. click File menu ➤ Print.Paste the text on the sheet 8 In the Revit MEP window. click Training Files. and open Common\Fixture Schedule. Importing Spreadsheets In this exercise. 5 Click OK. This step has been completed for you. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 9 On the Design Bar. 9 Click to place the image on the sheet. This process may vary from system to system. 4 Under Printer. This exercise demonstrates a common method. enter Fixture Schedule. click Modify. 1 In the Project Browser.mdi. double-click A102 . click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image.xls. 2 Open the Microsoft Excel worksheet. 10 On the Design Bar. Importing Spreadsheets | 611 . The text is pasted into the new text box on the sheet. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 11 Zoom in to see the Fixture Schedule. 7 In the Revit MEP window. click Modify. and saved as Fixture Schedule. you could use a screen capture utility to save the worksheet in BMP or JPG format. NOTE Some formatting may be required once the text is placed in Revit MEP. click Desktop.Unit 18. 6 In the left pane of the Save As dialog.JPG.

12 Click File menu ➤ Save. 612 | Chapter 10 Finishing the Sheets .

Using Dependent Views 11 In this tutorial. 613 . or footprint. for the sanctuary will not fit onto a plotted sheet as one plan. you break up the plan into sections. as well as a large lab building. To effectively document this project. you work with a large project for a bird sanctuary. The large floor plan. called dependent views. The drawings include the aviary and observation area of the site.

614 | Chapter 11 Using Dependent Views .Dependent view of lab building Dependent view of aviary and observation platforms Dependent views can be placed on sheets for documentation purposes.

| 615 .

click Training Files. 6 In the drawing area. 616 | Chapter 11 Using Dependent Views . you ■ ■ ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan and elevation Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split and to provide links to the dependent views Apply the specifications of the dependent views to other views in the project Add dependent views to sheets for documentation Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views In this exercise. for Name. you ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan view Add a matchline to the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on sheets Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views Apply dependent view specifications to other views Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and click Rename. 4 In the Rename View dialog.rvt Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. right-click Dependent on Level 2. click Zoom To Fit. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click OK.Aviary. 3 In the Project Browser. 5 Click in the drawing area. enter Level 2 . 2 In the Project Browser. The dependent view opens. double-click Level 2. and on the Zoom flyout of the View toolbar. and open Metric\ m_Dependent_Views. select the crop region.Using Dependent Views in Documentation In this lesson. under Floor Plans. under Level 2. right-click Level 2.

and the model crop is the interior crop region. The annotation crop is the exterior crop region. 8 Click the inside control on the bottom and drag it up.The following image shows a plan view with the model and annotation crop regions visible. 7 Select the inside (model crop) control on the right and drag it toward the center of the view to crop out the lab building. confining the view to the upper-left area of the drawing (the aviary). Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 617 .

right-click Level 2. and click OK. 618 | Chapter 11 Using Dependent Views . 16 Use the inside controls to crop the view to the lower-right building (the labs). 11 In the Project Browser. 12 In the Project Browser. and on the Zoom flyout.Labs. 15 Select the crop region. for Name. enter Level 2 . and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. 14 Click in the drawing area. 13 In the Rename View dialog. click Zoom To Fit. click Zoom To Fit.9 On the View Control Bar. 10 On the Zoom flyout. right-click Dependent on Level 2. click (Hide Crop Region). and click Rename.

click (Hide Crop Region). 20 On the Zoom flyout. under Floor Plans. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 619 . double-click Level 2. 22 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Add matchline to indicate split view 21 In the Project Browser. 18 On the Design Bar. click Matchline. click Zoom To Fit. The outside controls adjust the annotation crop region. click Modify. 19 On the View Control Bar. Matchlines are annotation lines that you add to a view to indicate where a view is split.17 Select the outside control on the left and drag it to the left to reveal the notes.

Click above the left corner of the lab building. Move the cursor left about 4800 mm. Click just below the lower intersection of the lab building and the aviary. (Align with the second column of lab cubicles. 620 | Chapter 11 Using Dependent Views .) ■ ■ ■ ■ Move the cursor down and click just above the lab building. click Finish Sketch. 24 On the Design Bar.23 Draw the matchline by specifying the following points: ■ Click above and to the right of the intersection of the lab building and the aviary. and click.

28 For Line Pattern. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 621 . 27 Under Matchline.25 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. and click Rename. Create sheets and place dependent views 29 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. right-click A101 . 32 In the Sheet Title dialog.Unnamed. and click OK. for Line Weight. click Level 2 . 30 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. 26 In the Object Styles dialog. select 9. and drag it onto the sheet. expand Sheets. enter Level 2 Aviary. click the Annotation Objects tab. click OK to accept the default titleblock. select Double Dash. 33 In the Project Browser. for Name. 34 Click to place the view in the center of the sheet. and click OK.Aviary. under Floor Plans. 31 In the Project Browser.

double-click Level 2. rename the sheet Level 2 Labs. 40 Click to the left of the top of the matchline. You add view references near the matchline to annotate and link to the dependent views. under Floor Plans. 38 On the View tab of the Design Bar.Aviary is selected.35 On the Design Bar. click View Reference. verify that Floor Plan: Level 2 . 36 Use the same method to create another sheet. click Modify. 39 On the Options Bar.Labs dependent view on the sheet. for Target view. Add reference annotations to sheets 37 In the Project Browser. and place the Level 2 . 622 | Chapter 11 Using Dependent Views .

click (Show Crop Region). 45 On the Zoom flyout. for Target view. select Floor Plan: Level 2 . click Modify.Aviary. under Floor Plans.The Sheet number of the dependent view displays to the left of the matchline. 47 On the View Control Bar. 41 On the Options Bar. double-click Level 2 . Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 623 . click Zoom To Fit. 42 Click to the right of the top of the matchline.Labs. 43 Use the same method to add View References above (A101) and below (A102) the lower-left end of the matchline. NOTE Double-clicking a view reference opens the dependent view that it references. 46 In the Project Browser. 44 On the Design Bar.

click the far right control. 624 | Chapter 11 Using Dependent Views . 49 If. leaving 4 rooms visible in the view. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. 50 Use the same method to hide Cubicle 14 (directly below Cubicle 3). Notice that the view reference for the aviary does not display in the aviary dependent view.48 Select the crop region. the tags for Cubicles 3 and 14 display. NOTE View references display in all views except for the view that it is referencing. and drag it slightly to the right to expand the annotation region so you can see the view reference. select the room tag for Cubicle 3 (upper-right room tag) in the annotation area. right-click. after modifying the annotation crop region.

under Floor Plans. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 625 .51 On the View Control Bar. and click OK. 57 On the Zoom flyout. and click Apply Dependent Views. 56 Double-click Dependent on Level 1. you can apply the view and crop region specifications to parallel views of the same scale. click Zoom To Fit. select all views in the list. 55 On the Zoom flyout. After you have set up dependent view configuration for one view. click (Hide Crop Region). right-click Level 2. 53 In the Select Views dialog. click Zoom To Fit. and double-click Dependent (2) on Level 1. New dependent views display in the Project Browser under the primary view. Apply dependent view settings to other plans 52 In the Project Browser. expand Level 1. but are not placed on sheets. 54 In the Project Browser. Notice that the matchline and crop regions from Level 2 are applied to Level 1.

4 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK.Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views In this exercise. and open Metric\ m_Dependent_Views. and click Rename. 626 | Chapter 11 Using Dependent Views . 2 In the Project Browser. 5 In the drawing area. expand South Elevation. right-click Dependent on South Elevation. The matchline is already placed in the view. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. enter South Elevation . right-click South Elevation. expand Elevations (Building Elevation).Left. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select the Crop Region. click Training Files. The dependent view opens. and double-click South Elevation. you ■ ■ ■ ■ Create dependent split views of an elevation view Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on a sheet Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. for Name. 3 In the Project Browser.

right-click South Elevation. and drag it toward the center of the drawing. enter South Elevation. 9 In the Project Browser. 15 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. click OK to accept the default titleblock. and drag it toward the center of the view. 10 In the Rename View dialog.6 Select the inside crop region control on the right.Right. click (Hide Crop Region). right-click A103 Unnamed. for Name. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. click (Hide Crop Region). Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 627 . and click Rename. 8 In the Project Browser. 16 In the Project Browser. cropping the view to the aviary. and click Rename. right-click Dependent on South Elevation. 7 On the View Control Bar. and click OK. and click OK. 13 On the View Control Bar. 12 Select the inside crop region control on the left. enter South Elevation . under Sheets. cropping the view to the lab building. for Name. 17 In the Sheet Title dialog. Create a sheet and place both dependent views on the sheet 14 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. 11 Select the crop region.

under Elevations.18 In the Project Browser. under Elevations. 21 Click to place the elevation view at the bottom of the sheet.Left. for Target view. 24 On the Views tab of the Design Bar. 26 Click to the left of the top of the matchline at the center of the elevation. and drag it onto the sheet. 27 Click to the left of the bottom of the matchline. click Modify. under Elevations. 19 Click to place the elevation view at the top of the sheet. 25 On the Options Bar.Left is selected. 22 On the Design Bar. 628 | Chapter 11 Using Dependent Views . click View Reference. verify that Elevation: South Elevation . 20 In the Project Browser.Right. click South Elevation . click South Elevation . double-click South Elevation. 23 In the Project Browser. and drag it onto the sheet.

Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 629 . 30 On the Design Bar. 31 In the Project Browser. double-click A103 .Right. select Elevation: South Elevation . click Modify. under Sheets (all).South Elevation. for Target view. 29 Click to the right of the top and the bottom of the matchline.28 On the Options Bar.

and click Activate View. you can modify the annotation region for the dependent view from the sheet.NOTE If the view references are not visible. and use the annotation crop controls to modify it. 630 | Chapter 11 Using Dependent Views . Right-click the view. Select the crop region.

Viewing and Rendering 3 631 .

632 | Chapter 12 Viewing and Rendering .

you learn to create and customize views of building information models. You learn how to access and create building model views and how to change the visibility of building components and annotations within views. More specifically. how to control fill pattern colors. you learn how to change the visibility of detail components. and how to use plan regions within floor plans and reflected ceiling plans.Viewing 12 In this tutorial. 633 .

2 In the Project Browser. TIP If the Project Browser does not display. You also learn how to control the visibility of different building components and annotations within building model views. Open an elevation view of the building model 1 On the left side of the drawing area. 634 | Chapter 12 Viewing . Both hidden lines and window tags display in the east elevation view. The Project Browser is displayed by default between the Design Bar and the drawing area. on the Standard toolbar. A new view displays a wireframe view of the east elevation view of the building model. and three-dimensional (3D) views. including elevation and three-dimensional views.Viewing a Building Model In this lesson. click . and learn how to control the visibility of building components and annotations within views. sections. you learn to create and customize user-defined views of a building information model. you learn how to access different views of the building model. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\m_Viewing_Exercise.rvt. and double-click East. click Training Files. Exploring the Building Model In this exercise. The current file name is displayed in the Project Browser title bar. expand Views (all). locate the Project Browser. expand Elevations. You create elevations. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

click Visibility/Graphics.Display the elevation view with hidden lines 3 On the View Control Bar. This change is applied only in this elevation view. The window tags are no longer displayed in this view. 5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides for Elevation: East dialog. Turn off the display of window tags in the elevation view 4 On the View menu. 6 Under Visibility. The east elevation view displays with hidden lines. and click Hidden Line. Exploring the Building Model | 635 . This change is applied only to the active view. The default name of the view is {3D}. click the Annotation Categories tab. The 3D view is displayed in a new viewing window. This hides the lines that show through to the exterior of the elevation view. Notice that window tags continue to display in the view. the east elevation. click . Create a 3D view of the building model 8 On the View toolbar. scroll down and clear Window Tags. 7 Click OK. click Model Graphics Style.

right-click {3D}. NOTE If you have a pointing device with a middle wheel. 17 In the upper right corner of the viewing window. and expand 3D Views. . 15 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. 16 In the Rename View dialog. NOTE If you have a pointing device with a middle wheel. 10 Move the cursor to the drawing window and notice that it now displays as a hand This means you are in pan mode. Move the mouse to pan the view. Notice that the view name is updated in the title bar of the viewing window and in the Project Browser. click to reorient the view. zoom. under 3D Views. 12 Press and hold CTRL. you can enable pan mode by pressing and holding the middle wheel button down. and click OK. double-click My 3D View. The view follows the movement of the cursor. expand Views (all). Save the current 3D view 14 In the Project Browser. you can enable zoom mode by rolling the middle wheel.9 On the View toolbar. enter My 3D View. You can pan. 636 | Chapter 12 Viewing . . 13 View the Dynamic View dialog in the lower left corner of the screen. 11 Pan the view by clicking and dragging the cursor in the drawing area. and notice that the cursor displays as a magnifying glass This indicates that you are in zoom mode. and spin the building model by clicking the appropriate button in this dialog. and click Rename. 18 In the Project Browser. click X to close the view.

19 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating a Perspective View with a Camera | 637 . TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. as shown in the following illustration. expand Floor Plans. right-click in the Design Bar. Cameras define the eye point. After you specify the second point (the view target). 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. “Creating a Perspective View with a Camera” on page 637. and click View. Create the perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. Creating a Perspective View with a Camera In this exercise.rvt. the new view named 3D View 1 is displayed by default in a perspective view. Specify the second point in one of the rooms in the building. you create a perspective view of the building model with a camera. expand Views (all). eye height. click Camera.Notice that the view continues to display with hidden lines and no window tags. and double-click Level 1. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. m_Viewing_Exercise. outside of the dimension lines. and distance from the target. 3 Add the camera to the view by specifying two points: one for the camera position and the other for the camera target point: ■ ■ Specify the first point in the top right corner of the drawing.

click Dynamically Modify View. click the Walkthrough tab located at the bottom of the dialog. Change the camera projection settings 6 On the View menu. Move the cursor up and down in the view to move the cursor forward and backward. 8 To move the camera eye position higher or lower: ■ ■ ■ Click Dolly and move the cursor into the perspective view. select the blue control grips on the sides of the crop region and move them out. Press and hold the left mouse button. 9 To move the camera forward and backward in the view: ■ ■ ■ Click Forward/Back and move the cursor into the perspective view. 5 On the View menu. 638 | Chapter 12 Viewing . and sideways to see how the view changes. down.4 To resize the view to see the entire floor model. 7 In the Dynamic View dialog. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. You can use the walkthrough controls in this dialog to move the camera position and change the view. Press and hold the left mouse button. Move the cursor up.

and target 12 On the Window menu.10 To rotate the camera around the target: ■ ■ ■ Click Turn and move the cursor into the perspective view. You may need to reposition the view with the other controls. height. 11 Adjust the view as shown in the following illustration. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. Move the cursor side to side in the view to rotate the view. 13 On the View menu. click Tile. Change the camera position. Four views of the model display in the drawing area. Press and hold the left mouse button. Creating a Perspective View with a Camera | 639 .

16 In the Project Browser. The border of the window that contains the Level 1 view highlights. under 3D Views. and click Show Camera. right-click 3D View 1. The camera and the view direction of the camera are displayed in the appropriate views. 15 In the Project Browser.14 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. double-click Level 1. 640 | Chapter 12 Viewing . double-click 3D View 1.

18 Change the target and eye elevation of the camera by modifying its properties: ■ ■ Select the camera in My 3D View. TIP The updated view depends on the location of the camera before you change the elevation values. select the camera target point (the magenta grip). and click Shading. click to create a new 3D view. Use a section box to clip the model 19 On the View toolbar. Click OK.17 In My 3D View. 20 On the View Control Bar. and click Element Properties. and move it to another location. right-click. 3D View 1 should update immediately after you move the target point of the camera. Creating a Perspective View with a Camera | 641 . under Camera. ■ 3D View 1 immediately updates to show the change. click Model Graphics Style. In the Element Properties dialog. enter 15000 for Eye Elevation and 1700 for Target Elevation.

25 Select and move the lower right grip on the section box closer to the model. 24 Click the section box. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. A rotation tool is also displayed. 642 | Chapter 12 Viewing . select Section Box. and click OK. The section box highlights and grips are displayed on its faces. A section box is displayed around the model.21 Rotate the view as shown in the following illustration. as shown in the following illustration. 22 On the View menu. click View Properties. under Extents.

Sketch a section line in a plan view 1 In the Project Browser. Creating a Section View | 643 . you create a section view by sketching a section line in a plan view. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. click Section. expand Floor Plans. and rotate the section box around the model. m_Viewing_Exercise. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. double-click Level 1. Creating a Section View In this exercise.26 Click and hold the rotation tool. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.rvt. “Creating a Section View” on page 643. and maximize this view.

or in the Project Browser. right-click. 7 In the Go To View dialog. and drag the section depth grip below the middle horizontal wall as shown in the following illustration. expand Sections. You may need to zoom closer to the walls in order to see the fill pattern.3 Click to the left of the left wall of the building model. and click Find Referring Views. 644 | Chapter 12 Viewing . select the section view. 6 In the Project Browser. double-click the section head. and double-click Section 1. and then click to the right of the lower right wall to sketch the horizontal section line shown in the following illustration. NOTE Fill pattern is dependent on the zoom ratio. 4 On the Design Bar. 8 Select the section line. click Modify. View the section 5 To view the section. select Floor Plan: Level 1. and click Open View. The box represents the extents of the section view as well as the viewing direction of the section. Notice a dashed green box with blue grips is displayed on the section line.

click Modify. and select and move the section depth grip under the lower wall. 12 Select the section line.rvt. click Modify. 13 Click the control arrows to flip the section view. Notice the change in section depth. “Creating Elevation Views” on page 645. Notice the change in the view direction. 14 On the Design Bar. Add an elevation symbol 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1. Notice that the elevation symbol arrow points to the nearest wall as you move through the building model. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. An elevation symbol displays at the end of the cursor. under Floor Plans. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. 3 Without clicking in the drawing area. click Elevation.9 On the Design Bar. Control arrows are displayed near the section tag. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Creating Elevation Views In this exercise. move the cursor around the building model. You may need to adjust your zoom settings to see the elevation symbol. Change the view direction of the section 11 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. 15 Double-click the section head to display the section view. 10 Double-click the section head to display the section view. double-click Level 1. Creating Elevation Views | 645 . you learn to create an elevation view in a project by adding an elevation symbol to a plan view. m_Viewing_Exercise.

Elevation 1 .4 To create an elevation view of the building lobby. place the cursor inside the building facing the lobby entrance. View the elevation 6 To view the new elevation. Elevation 1 . double-click Level 1. Do not select the arrow. Make sure the elevation symbol is pointing towards the lobby doors. The elevation symbol is displayed with four check boxes.b. The check mark in the right box indicates the current elevation view.a by default.b. and double-click the elevation symbol arrow. under Elevations. 8 Select the center of the elevation symbol. 7 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. 646 | Chapter 12 Viewing . double-click Elevation 1 . 5 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 10 In the Project Browser.a. and click. zoom in. The elevation is named Elevation 1 . indicating the possible elevation views that you can create. 9 Select the box shown in the following illustration to add a new elevation view.

12 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. This means that in views with a coarse level of detail. You can control the fill pattern color of the cut and surface patterns for objects that obtain their fill pattern definition from materials. Controlling Fill Pattern Colors In this lesson. and open Common\c_Showroom. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. You change the color of the cut and surface patterns in the brick material assigned to the exterior wall in the building model. in a compound wall. such as Brick on CMU. a shade of gray. you can choose the wall fill color for a wall type.rvt. click Save As. you can set the fill pattern color for the brick to red. and the insulation color to pink. you can set the color of the coarse scale fill pattern for wall types.11 If you want to save your changes. Controlling Fill Pattern Colors | 647 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. where each layer is assigned a different material. floors. such as the one below. you learn to control the fill pattern color of a material and set the coarse scale fill pattern color of a wall type. on the File menu. This includes walls. For example. Controlling the Fill Pattern Color of a Material In this exercise. and save the exercise file with a unique name. In addition. and applies to phasing override materials as well. in this case. click Training Files. you learn to control the fill pattern colors of a material. roofs. and other families.

648 | Chapter 12 Viewing . View the surface pattern of the exterior brick walls 6 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Materials dialog.Brick for Name. and double-click Wall/Floor Join . 7 Zoom in on the brick pattern of the exterior walls. 5 In the Color dialog. and double-click 3D.Change the color of the brick cut pattern for the exterior walls 1 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all). The brick cut pattern on the left is displayed as red. Each layer is designated by the material settings of the layer. click Materials. expand Views (all). A color is assigned to both the Surface Pattern and Cut Pattern options in the dialog. Change the brick surface pattern from black to white 8 On the Settings menu. The surface pattern of the brick is black.Level 3. 4 Under Cut Pattern.Brick for Name.Filled). expand Sections (Section Head . click Color. select Masonry . 2 On the Settings menu. 9 In the Materials dialog. select red. click Materials. select Masonry . expand 3D Views. and click OK twice. Notice the different fill patterns assigned to each layer within the floor and wall structure.

and double-click Level 1. expand Floor Plans. Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type In this exercise. The surface pattern of the brick is now white. 2 On the View menu. expand Views (all). You change the coarse scale fill pattern from the default color of black to a shade of gray for a wall type. you learn to set the coarse scale fill pattern color for a wall type. Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type | 649 . 11 In the Color dialog. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. click Color. click View Properties.10 Under Surface Pattern. 3 Click Cancel to exit the dialog without making any changes. “Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type” on page 649. select white. View the detail level setting of the view 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK twice. The walls in the floor plan that you work with are displayed with a gray fill pattern when displayed in a view with a coarse level of detail. The view level of this view is set to display in Coarse detail as indicated by the Detail Level instance parameter value under Graphics. c_Showroom.rvt.

click in the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern parameter value field and click 9 In the Fill Patterns dialog. 12 On the View Control Bar. 15 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. 8 In the Type Properties dialog. Plan regions are closed sketches that you can create in floor plan and reflected ceiling plan (RCP) views only. double-click Level 2. the Coarse Scale Fill Color is black and the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern is set to none. 13 Zoom in on the arced wall. By default. 7 In the Color dialog. and click OK. click Save As. and click Element Properties. click Edit/New. and click OK three times. If you create more than one plan region in a file. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. View the arced wall in fine detail 11 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. although they may have 650 | Chapter 12 Viewing .Change coarse scale fill pattern color of the arced wall 4 Select the south arced wall. The wall type is displayed as solid gray within any view where the Detail Level is set to Coarse. 10 On the Design Bar. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. 14 If you want to save your changes. Notice that the surface pattern and color of the brick wall that display in a coarse detail level are not applied because the detail level is set to Fine. the plan regions cannot overlap each other. on the File menu. right-click. Creating a View Plan Region In this lesson. . you work with a split-level building model that requires a different view range than the rest of the view. click Detail Level. and save the exercise file with a unique name. click in the Coarse Scale Fill Color value field. and click Fine. select Solid fill for Name. click Modify. select a shade of gray.

rvt. By creating a plan region in the view with a different cut plane height. click Training Files. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. or pattern. Because the stepped portion of the walls in the building model is above the cut plane height in the Level 1 floor plan view. you create a plan region in the Level 1 floor plan of the following building model. and you cannot control their visibility. Creating a Plan Region in a Floor Plan In this exercise. Plan regions do not work with linked Revit MEP files. it does not display in the Level 1 floor plan. line color. refer to the online Help for more information.coincident edges. Creating a Plan Region in a Floor Plan | 651 . you can display the stepped portion of the walls in the Level 1 floor plan. If you are not familiar with view ranges in Revit MEP. line type. and open Metric\m_Plan_Region.

The stepped portion of the project walls and windows are not displayed because the cut plane does not intersect any of the model geometry above this height. which is similar to the view range for plan views. click Plan Region. Add a plan region to view the stepped portion of the model 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and double-click Level 1. Specify a point at the intersection of the two dashed blue lines on the bottom right. You use the view range property to control the cut plane. expand Floor Plans. click . and click View. The cut plane height of the view range for this view is 1200 mm. view range. sketch the plan region using the blue tick marks for guidance: ■ On the Design Bar. and the view depth plane.View the Level 1 floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. the south elevation is also displayed. right-click in the Design Bar. On the Options Bar. Plan regions have a single property. so you can view the height of the walls and windows. expand Views (all). In the following illustration. ■ ■ ■ Specify a point at the intersection of the two dashed blue lines on the top left. the top and bottom clip planes. click Lines. 3 In the Level 1 view. 652 | Chapter 12 Viewing .

■ ■ On the Design Bar. 6 In the View Range dialog. Creating a Plan Region in a Floor Plan | 653 . The plan region displays as a dashed green line. select Parent View’s Level (Level 1) for Cut Plane. and then click OK twice. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. 8 Click Apply. and view depth) in the view range is the same as the level used to define the corresponding plane in the parent view. you specify that the level used to define each plane (cut plane. The Level 1 floor plan should display as shown in the following illustration. click Edit for View Range. Press ESC to end the command. 7 Because the top clip plane value cannot be set lower than the cut plane. and click Element Properties. When you select the plan region. enter 4000 for the Top Offset. and enter 2800 for the cut plane Offset. This means that the plan region view is going to cut all geometry at 2800 mm above Level 1. right-click. top and bottom clip planes. the line turns red. 4 Select the plan region. click Finish Sketch. By selecting Parent View’s Level. 9 On the Design Bar. under Extents. click Modify.

and save the exercise file with a unique name. 654 | Chapter 12 Viewing .The following illustration demonstrates how the level 1 floor plan view is being viewed with the plan region. 11 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. click Save As. on the File menu. 10 If you want to save your changes.

to place and render decals to create signs. billboards. 655 . and posters.Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs 13 In this tutorial. AccuRender is the rendering engine incorporated into Revit MEP that is used to produce rendered views. you learn to use the AccuRender® Radiosity and Raytrace features in Revit MEP 2008 to create rendered interior and exterior views of your building information model. and to create walkthroughs of your building information model.

define a new polished aluminum material and apply it to the curtain wall mullions on the front curtain wall. you raytrace a region of the building that includes the exterior wall. and create the perspective view that you want to render. After you create the perspective view. You learn to create and apply materials to a building model. Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model In this exercise. you: ■ ■ ■ change the texture of the brick material applied to the exterior walls of the building. and the curtain wall to view and verify the material and texture changes. you learn how to view and modify the material that is applied to a building component in a building model. you select a scene that defines the model environment. You also learn to create a new material and apply it to a building component. you learn how to create an exterior perspective view of a building model and render it with the AccuRender Raytrace feature. change the material of the front terrace of the building from the default material to asphalt. add realistic three-dimensional trees to the building site. and then raytrace the view to produce the final rendered exterior view. When you complete these changes.Rendering an Exterior View In this lesson. You work with a building model that already has material applied to it. 656 | Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . In this exercise. the floor.

Heavyweight block is displayed for Type. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. and click the tab in the context menu. click next to Texture to display the Material Library.rvt. under Construction. and open Metric\m_Cohouse. 5 In the Type Properties dialog.Brick. TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar. under Name. verify that Co-house . click Edit for Structure. Change the brick texture of the exterior wall finish material 7 On the Settings menu. 9 Under AccuRender. right-click in the Design Bar. and click Edit/New. 6 Click Cancel three times to return to the 3D view of the building model without making any changes to the exterior finish at this time. 2 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar. click . 3 On the Options Bar. Verify that the material defined for the exterior finish layer (Layer 1) of the building model is Masonry . Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 657 . select Masonry .Cavity Wall . click Wall. 8 In the Materials dialog. View the finish material of the exterior walls 1 Verify that the 3D view of the townhouse building model is displayed. click Training Files. click Materials.Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Brick.

200mm. under Construction. 27 On the Design Bar. 16 In the Type Properties dialog. expand Masonry and click Brick. 17 In the Edit Assembly dialog. 21 In the Materials dialog. 19 Click OK four times. select Polished. 18 In the Materials dialog. click Edit/New. and click . 25 Under Name. click Modify and select the terrace in front of the building. Define a new polished aluminum material and apply it to the curtain wall mullions 20 On the Settings menu. enter Aluminum. 24 In the Material Library.A preview of the brick texture that is currently assigned to the walls is displayed in the right pane of the Material Library. expand Metals. click Modify. 23 Under AccuRender. and click Aluminum.Running. select Site . under _accurender. click Materials. click in the Material field that contains Default Floor. under Name. 22 In the New Material dialog. 658 | Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .Asphalt. select Carib. . click next to Texture to display the Material Library. Polished and click OK. and click 15 In the Element Properties dialog. 26 Click OK twice. for Layer 2. Change the material of the terrace from the default material to asphalt 13 On the Design Bar. under _accurender. under Name. 10 In the left pane of the Material Library dialog. click Edit for Structure. 12 Click OK twice. 14 On the Options Bar. click Duplicate. 11 Under Name. You can view the new brick texture when you raytrace a region of the building in a later step. 28 Select one of the curtain wall mullions on the exterior face of the building. verify that Floor : Floor 1 displays in the Type Selector.Plain.

select Aluminum. When Curtain Wall Mullions: Rectangular Mullion displays in the Status Bar at the bottom of the screen. 35 Move the cursor over the building model. verify that New is selected. click Edit/New. 33 Click OK three times. Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 659 . 30 In the Element Properties dialog. press TAB to cycle your selection through different building model components. 31 In the Type Properties dialog. Polished. 36 In the Scene Selection dialog. and draw the rectangular region shown in the following illustration. 29 On the Options Bar. and curtain wall mullions to which you made material changes. click in the Material field. 37 If you are prompted to turn off the lights in the scene. This completes the changes in materials and textures that you make for the building model. under Name. click . and click OK. 32 In the Materials dialog. select the curtain wall mullion again. click No. floor.TIP If you do not select the curtain wall mullion on the first selection. click Region Raytrace. under Materials and Finishes. and then click . Make sure the region includes the exterior walls. select Exterior under Type. Raytrace a region of the building to view the material changes that you made 34 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar.

producing a photorealistic effect. expand Views (all). “Adding Trees to the Site” on page 660. 39 Proceed to the next exercise. you place two different types of trees on the building site. 38 On the Design Bar.The portion of the building that you selected is raytraced and the materials that you changed and applied to the exterior walls.rvt. the leaves of the trees display as indicated by the season and location specified in the render scene settings. Add red maple trees to the site 1 In the Project Browser. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Cnst. Adding Trees to the Site In this exercise. click Display Model to end the Region Raytrace command and redisplay the building model in hidden line wireframe. and double-click 1st Flr. m_Cohouse. and curtain wall mullions are rendered (this takes a few moments). expand Floor Plans. floor. when you render an exterior view of the model. 660 | Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . In a later exercise.

9 Meters. and click Site Component. 5 Move the cursor to a location on the building site. 7 In the Type Selector. Create a new type of tree. and click Site. and add it to the site 6 On the Design Bar. 3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. and click to place a tree. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed.Deciduous : Acer Rubrum . and click . select any of the deciduous trees. click Site Component. select M_Tree . Continue to place trees until you have added several red maples to the building site as shown in the following illustration. 4 In the Type Selector.2 Zoom out so you can easily view the area surrounding the building model. right-click in the Design Bar. Available tree types are listed in the Type Selector by their Latin names. click Modify. Adding Trees to the Site | 661 . The tree that you selected in this step is a red maple.

and click Deciduous. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. enter 7000mm for Plant Height. enter Black Oak. as shown in the following illustration. under accurender. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. Creating a Perspective View In this exercise. and click OK. 9 In the Type Properties dialog.rvt. The black oak is shorter than the red maple trees that you added to the site. 18 Proceed to the next exercise. m_Cohouse. and then click display the Plant Library. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. click in the Value field for Plant Name. “Creating a Perspective View” on page 662. 15 Under Other. click Edit/New. you define the exterior perspective view of the building model that you want to render. click Duplicate. 16 Move the cursor to the building site. under Identity Data. under Other. 12 In the Plant Library.8 In the Element Properties dialog. 13 Under Name. to 17 Press ESC to end tree placement. and click OK. expand Trees and Shrubs. and place two black oak trees. select Black Oak for Type Comments. Black. 662 | Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . select Oak. and click OK twice. 10 In the Name dialog.

on the View tab of the Design Bar.Place a camera in the first floor view 1 With the 1st Flr. Cnst. view open. The new perspective view is displayed. Creating a Perspective View | 663 . click Camera. 3 Select and move the crop boundary grips until the perspective view displays as in the following illustration. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and the camera target point: ■ ■ Specify the first point on the site facing the building to position the camera. Specify the second point in front of the building facade to define the target point of the camera.

The red triangle represents the FOV (field of vision) angle and the back clipping plane of the view. The camera position is displayed in the 1st Flr. and click Show Camera. Cnst. 6 Select and move the FOV boundary grip to adjust the field of vision and back clipping plane as shown in the following illustration. expand 3D Views. 5 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. right-click 3D View 1 (the default perspective view name). view. Cnst. 664 | Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .Modify the camera position and back clipping plane in the perspective view 4 In the Project Browser under Views (all). double-click 1st Flr.

Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View | 665 . m_Cohouse. 9 Proceed to the next exercise. right-click 3D View 1. you select a scene and specify time. double-click Exterior. under 3D Views.rvt. enter Exterior. and environment settings that you use to render the view. “Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View” on page 665. and click Rename.7 In the Project Browser. Display the perspective view 1 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View In this exercise. and click OK. 8 In the Rename View dialog. place. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. lighting. date.

and click Sun. 7 Under Date. enter 10 (October) for Month and 5 for Day. 3 In the Scene Selection dialog. Time. Select the render scene settings 2 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. clear Use Sun and Shadow Settings from view.You must define a scene because this is the first time settings are being applied to this view. 6 Select By Date. 4 In the Render Scene Settings dialog. 666 | Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . under Scene Settings. verify that Daylight Savings Time is selected. TIP Use the left and right arrow keys to adjust the minutes precisely. 5 In the Sun and Sky Settings dialog. click Settings. and Place from the Specify Solar Angles list. click OK to accept the existing scene (Scene 1). 8 Under Time. Notice that the name of the tab changes to Date and Time. and drag the slider to set the time to 2:30 PM. click the Solar Angles tab.

) 14 Click OK. 10 Click in the Cities list.00 (many clouds.9 Click the Place tab. 28 If you are prompted to turn off the lights in the scene. This setting produces a level of cloudiness in the sky that ranges from 0 (no clouds) to 1. The Ground Plane tab displays. select Good for Quality. 13 Enter . 12 Click the Settings Tab. and enter bo. under Background Color. 11 Scroll down. verify that Automatic Sky is selected. 20 In the Name list. under Scene Settings. Render the perspective view 24 On the Design Bar. click . 23 Under Raytrace Settings. click Raytrace. 15 In the Render Scene Settings dialog. MA. click Environment. Rye. Dark. and click OK. 27 On the Options Bar. USA. Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View | 667 . and select Boston.20 for Cloudiness. The rendered exterior perspective view is displayed. click Site. 26 On the Design Bar. select Grass. Save the rendered view 29 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 21 Click OK twice. 25 Enter 150 for Resolution. under Scene Settings. 22 In the Render Scene Settings dialog. 18 Click Material. click Image Size. click Capture Rendering. under _accurender. click No. select Ground Plane. select Autumn for Plant Season. The rendered view is saved in the project and can be accessed from the Project Browser. 16 In the Environment dialog. 17 Under Advanced. 19 In the Material Library.

Adding RPC People In this exercise. To create the rendered scene. Rendering an Interior View In this lesson. “Rendering an Interior View” on page 668. and finally. you add ArchVision realpeople (RPC people) to the floor plan of the second floor. expand Renderings. m_Cohouse. Open second floor plan to display the interior scene that you will render 1 In the Project Browser under Views (all).rvt. 32 If you want to save this exercise. Cnst.30 On the Design Bar. on the File menu. 33 Proceed to the next lesson. and double-click Exterior to display the rendered view of the townhouse that you saved. RPC people are represented by a circle in plan view and resemble real people only when rendered in a 3D view. expand Floor Plans. 668 | Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . use both Radiosity and Raytracing to render the view. and double-click 2nd Flr. Redisplay the rendered view 31 In the Project Browser under Views (all). Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. define the view and render scene settings. click Save As. click Display Model to end rendering and redisplay the wireframe perspective view of the building model. and save the exercise file with a unique name. you add two RPC people to the interior view that you render in a later exercise. you render an interior view of the building model that you worked with in the previous lesson.

3 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. Adding RPC People | 669 .2 Zoom in on the left side of the living room as shown. 5 On the Options Bar. select M_RPC Female: Cathy. 7 Repeat steps 4 . click Component. 4 In the Type Selector. 6 Click to place Cathy to the right of the sofa and below the table.6 to select and place M_RPC Male: Alex to the right of Cathy and facing up and to the left (northwest). select Rotate after placement. and then move the cursor to rotate her so she is facing up and to the right (northeast).

Creating the Interior Perspective View In this exercise. 670 | Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . you create the interior perspective view that you will render in the final exercise in this lesson. Add a camera 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and target point: ■ Specify the first point on the floor plan facing the table and RPC people to place the camera. m_Cohouse.rvt.8 Proceed to the next exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. “Creating the Interior Perspective View” on page 670. click Camera.

3 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. but you must adjust the field of vision and far clipping plane to display more of the view.■ Specify the target point of the camera in front of the corner of the table. Cnst. Creating the Interior Perspective View | 671 . The interior perspective is displayed. double-click 2nd Flr.

4 Select and move the FOV boundary grip to adjust field of vision and back clipping plane as shown in the following illustration. and click OK. under Size. and click Rename. 672 | Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . right-click 3D View 1. enter 178 mm for Height. 5 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. double-click 3D View 1 to redisplay the interior perspective view. click the dimensions for Size. 8 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. enter 229 mm for Width. Resize the perspective view 6 On the Options Bar. 7 In the Crop Region Size dialog.

11 On the View menu. click Shading to view the effects of the section box when you add it. enter Interior. Grips are displayed on the section box. Add a section box to limit the extents of the rendered view 10 On the View toolbar. 12 On the View menu. under Extents.9 In the Rename View dialog. select Section Box. 14 On the Design Bar. and select the section box. click View Properties. A section box is displayed around the building model. 15 Select and move the section box grips until only the room that you added RPC people to and that you want to render is visible. click Modify. and click OK. click to display the 3D view of the building model. and click OK. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. Creating the Interior Perspective View | 673 .

7 Select By Date. under Scene Settings. 3 In the Scene Selection dialog. 9 Under Time. Display the interior perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. 8 Under Date. Notice that the name of the tab changes to Date and Time. MA.This process allows you to limit the geometry that will be rendered when you create a rendering of your interior view. 17 In the Environment dialog. on the Main tab. 674 | Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 16 Proceed to the next exercise. and click Save. and enter bo.rvt. 4 Under Type. and Place from the Specify Solar Angles list. 11 Click in the Cities list. 15 In the Sun and Sky Settings dialog. TIP Use the left and right arrow keys to precisely adjust the minutes. and enter Interior Scene for Name. select Interior. clear Use Sun and Shadow Settings from view. double-click Interior to display the interior perspective view. date. USA. verify that Daylight Savings Time is selected. 10 Click the Place tab. click the Solar Angles tab. 16 In the Render Scene Settings dialog. Time. 6 In the Sun and Sky Settings dialog. under Scene Settings. 14 Click Save. place. specify a file location and name for the scene settings. “Creating a New Render Scene” on page 674. and select Boston. and click OK. and drag the slider to set the time to 8:30 PM. verify that Automatic Sky is selected. 12 Scroll down. enter 6 (June) for Month and 6 for Day. m_Cohouse. click Settings. Creating a New Render Scene In this exercise. you reduce the rendering time. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. select New. under Background Color. and click Sun. By limiting the geometry. Select the render scene settings 2 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. click Environment. click OK. you create a render scene to specify the time. 13 Click the Settings tab. and environment settings used to render the view. 5 In the Render Scene Settings dialog.

Dark. click Site. 3 Select the curtain wall on the second floor (Walls: Curtain Wall. select {3D}. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. m_Cohouse. you define daylights for the glazed panels of the curtain wall and render the view. double-click {3D}. select Ground Plane. double-click Interior. click Daylights. 5 On the Design Bar. Defining Daylights and Rendering the View | 675 . “Defining Daylights and Rendering the View” on page 675. and click OK. 20 In the Material Library. The 3D view of the building model with the section box is displayed. click Radiate. select Summer for Plant Season. as daylight sources. Rye. The Ground Plane tab displays. 6 In the Radiosity Information dialog. 21 In the Name list. Define daylights for the glazed panels of the curtain wall 1 In the Project Browser. click OK. you allow sunlight to pass through the panels when you render the view. 23 In the Render Scene Settings dialog.18 Under Advanced. Curtain Wall 1). under accurender. 2 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. When you define daylights for the curtain wall panels. You can select families with transparent materials.rvt. such as windows and doors. Render the perspective view 4 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. 19 Click Material. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. select Grass. 22 Click OK twice. under Use View’s Section Box. 24 Under Scene Settings. Defining Daylights and Rendering the View In this exercise. under 3D Views.

which can take several minutes. begins. The RPC people do not display in the view until you raytrace them in the next steps. Light bounce is calculated for each individual light. By completing the two rendering lessons included in this tutorial. 8 On the Options Bar. 9 If you want to save your changes. 10 Close the exercise file.The radiosity process. 676 | Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and click The raytraced perspective view is displayed and now includes the RPC people. the following rendered view is displayed. click Save As. 7 On the Design Bar. you rendered an exterior and an interior view. You learned to use both the Radiosity and Raytracing features included in the AccuRender render engine. . When radiate completes. and save the exercise file with a unique name. on the File menu. select Medium (150 dpi) for Resolution. click Raytrace.

you must select or define a scene. you can record the walkthrough by exporting it to an AVI file that you can play with any available video player independent of your Revit MEP software. Usually you define the walkthrough path in a plan view. and open Common\c_Townhouse. proceeds through the dining room. In a plan view. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and you create it by specifying points that create the spline. Additional frames that comprise the walkthrough are created between the key frames. You create a walkthrough that begins in the breakfast room of the townhouse. you can also specify the height of the camera along the walkthrough path. click Training Files. A walkthrough is created in a 3D perspective view by default. which is the path that a camera will follow through your building model.Creating and Recording Walkthroughs In this lesson. you learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of your building models in Revit MEP 2008. NOTE Some Imperial values are used by default in this exercise. Recording a Walkthrough After you create a walkthrough. If you prefer to use Metric values. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Creating and Recording Walkthroughs | 677 . Creating and Editing a Walkthrough The first step in creating a walkthrough is to define the walkthrough path. you can select one of the following display options for the building model in your walkthrough: ■ ■ ■ ■ Wireframe Hidden Line (wireframe view with hidden lines) Shaded or Shaded with Edges AccuRender (Raytrace) IMPORTANT If you record your walkthrough AVI with the AccuRender display option. you learn how to create and edit a walkthrough of the first floor of a townhouse. elevation. and ends in the far corner of the living room.rvt. click Settings ➤ Project Units. but you can also define it in a 3D. You can edit the walkthrough path by selecting and moving the key frames. When you export your walkthrough to an AVI. Creating a Walkthrough In this exercise. Each point becomes a key frame in the walkthrough. but you can also create it in a 3D orthographic view. or section view. The walkthrough path is a spline. and change unit formats as desired.

The floor plan of the first floor of the townhouse is displayed. and double-click Walkthrough 1. Edit and play the walkthrough 7 In the Project Browser under Views (all). 4 Move the cursor under the text label in the Breakfast room. expand Views (all). verify that Perspective is selected to create the walkthrough in a 3D perspective view. on the Options Bar. click Walkthrough. expand Walkthroughs. TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar. and click to specify the start point. and double-click 1st Floor. 678 | Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . or the first key frame. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click the tab in the context menu. click . right-click in the Design Bar. of the walkthrough. 6 After you specify the final point of the walkthrough path in the Living room. 3 On the Options Bar. expand Floor Plans. 5 Specify four additional points to define key frame positions on the walkthrough path as shown in the following illustration.Create a walkthrough of the first floor of the building model 1 In the Project Browser.

surrounded by a crop boundary with grips as shown in the following illustration. click Zoom ➤ Zoom Out (2x). If it is not. 13 On the Options Bar. Creating a Walkthrough | 679 . 8 Verify that the crop boundary of the walkthrough frame is selected and is displayed as red with blue grips. and click OK. click Edit Walkthrough. 14 Click . and select the crop boundary. The frame that is displayed is frame 300 of 300 frames in the walkthrough. 12 On the View menu. select the crop boundary. 11 Under Change. 10 In the Crop Region Size dialog. Your frame may look a bit different from the frame in the illustration because the walkthrough path is not precisely the same.The last frame of the walkthrough is displayed. The walkthrough controls are displayed on the Options Bar. enter 16" for Width and 9" for Height. 9 On the Options Bar. click the dimensions for Size to change the size of the walkthrough frame crop region. verify Field of view is selected. Two options are displayed on the Options Bar: Edit Walkthrough and Size.

Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. c_Townhouse. clear Far Clip Active. and click OK. proceed to the next exercise. “Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position” on page 680. 680 | Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and press ENTER to set the walkthrough to play from the beginning (the key frame). you learn how to edit the walkthrough path and change the camera position in the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise. NOTE To stop playing the walkthrough at any time. click Edit Walkthrough. under Extents. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. Edit the walkthrough path 4 On the Options Bar. enter 1 for Frame. and click OK. 18 When the walkthrough stops playing. The walkthrough path is displayed in the floor plan of the first floor. press ESC. The current display is wireframe with hidden lines.15 In the Walkthrough Frames dialog. Clearing this option disables the far clipping plane of the camera. 16 On the Options Bar. 2 On the Options Bar. double-click 1st Floor.rvt. Change the properties of the camera 1 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. 17 Click . click . Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position In this exercise. The walkthrough plays. enter 60 to reduce the total number of frames in the walkthrough from 300 to 60.

Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position | 681 . 6 On the Options Bar. select Path for Controls.The camera is displayed at the first key frame position on the walkthrough path in the breakfast room. You can move any camera target or key frame position. Blue grips are displayed at each key frame. and adjust it to view the kitchen as shown in the following illustration. 5 Select the target point of the camera (the magenta grip). Your walkthrough path may vary from the one in the illustration so do not be concerned if the camera displays at a slightly different location.

If you are unsure of what option to use. NOTE The available Compressor options are specific to your current computer system. 4 Under Format. 1 On the File menu. select <Shading> for Display mode. but that do not suffer loss due to compression quality. 3 Under Output Length. specify 15 for Frames per Second. double-click Walkthrough 1. When you export the walkthrough. and drag it to the location shown in the following illustration. you can select to display the walkthrough in wireframe. and click OK. It produces files that are larger than compressed files. hidden line. or with AccuRender raytracing. specify a path and a file name for the AVI. Recording the Walkthrough In this exercise. shaded. Play the walkthrough to view the changes that you made 8 In the Project Browser. click Export ➤ Walkthrough. 6 Double-click the AVI file to play the walk-through from the location that you specified in step 3. shaded with edges. under Walkthroughs. click Edit Walkthrough. the Full Frames (Uncompressed) option is available to all users. 682 | Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . “Recording the Walkthrough” on page 682.7 Click the third key frame position. without opening Revit MEP 2008. 5 In the Video Compression dialog. and then click to play the walkthrough. 9 On the Options Bar. and click Save.rvt. The AVI is recorded. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. 2 In the Save As dialog. select any codec (compression/decompression) that is available on your system for Compressor. you record the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise by exporting it to an AVI. c_Townhouse. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.

on the File menu. Recording the Walkthrough | 683 . If you had 150 frames and a frame rate of 15 seconds. click Save As. perhaps to 6” wide x 4” height. Reducing the size of the output images and managing the frame rate lets you create realistic and smooth movement. and with a frame rate of from 15-30 frames per second. and save the exercise file with a unique name. then you are moving from the breakfast area to the living room window in 10 seconds. 8 If you want to save this exercise. 9 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. specifying the number of frames.7 Try creating other walkthroughs. reducing the size of the image.

684 | Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .

Exterior solar studies can show the impact of shadows on a site by the terrain and the surrounding buildings. 685 . you learn how a solar study of different perspective views of a building can support passive solar design by showing where shadows fall during the warmest time of the day and at different times throughout the year. you create interior and exterior views of a building information model to be used in solar studies that you define. More specifically. Interior solar studies can illustrate how effectively natural light penetrates inside a building during specific times of the day and year.Creating Solar Studies 14 The ability to create solar studies for a specific project and site can be very valuable for creating sustainable designs. In this tutorial. You specify settings for summer and winter solstice solar studies and export one solar study as a video and the other as a series of images.

1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. ■ ■ ■ A courtyard perspective view illustrates how shadows impact the site and buildings. expand Views (all). and double-click 01 Entry. 3 Click in the lower right corner of the drawing area outside of the courtyard to place the camera and click in the upper left corner above the courtyard to place the camera target point. A plan view provides information on how sunlight and shadows play on the floor of a building.rvt. Creating a Solar Study . you customize a 3D external view of the building to enhance Solar Study analysis. In the left pane of the Open dialog. as shown. A cut section view enables you to see the effect of shadows and light on the interior of a building. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. A 3D view is created. you learn to create three 3D views of a building information model for use with solar studies. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.Courtyard View In this exercise. 686 | Chapter 14 Creating Solar Studies . and open Common\c_Solar_Study. expand Floor Plans. click Camera. The view you create may differ slightly from the illustrations in the exercises because of minor variations in camera placement.Creating Views for Solar Studies In this lesson.

8 In the Project Browser. 2 Enter ZR to zoom in on the house. under Floor Plans. you create a section cutaway view. click Modify. 5 In the Dynamic View dialog.rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise. “Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View” on page 687. and click Rename. 6 On the Design Bar. expand 3D Views. right-click 3D View 1. and drag the blue circular controls to see more of the perspective view. click Spin and move the cursor in the drawing area to adjust the view. Create section 1 In the Project Browser. click Save As. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. 10 On the File menu. as shown.4 On the View toolbar. if necessary. 7 Click the view boundary to select it. enter Solar Study . double-click 01 Entry. 11 Proceed to the next exercise. as shown. 9 In the Rename View dialog. and save the exercise file with a unique name. and click OK. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View In this exercise. click to reorient the view. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View | 687 .Courtyard View.

7 In the Project Browser. 6 To view the section. Create 3D section view 9 On the View toolbar. 8 In the Rename View dialog. 4 Click to the right of reference plane 9 between A and B and. click Section.3 On the Design Bar. 5 On the Design Bar. enter Section for Solar Study Cutaway. expand Sections. and click OK. click . and click Rename. 688 | Chapter 14 Creating Solar Studies . double-click the section head. and then click to the left outside of the house to sketch the horizontal section line shown in the following illustration. click 10 On the View toolbar. click Modify. right-click Section 1. to reorient the view.

select Section: 12 In the Dynamic View dialog. On the Annotation Categories tab. under 3D Views. as shown. click Spin and move the cursor to adjust the view down and to the right. click Section for Solar Study Cutaway. changing to Medium or Fine provides a better view for a shadow study. some structural elements are shown as a single line rather than solid and do not cast a shadow. double-click 01 Entry. enter Solar Study Section Cutaway. then select Medium. 17 To hide the section box. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View In this exercise. NOTE A plan view of a shadow study should be created in a 3D view with top orientation. such as floor plans and ceiling plans. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. and click OK. clear Section Boxes. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 14 In the Project Browser. and click OK. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View | 689 . under Floor Plans. then Fine. 13 On the Design Bar. and click Rename. click Detail Level ➤ Coarse. click Modify. do not display many elements in 3D. to expand the dialog. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. NOTE With the detail level set to Coarse. so no shadows will be cast from these elements. “Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View” on page 689. 3 Click in the upper left corner and lower right corner to sketch a selection around the site. click Save. click Callout. 15 In the Rename View dialog.11 In the Dynamic View dialog. including the house. right-click {3D}.rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise. Create callout 1 In the Project Browser. 16 On the View Control Bar. Typical plan views. In some cases. you create a plan cutaway view. and under Orient to a View. as shown. 18 On the File menu.

under Floor Plans. 6 In the Rename View dialog. to reorient the view. double-click Callout of 01 Entry. 10 In the Dynamic View dialog. 11 On the Design Bar. and under Orient to a View. 690 | Chapter 14 Creating Solar Studies . and click OK. 13 Select the blue down arrow control at the bottom of the model and drag down to expose the full first level of the model. click . click Modify. right-click Callout of 01 Entry. as shown. select Floor Plan: Solar Study Callout for Plan Cutaway. and click Rename. 9 In the Dynamic View dialog click to expand the dialog. click 8 On the View toolbar. 5 In the Project Browser.4 In the Project Browser. click Spin and move the cursor to adjust the view to the right and back to view the front side. 14 Select the blue up arrow control in the center of the model and drag up to expose the second floor of the building. Create 3D Plan View 7 On the View toolbar. 12 Select the section box in the drawing area. as shown. enter Solar Study Callout for Plan Cutaway.

18 In the Project Browser. Display study views 22 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. click Detail Level ➤ Fine. under 3D Views. 16 On the View Control Bar. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View | 691 . click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. 21 On the File menu.Courtyard View Solar Study Plan Cutaway Solar Study Section Cutaway These views will be used in additional lessons in this tutorial. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. so you can see into the building from the top. double-click each of the sun study 3D views that you created in this lesson: ■ ■ ■ Solar Study . under 3D Views. 19 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. 17 On the View Control Bar. right-click {3D}. click Save. enter Solar Study Plan Cutaway. 20 On the View Control Bar.15 Select the Roof.

9 In the Name dialog. For the Single-Day solar study. 10 Under Place. USA. as well as a time interval for the frames of the solar animation. enter Summer Solstice. you specify the location.Courtyard View. you create a solar study for winter and summer solstice. 11 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. CA. click . You can change the intensity of the shadows by dragging the slider in the Shadow field. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics.rvt dataset you used in the previous lesson. date range. MA. Creating Solar Studies . and time. 2 On the View Control Bar. and preview the effects of each study as an animation. . For this study. you create a single-day solar study for the summer solstice. USA is selected. expand Views (all).Summer and Winter Solstice In this exercise. 8 Confirm that One Day Solar Study . single-day. date. select Los Angeles. click Changing the place in this dialog changes the setting defined for the project. Dataset Continue to use the customized c_solar_study. You can create a still. For the Multi-Day solar study. and click OK. and time range.Boston. 5 Click the Single-Day tab. expand 3D Views. Create summer solstice study 1 In the Project Browser. as well as a time interval for the frames of the solar animation. 6 Click the Multi-Day tab. click . and click OK. 692 | Chapter 14 Creating Solar Studies . and click Duplicate. and double-click Solar Study . 7 Create a Single-Day study from an existing study. The Sun and Shadows Settings dialog displays. for City. The animations of solar activity at a particular place and time allow you to study the impact of natural light and shadows on the buildings and site.Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations In this lesson. leave the slider at 50. Click the Single-Day tab. Los Angeles. you specify the location. or multi-day solar study. 3 Select Cast Shadows. 4 Under Sun and Shadows Settings.

click the control buttons to preview the animation: ■ To display the previous key frame. For Time Range. . 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog.12 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog: ■ ■ For Date. Los Angeles is selected. Los Angeles. click . Previewing Solar Study Animation | 693 .Courtyard View is currently displayed. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. 2006. 2 On the View Control Bar. 2006. Preview winter solstice animation 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study .rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 16 In the Name dialog. click Save. click . on the Single-Day tab. “Previewing Solar Study Animation” on page 693. and click OK. and click Duplicate. Clear Ground Plane at Level. select Winter Solstice. Los Angeles. NOTE If you clear Sunrise to sunset. and click OK. click OK. 19 On the File menu. 14 In this case. enter Winter Solstice. 20 Proceed to the next exercise. click OK. verify that the value is set to 15 minutes. Under Frame. You can select the level to be used for shadow display. 8 On the Options Bar. 6 On the View Control Bar. for Date. you can specify the start and stop times for the solar study. you want to see how the shadows fall on the terrain and not for a specific level. click To display the next key frame. you preview the solar studies you created in the previous exercise. Previewing Solar Study Animation In this exercise. click . 13 Select Ground Plane at Level. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. ■ For Time Interval. 17 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. confirm that Summer Solstice. Create winter solstice study 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. under Sun and Shadows Settings. 7 On the Options Bar. and click OK. ■ ■ To display the previous sequential frame. select June 22. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. under Frame. verify that Sunrise to sunset is selected. enter 10 and press ENTER. select December 22. 18 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. Notice that 01 Entry is selected as the level. click Shadows ➤ Preview Solar Study. you can specify to go to a specific frame in the solar study animation: ■ ■ Under Frame. enter 20 and press ENTER.

■ To display the next sequential frame. 13 On the View Control Bar. select Summer Solstice. on the Single-Day tab. under Floor Plans. . Preview summer solstice animation 9 On the View Control Bar. click To play the animation from start to finish. Click in the drawing area and enter Living Area. approximately as shown.rvt dataset you saved in the previous lesson. under Sun and Shadows Settings. 12 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. You also export the winter solstice solar study as a series of PNG format images. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. click Text. Annotate view for solar study 1 In the Project Browser. approximately as shown. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. click OK. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. Exporting Solar Studies In this lesson. Los Angeles. AVI files are standalone video files that can be easily distributed and viewed by colleagues or clients. 3 Label areas in the house: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click . ■ NOTE You can stop viewing the animation at any time by clicking Cancel in the Status Bar. click Shadows ➤ Preview Solar Study. click . showing the progression at 15-minute intervals for the location and date specified. click . Exporting the Study as AVI In this exercise. you export the summer solstice solar study as an AVI file. PNG format images can be easily displayed on a web site or sent via e-mail. and click OK. 2 Enter ZR and zoom in on the house. Each PNG is a still image of a sequential frame in the animation. double-click 01 Entry. Click and enter Dining. 694 | Chapter 14 Creating Solar Studies . The solar study animation plays. 14 On the Options Bar. 11 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. you annotate a floor plan to identify different activities for the building and export a solar study for a cutaway view as an AVI video file. Click outside of the text box to end the command.

Los Angeles. Sketching the living and dining room areas in the house and using a solar study to determine where direct light is in the floor plan helps to determine the best layout. and click OK. NOTE The building is a shell and you are considering alternative layouts for the interior space. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. expand 3D Views. On the Annotation Categories tab. click . click . click Lines. On the Options Bar. ■ ■ ■ Click in the drawing area and sketch a rectangle around the living area. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. 6 On the View Control Bar. Exporting the Study as AVI | 695 . 8 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. and double-click Solar Study Section Cutaway. click OK. 5 In the Project Browser. select Summer Solstice. 11 To display the section box. 9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. as shown.4 Sketch rooms: ■ On the Design Bar. on the Single-Day tab. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. Click in the drawing area and sketch around the Dining area. verify that Cast Shadows is selected. as shown. select Section Boxes. and click OK.

13 Click the right blue control and drag the right edge of the section box to reveal the roof overhang. 696 | Chapter 14 Creating Solar Studies . On the Annotation Categories tab. select AVI Files. Under Format. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. you only enter one dimension and the other one is calculated automatically. select the section box. enter 450 in the first field (width). Under Output Length. For Frames per second. and click in the second field (height) to see the value dynamically changed. For File name.Los Angeles. For Save as type. verify that the value is set to 15. and enter 5 to 50. clear Section Boxes. Export as AVI 16 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. 15 To hide the section box. verify that Hidden Line is selected. NOTE ZR for Zoom To Region to make it easier to select the control.12 In the drawing area. and enter ZF to zoom to fit the building to the drawing area. To maintain the proportions of the frame. if necessary. as shown. select Frame range. For Dimensions. The equivalent zoom percentage is also set if you specify frame dimensions. enter Summer Solar Study Section Cutaway . for Model Graphics Style. and click OK. 14 Click outside of the section box. 17 Complete the information in the Save As dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the Desktop icon on the left to save the file to the computer Desktop.

and click in the second field (height) to see the value dynamically changed. The AVI can then typically be played from within the zip file. “Exporting a Study as PNG” on page 697. depending on the Frame Range. you export the Winter Solstice Solar Study to create a solar animation that is output as individual ping (PNG format) graphics. or frame. 20 On the File menu. Exporting a Study as PNG In this lesson. and click OK. For File name. 8 In the Save As dialog. For Save as type. Under Output Length. For Frames per second. enter 450 in the first field (width). or any single-frame format. 3 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. for Compressor. click Save. 18 In the Save As dialog.rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise. select PNG. you open each image. enter Winter Solar Study Section Cutaway . The resulting PNG images are date and time stamped. NOTE When you export to PNG. 7 Complete the information in the Save As dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the Desktop icon. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. click OK. TIFF.Los Angeles. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. Under Format. verify that the value is set to 15. it is recommended that you first create a folder to export to because the export process creates several files. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click Save. select Frame range. 6 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. on the Single-Day tab. the Frame Range was set to just 5 files to avoid cluttering the Desktop. For Dimensions. and enter 5 to 10. click . To view the animation. click Save. such as JPEG. verify that Hidden Line is selected. The animation plays as the files are saved to the Desktop. for Model Graphics Style. In this example. Los Angeles. Export as PNG 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study Section Cutaway is displayed. select Winter Solstice. 19 In the Video Compression dialog. or GIF. of the animation separately. 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. Limiting the range from 5 to 50 omits these frames. BMP. verify that Full Frames (Uncompressed) is selected. 2 On the View Control Bar. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the Desktop. and click OK. NOTE Uncompressed AVI files can be zipped to reduce the file size.NOTE The first and last few frames (sunrise and sunset) show large triangular shadows from the terrain. as shown: Exporting a Study as PNG | 697 .

Creating an Internal Plan Solar Study In this lesson. you create an internal solar study for a plan to determine where shadows fall inside the building during the warmest part of the day.9 On the File menu.rvt dataset you saved in the previous lesson. you create a 3D view of a plan and create a solar study to animate the effects of natural light on the inside of the building. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. 698 | Chapter 14 Creating Solar Studies . click Save. Create plan interior view 1 In the Project Browser. Creating an Internal Plan Study In this exercise. under 3D Views. 2 Select the section box in the drawing area. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway.

Hiding the roof allows you to see how shadows fall on the interior floor of the building. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. 3 Select the blue left arrow control and drag it to the left to expose the roof overhang and posts. Creating an Internal Plan Study | 699 . as shown. and on the View Control Bar.NOTE Enter ZF for Zoom To Fit if necessary to see the entire building on the screen. 4 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Top. 5 Select the roof.

click Shadows ➤ Solar Study Off. 13 Specify values for the multi-day study: ■ ■ ■ . and click OK. Click Detail Level ➤ Fine. click OK.Los Angeles . 14 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. specify 2:00 pm. select Full Frames (Uncompressed). clear Section Boxes. 11 Select Multi Day Solar Study . for name enter 2pm Los Angeles Plan Cutaway. click 10 On the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 9 On the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. 8 On the View Control Bar. On the Annotation Categories tab. for Compressor. 7 Adjust settings on the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Shadows ➤ Shadows On. Notice that the dining area receives full sun during the warmest part of the day. and click OK.Week Interval. MA. 18 On the File menu. For Time Interval. 12 In the Name dialog. and click Duplicate. 15 Export the animation: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. and click OK. For Time. under Sun and Shadows Settings. Clear Ground Plane at Level so that the shadows fall on the terrain.Create multi-day solar study 6 To hide the section box. select One week. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. Orienting to True North for Solar Studies In this lesson. In the Save As dialog.Boston. click Save. and click OK. 17 On the View Control Bar. you compare how shadows display when the project is oriented to Project North and when it is changed to True North. USA. 16 In the Video Compression dialog. 700 | Chapter 14 Creating Solar Studies . The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop. Click the Desktop icon. and click Save. for File name enter 2pm . click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click the Multi-Day tab.

NOTE Solar Studies do not have a Daylight Savings setting.rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise. change the time back to 12:00 PM. select Summer Solstice. 4 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. 7 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. click . Notice that the shadows display in an upward direction in the cutaway view. and click OK. In this exercise. click . so you may need to make your own adjustment for specific studies. Then. you change the orientation to True North to see how the change in orientation can impact solar study accuracy. 9 Under Date and Time. 11 Under Date and Time. you create still solar studies and observe that the shadows extend straight up when the project is set to the default orientation of Project North. 5 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 10 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. 2 On the View Control Bar. click the Still tab. click . specify 11:00 AM for time. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. on the Still tab. to see the sun at its highest point on June 22. and click OK. 8 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. For example. click Apply. select Cast Shadows. and click OK. and select Winter Solstice. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. you would set the time to 1:00 PM rather than 12:00 PM. 6 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. Orienting to True North | 701 .Orienting to True North Drafting convention is that project north is the top of the view. View still solar studies 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study Plan Cutaway is displayed in the drawing area.

select True North. In the Element Properties dialog. under Graphics. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. 18 Orient the project to True North: ■ ■ ■ ■ Right-click in the drawing area. 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. double-click 01 Entry. and select Winter Solstice. for Orientation. NOTE You must go to a plan view to set True North and you must change the view graphics to True North before you can change the angle value. 13 On the View Control Bar. click OK. 14 Under Sun and Shadows Settings.12 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. Rotate project to True North 17 In the Project Browser. and select View Properties. under Floor Plans. On the Options Bar. click the Still tab. 702 | Chapter 14 Creating Solar Studies . and click OK. Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Rotate True North. in the Angle from Project to True North field. and click OK. 16 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. enter 45 and press ENTER to set the angle of rotation. click . click OK. Notice that the project rotates in the view.

22 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. select Summer Solstice. click the Still tab. and click Apply. For Save as type. enter True North Summer Solstice Plan Cutaway. including the angle from True North. under 3D Views. In the Save As dialog. 19 In the Project Browser. click Summer Solstice. 21 On the View Control Bar. are saved with the project.NOTE Settings for the location and orientation. 20 Click View menu ➤ Refresh. 24 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click . verify that AVI Files is selected. 23 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Los Angeles. Notice that the shadows lengthen now that the project is oriented to True North. Export animated solar study 26 Export the animation: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. for File name. and click OK. click OK. Orienting to True North | 703 . 25 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. click the Single-Day tab.

On the Options Bar. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop. Click the Desktop icon. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. under 3D Views. and click in the second dimension field to see the value calculated automatically. select Winter solstice 2pm in LA. it is a best practice to change the view graphics setting back to Project North for documentation and annotation purposes: ■ ■ ■ In the Project Browser. you render an interior view to observe how sunlight and shadows play in a specific room. Rendering Interior Shadow Views In this lesson. 704 | Chapter 14 Creating Solar Studies . select Project North.■ Under Format. JPEG format images can be easily displayed on a web site or sent via e-mail. In this exercise. The scene is rendered in full color at draft resolution.rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise. and select View Properties. Right-click in the drawing area. ■ 27 In the Video Compression dialog. and exporting it as a JPEG image. and click OK. Refer to “Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs” on page 655 for additional information on rendering. 28 Once you are finished with the study. In the Element Properties dialog. for Compressor. Since a rendered image is temporary. On the Options Bar. Rendering an Interior View Shadow calculations are not reliable for camera views in which a shadow would fall onto the camera’s location in the view. double-click 01 Entry. 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 2 In the Project Browser. double-click each of the following views to review the available views for rendering: ■ ■ ■ to house from SW to west facade of house living area This view most accurately shows the interior of the living room. enter 600 in the first field. you confirm that the winter solstice has sunlight in the living room by creating one rendering. for Dimensions. 4 Render the scene: ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. you also capture the image and export it as a JPEG file for future use. and click Save. click Save. NOTE Retain the 45° value for the Angle from project to True North to maintain accuracy in shadow display for this project. for Resolution. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. This would include some exterior views and most interior views. 29 On the File menu. verify that Full Frames (Uncompressed) is selected. click Raytrace. click GO. select Draft (75 dpi). under 3D Views. Rendered views do not have this limitation. 3 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. for Scene. under Graphics. under Floor Plans. for Orientation. capturing it. Rendered views will also show shade from plants and seasonal foliage.

■ ■ On the Options Bar. click Capture Rendering. so use the Capture Rendering option to save the view in the project. click Save. select Presentation (300 dpi). double-click each of the following images: ■ ■ ■ living area summer living area winter to house and studio summer solstice 8 On the File menu. 7 Review some captured images of the building. Notice that you can clearly see where light enters the windows and how the shadows fall on the floor. In the Save As dialog. select JPEG. 5 On the Design Bar. 6 Export the image as a JPEG: ■ ■ on the Design Bar. Rendering an Interior View | 705 . The scene is rendered in high resolution. click GO. NOTE Rendered views are temporary. under Renderings. On the Options Bar. for Resolution. click Export Image. and click Save. for Save as Type. In the Project Browser.

706 | Chapter 14 Creating Solar Studies .

Presentation Views 15 In this tutorial. there are several options for expressing the architecture. You can use the analytique to graphically compare the organization and forms of a particular 707 . length. and line quality without the measurement of its thickness is to transcend "building" and to recognize the "architecture. To express texture beyond material specifics. and Section Boxes. elevations. the Linework Tool. The architect's primary goal in documentation is to communicate the intent of the design. Advanced Model Graphics. you learn several graphic techniques using these above mentioned tools to create an "analytique. For the realistic approach. and other quantifiable elements within the context of contract documents. There are two directions you can choose when organizing presentation graphics: realism and stylistics. an outside reviewer. a consultant. you explore the stylistic approach. sections. There remain many options in the software that do not quantify specific dimensions so much as they explain the subjective complexity of the work. They include the Accurender® Plug-in for Rendering. or the client. and details. type." The analytique is a classic Beaux Arts method of representing a work of architecture for analysis by graphically showing the relationship among plans. Whether the audience is the general contractor. tutorials on the Accurender features of Revit MEP can be found under “Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs” on page 655. you learn various methods of effectively communicating your design intent to your audience by creating presentation views. A majority of tools in Revit MEP 2008 are intended to describe number. tailoring the presentation is just as important as the accuracy of the content. In this tutorial. In this series of exercises." In Revit MEP.

Using the pre-built building model. Co-house.building or space by superimposing and overlapping measured drawings at multiple scales. 708 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . you organize an analytique by creating and modifying several views.

change the visibility settings to remove unwanted documentation. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. you create a copy of a floor plan in preparation for the analytique. and place the plan on a dark background for contrast. In order for the floor plan to fit into the analytique. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. and open Metric\m_Cohouse. expand Floor Plans. Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique | 709 . you create a presentation floor plan. Copy the floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. A copy of the floor plan is created and opened. you create a copy of the plan. right-click 2nd Flr. Cnst. expand Views (all).Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique In this lesson. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique In this exercise.

710 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . click the Scale control and select 1:100. exit the menu. enter Presentation Second Floor Plan. Modify view scale 9 On the View Control Bar at the bottom of the drawing area. 3 In the Rename View dialog. Modify visibility/graphics 4 On the View menu. 7 Under Visibility. Notice that no annotations display in this view. click Visibility/Graphics. TIP If the Visibility/Graphics option is not active. 8 Click OK. expand the Stairs category. Cnst. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. NOTE Stair text is considered part of a stair component rather than an annotation. 10 On the File menu. and click OK. Notice the immediate change in the line weights. right-click Copy of 2nd Flr. 6 Click the Model Categories tab. and click Rename. This turns off the visibility of all tags. click the Annotation Categories tab. 5 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. click Save As. and click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics again. sections. dimensions. UP Text. click in the drawing area. and so on in this view.2 In the Project Browser. elevations. Up Arrow. and clear DOWN Text. under Floor Plans. Down Arrow. this represents the view getting smaller.

click . the darker the shadows. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.11 In the Save As directory. Within a Project. specify the following: ■ ■ Select Hidden Line for Style. and delete multiple locations in order to analyze a single prototype. The Sun and Shadows Settings are shared with Accurender and can also be used when rendering. Modify advanced model graphics settings 1 If the Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan is not the active view. The Shadow intensity dictates the darkness of the shadow display. At that place. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. select Cast Shadows. Time and Place. and click Advanced Model Graphics. ■ Under Sun and Shadows Settings. name the project m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. you can specify one place where the project resides within the world. 8 Select Boston. click for Place. specify 35 for Shadow. USA for City. 6 Under Settings. Changes made within the Advanced Model Graphics dialog are applied only to the active view. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. modify. you can create. 12 Proceed with the next exercise. and click Save. MA. navigate to the folder of your choice. 2 On the View Control Bar. ■ Under Intensity. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows and add a sense of texture to the new floor plan view. The higher the number. and click OK. Using Advanced Model Graphics | 711 . select By Date. 7 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. 5 Under Settings.rvt. NOTE Shadows can be cast in all view styles except Wireframe. Using Advanced Model Graphics In this exercise. “Using Advanced Model Graphics” on page 711. click the Place tab. double-click it in the Project Browser.rvt. select Sun and Shadow Settings. on the Still tab. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. Under Shadows Properties.

9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog.NOTE For this step. Turn off the ground plane shadows 13 On the View Control Bar. and click Advanced Model Graphics. clear Ground Plane at Level. and select 1st Flr. 17 On the File menu. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. click . most of the images in the remainder of this tutorial may differ from those on your screen depending on the settings that you choose. you can enter any city you wish. 712 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . 10 Select Ground Plane at Level. under Settings. 18 Proceed with the next exercise. Cnst. 16 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. click OK. 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. under Sun and Shadows Settings. Notice the series of shadows based on the specified sun angles. This plan view is now ready to be added to a sheet. 12 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. 14 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. “Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet” on page 713. This turns off the shadows cast on the ground. 11 Click OK. click OK. and click OK. This is the level the shadow will be cast upon. specify 10/27/2006 for Date and 1:00 PM for Time. however. be aware that if you enter a different city. click Save. This gives the plan depth and creates a sensation of space beyond what you can normally express in a plan view.

select Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan. and click OK. TIP If the View tab is not available. 5 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet as shown. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Add View. 7 Zoom in around the viewport. click Modify. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet | 713 . Notice the blank D-sized sheet is portrait oriented. right-click the Design Bar. and notice a view title displays. and click View. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. Create a new sheet 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. The viewport displays at the tip of the cursor. and click Add View to Sheet.Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet In this exercise. 6 On the Design Bar. select Arch Portrait. 4 In the Views dialog. click Sheet. and click to place it. you add the floor plan to a sheet and modify the view to enhance the contrast.

9 On the Options Bar. click OK.Because the view title needs to be removed for the analytique. click Duplicate. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. This activates the Presentation Second Floor Plan within the context of the sheet. Notice the viewport no longer displays a view title. 714 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . you will create a dark filled region for the floor plan view. Create a solid fill background for contrast 15 Right-click the viewport. and click Activate View. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. you need to create a new viewport type that does not display the view title. For this analytique. To accomplish this. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit/New. 12 In the Name dialog. and click OK. Create a new viewport type 8 Select the viewport in the center of the sheet. enter Presentation. click . under Graphics. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. select No for Show Title. and click OK. you need to create a base of contrast for the centered plan.

click Region Properties. The lines shown below are enhanced for training purposes. 24 In the Type Properties dialog. click . 18 On the Options Bar. click Edit/New. 17 In the Type Selector. create the interior chain of lines using Medium or Wide lines. fill properties. You may want to zoom in while sketching some details. for Fill Pattern. and select Chain. you must define the inner perimeter by drawing a chain of lines around the perimeter of the building model. 20 On the Options Bar. 22 On the Design Bar. TIP Use care when sketching this chain. and you should take advantage of endpoint snapping when available.16 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. TIP If you have difficulty sketching using invisible lines. under Graphics. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet | 715 . click . and the boundary of the region. The space between the perimeter of the building model and each line should be equidistant. You enter sketch mode where you define the line type. click . select Invisible Lines. If necessary. 19 Draw a rectangle around the view as shown. and click OK. When you are finished drawing the chain. draw a chain of lines around the exterior face of the building model as shown. click Filled Region. Now that you have defined the outer perimeter of the filled region. 25 In the Name dialog. 26 In the Type Properties dialog. select the entire chain (use TAB) and change the line type back to Invisible lines by selecting it from the Type Selector. 21 Starting at the upper-left corner of the building model. click Duplicate. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. use the Trim tool to clean up gaps or overlapping intersections. enter Solid Black.

verify that the Background is Opaque and the Color is Black. click Finish Sketch. you copy an elevation view and use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the view. 716 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . select Solid Fill. 30 On the Design Bar. Preparing the Elevation Analytique In this exercise. “Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique” on page 716. 32 Right-click the edge of the sheet. 35 Proceed with the next lesson. Name the sheet 31 Right-click anywhere on the sheet. click OK. under Identity Data. enter Presentation for Sheet Name. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. 28 In the Type Properties dialog.27 In the Fill Patterns dialog. 29 In the Element Properties dialog. you create an elevation and add it to the presentation sheet that you created in the first exercise. Notice how the filled region enhances the view contrast. and click View Properties. and click Deactivate View. 34 On the File menu. under Name. and click OK. click Save. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique In this lesson. and click OK. scroll down. and click OK.

and click OK. under Pattern Overrides. 6 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. right-click Copy of South. under Visibility. click Visibility/Graphics.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. A copy of the south elevation view becomes the active view. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. under Visibility. and click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics again. under Elevations. 9 Click OK. click in the Walls row. under Views (all). and click Rename. enter Presentation South Elevation. expand Elevations. scroll up. 7 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. on the Model Categories tab. click Override. 3 In the Rename View dialog. and clear Elevation Swing. Modify visibility/graphic overrides 4 On the View menu. TIP If the Visibility/Graphics option is not active. Copy and rename the elevation view 1 In the Project Browser. right-click South. In the Projection/Surface Patterns column for Walls. 8 Click the Annotation Categories tab. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and clear Show annotation categories in this view.rvt. click in the drawing area. 5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. expand the Doors category. exit the menu. 2 In the Project Browser. and click OK. clear Visible. This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view. Preparing the Elevation Analytique | 717 . This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view.

under Settings. 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 16 In the Name dialog. Changes made within the Advanced Model Graphics dialog are applied only to the active view. you can create more interesting shadows on the elevation view. click Duplicate. you add the Presentation South Elevation view to the Presentation sheet. click Save. click OK. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Elevation. specify 35 for Shadow. 17 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. select Cast Shadows. select By Date. 11 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog.Apply advanced model graphics 10 On the View Control Bar. 19 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. and click Advanced Model Graphics. verify that Hidden Line is the selected Style. By changing the angle of the sun. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet In this exercise. click . 14 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. 21 Proceed with the next exercise. 718 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . 12 Under Shadow Properties. 18 Specify 2:30 PM for Time. Time and Place. 13 Under Intensity. 20 On the File menu. and click OK. and click OK. “Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet” on page 718.

expand Sheets (all). click Add View. Notice the viewport displays a view title. TIP Use the snap feature to snap the viewport to the center reference plane. 3 In the Views dialog. 4 Center the viewport above the presentation plan view as shown. and double-click A105 .Presentation.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Elevation: Presentation South Elevation. and click Add View to Sheet. under Views (all). m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.rvt. Add a view to the sheet 1 In the Project Browser. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet | 719 .

select Viewport: Presentation. 6 Drag the Presentation South Elevation viewport downward until it shares an edge with the presentation floor plan.5 In the Type Selector. 720 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . click Modify. Notice the view title no longer displays. 7 On the Design Bar.

You also create a view template for presentation views and apply it to other views. “Adding Section Views to the Analytique” on page 721.8 On the File menu. You add silhouette edges and filled regions to the views. you create section and callout views and place them in the analytique. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 721 . click Save. Preparing a Section View for the Analytique In this exercise. Adding Section Views to the Analytique In this lesson. 9 Proceed with the next lesson. you create and modify the section view that you later add to the analytique.

and double-click Section 2. To accomplish this. this view needs to be rotated 180 degrees. 722 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . 3 On the Options Bar.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. To fit correctly in the analytique. you will create a callout around the building model components within the section view. select 1: 100 for Scale. Adjust the controls to modify the extents. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.rvt. double-click 1st Flr. Add a section in a plan view 1 In the Project Browser. click Section. The section should cut through the center of the building model and extend past the front of the building (lower wall). m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. TIP You can also change the scale of the section view after you create it. Create a callout of the section view 5 In the Project Browser. expand Sections (Callout 1). and use the flip arrows if necessary. 4 Add the section shown below. Section 2 is added to the building model. Cnst. under Floor Plans.

and click OK. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. click Visibility/Graphics. Rename the callout 9 On the Design Bar. click the Model Categories tab. 11 In the Rename View dialog. 10 In the Project Browser. Use the controls to adjust the precise location of the boundary and to move the callout head so it is readily identifiable. under Sections (Callout 1). clear Visible. Modify Visibility/Graphic Overrides 13 On the View menu. and click OK. under Pattern Overrides. select 1 : 100 for Scale. Preparing a Section View for the Analytique | 723 .6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. double-click Presentation Section 2. under Sections (Callout 1). TIP You can also open the callout in the Project Browser by double-clicking Callout of Section 2 under Sections (Callout 1). click Override. 7 On the Options Bar. 16 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. and click Rename. This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view. 12 In the Project Browser. click Modify. click in the Walls row. 8 Draw a callout around all the building model components within the section view as shown. right-click Callout of Section 2. enter Presentation Section 2. click Callout. 15 Under Visibility. In the Projection/Surface Patterns column for Walls.

clear Crop Region Visible. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. and click OK. When you select the crop boundary. Hide the crop boundary 21 Select the crop boundary. expand the Doors category. The inner crop boundary shows the crop region for model elements. under Extents. This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. clear Annotation Crop. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. 18 Turn off the visibility of the following model categories: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Casework Ceilings Furniture Lighting Fixtures Specialty Equipment 19 Click the Annotation Categories tab. Revit MEP displays 2 boundaries.17 Under Visibility. 22 On the Options Bar. click . Notice that the crop regions no longer display. 20 Click OK. The outer crop boundary (indicated with dashed lines) shows the crop region for annotation elements. 724 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . scroll up. and clear Elevation Swing.

2 On the View Control Bar. specify 35 for Shadow. Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View | 725 . and click Advanced Model Graphics. select Cast Shadows. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. In addition. Click Apply. “Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View” on page 725. Notice that the shadows displayed do not offer much contrast. click Save. you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the section view. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Hidden Line for Style. open the Project Browser and. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.rvt. TIP You may need to move the dialog off to the side in order to see the view. Under Shadows Properties. double-click Presentation Section 2. Add shadows to the section view 1 If Presentation Section 2 is not the active view. Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View In this exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise.24 On the File menu. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. 25 Proceed with the next exercise. Under Intensity. under Sections (Callout 1). you apply silhouette edges to contrast the edges of the view.

5 In the Name dialog. and click Advanced Model Graphics. 6 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 10 Under Silhouette Edges. TIP The current view of your model may vary from the illustrations in the tutorial based on the placement of the section line in the previous exercise. you create a new Sun and Shadow setting in order to make a presentation view with more contrast. click Duplicate. “Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique” on page 727. click OK. 11 On the File menu. click Save. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. under Settings. was added to this dataset for training purposes. and click OK. Apply silhouette edges 8 On the View Control Bar. 726 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . ■ Under Sun and Shadows Settings. You can modify this line style by selecting Line Styles from the Settings menu. select Silhouette Edges for Silhouette style. select Relative to View. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. specify an Altitude of 70 degrees. NOTE The line style. 12 Proceed with the next exercise. under Silhouette Edges. select Directly.In the steps that follow. Notice the shadows on the view provide more contrast and a sense of depth. Notice application of heavy line weights to the edges of the building model. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. TIP You can also use the linework tool to emphasize individual surface edges. specify an Azimuth of 135 degrees. select Override Silhouettes. 9 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Section. Silhouette Edges. click . and click OK. and click OK.

The view title no longer displays. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 6 On the Design Bar.Presentation. select Viewport: Presentation. select Section: Presentation Section 2. Add the view to the presentation sheet 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Views dialog. and click to place the selected view. 5 In the Type Selector. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. double-click A105 . 4 Move the cursor under the centered plan view as shown.rvt.Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique In this exercise. click Add View. you add the Presentation Section 2 view to the analytique and rotate the view 180 degrees. under Sheets (all). and click Add View to Sheet. click Modify. Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique | 727 .

728 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . and enter 180 to specify the number of degrees of rotation. In the steps that follow. 9 On the Edit toolbar. and either enter the degrees of rotation or click to specify the end radius. 10 Specify the start radius to the right of the callout.Notice the section needs to be rotated 180 degrees. under Sections (Callout 1). you accomplish this by rotating the callout within the section view. you click to specify the start radius. click . specify 3 o’clock as the rotation start point. Rotate the callout view 7 In the Project Browser. 11 Move the cursor a slight distance counter-clockwise. To rotate an object. double-click Section 2. Using a clock as a reference. 8 Select the callout that you added previously. move the cursor in the direction of the rotation. and press ENTER.

under Sheets (all). Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique | 729 . Notice the extents need to be adjusted to fit around the edges of the building model.After you enter the rotation value and press Enter.Presentation. and drag it up and to the left as shown. Reposition the viewport 13 In the Project Browser. Notice that the Presentation Section 2 view has rotated 180 degrees and now needs to be repositioned. 12 Drag the callout extents until they extend just past the perimeter of the edges of the building model as shown. 14 Select the Presentation Section 2 viewport. double-click A105 . the callout rotates 180 degrees.

After applying the view template to a new section view. “Working with a Presentation View Template” on page 730. click Modify. 17 Proceed with the next exercise.rvt. Working with a Presentation View Template In this exercise. 3 In the New View Template dialog. click OK. click Create View Template from View. you add the modified view to the presentation sheet. enter Presentation. 2 On the View menu. you create a view template for presentation views in order to reduce repetitive work while creating subsequent views. double-click Presentation Section 2. 16 On the File menu. Create a presentation view template 1 In the Project Browser.15 On the Design Bar. 730 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. click Save. and click OK. 4 In the View Templates dialog. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. under Sections (Callout 1).

under Sheets (all). you can simply apply the presentation view template. 9 In the Select View Template dialog. Rather than use a callout to rotate this view after it is added to a sheet. annotations. lighting fixtures. click Apply View Template. you can use a view property to accomplish the same thing. and click Activate View. and click OK.Presentation. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Presentation. 16 On the View menu. and click OK. click View Properties. under Sections (Type 1). 7 In the Rename View dialog. Apply presentation view template 8 On the View menu. select Viewport: Presentation. select Section: Presentation Section 1. under Sections (Type 1).Create a new presentation view 5 In the Project Browser. 6 In the Project Browser. click Add View. Add the view to the presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. right-click Copy of Section 1. 13 Place it to the left of the plan view. and click Add View to Sheet. 12 In the Views dialog. 14 In the Type Selector. Working with a Presentation View Template | 731 . and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. enter Presentation Section 1. Notice the furniture. 15 Right-click the viewport. double-click A105 . Now. rather than repeat numerous steps to prepare this view for the analytique. and elevation swings no longer display. right-click Section 1. and click Rename.

In this exercise. select 90 degrees Counterclockwise for Rotation on Sheet. 732 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . you create a wall section and add it to the right side of the analytique. 18 Right-click the viewport. and click Deactivate View. Working in a Callout Analytique Typically. “Working in a Callout Analytique” on page 732. 19 Move the view so the walls line up similar to the image shown.17 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. under Graphics. traditional analytiques contain a detail. 20 On the File menu. such as a tracery window or column capital. click Save. 21 Proceed with the next exercise.

6 In the Project Browser. right-click Callout of Section 1.rvt. and click OK. Working in a Callout Analytique | 733 . under Sections (Callout 1). double-click Section 1. select the callout. double-click Presentation Callout.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click Rename. enter Presentation Callout. After you add the callout. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. and modify the extents and the callout head location as shown. 4 In the Project Browser. click Callout. 3 Draw a callout around the front balcony as shown. 5 In the Rename View dialog. under Sections (Callout 1). Create callout 1 In the Project Browser. under Sections (Type 1). click Modify.

clear Crop Region Visible. This gap is used later in the exercise to place a fill region. under Extents. and click View Properties.7 Select the crop boundary and adjust the bottom so that there is a small gap as shown. and click OK. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. clear Annotation Crop. 734 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . 8 Right-click.

Modify presentation callout on sheet 16 Right-click the presentation callout viewport. select Section: Presentation Callout. click Modify.Presentation. click Add View. and click OK. double-click A105 . 19 Right-click the callout presentation view.Add callout to presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. select Viewport: Presentation. 15 On the Design Bar. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. 17 On the View menu. and click Add View to Sheet. click View Properties. select Custom for View Scale. and click Activate View. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 14 In the Type Selector. and click Deactivate View. specify a value of 22 for Scale Value 1. and move it into the position shown below. Working in a Callout Analytique | 735 . 13 Place it on the right side of the presentation sheet. 12 In the Views dialog. 20 Select the callout presentation viewport. under Sheets (all).

Apply filled regions to presentation callout 21 In the Project Browser. 736 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . double-click Presentation Callout. You do not have to replicate the image exactly. click Region Properties. sketch the filled regions on the floors and roof shown below. turn on the crop region from the view properties dialog. In the steps that follow. You can sketch all of them at once or one filled region at a time.NOTE If the presentation callout view does not fit properly on the sheet. and click OK. The composition set for the analytique is now complete. Click Finish Sketch on the Design Bar when you are finished. you add a heavy base to the floors and a poche to the base. select Solid Black for Type. hide the crop region and deactivate the viewport. the easiest method is to apply filled regions to the presentation callout. and make adjustments as necessary. When finished. click Filled Region. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. under Sections (Callout 1). 23 On the Design Bar. activate the viewport. Although there are several methods you could use to create these areas of contrast. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 25 Using the drawing tools on the Options Bar. The intent of the analytique is not so much a measured construction document as it is a stylized representation of the architectural forms.

Presentation. and sketch the rectangle shown below. click Filled Region. and click Activate View. Working in a Callout Analytique | 737 . 28 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click . under Sheets (all). Add poche region 27 Right-click the presentation callout viewport. double-click A105 .26 On the Project Browser. 29 On the Options Bar.

and drag the left and bottom extent until the entire poche region displays. and click OK. Notice the entire poche region does not display because the crop region does not encompass the new filled region. 31 On the View menu.30 On the Design Bar. 33 Select the crop region. 738 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . click Finish Sketch. under Extents. click View Properties. select Crop Region Visible. 32 In the Element Properties dialog.

you create isometric 3D views and use section boxes to create cutaways with shadows. click View Properties. 37 On the File menu. “Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes” on page 739. click Save. You then add perspective views to the presentation and annotate the sheet. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views In this exercise. you create three similar isometric views with different cutaways.34 On the View menu. and apply shadows to the views. You then add each view to the presentation sheet. 36 Right-click the presentation callout viewport. clear Crop Region Visible. and click OK. 35 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Deactivate View. 38 Proceed with the next lesson. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes In this lesson. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 739 . under Extents.

7 In the Name dialog. click . Under Shadows Properties. 2 On the View menu. Under Sun and Shadows Settings.rvt.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 740 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . Under Intensity. and click Advanced Model Graphics. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Hidden Line for Style. and click 1 : 200. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric. click Orient ➤ Southwest. Create southwest isometric view 1 In the Project Browser. select Cast Shadows. click Duplicate. Apply advanced model graphics 4 On the View Control Bar. click the Scale control. 6 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. specify 35 for Shadow. double-click Isometric. under 3D Views. and click OK. 3 On the View Control Bar. 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog.

specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Directly. Cnst. click View Properties. right-click Isometric 1. Add a section box to Isometric 2 17 In the Project Browser. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 11 Under Silhouette Edges. right-click Copy of Isometric 1. Notice the section box that displays around the building model. under 3D Views. select Override Silhouettes. 9 Click OK. select Silhouette Edges for Silhouette style. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. double-click Isometric 2. under 3D Views. enter Isometric 1. Select Ground Plane at Level. and click OK. under 3D Views. Specify an Azimuth of 135 degrees. 14 In the Project Browser. 15 In the Project Browser. right-click Isometric. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. 18 On the View menu. Select 1st Flr. and click OK.8 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. under Extents. and click OK. and click Rename. 16 In the Rename View dialog. 13 In the Rename View dialog. Rename and duplicate isometric views 12 In the Project Browser. under Silhouette Edges. and click Rename. Select Relative to View. select Section Box. and click OK. under 3D Views. enter Isometric 2. in the list. under Settings. Specify an Altitude of 45 degrees. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 741 .

right-click Copy of Isometric 2. 22 In the Project Browser. make a duplicate of the view. Notice the grips that display on each face of the section box. click Modify on the Design Bar. right-click Isometric 2. 742 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . These allow you to modify the extents of the section box. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 23 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. under 3D Views. and click Rename. When you are finished.20 Select the section box. You can use this to rotate the section box. 21 Select the controls for the top plane of the section box. and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the second floor as shown. TIP Notice there is also a rotation symbol. Before turning off the visibility of the section box.

under 3D Views. select Viewport: Presentation. either adjust the plane location. 26 To hide the section box. 29 Select the section box.24 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. Notice the section box no longer displays. 34 In the Project Browser. clear Section Boxes. 27 On the Annotation Categories tab. 31 To hide the section box. double-click A105 . under 3D Views. 32 On the Annotation Categories tab. 30 Select the controls for the top plane of the section box. Next. you stack the three isometric views in a vertical column on the presentation sheet to show the continual erosion of the structure. NOTE Depending on the precise location of the top plane of the section box. In such a case. the stairs and railings may display.Presentation. double-click Isometric 3. and click OK. When you are finished. under Sheets (all). Modify the section box of Isometric 3 28 In the Project Browser. drag Isometric 3 underneath the left section view as shown and. clear Section Boxes. or turn off the visibility of railings and stairs using the Visibility/Graphics dialog. and click OK. enter Isometric 3. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Add isometric views to the presentation sheet 33 In the Project Browser. 25 In the Project Browser. click Modify on the Design Bar. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 743 . and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the first floor as shown. under 3D Views. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. double-click Isometric 2. in the Type Selector.

under 3D Views. in the Type Selector. select Viewport: Presentation. in the Type Selector. under 3D Views. drag Isometric 2 underneath Isometric 3 as shown and. 744 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . Notice the filled region partially covers the view.35 In the Project Browser. You resolve this problem in the steps that follow. select Viewport: Presentation. 36 In the Project Browser. drag Isometric 1 underneath Isometric 2 as shown and.

click Region Properties. and on the Options Bar. You change this back to solid fill when you are done. and click Deactivate View.Modify filled region boundaries 37 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. click Lines. select Solid Black for Type. click Region Properties. redraw the portion of the filled region so it follows the boundary of Isometric 1. 46 In the Element Properties dialog. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 745 . This will make it easier to draw lines. 43 On the Design Bar. and then click Edit/New. 47 On the Design Bar. 45 On the Design Bar. select Transparent for Background. click Edit. 41 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. 40 In the Element Properties dialog. 48 Right-click the Presentation Callout view. 38 Select the poche filled region. select Concrete for Type. 44 Using the drawing tools. and click Activate View. 42 Click OK twice. You may need to use the split tools and trim tools to modify lines along the way. The image below shows the lines redrawn. 39 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. under Graphics.

m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. After adding shadows and silhouette edges to the view. double-click 1st Flr. and specify the range and direction just outside the upper right corner of the building model. click Save. 746 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views .rvt. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. click Camera. 3 Place the camera in the southwest corner of the view as shown. you add it to the presentation sheet. then you specify the eye direction and range. Adding a camera is a two-click process: first you specify the eye location. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. a cutaway perspective view. you create the final view for the analytique. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views In this exercise. 50 Proceed with the next exercise.49 On the File menu. Cnst. Create a perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. “Creating Cutaway Perspective Views” on page 746. under Floor Plans.

click the Advanced Model Graphics control. 4 Adjust the crop boundary so the entire building model fits within it. Add shadows and silhouette edges 5 On the View Control Bar. Under Sun and Shadows Settings. Under Intensity.The view opens immediately. click . specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Hidden Line for Style. and click Advanced Model Graphics. specify 35 for Shadow. 6 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. Under Shadows Properties. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views | 747 . select Cast Shadows.

under Extents. 12 Select the section box. You may need to adjust the location of the crop boundary as well. and click OK. select Section Box. 8 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. 13 Use the section controls to modify the location of each respective plane until your view resembles the following image. under Silhouette Edges. select Silhouette Edges for Silhouette style. Notice the controls that display on each plane. 748 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . click View Properties. and click OK. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. select Override Silhouettes. 9 Under Silhouette Edges. Add a section box 10 On the View menu. select Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric for Name.7 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. and click OK. A section box now cuts through the building model.

drag 3D View 1 onto the presentation sheet. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views | 749 . Add the view to the presentation sheet 20 On the Project Browser. and click OK. enter 165 mm for Width. After placing it. Because scale does not apply to perspective views. 15 On the Options Bar. and click OK. click Size. under 3D Views. you must specify the actual size of the image. On the Annotation Categories tab. and place it in the upper-left corner as shown. click View menu ➤ View Properties. under Change.14 Select the crop boundary. and click OK. select Scale (locked proportions). under Sheets (all). clear Section Boxes.Presentation. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 17 Under Model Crop Size. Clear Crop Region Visible. 21 In the Project Browser. 19 To hide the section box. 16 In the Crop Region Size dialog. 18 To hide the crop region. go to the Type Selector and select Viewport : Presentation. double-click A105 .

and click OK. click Save. click Duplicate. enter Title. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. click Edit/New. click OK. specify a text size of 40 mm. 2 On the Options Bar. click Duplicate. click Edit/New. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. 5 In the Name dialog. specify a text size of 6 mm. “Annotating the Analytique” on page 750. you complete the analytique by adding text to the presentation sheet. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. 13 Add a title to the analytique as shown. under Text. select a font. 8 In the Type Properties dialog. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. Add a title and description 12 In the Type Selector. 9 In the Name dialog. under Text. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. click . select the same font as the title. 750 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views .22 On the File menu. click Text. and click OK. 23 Proceed with the next exercise. select Text : Title. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. Annotating the Analytique In this exercise. and click OK. Create new text types 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. enter Description.rvt.

select Text : Description. 16 Add a description of your choosing and add it to the analytique as shown. click Save. 18 On the File menu. 17 On the Design Bar. Annotating the Analytique | 751 . 15 In the Type Selector.14 Click in the drawing window to complete the title text. click Modify. This completes the Presentation Views tutorial.

752 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views .

Creating Families 4 753 .

754 | Chapter 16 Creating Families .

you learn about the various types of families and the Family Editor. each with a different size. or other parameter variables as designed by the family creator. 755 . Changes to a family type definition ripple through the project and are automatically reflected in every instance of that family or type within the project.” The term family describes a powerful concept used throughout Revit MEP to help you manage your data and make changes easily. In this tutorial. shape. This keeps everything coordinated and saves you the time and effort of manually keeping components and schedules up to date.About Families and the Family Editor 16 All elements in Revit MEP 2008 are “family based. thus the term family. Even though various types within a family can look completely different. material set. they are still related and come from a single source. Each family element can have multiple types defined within it.

Family templates are either host-based or standalone. You can load them into projects. floors. and when and how to use it. you learn about the three types of families and how they are used within a project and how they are created. and roofs. such as a dome roof. and save them from a project file to your library if needed. For example. and roofs are examples of these types of families. The following illustration shows different types within the basic walls family. however. floors. NOTE You can use “Transfer Project Standards” to copy system families from one project to another. Introduction to Families Most families are created in the Family Editor and saved as separate files with an . All different types that you create are stored with the master family file. while many more are stored in component libraries. generic. You also learn about the Family Editor. for example.rfa extension.rfa extension. In addition. there is another type of family that allows you to create any shape or form required for a particular project and have Revit MEP recognize it as a particular component type. if you create a family called "double-hung window" that includes types with several sizes. Revit MEP has three types of families: ■ ■ ■ System Standard Component In-place System Families System families are pre-defined within Revit MEP and comprise principle building components such as walls. You can duplicate and modify existing system families. Standalone families include columns. You work with the Family Editor to create and modify components.Using Families and the Family Editor One of the many advantages of using Revit MEP is the ability to create your own families of components without having to learn a complex programming language. you create a family within predefined templates that contain the intelligent objects needed to create the particular family type. has wall types that define interior. the types would all be saved as one file which can then be loaded into any project. There are. exceptions to this rule. but you cannot create new system families. foundation. Standard Component Families Standard component families are loaded by default in project templates. 756 | Chapter 16 About Families and the Family Editor . Standard component families can exist outside of the project environment and have an . Using the Family Editor. trees. because there is only one file to track. exterior. Some family types are pre-defined within Revit MEP and cannot be created or modified outside of the project environment. Family templates assist you in creating and manipulating component families. and partition wall styles. Host-based families have components that require hosts. In this lesson. Walls. This makes file management much easier. An example is a door family hosted by a wall family. The basic walls system family. transfer them from one project to another. and furniture. You can either duplicate and modify an existing component family or create a new component family based on a variety of family templates. You provide the information necessary to uniquely describe the family geometry.

you can drag it into the document window. Introduction to the Family Editor You can use the Family Editor to create both real-life building components and graphical/annotation components. You create in-place families only within the current project. In the final exercise. Load Family command on the File menu. custom wall treatments. The following illustration shows a building model of the Pantheon without a roof and with an in-place roof family. such as plan. You do not have to carry the original family file along with the project. click Load From Library ➤ Load Family. In this section. and also a standalone furniture family component. you learn about the Family Editor. In-place Families In-place families are either model or annotation components in a particular project. Families store all of the necessary geometry to display the two-dimensional (2D) and three-dimensional (3D) versions of particular objects. so they are useful for objects unique to that project. 4 Select the family file name and click Open. you need to reload the family in the project to see the updated family. or you can load it using the Load From Library. However. or 3D. elevation. Families are listed in the Project Browser under their respective component category. and the category that you use determines the component’s appearance and display control within the project. Introduction to the Family Editor | 757 . 2 On the File menu. and when to use it. you learned about the different types of Revit MEP families and when to use them. You have a choice of categories when you create in-place families.The following illustration shows host-based window and door family components in a wall. if you change the original family. for example. 3 Navigate to the library or location of the family. it is saved with the project. Adding a family to a project 1 Open or start a project. how to access it. Family element visibility can be dependent of your viewing direction. After the family has been loaded in the project. To add a family to your project. as well as the level of detail associated with that view.

6 Flex the new model to verify correct component behavior. This will be apparent because the only Design Bar tab available is Family. 5 Finally. How to use the Family Editor You can access the Family Editor in several ways. consider checking the web library and other web resources. Also consider any internal family libraries that may exist on the network. you can click File ➤ Open. select the appropriate template. 2 Define sub-categories for the family to aid in controlling visibility of the object. you learn when to use the Family Editor. such as newsgroups. With Revit MEP open. click File ➤ New ➤ Family. There is a logical thought process that you should follow: 1 Is there a component of this type already loaded into this project? If so. and click Open. navigate to a family file. modify it as needed. and then load it into the project. 3 Next. 9 Save the newly-defined family. you can search the component library loaded on your local hard drive. open it in the Family Editor. General procedure for creating a standard component family 1 Select the appropriate family template. You can have a project open and the Family Editor open simultaneously. 4 Add dimensions to specify parametric component geometry. If you find a close match.rfa extension and it will open Revit MEP in the Family Editor. and click Open. you should create a new component family using one of the family templates as a starting point. 3 Lay out reference planes to aid in drawing component geometry.In this exercise. 758 | Chapter 16 About Families and the Family Editor . presume it is a bay window that you require. When to use the Family Editor During the design process. 2 If there isn’t a component family loaded in the project. it should be available within the Type Selector. 4 If you can’t find the component you require. and the general procedure for creating a standard component family. how to access it. 7 Specify 2D and 3D geometry display characteristics with sub-category and entity visibility settings. if you have exhausted your external resources. you will inevitably come to a point where you need a specific component for your design. 8 Define family type variations by specifying different parameters. When the family opens. it opens within the Family Editor. To start a new family. you should then try to find the component that most closely resembles it. 5 Add label dimensions to create type or instance parameters. In this case. Within the Windows® environment. and then load it into a new project and see how it performs. It is far easier to modify an existing component within the Family Editor than to create it from scratch. you can double-click any file with an .

you start with a simple door family and then move onto a window family.Creating Components in the Family Editor 17 In this tutorial. In each lesson. When you create an in-place family. This allows you to create the family in the context of the current project. not within the Family Editor. and several annotation families. you learn how to create a different type of component. you create it within the project file. you learn how to create specific Revit MEP 2008 families. you create an in-place family. In addition. You create a furniture family. 759 . a lighting fixture. Using the installed templates.

and thickness. you create new door types based on size and assign parameters respectively. Drawing the Door Plan View Components In this exercise. The door type has a variable height and width. you draw the plan view components for the new door family. You also learn how to constrain the door design by adding labelled dimensions to specify values for the door width. 760 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . you create a custom door family based on the definition of a flush exterior door.Creating a Door Family In this lesson. height. After you create the door leaf as an extrusion.

click New ➤ Family. 11 Starting at the door hinge point on the lower left corner of the door opening.Create a new family based on the default door template 1 Close any open projects or families. 6 Maximize the window. The door opening is aligned and locked to the reference planes. and represent the door opening profile. click Symbolic Lines. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Door. 2 On the File menu. Draw the door panel plan view representation 8 On the Design Bar. sketch a 1000 mm x 50 mm rectangle for the door leaf as shown. click Training Files. 9 In the Type Selector. this is the keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit. The reference planes that display are part of the default door template. 10 On the Options Bar. Drawing the Door Plan View Components | 761 . Floor Plan: Ref. click . part of the door properties. click Tile. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog box. 5 On the Window menu. Notice the four tiled views. are also displayed. select Doors [projection]. Level. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All to Fit. 7 Enter ZF. 4 On the View menu.rft. Labelled dimensions.

762 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 13 Add a horizontal dimension from the left edge to the right edge of the door panel as shown. 14 Add a vertical dimension from the top edge of the door panel to the bottom edge as shown.Dimension the door panel 12 On the Design Bar. click Dimension.

Add dimension labels to the door leaf 15 On the Design Bar. Because labelled dimensions are parameters. 19 On the Options Bar. click Modify. a user can change the value of the Width parameter and all dimensions labelled with it change accordingly. select Width for Label. 17 On the Options Bar. select Thickness for Label. NOTE This same label is applied to the dimension referencing the door opening. 16 Select the vertical dimension that controls the door width. Drawing the Door Plan View Components | 763 . 18 Select the horizontal dimension that references the door thickness.

and select the intersection at the upper left corner of the door opening for the arc center point. click the down arrow button. then you specify each end point.Draw the door opening plan view arc 20 Select the dimension with the two EQ symbols and move it. as shown. TIP If the Arc from Center and End Points command is not visible on the Options Bar. select Plan Swing [cut]. so it doesn’t visually interfere with the door swing location. 25 Select the upper right corner of the door opening for the arc start point. click . 23 On the Options Bar. click Symbolic Lines. along with the witness line controls. and select the command from the menu. 22 In the Type selector. In the image below. 764 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 24 Enter SI. 26 Select the upper left corner of the door leaf for the arc endpoint. the arc is selected so you can see the arc center and each end point. 21 On the Design Bar. When drawing an arc from center and end points. you first specify the arc center.

3 On the Design Bar. and click OK. “Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry” on page 765. 4 In the Work Plane dialog box. you create the solid geometry of the door leaf with an extrusion. 5 On the Design Bar. select Reference Plane: Exterior for Name. enter 50 mm for Depth. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 1 In the Project Browser. Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry In this exercise. double-click Exterior. under Elevations. 2 On the Design Bar. 6 On the Options Bar. click Set Work Plane. and then select the lower right corner of the door opening for the second corner of the rectangle. Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry | 765 . 7 Select the upper left corner of the door opening for the first corner of the rectangle.Add a reference plane for the exterior face of the door 27 Proceed to the next exercise. and click . click Lines. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. under Specify a new Work Plane.

766 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 9 In the Project Browser under Elevations. double-click Left. use the TAB key to toggle to the extrusion reference. 10 On the Design Bar.8 On the Design Bar. TIP When you add the witness line to the exterior face of the extrusion. click Dimension. click Finish Sketch. 11 Add a horizontal dimension from the exterior face of the door extrusion to the interior face of the door extrusion. then click to specify the dimension witness line.

14 In the Project Browser. 13 On the Options Bar. 17 On the Options Bar. and Fine are selected.12 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. 18 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog box. double-click Ref. Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry | 767 . 16 Select the door leaf extrusion. and When cut in Plan/RCP. click Visibility. Medium. Level. under View Specific Display. select Thickness for Label. 19 Under Detail Levels. click Modify. verify that Coarse. and click OK. select Front/Back. Left/Right. click Modify and select the dimension. Specify the visibility of the door leaf in plan view 15 On the Design Bar. and clear Plan/RCP.

This material designation controls how it displays in shaded and hidden line views. navigate to AccuRender/Wood/Oak. for Material. select Panel for Subcategory. The solid geometry of the door is now complete. 22 Proceed to the next exercise. and click OK. click 17 In the Materials dialog box. Create a new material based on the existing red oak material 1 On the Settings menu. 3 In the New Material dialog box. 5 In the Material Library dialog box. “Assigning Materials to the Door Components” on page 768.20 On the Options Bar. 6 Click OK. 19 Repeat the previous five steps for the exterior frame extrusion.No Gloss. It also defines its appearance when rendered. and click OK.Dark. click OK. click . 15 On the Options Bar. 4 In the Materials dialog box. 18 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Duplicate. Assign the Oak Door material to the door leaf 8 Select the door leaf extrusion. 9 On the Options Bar. The door leaf is assigned the new Oak Door material. click for Texture. under AccuRender. 12 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Materials. and click OK. under Name. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. Assigning Materials to the Door Components In this exercise. and click OK. 7 In the Materials dialog box. 768 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. you assign a material to the door leaf. 13 On the Design Bar. 16 In the Element Properties dialog box. click OK. Assign the Oak Door material to the door frame 14 Select the interior door frame extrusion. click . enter Oak Door for Name. click OK. click Modify. click 11 In the Materials dialog box. 21 In the Element Properties dialog box.Red/Stained. select Oak Door. for Material. under Materials and Finishes. click . select Oak Door for Name. 2 In the Materials dialog box.

under Views (all). click the Model Graphics Style control. and select Shading with Edges. 21 On the View Control Bar.The door frame is assigned the new Oak Door material. View the new door 20 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. double-click View 1. 22 Zoom in on a door corner. The Oak Door material is now assigned to the door leaf and door frame. Flex the door model 23 Zoom out to view the entire door. Assigning Materials to the Door Components | 769 .

you define new door types based on the door model that you have created. Enter 1000 mm for Width. Define new door types with various heights and widths 1 On the Design Bar. Try to move the dialog box off to the side so you can still see the door family next to it. By flexing the new component. “Defining New Door Types” on page 770 Defining New Door Types In this exercise. 28 Proceed to the next exercise. and click OK. 27 Click OK. Click Apply. click New. 770 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. 25 In the Family Types dialog box. Click Apply. In the Family Types dialog box.Flexing the new family is an important part of the design process. Under Other. click Family Types. Notice the door geometry adapts to the new dimension values. click Family Types. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Under Other. Enter 1500 mm for Width. 3 In the Name dialog box. you ensure it adjusts to the changes it may encounter once loaded into a project. This allows you to apply changes made in the dialog box and see how the new door reacts. enter 75 mm for Frame Width. 2 In the Family Types dialog box. under Family Types. 24 On the Design Bar. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. 26 Return the door parameters to their original values. enter 925 x 2000mm for Name. enter 2500 mm for Height. enter 2000 mm for Height. enter 125 mm for Frame Width.

and click OK. Enter 750 mm for Width. Click Apply. click Wall. click Door. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. enter 2134 mm for Height. 19 On the Options Bar. click Save. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. enter 2000 mm for Height. Training Door. 20 In the Open dialog box. You now have three new door types defined within your door family. enter 750 x 2100mm for Name. 16 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog box. 6 In the Name dialog box. and click Open. Click Apply. Define the third new door type. select it. Training Door. click New. 11 Click OK. select Project.rfa. click Training Files. Enter 1220 mm for Width. click Load.4 In the Family Types dialog box. 10 In the Family Types dialog box. enter 1220 x 2134mm for Name. Define the second new door type. 12 On the File menu. Defining New Door Types | 771 . 7 In the Family Types dialog box. click New. 18 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. enter 2100 mm for Height. Enter 925 mm for Width. under Template file. Use the default wall selection in the Type Selector. navigate to the location where you saved the door family. 8 Under Family Types.rte. 5 Under Family Types. click New ➤ Project. Place new door types in the project 21 On the Design Bar.rfa. and click OK. 17 Under Create new. Load the new door family into a new project 14 On the File menu. 22 Draw a wall segment 8000mm long. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. click Browse. Click Apply. 13 Navigate to the folder of your choice and save the new door family with the name. 9 In the Name dialog box. and click OK. 15 In the New Project dialog box.

26 In the Type Selector. click . 27 Add the door to the left side of the wall as shown. 25 On the Design Bar. select Training Door : 925 x 2000mm. 29 Add this door to the center of the wall as shown. and select Shading with Edges. 24 On the View Control Bar. 28 In the Type Selector. select Training Door : 750 x 2100mm. click the Model Graphics Style control.23 On the View toolbar. 772 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Door.

you assign new dimension values to the window to create new types within the window family. and specify values for the window width. glazing and mullions as extrusions. You create the window frame. Creating a Door Family. default sill height. Finally. Creating a Window Family In this lesson. You then assign parameters to the window family to allow for the creation of different-sized versions of the nine-light prototype. select Training Door : 1220 x 2134mm.30 In the Type Selector. 31 Add the third door type to the right side of the wall as shown. Creating a Window Family | 773 . and create the window sash as a sweep. This completes the lesson. You now have three new flush exterior doors based on the new door family prototype. 32 You can close all files without saving. height. and mullion offset. you create a custom window family based on the definition of a fixed rectangular window with nine lights.

rft. 6 Maximize the exterior elevation view. equally spaced vertical mullions. 774 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . The reference planes that display are part of the default window template and represent the window opening profile. The label name. Labelled dimensions. click Tile. Height and Default Sill Height. you specify the parameters for the new window family. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All to Fit. When you add labels to dimensions. this is the keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Window. also one of the window properties.Specifying the New Window Parameters In this exercise. 2 On the File menu. 5 On the View menu. these specific type parameters are adjustable once the window is part of a project. The window opening is aligned and locked to the reference planes. part of the window properties. is one of the type parameters. 8 Two dimension strings display with their labels. 7 Enter ZF. The window type has a variable height and width. Create a new family based on the default window template 1 Close any open projects or families. click New ➤ Family. are also displayed. and the height of the top and bottom row of lights is adjustable. click Training Files. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog box. 4 On the Window menu. Four views are tiled on your display.

Notice how the window opening adapts to the changing dimension values. 13 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry | 775 .Modify the new window type height and width parameters 9 On the Design Bar. 11 Enter 1000 mm for Height and 2000 mm for Width. click Family Types. Move the dialog box off to the side so you can see the window opening. then sketching the sweep profile. you create the solid geometry of the window frame with a sweep. 12 Click OK.” and it is done to avoid conflicts and to ensure that all model geometry adjusts to changes as designed. Creating sweep geometry requires first sketching the sweep path. and click Apply. The profile is swept along the path to create the solid geometry. and click Apply. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. 10 In the Family Types dialog box. Enter 1800 mm for Width. This is the starting point for the new window. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. Click Apply. Change the height and width values again. “Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry” on page 775. enter 1300 mm for Height. Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry In this exercise. This process is called “flexing the model.

and select 1:10. click Sketch Profile. 5 Sketch a rectangle to represent the sweep path starting at the upper left corner of the opening and ending at the lower right corner.Create a sweep path for the window frame solid geometry 1 On the Design Bar. 9 On the View Control Bar. 6 On the Design Bar. Add a reference plane for the sweep profile 7 On the Design Bar. click Sketch 2D Path. 3 On the Design Bar. click the Scale control. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Sweep. Snap the cursor to each corner. click Lines. 2 On the Design Bar. select Elevation: Right. click . 4 On the Options Bar. click Finish Path. 776 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and click Open View. 10 Zoom in on the red dot in the middle of the wall. 8 In the Go To View dialog box.

click Modify. click . click Ref Plane. select Prefer: Wall faces. click Dimension. 14 On the Design Bar. 11 On the Design Bar. 15 On the Options Bar. 17 On the Design Bar.The red dot indicates the intersection of the sweep path and the profile plane. 16 Add a dimension between the exterior wall face and the new reference plane. and select the dimension. 12 On the Options Bar. 13 Pick the exterior wall face so that a reference line is offset 50 mm to the left of the exterior wall face as shown. Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry | 777 . and specify an offset of 50 mm.

sketch the frame profile approximately as shown. click Modify. 24 Below the red dot. NOTE When you sketch the frame profile. click Lines. Precise dimensions are assigned to the frame profile in subsequent steps. under Identity Data. the exact dimensions are not critical. 19 On the Design Bar. 23 On the Options Bar. select Chain and click . the frame profile should extend beyond the edges of the wall. enter Sash for the Name.18 Drag the value control off to the side as shown. 21 In the Element Properties dialog box. 25 On the Design Bar. 20 On the Options Bar. 778 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and select the reference plane. Sketch the window frame profile 22 On the Design Bar. and click OK. click Modify. However. click .

Drag it to the left and align it with the Sash reference plane. 28 Select the short line parallel and to the right of the Sash reference plane. When the lock displays. 27 Select the left edge of the frame section.26 Select the right edge of the frame section. and drag it to the exterior face of the wall. and drag it to the interior face of the wall. click it to lock the line to the reference plane. When the lock displays. When the lock displays. click it to constrain the frame to the exterior wall face. Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry | 779 . click it to constrain the left edge of the frame to the interior face.

and specify the dimension value. 780 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Modify. select the line you want to move. 30 Add a vertical dimension of 40 mm to the left side of the frame and another vertical dimension of 20 mm to the right side of the frame. Modify each dimension if necessary. as shown.29 On the Design Bar. TIP After adding the dimension. click Dimension.

click the lock to constrain the present value. The window frame profile is swept around the window opening. zoom out until it displays. 35 On the Design Bar. 36 On the Design Bar. TIP If you don’t see the lock icon. click . Next. select the top horizontal line of the frame profile. Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry | 781 . this is the top of the window opening. When the lock displays. and double-click View 1. 34 Select the horizontal reference plane that intersects the red dot. click the lock to constrain the present value. click Finish Profile.Align the new profile to the window opening edge 31 Select the 40 mm dimension. 33 On the Tools toolbar. click Finish Sweep. When the lock displays. 37 In the Project Browser. under Views (all). 32 Select the 20 mm dimension. spin the model so you can see the interior of the frame. Lock the alignment when the lock icon displays. If necessary. expand 3D Views.

Creating the Window Sash Solid Geometry In this exercise. press TAB to cycle through the selection options. 3 In the Work Plane dialog box. 782 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and select the option. Chain of walls or lines. 4 On the Design Bar. select Reference Plane: Sash for Name. Pick the sash profile lines 6 Place the cursor over the left side of the frame.45 mm for Depth. under Elevations. under Specify a new Work Plane. click Lines. and select Lock. click Set Work Plane. and click OK. “Creating the Window Sash Solid Geometry” on page 782. you create the solid geometry of the window sash with an extrusion. click . double-click Exterior. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. Specify the window sash extrusion parameters 1 On the Design Bar. 5 On the Options Bar. and enter . Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise.38 In the Project Browser. 2 On the Design Bar. 39 Proceed to the next exercise.

8 Specify the upper left inside corner of the window frame for the first corner of the rectangle. click Finish Sketch.50 mm for Offset. and lock icons display on each line. ■ ■ Enter . Creating the Window Sash Solid Geometry | 783 . ■ Click . Draw offset extrusion lines 7 On the Options Bar. and then specify the lower right inside corner for the second corner of the rectangle. You specify a negative offset value to indicate an extrusion direction inside of the window frame. set the following options: Click .The entire sash outline is selected. 9 On the Design Bar.

under Elevations.10 In the Project Browser. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. “Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry” on page 784. 11 In the Project Browser. Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry In this exercise. double-click Right. double-click View 1. you create the solid geometry of the window glass with an extrusion. 784 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . under 3D Views. Notice the sash is aligned with the Sash reference plane. The window sash extrusion is now complete. Spin the model if necessary to view the sash and frame at various angles.

3 On the Options Bar. double-click Right. 2 On the Design Bar. 4 Select the left edge of the sash so that a vertical reference plane is added 30 mm to the right. click . as shown. Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry | 785 . and enter 30 mm for Offset.Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. Add a reference plane to specify the glass work plane 1 In the Project Browser. click Ref Plane. under Elevations.

press TAB until the chain of lines is preselected. Pick lines to define the glass extrusion 12 On the Design Bar. click Modify. and click OK. double-click Exterior. 14 In the Work Plane dialog box. click . 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. 7 On the Design Bar. enter Glazing for the Name instance parameter. click Dimension. click Set Work Plane. 9 On the Options Bar. enter -12 mm for Depth. and select Lock. 11 In the Project Browser. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 8 Select the reference plane. 786 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . select Reference Plane: Glazing for Name. and click OK. 6 Add a horizontal dimension of 30 mm between the left edge of the sash and the reference plane. 13 On the Design Bar.5 On the Design Bar. under Specify a new Work Plane. 17 Place the cursor on one of the sash extrusion lines. click . 15 On the Design Bar. 16 On the Options Bar. click Lines. and click to create the glass boundary. under Elevations. under Identity Data.

After the family is loaded into a project. under Elevations. 21 On the Options Bar. Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry | 787 . under Identity Data. 22 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Modify. double-click Right. and click OK. specify Glass for the Subcategory instance parameter. sash. View the window model with frame. you can control subcategory visual style using the Objects Styles dialog box. 23 On the Design Bar. click .18 On the Design Bar. 20 Select the glass extrusion. click Finish Sketch. NOTE Assigning subcategories to model elements is important. and glass 19 In the Project Browser.

click Family Types. Click Apply. Notice the window adapts to the new dimension parameters. under 3D Views. it is important to verify that all model elements adapted to the changes as expected. Move the Family Types dialog box off to the side so you can see the window model. Flex the window model 25 On the Design Bar. enter 1500 mm for Height. enter 500 mm for Default Sill Height. NOTE After flexing the model. Enter 1500 mm for Width. Under Other. For example. 788 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Most problems can be resolved by aligning and locking lines. 26 In the Family Types dialog box. You should flex the model at regular intervals to catch problems early.24 In the Project Browser. make sure the window frame stretched with the opening and that the glass extrusion remains attached to the interior edge of the sash. double-click View 1. Spin the model if necessary to view the sash and frame at various angles.

Click Apply. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry In this exercise. Add reference planes to specify the location of the new window mullion centerlines 1 In the Project Browser. Enter 2000 mm for Width. enter 1000 mm for Height. enter 800 mm for Default Sill Height. you create the solid geometry of the window mullions based on reference planes and extrusions. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. Click OK. 28 Proceed to the next exercise.27 In the Family Types dialog box. Precise dimensions are assigned to the reference planes in subsequent steps. double-click Exterior. 3 Add two horizontal and two vertical reference planes inside of the window opening to approximate the mullion centerline locations as shown. NOTE When you draw each reference plane. 2 On the Design Bar. click Ref Plane. Under Other. “Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry” on page 789. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry | 789 . under Elevations. return the window to its original dimensions: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. the exact location is not critical.

Do not be concerned with dimension values. 5 Add a dimension between the top of the window opening (top reference plane) and the horizontal reference plane below it. Do not be concerned with dimension values. click the EQ symbol to make the dimension segments equal.4 On the Design Bar. Add a multi-segmented dimension referencing all of the vertical reference planes except the center (Left/Right) as shown. as shown. click Dimension. 6 Add a dimension between the bottom of the window opening (bottom reference plane) and the horizontal reference plane above it. After adding the dimension. as shown. 790 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

select Dimensions. specify the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Type. select Family parameter. you may want to drag the dimension value as shown.> for Label. 13 Select the horizontal reference plane second from the bottom. enter Mullion Offset for Name. Click OK. enter 350 mm for Mullion Offset. 8 Select the dimension on the upper-right that references the top two horizontal reference planes. under Dimensions. click Family Types. 11 On the Design Bar. and click OK.. 12 In the Family Types dialog box. select <Add parameter.Add a mullion offset family parameter 7 On the Design Bar. Under Group parameter under. Under Parameter Data. click Modify. Select Instance.. TIP Due to the length of the dimension label. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry | 791 . 10 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. 9 On the Options Bar.

Create the vertical mullion extrusions 19 On the Design Bar. click Modify. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. click Modify. 792 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . As you did before.Notice the dimension value becomes editable. 15 On the Design Bar. 18 On the Design Bar. 14 Click the dimension value. click Set Work Plane. 20 On the Design Bar. move the dimension value as shown. 17 On the Options Bar. and enter 350 mm as the new value. 16 Select the dimension on the lower-right. select Mullion Offset for Label.

After you complete the sketch. and click . Watch the Status Bar to be sure that the lines are snapping to the sash. 23 On the Options Bar. under Specify a new Work Plane. select Reference Plane: Glazing for Name. click Dimension. 27 Add a horizontal dimension from the left edge of the mullion extrusion to the reference plane centered between the vertical mullion extrusion sketch lines. and click OK. and to the right edge of the mullion extrusion. it is critical that the short horizontal lines align with the horizontal edges of the sash. 25 Click both of the locks so the mullion adapts to changes in window height. Do not be concerned with precise dimensions. Click the EQ symbol to make both horizontal dimensions equal. notice lock icons display on the interior horizontal edges of the sash. 22 On the Design Bar. 26 On the Design Bar. 24 Sketch a rectangle centered on the left vertical mullion reference plane approximately as shown. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry | 793 . However. enter 14 mm for Depth. Move the dimension values as shown. click Lines.21 In the Work Plane dialog box.

Click OK. 794 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . select <Add parameter> for Label. 29 On the Design Bar. select Family parameter. Under Group parameter under. select Dimensions. and place it above the dimension you placed in the previous steps. and select the dimension you added in the previous step. Move the Mullion Width value to the left as shown. Under Parameter Data. enter Mullion Width for Name. Select Type. click Modify. 30 On the Options Bar.28 Add a horizontal dimension from the left edge to the right edge of the mullion extrusion. specify the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Type. 31 In the Parameter Properties dialog box.

Remember. and on the Options Bar. Select the dimension. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry | 795 . 33 On the Design Bar. Add a dimension between the left and right mullion edges.32 Repeat the previous steps to create an identical mullion centered on the right vertical reference plane as shown. NOTE Do not lock the lines to the sash edge as you did previously. This is changed in later steps. click Finish Sketch. ■ ■ Do not be concerned with the value of the mullion width. ■ Dimension mullion edges and the reference plane at the center of the mullion and click the equality constraint. select Mullion Width for Label. follow these basic steps: ■ Sketch the rectangle similar to the mullion on the left.

Notice the window adapts to the new dimension parameters. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. enter 1500 mm for Height.Specify the mullion width parameter 34 On the Design Bar. click Family Types. and the mullions stretch with the new window height. and click Apply. Flex the window model 36 In the Family Types dialog box. enter 500 mm for Default Sill Height. Notice the mullions remain centered and equally spaced on the reference planes. Under Other. enter 40 mm for Mullion Width. 796 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Enter 1500 mm for Width. Click Apply. Move the dialog box off to the side so you can see the window in the drawing area. 35 In the Family Types dialog box.

39 On the Design Bar. select Reference Plane : Glazing for Name. 37 In the Family Types dialog box. or undoing the same. enter 800 mm for Default Sill Height. Most problems can be resolved by aligning and locking lines. enter 1000 mm for Height. In this case. Under Other. Sketch the horizontal mullion extrusions 38 On the Design Bar. under Specify a new Work Plane. return the window to its original dimensions: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. click Set Work Plane. evenly spaced. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. and then click the lock icons to lock the left and right edges to the edge of the sash. Enter 2000 mm for Width. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry | 797 . Click Apply. you should pay close attention to the new mullions and make sure they remain centered. Notice the Depth value on the Options Bar remains at the previously specified value. and aligned with the sash edge. 43 Sketch a rectangle centered on the upper horizontal mullion reference plane approximately as shown. 42 On the Options Bar.NOTE After flexing the model. 41 On the Design Bar. it is important to verify that all model elements adapted to the changes as expected. Click OK. You should flex the model at regular intervals to catch problems early. 40 In the Work Plane dialog box. click Lines. and click OK. click .

Do not be concerned with the dimension value. click Modify. click Dimension. 46 On the Design Bar. click Dimension.44 On the Design Bar. 45 Add a vertical dimension from the top edge of the mullion extrusion to the reference plane at the center of the mullion. follow these basic steps: ■ Sketch the rectangle similar to the mullion you just completed. and select the dimension you added in the previous step. and then to the bottom edge of the mullion extrusion. 50 Repeat the previous steps to create an identical mullion centered on the lower horizontal reference plane as shown. Click the EQ symbol to make both vertical dimensions equal. 48 On the Design Bar. Remember. and move the EQ values off to each side as shown. 47 Add a vertical dimension from the top edge to the bottom edge of the mullion extrusion. select Mullion Width for Label. 798 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . as shown. 49 On the Options Bar. Move the dimension value as shown.

The horizontal mullion extrusions are now complete. Add a dimension between the upper and lower mullion edges. click Join Geometry. 53 Select the horizontal mullions. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry | 799 . ■ Dimension mullion edges and the reference plane at the center of the mullion and click the equality constraint. and on the Options Bar. Join the mullion geometry 52 On the Tools menu. select Mullion Width for Label. click Finish Sketch. and select the vertical mullions. ■ ■ 51 On the Design Bar.NOTE Do not lock the lines to the sash edge as you did previously. Select the dimension.

click Family Types. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions.54 In the Project Browser. enter 500 mm for Default Sill Height. 57 In the Family Types dialog box. Under Other. enter 1500 mm for Height. 800 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . spin the model to get a good view of the mullions. you can still see the window. If necessary. Notice the mullion extrusions are joined. Flex the window model 55 Adjust the location of the window model within the drawing area. Notice the window adapts to the new dimension parameters and the mullions stretch with the new window height. Click Apply. so when you open the Family Types dialog box. Enter 1500 mm for Width. double-click View 1. under 3D Views. 56 On the Design Bar.

59 Proceed to the next exercise. Click Apply. you assign materials to the frame. Assigning Materials to the Window Components In this exercise. enter 1000 mm for Height. Click OK. enter 800 mm for Default Sill Height. and mullions that you want to display in renderings of the new window. return the window to its original dimensions: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Under Other.58 In the Family Types dialog box. Enter 2000 mm for Width. “Assigning Materials to the Window Components” on page 801. sash. Assigning Materials to the Window Components | 801 .

click for Texture. double-click Exterior. 2 In the Materials dialog box. Assign the Pine Frame material to the frame. Create a new material based on the existing yellow pine material 1 On the Settings menu. clear the other view options. under Graphics. and the mullions. click the Model Graphics Style control. 16 Under Detail Levels. 15 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog box. click Materials. 17 In the Element Properties dialog box. navigate to AccuRender/Wood/Pine. 9 Select the window frame sweep. click OK. select Front/Back and When cut in Plan/RCP (if category permits). and click OK. click for Material. select Pine Frame for Name. verify that Coarse. and mullions 7 In the Project Browser. under Identity Data. enter Pine Frame for Name. under View Specific Display.Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. 11 In the Element Properties dialog box. 6 In the Materials dialog box. click Duplicate. and click OK. 802 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 10 On the Options Bar. No Gloss. click Modify. Medium. and select Shading with Edges. 13 In the Materials dialog box. and click OK. 12 Under Materials and Finishes. and Fine are selected. 8 On the View Control Bar. click . the sash. 3 In the New Material dialog box. select Edit for Visibility. sash. 4 In the Materials dialog box. under Elevations. 14 In the Element Properties dialog box. 18 On the Design Bar. The window frame is assigned the new Pine Frame material. select Stained. Dark. TIP Hold the CTRL key down as you select the sweep and various extrusions. 5 In the Material Library dialog box. select Frame/Mullion for Subcategory. under AccuRender. Yellow/. and click OK. click OK.

Modify the glass visibility 19 In the Project Browser under Elevations. verify that Coarse. 25 Zoom in on a window corner. select Front/Back and When cut in Plan/RCP (if category permits). double-click Right. Medium. double-click View 1. Assigning Materials to the Window Components | 803 . click Visibility. 24 In the Project Browser. 22 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog box. under View Specific Display. and Fine are selected. 23 Under Detail Levels. and click OK. 21 On the Options Bar. 20 Select the glass extrusion. under 3D Views.

Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. You then create multiple window types that will be available to the user after the family is loaded into a project.The window frame. sash. 804 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 26 Proceed to the next exercise. You begin by adding a formula to the mullion offset parameter to specify horizontal divisions of one third the overall height of the window. and glass display their assigned materials. “Defining New Window Types” on page 804. you define new window types based on the window model that you just created. mullions. Defining New Window Types In this exercise.

8 In the Family Types dialog box. 3 In the Family Types dialog box. but the one third height spacing is maintained in the horizontal mullions. click New.Add a mullion offset formula to the family type 1 Zoom to fit and move the window model off the side of the drawing area so it will be visible after you open the Family Types dialog box. under Family Types. Enter 1250 mm for Height. enter 2500 w x 1250mm h for Name. enter 2000 mm for Height. enter 1000 mm for Height. it is also a good idea to flex the model after a new formula is applied. In the Family Types dialog box. specify the following parameter values: ■ ■ ■ Enter 2500 mm for Width. and click OK. The horizontal mullions are now spaced apart at one third the height of the window. 5 In the Family Types dialog box. 2 On the Design Bar. and click Apply. enter Height/3 in the Formula column for Mullion Offset. 7 In the Name dialog box. Click Apply. The window height is doubled. Defining New Window Types | 805 . and click Apply. click Family Types. and click Apply. Define new window types with various heights and widths 6 In the Family Types dialog box. Flex the window model 4 In addition to flexing the model after the addition or modification of model geometry.

click New. click to start a new project based on your default template. Click OK. select it. 20 In the Open dialog box. 11 In the Family Types dialog box. Load the new window family into a new project 17 On the Standard toolbar. 16 Navigate to the location of your choice and save the new window family with the name. click New. Enter 1500 mm for Height. 19 On the Options Bar. click Load. 13 In the Name dialog box. 18 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.9 Under Family Types. 15 On the File menu. click Window. and click OK. specify the following parameter values: ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter 1800 mm for Width. enter 1800 w x 1500mm h for Name and click OK.rfa file. Training Window. Click Apply. Click Apply. enter 2600 w x 1300mm h for Name. 806 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 10 In the Name dialog box. Define the final window type 12 Under Family Types.rfa. 14 In the Family Types dialog box. specify the following parameter values: ■ ■ ■ Enter 2600 mm for Width. You now have three new window types defined within your window family. Enter 1300 mm for Height. and click Open. click Save. navigate to the location of your Training Window.

click Window. 23 On the Design Bar. 32 On the View menu. and select Shading with Edges. 30 Add the third window to the right side of the wall. Defining New Window Types | 807 . 35 On the View Control Bar. 34 On the View toolbar.Place new window types in the project 21 On the Design Bar. Notice the detail that displays. click Modify. click the Model Graphics Style control. 33 Zoom in on the center window. click Thin Lines. select Training Window : 2500 w x 1250mm h. 22 Draw a generic wall segment 12000 mm long. This is because you set the visibility values to display when cut in plan/RCP. 27 In the Type Selector. 29 In the Type Selector. click . 26 Add the window to the left side of the wall. select Training Window : 1800 w x 1500mm h. select Training Window :2600 w x 1300mm h. 24 On the Options Bar. clear Tag on Placement. click Wall. 28 Add this window to the center of the wall. 31 On the Design Bar. 25 In the Type Selector.

you add reference planes and specify the parameters for the new rolltop desk furniture family. This completes the Creating a Window Family lesson. Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters In this exercise. drawer base. and drawers as extrusions. 808 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and specify values for the furniture length and depth.You have three new fixed nine-light windows based on a new window family prototype. rolltop. you create a custom furniture family based on the definition of a rolltop desk. Finally. You begin by creating the desktop. Creating a Furniture Family In this lesson. you assign new dimension values to the furniture to create new types within the furniture family. You then assign parameters to the furniture family to allow for the creation of different-sized versions of the prototype.

4 Maximize the view. Floor Plan: Ref. NOTE When you draw the reference planes. one to the left and one to the right of the existing vertical centerline reference plane as shown. 2 On the File menu. Precise dimensions are assigned to the reference planes in subsequent steps. they represent the furniture centerline axes. one above and one below the existing horizontal centerline reference plane as shown. The reference planes that display are part of the default furniture template. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. 8 Draw two vertical reference planes. Level. 5 On the View menu. their exact location is not critical. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog box. Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters | 809 . click Training Files. Draw additional horizontal and vertical reference planes 6 On the Design Bar. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Furniture. 7 Draw two horizontal reference planes. click Ref Plane.Create a new family based on the default furniture template 1 Close all open projects or families. click New ➤ Family.rft.

add a horizontal dimension string beginning at the left reference plane. It should reference the left reference plane and the right reference plane as shown. and ending at the right reference plane. Click the EQ icon to make the segments equal. 810 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor .Dimension the reference planes 9 On the Design Bar. as shown. 11 Add an overall horizontal dimension underneath the dimension you just added. 10 Near the bottom of the drawing area. click Dimension. proceeding to the centerline reference plane.

click Modify. proceeding to the centerline reference plane. Click the EQ symbol to make both segments equal. as shown. 13 Select the left reference plane. Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters | 811 . click Dimension. and ending at the lower reference plane. 15 On the Design Bar.12 On the Design Bar. add a vertical dimension string beginning at the upper reference plane. 16 On the right side of the drawing area. 14 Change the horizontal dimension to 2000 mm.

20 Change the vertical dimension to 1000 mm. as shown. click Modify. horizontal reference plane.17 To the right of the dimension you just created. 812 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . add an overall vertical dimension from the upper reference plane to the lower reference plane. 19 Select the upper. 18 On the Design Bar.

Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters | 813 . select Family parameter. Add length and depth family parameters 23 Select the 2000 mm dimension. Click OK. select <Add parameter.. Afterwards. TIP To do this. Select Type.> for Label. 24 On the Options Bar. For Group parameter under. 22 Clean up the extents of the reference planes and the dimension witness lines as shown. Under Parameter Data. select each reference plane and drag the extents to the new position. click Modify. 25 In the Parameter Properties dialog box.. select Dimensions.21 On the Design Bar. enter Length for Name. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type. select each dimension and drag the witness line controls as needed.

Select Type. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type. you can still see the model. Click OK. These reference planes will be the skeleton that you snap the solid geometry to.> for Label. click Family Types. Under Parameter Data. enter Depth for Name. select <Add parameter. Flex the design 29 Adjust the location of the reference planes within the drawing area.26 Select the 1000 mm dimension. For Group parameter under. 27 On the Options Bar. select Family parameter. you should flex the design now to ensure the reference planes and labelled dimensions adapt to changes as expected. 814 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 30 On the Design Bar.. so when you open the Family Types dialog box. select Dimensions. Therefore. 28 In the Parameter Properties dialog box..

“Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry” on page 815. Click OK. and then select the lower right reference plane intersection for the second corner of the rectangle. Create the desktop using an extrusion 1 On the Design Bar. you create the solid geometry of the desktop with an extrusion. the symbolic line thickness was modified for training purposes. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. 32 In the Family Types dialog box. 3 Select the upper left reference plane intersection for the first corner of the rectangle. When the solid geometry is snapped to the reference planes. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. click Symbolic Lines. click . 2 On the Options Bar. enter 3000 mm for Length. Your lines may have a lighter weight. Notice the reference planes adapt to the new dimension parameters. Click Apply. Enter 1000 mm for Depth. NOTE In the image below. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. it will also adapt to the same changes. Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry | 815 . enter 2000 mm for Length. Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry In this exercise.31 In the Family Types dialog box. Click Apply. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Enter 1500 mm for Depth.

click Finish Sketch. 5 On the Design Bar. under Elevations. and click OK. double-click Front. 11 In the Project Browser. press TAB until the chain of lines is offered as a selection option. 9 Move the cursor over one of the symbolic lines.4 On the Design Bar. Move the desktop up 12 On the Design Bar. The desktop extrusion extends 100 mm above the reference level. click Modify. press TAB until Extrusion : Shape handle displays in the Status Bar. and click to select all four symbolic lines. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 7 On the Design Bar. and enter 100 mm for Depth. click Set Work Plane. click . select Level: Ref. and select the top edge. 816 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Lines. Level for Name. 6 In the Work Plane dialog box. 13 Move the cursor over the top edge of the desktop. 8 On the Options Bar. under Specify a new Work Plane. 10 On the Design Bar.

select <Add parameter. 15 Move the cursor over the bottom edge of the desktop. Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry | 817 . Add height and thickness family parameters 20 On the Design Bar. 21 Select the 750 mm dimension. Add height and thickness dimensions 17 On the Design Bar.14 Drag the top edge of the desktop upward until the temporary dimension value is 750 mm. 23 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. press TAB until Extrusion : Shape handle displays in the Status Bar.. click Modify. 19 Add a vertical dimension from the bottom of the desktop to the top edge.. enter Height for Name. select Family parameter. and select the bottom edge. 18 Add a vertical dimension from the reference level to the top edge of the desktop. click Dimension. 16 Drag the bottom edge of the desktop up until the desktop is 100 mm thick.> for Label. Under Parameter Data. 22 On the Options Bar. as shown. specify the following: ■ ■ Under Parameter type.

Select Type. Click OK. Click OK. Enter 150 mm for Thickness. click Modify.. Under Parameter Data. Click OK. select Family parameter.> for Label. 25 On the Options Bar. Notice the desk top adapts to the new dimension parameters. 27 On the Design Bar. select <Add parameter. “Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry” on page 818. 29 On the Design Bar. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions.■ ■ ■ For Group parameter under. enter Thickness for Name. For Group parameter under. Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry In this exercise. 31 In the Family Types dialog box. 26 n the Parameter Properties dialog box. Click Apply. 30 In the Family Types dialog box. select Dimensions. Flex the design 28 Adjust the location of the model within the drawing area. enter 2000 mm for Length. and click Apply. and click Apply. you can still see the model. and click Apply. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. 24 Select the 100 mm dimension. 818 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Enter 1200 mm for Height. Enter 750 mm for Height. Enter 100 mm for Thickness. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. so when you open the Family Types dialog box. select Dimensions. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type. click Family Types. enter 4000 mm for Length. you create the solid geometry of the desk drawer base.. Select Type.

2 On the Design Bar. Offset two reference planes to locate the first drawer base corner 1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. and click to locate a new horizontal reference plane offset 100 mm below it. 3 On the Options Bar. click . click Dimension. 5 Move the cursor over the upper horizontal reference plane. 4 Move the cursor over the left vertical reference plane.Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry | 819 . Level. and enter 100 mm for Offset. click Ref Plane. and click to locate a new vertical reference plane offset 100 mm to the right. double-click Ref. 6 On the Design Bar.

13 On the Options Bar. Click the lock icon as shown. as shown. 10 On the Design Bar. Lock the dimension as shown. click Set Work Plane. click Lines. click . 8 Add a dimension to the top horizontal reference plane and the offset plane below it. select Level: Ref. 11 In the Work Plane dialog box. Level for Name. 12 On the Design Bar. under Specify a new Work Plane. 14 Select the intersection of the new offset reference planes for the first corner of the rectangle.7 Add a dimension referencing the left vertical reference plane and the offset plane you added. Sketch the left drawer base 9 On the Design Bar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 820 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and click OK. and then specify a point 300 mm to the right and 800 mm down for the second corner of the rectangle.

click Dimension. 15 Click both of the lock icons to lock the edges of the extrusion to the reference planes. 17 Add a vertical dimension from the lower reference plane to the lower edge of the drawer base. Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry | 821 . two lock icons display.After you complete the rectangle. and then click the lock icon to lock the dimension. 16 On the Design Bar.

click the Mirror tool. 19 Select the four sketched lines. . using the TAB key. click Modify. as shown below at the cursor. 822 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 22 On the Tools toolbar. select the horizontal reference plane second from the top. 21 Select the vertical centerline reference plane as the mirror axis.Mirror the left rectangle to create the right drawer base 18 On the Design Bar. A duplicate of the left drawer base is mirrored to create the right drawer base. TIP You can select multiple elements by holding the CTRL key down. You can also highlight the entire line chain. 23 For the align-to reference. 20 On the Tools toolbar. click .

Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry | 823 . 26 On the Design Bar. 27 Add and lock the following two dimensions to the right drawer extrusion: ■ Add a dimension from the right vertical reference plane to the right edge of the drawer base.24 Select the top horizontal line of the right drawer extrusion as shown. click Dimension. A lock icon displays. and then click the lock icon to lock the dimension. 25 Click the lock icon to lock the extrusion edge to the reference plane.

31 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. Select Type. as shown. one on each extrusion that references the width of the drawer base. enter Drawer Base Width for Name. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type. Under Parameter Data. and then click the lock icon to lock the dimension. 28 Add two final dimensions.. For Group parameter under. select Family parameter. select Dimensions. select <Add parameter. 29 Select the dimension referring to the drawer width on the left extrusion..■ Add a dimension from the lower reference plane to the lower edge of the drawer base.> for Label. 30 On the Options Bar. 824 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Click OK.

35 On the Design Bar. double-click Front. under Elevations. select Drawer Base Width for Label. 33 On the Options Bar.32 Select the dimension referring to the drawer width on the right extrusion. click Modify. 34 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. Extend the drawer base extrusions up to the desktop 36 In the Project Browser. Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry | 825 .

click . 38 Select the lower edge of the desktop as the align-to reference. 44 Clear Show annotation categories in this view. The solid geometry for the desk drawer base is now complete. click the Scale control and select 1:20. click Visibility/Graphics. 43 Click the Annotation Categories tab. notice that annotations display in this view. click Modify. click it to lock the alignment. 40 On the Design Bar.37 On the Tools toolbar. 39 Select the upper edge of the drawer base. 42 On the View menu. After the alignment. 45 On the View Control Bar. a lock icon displays. click . and click OK. However. 826 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 41 On the View toolbar.

enter 4000 mm for Length. click Family Types. Enter 1200 mm for Height. Click OK. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. 48 In the Family Types dialog box. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. and click Apply.Flex the design 46 Adjust the location of the model within the drawing area so when you open the Family Types dialog box. and click Apply. you can still see the model. 50 Proceed to the next exercise. Enter 750 mm for Height. Enter 150 mm for Thickness. Enter 100 mm for Thickness. 47 On the Design Bar. Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry In this exercise. Notice the desk adapts to the new dimension parameters. 49 In the Family Types dialog box. “Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry” on page 827. you create the solid geometry of the desk rolltop. Click Apply. and click Apply. enter 2000 mm for Length. Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry | 827 .

2 On the Design Bar. click Lines. under Specify a new Work Plane. click Set Work Plane. and click OK. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 6 On the Options Bar. and click to specify the upper left corner. as shown. then move the cursor up 300mm and to the left 400mm. under Elevations. 4 In the Work Plane dialog box. click . double-click Right. select Reference Plane: Center (Left\Right) for Name. 5 On the Design Bar. 3 On the Design Bar. 7 Sketch the rectangle beginning at the intersection of the desktop and the right reference plane.Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. Create the rolltop extrusion 1 In the Project Browser. 828 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

then select the right parallel sketch line. and lock the alignment.8 On the Tools toolbar. and click the lock icon to lock the alignment. then the lower horizontal sketch line. Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry | 829 . 9 Select the desk top. click . 10 Select the right vertical edge of the desktop extrusion.

. click the Fillet arc tool. click Lines. 15 Select the left vertical sketch line. and then select the fillet arc tool from the menu. 12 Add one dimension referring to both vertical sketch lines. Do not be concerned with the precise dimension of the arc radius. 13 On the Design Bar. Add another dimension to both horizontal sketch lines. 830 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and then move the cursor down and to the right until you create and arc similar to the image below. the upper sketch line. click Finish Sketch. and lock it. 14 On the Options Bar. 16 On the Design Bar. TIP You may need to click the down arrow button. click Dimension.11 On the Design Bar. and lock it.

select the right edge of the rolltop. and click the lock icon. Align the left and right edges of the rolltop with the drawer bases 17 In the Project Browser. click . 20 Select the right edge of the right drawer base. Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry | 831 . double-click Front.The rolltop extrusion outline is complete. 18 On the Tools toolbar. under Elevations. 19 Select the left edge of the left drawer base. and click the lock icon. select the left edge of the rolltop.

click . If not. Flex the design 22 Adjust the location of the desk model within the drawing area so when you open the Family Types dialog box. and click Apply. 832 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and click Apply. 24 In the Family Types dialog box. click Family Types.21 On the View toolbar. You can also use dimension constraints. enter 4000 mm for Length. The solid geometry of the rolltop is now complete. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. 23 On the Design Bar. The desk should adapt to all the changes. Enter 1500 mm for Depth. Enter 200 mm for Thickness. and click Apply. and click Apply. Enter 1500 mm for Height. you can still see the model. you may need to align and lock problematic edges that did not remain aligned.

Enter 750 mm for Height. select Pick a Plane.25 In the Family Types dialog box. 3 In the Work Plane dialog box. Click OK. Enter 100 mm for Thickness. click Set Work Plane. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 2 On the Design Bar. 4 Select the front plane of the right drawer base. Click Apply. under Specify a new Work Plane. enter 2000 mm for Length. “Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry” on page 833. and click OK. Enter 1000 mm for Depth. Create the desk drawer extrusions 1 On the Design Bar. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. you create the solid geometry of the drawers and apply material to the desk. 26 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry In this exercise. Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry | 833 .

7 On the Options Bar. If you modify the desk length or the drawer base width. 12 On the Options Bar.5 In the Project Browser. and repeat the previous step by selecting the right vertical lines of the 834 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Lines. 14 On the Tools toolbar. Lock each dimension as you add it. 9 On the Design Bar. There should be four dimensions as shown. double-click Front. NOTE The exact configuration of the rectangles representing the drawer fronts is not critical. click drawer set on the left. these locked dimension assure that the drawers flex as expected. NOTE Adding and locking these dimensions is very important. 6 On the Design Bar. If you cannot see the locks on the dimensions. . 10 Add a dimension between the vertical edges of the drawer base and the vertical lines of each bottom drawer. After selecting the line of an upper drawer. 11 On the Tools toolbar. under Elevations. select Multiple Alignment. select the left vertical line on the left lowest drawer first. click Dimension. click . and then select the corresponding left vertical lines of the two drawers above it. zoom the view until you do. 13 To constrain the four upper drawers. click the lock that displays to lock the alignment. click . 8 Sketch six drawers similar to the image below.

20 On the View toolbar. under AccuRender. These steps ensure the top drawers remain aligned and flex with the constrained bottom drawer. enter Desk . Apply material to the desk 21 Draw a pick box around the entire desk to select all the extrusions. and select Shading with Edges. click OK. 16 On the Design Bar. 27 In the Material Library dialog box. click Extrusion Properties. for Material.15 On the Tools toolbar. click Duplicate. click OK. click Modify. and repeat the previous two steps on the right set of drawers. Cherry. 22 On the Options Bar. 26 In the Materials dialog box. click . 31 On the View Control Bar. 30 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Finish Sketch. Dark. enter 20mm for Extrusion End. click the Model Graphics Style control. click 24 In the Materials dialog box. 23 In the Element Properties dialog box. Polished. and click OK. click . 17 On the Design Bar. click for Texture. 19 On the Design Bar. 18 In the Element Properties dialog box. 28 Click OK. 25 In the New Material dialog box. navigate to AccuRender/Wood/Cherry and select Stained.Wood. Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry | 835 . click . 29 In the Materials dialog box. and click OK. under Constraints. under Materials and Finishes.

Flex the design 32 Adjust the location of the desk model within the drawing area so when you open the Family Types dialog box. Enter 1500 mm for Depth. enter 2000 mm for Length. Enter 750 mm for Height. enter 4000 mm for Length. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. and click Apply. Enter 100 mm for Thickness. 36 Proceed with the final exercise in this lesson. Enter 200 mm for Thickness. “Defining New Furniture Types” on page 836. click Family Types. Click OK. and click Apply. 836 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and click Apply. Enter 1000 mm for Depth. You can also use dimension constraints. 35 In the Family Types dialog box. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. you may need to align and lock problematic edges that did not remain aligned. you define new furniture types based on the rolltop desk model that you just created. Defining New Furniture Types In this exercise. you can still see the model. The desk should adapt to all the changes. 33 On the Design Bar. 34 In the Family Types dialog box. If not. Click Apply.

5 Under Family Types. click New. 6 In the Name dialog box. 9 In the Name dialog box. and click OK. click New. select Rolltop Desk 200 x 1000mm. 19 In the Type Selector. 11 On the File menu. 3 In the Name dialog box. and click Open. click the Model Graphics Style control and select Shading with Edges.rfa file. 7 In the Family Types dialog box.Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. and click Apply. and click OK. navigate to the location of your Training Furniture. to start a new project based on your default template. enter Rolltop Desk 2100 x 1100mm for Name. verify that Length is 2000 mm and Depth is 1000 mm. enter Rolltop Desk 2250 x 1250mm for Name. 17 On the Options Bar. Defining New Furniture Types | 837 . click Save. Load the new furniture family into a new project 13 On the Standard toolbar. 2 In the Family Types dialog box. under Family Types. click Family Types. 12 Navigate to the folder of your choice and save the new furniture family project with the name. Define new furniture types with various widths and depths 1 On the Design Bar. and click OK. click Component. 20 Specify a point in the drawing area to add the first desk. 8 Under Family Types. 18 In the Open dialog box. 10 In the Family Types dialog box. enter 2100 mm for Length and 1100 mm for Depth.rfa. enter Rolltop Desk 2000 x 1000mm for Name. 4 In the Family Types dialog box. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. You now have three new furniture types defined within your furniture family. and click OK. click Apply. click New. enter 2250 mm for Length and 1250 mm for Depth. select it. click . 15 On the View Control Bar. click Load. and click Apply. click 14 On the View toolbar. Training Furniture.

Balusters are simply profile extrusions with an assigned height family parameter. select Rolltop Desk 2250 x 1250mm. 24 Specify a point in the drawing area to the right of the previous two desks. 23 In the Type Selector. You now have three new rolltop desks based on the new rolltop desk furniture family prototype. and add the second desk. and click to add the third desk. you draw a baluster with an extrusion. you create a custom baluster and apply it to a set of stair railings. 22 Specify a point to the right of the first desk. This completes the Creating a Furniture Family lesson. Drawing a Baluster In this exercise. select Rolltop Desk 2100 x 1100mm.21 In the Type Selector. Creating a Baluster Family In this lesson. 838 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

and click OK. 6 In the Work Plane dialog box. 4 On the Design Bar.rft. Drawing a Baluster | 839 . However. The bottom of the baluster is at the reference level and the baluster has an assigned default height of 750mm. Level for Name. 8 Draw the closed baluster plan profile as shown. select Ref. select Training Files and navigate to the Metric ➤ Templates folder. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All to Fit. 9 On the Design Bar. 2 On the View menu.Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. Select Metric Baluster. click Set Work Plane. Draw the baluster plan profile 3 In the Project Browser. click Finish Sketch. 7 On the Design Bar. click Lines. their exact location is not critical. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs. expand Floor Plans. Create a new family based on the default profile template 1 Expand the left elevation view. and double-click Ref. The reference planes that display are part of the default baluster template. and click Open. the baluster profile should be centered on the vertical and horizontal reference planes. Level. In the left pane of the New dialog box. 5 On the Design Bar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. Top and bottom cut angles for the baluster are also displayed. Draw your profile approximately 30mm wide by 60mm deep. click New ➤ Family. expand Views (all).

5 Draw a straight stair run as shown. 15 Save the new baluster family with the name Training Baluster. and in the left pane of the New dialog box. select Training Files. click . click Stairs. 14 Click the lock icon. Select the DefaultMetric.rte file. and click Open. 4 On the Design Bar. Assigning the New Baluster to a Stair Run In this exercise. Navigate to the Metric ➤ Templates folder. The new custom baluster is now complete. By default. 13 Select the top reference plane and select the top edge of the extrusion. the extrusion has a height of 250mm. you assign the new baluster that you just created to a stair run. 6 On the Design Bar. Load the new baluster family into a new project 1 On the File menu. click OK. 2 In the New Project dialog box. click Modify and select the extrusion. In the New Project Dialog box. 12 On the Options Bar. click Finish Sketch.Extend the baluster extrusion to the top reference plane 10 In the Project Browser under Elevations. double-click Front.rfa. Draw a straight stair run 3 On the Design Bar. click Browse. 11 On the Design Bar. click the Modelling tab. click New ➤ Project. 840 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

19 Click OK. 14 In the Element Properties dialog box. click . click OK. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. click Edit for Baluster Placement. click . click OK. 20 In the Type Properties dialog box. under Baluster Family. 9 On the View toolbar. click Modify and select the existing railing. 15 In the Type Properties dialog box. and click Open. select it. 11 On the View menu. 21 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Shading with Edges. select Training Baluster : Training Baluster for the Regular baluster. 8 In the Open dialog box.7 On the File menu. Assigning the New Baluster to a Stair Run | 841 . 17 Clear Use Balusters Per Tread on Stairs. navigate to the location of your Training Baluster. click Orient ➤ Southwest. 10 On the View menu. 18 Specify Start and End posts as Training Baluster. 16 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box. 13 On the Options Bar.rfa file. Apply the custom baluster to the stair run 12 On the Design Bar. click Edit/New. 22 Zoom in on the new balusters.

The stair run is now assigned the new baluster that you created. and other sweep-defined objects. Drawing a Sweep Profile In this exercise. the sweep profile should begin at the reference plane intersection. However. click Lines. In the left pane of the New dialog box. select Training Files.Sweep. Creating Profile Families A profile is a series of closed two-dimensional lines and arcs. and navigate to the Metric\Templates folder. Create profiles to define frequently used shapes in your details. a railing. and a host sweep. Use profiles to define object cross sections such as railings. Create a new family based on the default profile template 1 On the Design Bar. You then create an in-place sweep based on a 2D path and apply the host sweep to a wall. cornices. In this lesson. their exact location is not critical. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. Select Metric Profile. 3 Save the new profile family with the name Profile . you create five different profiles: a sweep. Drawing a Rail Profile In this exercise. you create a rail profile. balusters. This completes the Creating a Baluster Family lesson. soffits. a stair nosing. and click Open. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs. a reveal. draw the sweep profile with line and arc segments as shown. The new sweep profile is now complete.rfa. you draw a sweep profile. 2 Starting at the reference plane intersection. 842 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click New ➤ Family.rft.

Drawing a Stair Nosing Profile | 843 .rfa. Select Metric Profile-Rail. However. 4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile . Create a new family based on the default rail profile template 1 In the Project Browser. Dataset ■ On the File menu.Rail. and click Open. verify that Ref.Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. select Training Files. The rail height is measured from the floor elevation to the rail top.rft. you create a stair nosing profile. click New ➤ Family. Drawing a Stair Nosing Profile In this exercise. the top of the rail profile should coincide with the rail top reference plane. with the vertical reference plane labeled as the rail centerline and the horizontal reference plane labeled as the rail top. 3 Starting at the reference plane intersection. draw the rail profile with line segments as shown. Draw the rail profile 2 On the Design Bar. click New ➤ Family. In the left pane of the New dialog box. The reference planes that display are part of the default rail profile template. under Floor Plans. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs. The new rail profile is now complete. Level is open. click Lines. their exact location is not critical. and navigate to the Metric\Templates folder.

select Training Files. Drawing a Reveal Profile In this exercise. Create a new family based on the default reveal profile template 1 In the Project Browser. Select Metric Profile-Reveal. Draw the stair nosing profile 2 On the Design Bar. 4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile . NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs. Select Metric Profile-Stair Nosing. The horizontal reference plane represents the offset from floor level to the reveal. under Floor Plans. 3 Starting at the reference plane intersection. However. the top of the stair nosing profile should coincide with the tread surface reference plane and the right edge of the stair nosing profile should coincide with the riser face reference plane. Level is open. their exact location is not critical. and navigate to the Metric\Templates folder. draw the stair nosing profile with line and arc segments as shown. The reference planes that display are part of the default reveal profile template. The reference planes that display are part of the default stair nosing profile template. select Training Files. In addition. verify that Ref.Stair Nosing.rfa. with the vertical reference plane labeled as the riser face and the horizontal reference plane labeled as the tread surface.rft. with the vertical reference plane labeled as the wall face. click Lines. and navigate to the Metric\Templates folder. and click Open. you create a reveal profile. you must draw the stair nosing in the lower-left quadrant. The new stair nosing profile is now complete. Create a new family based on the default stair nosing profile template 1 Notice the existing planes and text provided within the template.■ In the left pane of the New dialog box. Additional text specifies the lower-left quadrant as the location for the stair nosing. In the left pane of the New dialog box. click New ➤ Family. Reveal profiles are used with the Reveal tool in the project environment to define a wall cutout. 844 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu.rft. and click Open. and the wall body indicated to the right of the wall face reference plane.

Level is open. and click Open. under Floor Plans. verify that Ref. Create a new family based on the default host sweep profile template 1 In the Project Browser. However. select Training Files.Draw the reveal profile 2 On the Design Bar.rfa. Drawing a Host Sweep Profile In this exercise. 3 Starting at the reference plane intersection. Drawing a Host Sweep Profile | 845 . draw the reveal profile with line segments as shown. Host Sweep profiles are similar to reveal profiles and are used with the Host Sweep tool in the project environment to define a shape to add to a host surface. click Lines. their exact location is not critical. which may be any vertical surface. the left edge of the reveal profile must coincide with wall face reference plane and the reveal must be drawn within the wall body (to the right of the wall face reference plane). and navigate to the Metric\Templates folder. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. click New ➤ Family. you create a host sweep profile. In the left pane of the New dialog box. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines.Reveal.rft. Select Metric Profile-Hosted. 4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile . The new reveal profile is now complete.

Host Sweep. their exact location is not critical. 846 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . with the vertical reference plane labeled as the host face and the host body indicated to the left of the host face reference plane. draw the reveal profile with line and arc segments as shown. 2 In the New Project dialog box. and in the left pane of the New dialog box. Navigate to the Metric\Templates folder. 4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile . The new host sweep profile is now complete. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines. Draw the host sweep profile 2 On the Design Bar. click Browse. and click Open. Select the DefaultMetric. you apply the sweep profile that you just created to a 2D path. In the New Project Dialog box. Create a new project 1 On the File menu.rfa. The reference plane intersection is the origin of the host sweep profile. 3 Starting at the reference plane intersection. click New ➤ Project.The reference planes that display are part of the default host sweep profile template. click Lines. the left edge of the host sweep profile must coincide with the host face reference plane.rte file. click Create. and the host sweep profile must be drawn outside of the host body (to the right of the host face reference plane). click OK. Specify the family category 3 On the Modelling menu. Applying a Sweep Profile to a 2D Path In this exercise. However. select Training Files.

rfa.Sweep. Sketch the 2D sweep path 6 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. NOTE When you sketch the 2D path. 17 Zoom in on the right end of the sweep. Apply the sweep profile to the 2D path 10 On the Options Bar. select Profile . beside Load Profiles. Applying a Sweep Profile to a 2D Path | 847 . click Finish Family. navigate to the location of Profile . click Lines and sketch the 2D path approximately as shown. and click Open. 5 In the Name dialog box. click Finish Path. expand Elevations.4 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog box. and click OK. select it. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Sweep. 7 On the Design Bar. the exact location of the path is not critical. Modify the sweep profile configuration 16 In the Project Browser. enter Sweep for Name. 15 On the View toolbar. click Finish Sweep. click Sketch 2D Path. click . and double-click South. 11 In the Open dialog box. 14 On the Design Bar. 8 On the Design Bar. 9 On the Design Bar. select Generic Models for Family Category.Sweep. click Load Profiles. 12 In the Type Selector. expand Views (all). 13 On the Design Bar.

Enter 25 degrees for Angle. you apply the host sweep profile that you created to a group of walls. click Finish Family. on the Options Bar. click Browse. 23 Click OK. click Wall. Create a new project 1 On the File menu. 25 On the View toolbar.18 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 21 Select the sweep profile again and. select Training Files. and in the left pane of the New dialog box. select Profile Is Flipped. 848 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Under Constraints. 19 Draw a vertical reference plane coincident with the left edge of the profile as shown. click 22 In the Element Properties dialog box. The sweep profile application is now complete. In the New Project Dialog box. click OK. Under Other. Select the DefaultMetric. enter 600 for Vertical Profile Offset. and click Open. do the following: ■ ■ ■ . 20 Select the sweep profile and. Draw a wall group 3 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar. 24 On the Design Bar. Applying a Host Sweep Profile to Walls In this exercise.rte file. click . click New ➤ Project. 2 In the New Project dialog box. Navigate to the Metric\Templates folder. click Edit. click Ref Plane. on the Options Bar.

their exact location is not critical. 8 Select a point on the left wall for the wall sweep. 4 Draw four walls as shown. Applying a Host Sweep Profile to Walls | 849 . click Host Sweep ➤ Wall Sweep. click . verify that Horizontal is selected. 9 Select a point on the right wall for the next wall sweep. 5 On the View toolbar.NOTE When you draw the walls. 6 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar. 7 On the Options Bar.

Creating a Room Tag In this lesson. In the left pane of the New dialog box. Replace the default wall sweep with the new host wall sweep 11 On the File menu.rft.Host Sweep : Profile . and click Open. This completes the Creating Profile Families lesson.rfa. select Profile . select Training Files. The default wall sweep is replaced with your host sweep profile. 15 In the Type Properties dialog box. click OK.Host Sweep. and click Open. 850 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 13 Select the wall sweep and. 12 In the Open dialog box. click Modify. on the Options Bar. under Construction. and click OK. Specifying Room Tag Parameters In this exercise. click Edit/New.Host Sweep for Profile. you create a room tag which displays room name. floor and ceiling finish. and area with labels added to extract project data. 19 Move the cursor to rotate your viewpoint to view the host sweep from underneath. 16 In the Element Properties dialog box. 17 On the View toolbar. click New ➤ Annotation Symbol. 18 In the Dynamic View dialog box. Create a new tag based on the default room tag template 1 On the View menu. The reference planes that display are part of the default room tag template. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All to Fit. select it. click 14 In the Element Properties dialog box. you specify the room tag parameters. and navigate to the Metric ➤ Templates folder. click . Select M_Room Tag. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. . navigate to the location of Profile . click Spin [Shift].10 On the Design Bar. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family.

and click OK. 9 In the Type Properties dialog box. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Edit/New. and click OK. click Edit/New. Add a 2mm label 6 In the Element Properties dialog box. click OK. click Label. 15 In the Select Parameter dialog box. 12 In the Type Selector. verify that Label : 3mm is displayed. select Ceiling Finish. and click OK. 13 On the Options Bar. and click OK. 19 In the Select Parameter dialog box. click Duplicate. 3 On the Options Bar. and click OK. 8 In the Name dialog box. verify that Center and Middle are selected for Text Alignment. 21 In the Select Parameter dialog box. 22 Specify a point below the Ceiling Finish label for the last label location. and click OK. enter 2 for the Text Size parameter. 5 In the Type Properties dialog box. and click OK. select Name. 17 In the Type Selector. 23 In the Select Parameter dialog box. Specifying Room Tag Parameters | 851 . 18 Specify a point below the Name label for the next label location. click Label. click . select Underline. 4 In the Element Properties dialog box. 7 In the Type properties dialog box. clear Underline. 16 Zoom in on the label. The name label is displayed with the text underlined. select Floor Finish. select Label : 2mm. 20 Specify a point below the Floor Finish label for the next label location. enter 2mm for Name. Combine labels into a room tag 11 On the Design Bar.Edit the 3mm label 2 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. select Area. 14 Specify the location for the first label as shown.

3 On the Options Bar. The reference planes that display are part of the default generic annotation template. Notes included with the template specify annotation parameters. and navigate to the Metric\Templates folder. Create a new annotation symbol based on the default generic annotation template 1 In the Project Browser. click . click New ➤ Annotation Symbol. 852 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor .rft. you create a custom north arrow annotation symbol with a circle and lines. Creating an Annotation Symbol In this lesson. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. select Training Files. notice that there is only one view available. The new room tag is now ready for use. In the left pane of the New dialog box. 4 Specify the reference plane intersection for the circle center point.rfa. click Lines. Sketch a north arrow symbol 2 On the Design Bar. Creating a Custom North Arrow Annotation Symbol In this exercise. and click Open. 24 Save the new room tag with the name Finish Area Tag. you create a custom north arrow annotation symbol and place it in a new project. This completes the Creating a Room Tag lesson.The Area label has a predefined value of 150 SF. Select Generic Annotation.

8 Draw a vertical line from the top to the center point of the circle. Creating a Custom North Arrow Annotation Symbol | 853 . 7 Draw a horizontal line from the left side to the right side of the circle through the center point. 9 Draw a vertical line from the center point to the bottom of the circle. click .5 Drag the cursor and specify a radius of 8mm. 6 On the Options Bar.

under Modify Subcategories. select 3 for Line Weight. 17 On the Design Bar. Adding the New North Arrow to a Project In this exercise. Training North Arrow. you add the new north arrow annotation symbol that you created to a project. Apply the new line weight to the upper vertical line 15 On the Design Bar. 16 In the Type Selector. click Modify. verify that Generic Annotations is selected for Subcategory of. 18 Select the template notes and press DELETE. enter North Line for Name. and select the upper vertical line. 19 Save the new north arrow with the name. click Modify. and click OK. click Object Styles. 854 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click New. 12 In the Object Styles dialog box. and click OK. The north arrow annotation symbol is now complete. The new north arrow annotation symbol is ready to edit. click Modify. 13 In the New Subcategory dialog box.rfa.10 On the Design Bar. 14 In the Object Styles dialog box. Add an annotation objects subcategory 11 On the Settings menu. select North Line. in the North Line row.

9 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 12 On the Design Bar. Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet In this exercise. text.rfa. click Modify. Creating a Titleblock Family In this lesson. 11 Specify a point in the lower right corner of the sheet to place the symbol. and in the left pane of the New dialog box. Navigate to the Metric\Templates folder. you draw all of the linework necessary to create a custom A0-size sheet. In the New Project Dialog box. 2 In the New Project dialog box. click Symbol. click Sheet. 7 On the File menu. Select the DefaultMetric. and click Open. click New ➤ Project. 4 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. and labels. you create a custom titleblock sheet based on the A0 metric titleblock template. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Titleblock Family | 855 . 6 Zoom in on the lower right corner of the sheet. graphics. select A1 metric. click Browse.rte file. Dataset ■ On the File menu. navigate to the location of Training North Arrow. click New ➤ Titleblock. 5 Click OK. You customize the titleblock with a new text style. This completes the Creating an Annotation Symbol lesson. and your project data.Load the new north arrow into a new project 1 On the File menu. select Training Files. and click Open. select Training North Arrow. 8 In the Open dialog box. select it. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. click OK. The titleblock has linework. 10 In the Type Selector.

Sketch the inside border 2 On the Design Bar. and click . 10 Draw a horizontal line 120mm below the last horizontal line as shown. . and then specify the lower right corner of the sheet for the second corner of the rectangle. 3 On the Options Bar. Create a new family based on the default titleblock template 1 The default titleblock template consists of 4 border lines. 6 Move the cursor over the right inside border line.■ In the left pane of the New dialog box. select Training Files and navigate to the Metric\Templates folder. and click Open. Add vertical and horizontal lines 5 On the Options Bar. 4 Specify the upper left corner of the sheet for the first rectangle corner. Select A0 metric. and click to draw a new vertical line. click . click Lines. 856 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click .rft. click 8 Enter 0 for Offset. 7 On the Options Bar. and enter -25 for Offset. and enter 140 for Offset. 9 Draw a horizontal line 140mm below the upper inside border as shown.

23 Move the cursor over the seventh horizontal line. select Wide Lines. 20 Move the cursor over the fifth horizontal line. 12 On the Design Bar. click Modify. select Title Blocks. click . 16 In the Type Selector. 18 Move the cursor over the third horizontal line. and click to draw a new horizontal line 20mm below the existing line. 21 On the Options Bar. and click to draw a new horizontal line 20mm below the existing line. enter 30 for Offset. and select the second and third horizontal lines. 19 Move the cursor over the fourth horizontal line. press CTRL. 13 In the Type Selector. Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet | 857 .11 Draw a horizontal line 120mm above the lower inside border as shown. and enter 20 for Offset. 17 On the Options Bar. 22 Move the cursor over the third horizontal line. and click to draw a new horizontal line 30mm above the existing line. 24 Move the cursor over the eighth horizontal line. and click to draw a new horizontal line 30mm above the existing line. and click to draw a new horizontal line 30mm above the existing line. click Lines. 14 Zoom in on the lower right corner of the sheet. 15 On the Design Bar. and click to draw a new horizontal line 20mm below the existing line.

Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock In this exercise. 3 Place the image in the upper right corner of the sheet as shown. Add a company logo 1 On the File menu. and click Open. you add a company logo.25 On the Design Bar. and labels to your titleblock. 26 Zoom out to view the entire sheet. select Company Logo. navigate to Training Files/Common. text notes. 2 In the Open dialog box. 4 Zoom in on the logo. click Modify. click Import/Link ➤ Image.jpg. 858 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . The titleblock linework is now complete.

10 In the Type Properties dialog box. Add company name text 12 Draw a text box under the first horizontal line as shown. Add company address and phone number text 15 In the Type Selector. and add an address and phone number as shown. under Text. 13 Enter Arch Design Inc. 11 Click OK twice. 14 Click outside of the text box to complete the text. 9 In the Name dialog box. and click OK. click Edit/New. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 859 . in the text box. click Text. 7 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Duplicate. click . 6 On the Options Bar. and select Bold. select Text : 8mm. enter 10mm Bold for Name.Create a new 10mm text style 5 On the Design Bar. 8 In the Type Properties dialog box. 16 Draw a text box below the initial text. enter 10 for Text Size.

click Text. and select the last text note.Press ENTER to add each new line of text and click outside of the text box to complete the text. 17 On the Design Bar. address. and enter the following text: ■ ■ ■ ■ Consultant: Address: Address: Telephone: 22 On the Design Bar. 21 Draw a text box below the second horizontal line. 860 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 18 Select the drag handle. 19 Click outside the text box to complete the modification. and phone number text 20 On the Design Bar. Add consultant name. and drag the text note down as shown. click Modify. and select the consultant text note. click Modify.

Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 861 . 26 Move the cursor down 120mm and click to specify the first copied text note position. 25 Click inside the Consultant text group.23 On the Edit toolbar. 27 Move the cursor down another 120mm and click to specify the second copied text note location. click . select Constrain and Multiple. 24 On the Options Bar.

and enter Checked By:. and enter Sheet Number:. 36 Draw a text box in the lower right space of the titleblock. enter 5 for Text Size. Add drawing data text 35 In the Type Selector. click Duplicate. 34 Click OK twice. and enter Date:. 32 In the Name dialog box. 39 Draw a text box in the next space up. 862 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . select Text : 5mm. 30 In the Element Properties dialog box. enter 5mm for Name.Create a new 5mm text style 28 On the Design Bar. 31 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Text. and click OK. click . 29 On the Options Bar. under Text. click Edit/New. 38 Draw a text box in the next space up. 37 Draw a text box in the next space up. 33 In the Type Properties dialog box. and enter Drawn By:.

The label displays a default value wrapped to 3 lines.Add drawing data labels 40 On the Design Bar. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 863 . 44 Select the left drag handle on the label. 43 In the Select Parameter dialog box. select Project Issue Date. NOTE Move the label if necessary to line up properly with the existing text. and click OK. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. 42 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Date field. 41 On the Options Bar. click Label. and click to specify the label location. select Right and Bottom for Text Alignment.

click . and click OK. select Label : 15mm Label. 52 In the Type Properties dialog box. 51 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Center and Middle. and click OK. click Duplicate. 60 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Date field. 50 On the Options Bar. NOTE Move the label if necessary to line up properly with the existing text. 58 In the Select Parameter dialog box. enter 15 for Text Size. and click to specify the label location. 61 In the Select Parameter dialog box. enter 15mm Label for Name. 864 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . under Text. 53 In the Name dialog box. 54 In the Type Properties dialog box. and click OK. select Checked By and click OK. and click to specify the label location. 46 In the Select Parameter dialog box. select Project Number. 48 In the Select Parameter dialog box. Add sheet number and project data labels 56 In the Type Selector. select Drawn By. 59 On the Options Bar. 55 Click OK twice. and click OK. click Edit/New. and click to specify the label location. 47 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Checked By field. and click to specify the label location. click Label.45 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Drawn By field. select Sheet Number. NOTE Move the label if necessary to line up properly with the existing text. 57 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Sheet Number field. Create a new 15mm label style 49 On the Design Bar.

Create a 4mm label style 69 On the Design Bar. and click OK. select Client Name. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. and click to specify the label location. select Project Name. and click to specify the label location. 63 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Project Number field.62 Select the left drag handle on the label. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. click Label. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 865 . 66 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Project Name field. 68 Select the left drag handle on the label. 64 In the Select Parameter dialog box. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. 67 In the Select Parameter dialog box. 65 Select the left drag handle on the label. and click OK.

72 In the Type Properties dialog box. 6 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. under Text. click Load. click Sheet. Load the new titleblock family into a new project 1 On the File menu. and then adjust the width of the File Path field so that it is approximately equal to the width of the Sheet Number field. 80 On the Design Bar. click Browse.rte file. navigate to the location of Training A0Horizontal Titleblock. select File Path. Add Project Path label 76 In the Type Selector. you add the titleblock that you created to a new project. click OK. 79 In the Select Parameter dialog box.rfa file. click Left and Middle. select Training Files. 78 Place the cursor in the border area below the left side of the Sheet Number field. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click to specify the label location. 7 Click OK. 2 In the New Project dialog box. 866 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click . and click OK. and click Open. and labels are now complete. text. and click OK. click New ➤ Project.70 On the Options Bar. and click Open. 4 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. 75 Click OK twice. click Modify. The titleblock graphics. 73 In the Name dialog box. Adding the Titleblock to a New Project In this exercise. 81 Save the new titleblock family with the name Training A0Horizontal Titleblock. select 4mm Label. click Duplicate.rfa. 71 In the Element Properties dialog box. select Training A0Horizontal Titleblock. enter 4 for Text Size. and in the left pane of the New dialog box. Navigate to the Metric\Templates folder. select it. click Edit/New. 5 In the Open dialog box. 77 On the Options Bar. 74 In the Type Properties dialog box. Select the DefaultMetric. enter 4mm Label. In the New Project Dialog box.

click . Enter In Progress for Project Status. 9 On the Options Bar. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter January 1. enter Name for Drawn By. 11 Zoom in on the lower right corner of the sheet. under Other. Enter Office Building for Project Name.Modify titleblock properties 8 On the Design Bar. Adding the Titleblock to a New Project | 867 . Enter 2005-01 for Project Number. 14 Click OK. Enter Jane Smith for Client Name. and click OK. click Project Information. 13 In the Type Properties dialog box. 12 On the Settings menu. 2005 for Project Issue Date. click Modify and select the titleblock.

on the Settings menu. NOTE This project was created using an imperial template and components. In-place families interact with the building model according to their assigned family category. 868 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and click Open. click Open. Set the Length units to millimeters.This completes the Creating a Titleblock Family lesson. Select c_Pantheon. set the Area to Square meters. and set the suffix to None. Sketch the roof cross-section with a closed profile in an elevation view. select Training and navigate to the Common folder. format the Area to use 2 decimal places. you create the dome roof with a revolved form. To change the units of measurement to meters. click Orient ➤ Southeast. Open the existing Pantheon building model 1 On the View menu. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. Creating In-Place Families In this lesson. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. and add a dome roof and a concave floor with revolved forms as in-place families.rvt. click Project Units. you start with an incomplete building information model of the Pantheon. You create an in-place family in your current project rather than in the Family Editor. Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family In this exercise.

Specify the dome roof revolved form parameters 6 On the Design Bar.Center. click Create. and double-click South. select Roofs for Family Category. click Set Work Plane. and click OK. and click Open View. Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family | 869 . enter Dome for Name. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Revolve.Next. Specify the Roofs family category 3 On the Modelling menu. 2 In the Project Browser. 10 In the Go To View dialog box. and click OK. 7 On the Design Bar. 9 Select the Center East/West reference plane as shown. 8 In the Work Plane dialog box. you add a dome roof with oculus (circular opening) to the Pantheon building model. 5 In the Name dialog box. and click OK. expand Elevations. expand Views (all). select Section: Wall Section . select Pick a Plane. 4 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog box.

16 Specify the intersection of the Upper Cornice horizontal reference plane and vertical axis as the circle center point. 15 On the Options Bar. click . click Lines.The center wall section view is displayed. Draw the axis of rotation for the dome roof revolved form 11 On the Design Bar. click Axis. Draw the lower face of the dome roof 14 On the Design Bar. 13 Specify the bottom endpoint of the Center East/West reference plane for the start point of the axis. click . 12 On the Options Bar. 870 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and then specify the top endpoint of the reference plane for the endpoint of the axis.

20 Specify the reference plane intersection for the start point of the rim profile as shown. 21 Snap to reference plane intersections. and select Chain. The reference planes that display are guides for drawing the oculus rim profile. 19 On the Options Bar. until it creates an intersection with the level 1 reference plane. click . Draw the oculus rim profile 18 Zoom in on the top of the circle. The circle is tangent to the interior wall face and the level 1 reference plane at the floor line. Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family | 871 .17 Move the cursor out. and draw the five rim profile line segments in the shape of a reverse C as shown.

25 Select the intersection of the circle and the lower left vertical line of the profile as shown. click . click Lines. Draw the upper face of the dome roof 26 On the Design Bar. 28 Specify the endpoint of the upper left rim profile line segment as the arc start point. select Delete Inner Segment.Split the circle 22 On the Tools toolbar. The circle is trimmed between the rim profile and the first split point. 27 On the Options Bar. 872 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 24 Select a point on the circle to the right of the rim profile. 23 On the Options Bar. click .

click .29 Specify the top of the stairs in the wall section as the arc endpoint. and then draw a vertical line down the interior wall face to the lower dome roof face tangent point. Trim the arc below the tangent point 34 On the Tools toolbar. Draw two lines to close the dome roof profile 31 On the Design Bar. click Lines. 33 Draw a horizontal line from the arc endpoint to the interior edge of the wall. click and select Chain. Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family | 873 . 30 Specify a point on the arc approximately as shown. 32 On the Options Bar.

The dome roof in-place family is now complete. 40 On the Design Bar. select Concrete . The dome roof closed profile is now complete. and click OK.35 Select the interior face of the wall. under Materials and Finishes. Creating the Concave Floor In-Place Family In this exercise. click . click for Material. 37 In the Element Properties dialog box. and then select a point on the arc above the tangent point as the segment to keep. click OK. Specify lightweight concrete for the dome roof material 36 On the Design Bar. 874 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . you create the concave floor slab for the Pantheon building model. click Finish Sketch. click Finish Family. click Create. click Revolution Properties.Cast-in-Place Lightweight Concrete for Name. 38 In the Materials dialog box. Specify the concave floor revolved form parameters 1 On the Modelling menu. 41 On the Design Bar. 39 In the Element Properties dialog box. 42 On the View toolbar.

Creating the Concave Floor In-Place Family | 875 . 7 In the Work Plane dialog box. and click OK. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Revolve. and click OK. and click Open View. select Pick a Plane.Center. 12 Specify the bottom endpoint of the Center East/West reference plane for the start point of the axis. 3 In the Name dialog box. Draw the axis of rotation for the floor revolved form 10 On the Design Bar. 8 Select the Center East/West reference plane as shown. enter Concave Floor for Name. 11 On the Options Bar. select Floors for Family Category.2 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog box. click Axis. and click OK. and then specify the top endpoint of the reference plane for the endpoint of the axis. 6 On the Design Bar. 4 In the Project Browser under Elevations. click . 5 On the Design Bar. double-click South. 9 In the Go To View dialog box. select Section: Wall Section . click Set Work Plane.

for the start point of the floor profile as shown. Footing level line and the axis. and select Chain. 876 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor .Draw the concave floor profile 13 On the Design Bar. 16 Drag the cursor up 800 mm. 17 Specify the intersection of the level 1 reference plane and the interior wall edge for the next point of the floor profile as shown. NOTE You may need to zoom in closer to the intersection to select the first point.O. click . 14 On the Options Bar. click Lines. and specify the next point for the floor profile as shown. 15 Specify the intersection of the T.

click OK. Footing level line and the interior wall edge for the next point of the floor profile. click Finish Family. Footing level line and the axis for the last point of the floor profile. Specify cobblestone for the concave floor material 20 On the Design Bar. 19 Specify the intersection of the of the T.18 Specify the intersection of the T. 23 In the Element Properties dialog box.O. select Cobblestone for Name. The concave floor closed profile is now complete. 24 On the Design Bar. 25 On the Design Bar.O. click Revolution Properties. 26 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. and click OK. click Finish Sketch. click for Material. double-click 3D Section View. 22 In the Materials dialog box. Creating the Concave Floor In-Place Family | 877 . 21 In the Element Properties dialog box. This completes the Creating In-Place Families lesson.

878 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

not specifically how to make a floor truss. This type of component uses a broad spectrum of design techniques within the Family Editor. methodology. you learn specific techniques and best practices that you can apply broadly when creating other families in Revit MEP 2008. During this tutorial. In this case. In exercises that become increasingly complex. formula-based parameters. you will understand the process.Parametric Component Design Techniques 18 In this tutorial. In the center of the truss is a mechanical service clearance to accommodate HVAC systems. 879 . The goal of this tutorial is to teach you the proper approach to parametric component creation. the length of the trimmable truss determines the size and grade of the truss chords. assigned subcatecories. The truss also has multiple types. and detail level controls. At the end of this tutorial. The parametric component that you design in this tutorial is an open web wood floor truss. and the specific techniques for creating a parametric component. you create a new parametric component within the Family Editor. you learn the process and methodology of creating a new family.

Knowing why you are creating a particular family and what you need it to do will drive the specific design process. If the component did not have to interact so closely with other structural components. Two types should be created. the design specification requires that the floor truss snaps to columns. Decide component type and design requirements 1 What type of component are you designing? In this case. you determine the requirements of the new component. you should avoid over-designing the component. imagine that your firm specializes in light commercial and residential design. and structural walls. a generic floor-based component might work.Planning a Parametric Component Family Creating a new parametric component family is no different than any other design process. A rectangular mechanical clearance opening must be centered within the beam. Determining Component Needs In this exercise. beams. For every complexity added to a family. there is a computing performance cost that must be paid within the project. Your assignment is to create a truss that adapts parametrically to changes in the building design. the beam design must be advanced in order to have the flexibility that the specs require. Using the new family within a project 3 How will you use the family within a project? 880 | Chapter 18 Parametric Component Design Techniques . In this case. it is not the best solution. For training purposes. this must be a structural beam component. Because this component has to interact closely with other structural components. In addition. Take this into consideration during your design planning. In this case. the component should use the point-to-point insertion method with the joist web members adjusting parametrically. The design requirements dictate how simple or complex a family must be. 2 What additional design requirements affect the design plan for this beam family? Additional design requirements ■ ■ ■ The truss should automatically adjust depth as the length changes. you accomplish two main tasks: you determine the component needs and select the family template that is suited to those needs. NOTE When creating a new family. In this lesson. a 2x3 truss and a 2x4 truss. you select the best available template with which to begin the new structural beam family. This decision dictates which family template you begin with. It should also be an available option within a beam system. and also works intuitively with them. In the next exercise. Although this solution is possible. it is an open-joist wood floor truss. then you should design only what is needed to satisfy the requirements. planning ahead is one of the most important steps. If the design requirements can be met with a simple design.

4 Continue with the next exercise. Selecting the Family Template In this exercise. In the previous exercise. would require Instance or Type parameters. you determined that the component type is a structural beam. In addition. “Selecting the Family Template” on page 881. These materials can be applied using Object Styles. ■ How will the component need to be scheduled? This is an important question. the means by which you gather the information you require within the schedule needs to be built into the component. This critical decision reduces the quantity of template options.For instance: ■ What materials need the most control? These materials. such as wood type. You have completed the planning stage for the new family. Depending on the family you are designing. you determine which family template provides the best starting point for the new beam family. only the 2x3 and 2x4 trusses with wood web members are required. ■ What materials remain constant throughout a project? The chord and web material will always be wood. ■ What types are most commonly used? In this training case. the planning stage and questions may differ. especially if you are going to be nesting subcomponents that may require separate scheduling. Selecting the Family Template | 881 .

to ensure you are using the templates referenced in this tutorial. NOTE Do not double-click the template or open it. In addition. 5 Select Metric Generic Model floor based. scroll to the structural framing templates. notice the preview. There are two structural framing templates provided. you will access them from the Training Files folder. The New dialog box opens to the templates folder that is specified in your Settings ➤ Options dialog box.rft 882 | Chapter 18 Parametric Component Design Techniques . it provides two intersecting reference planes: Center (left/right) and Center (front/back). click Training Files.Review the template options 1 Close any open projects or families. and open Metric\Templates. Usually. the template name often includes information how the component would be used with a project. On the right side of the New dialog box. However. ■ Metric Structural Framing . 6 In the New dialog box. Select it so that the preview displays.rft.Beams and Braces. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog box. this is where you access family templates. Like most generic family templates. You should be in the Metric Templates folder. 4 Scroll through the various template options. Notice that most of the template names include the component type. 2 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. for example: wall based or floor based.

It provides two intersecting reference planes: Center (left/right) and Center (front/back). spacing. Level.Beams and Braces. 8 Select Metric Structural Framing .This template is design specifically to accommodate point-to-point insertion and the specific snapping. This template is the best starting point for the new family. Because of its simplicity.Complex and Trusses.rft This template is designed for complex framing components and trusses. Open the family template 9 Double-click Metric Structural Framing . Notice this template offers three vertical planes on each side of the center (left/right) reference plane.rft to open it. it is not the best starting point for the beam family.Beams and Braces. Although the template name suggests this is the appropriate template. and notice the preview.rft and notice the preview. Floor Plan: Ref. ■ Metric Structural Framing . Floor Plan: Ref. Level Selecting the Family Template | 883 . These planes are designed specifically to accommodate point-to-point beam insertion and the special snapping and display requirements of beam components. 7 Select Metric Structural Framing .rft.Complex and Trusses. and display functions required by structural beams. 10 Maximize the view. it is not designed to create a component capable of point-to-point insertion.

Dimensioning the solid geometry directly also works. however. 884 | Chapter 18 Parametric Component Design Techniques . you add reference planes to the beam design. When a beam family based on this template is added to a project. Adding Reference Planes In this exercise. “Creating the Component Skeleton” on page 884.In this view. you snap and lock the solid geometry to these reference planes and lines. it is not necessary to create a skeleton of reference planes or lines and then align and lock the solid geometry to it. 13 Proceed to the next lesson. 2 Place the cursor over the leftmost vertical reference plane until the tooltip displays the name of the plane. using reference planes and lines is considered more reliable and is therefore a best practice. under Floor Plans. NOTE When creating or modifying a family. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you started in the previous exercise. the geometry supplied can be used or discarded as needed. Review existing reference planes 1 In the Project Browser. Like many templates. Reference Plane: Left. you add the reference planes. 11 In the Project Browser. double-click Front. Level. As you add solid geometry later in the tutorial. you can see the rectangular beam extrusion and a symbolic line. and dimensions that provide a skeleton for the solid geometry. Creating the Component Skeleton In this lesson. the top of the beam extrusion is aligned to the associated level of the plan view. lines. TIP The name also displays on the Status Bar. double-click Ref. creating a skeleton to build upon is the foundation of a new component family. under 3D Views. These reference planes act as part of the skeleton to which the solid geometry will align and lock. under Elevations. This beam extrusion is supplied within the template as a starting point. Notice that the beam extrusion is centered on the level line. 12 In the Project Browser. double-click View 1. Therefore.

■ Left and Right: These two planes mark the points where the beam intersects with other columns. NOTE The reference planes shown in the project image below were added as a training reference. ■ Member Left and Member Right: These two planes refer to the left and right extent of the beam solid geometry when displayed in a medium or fine display view of a project. they do not display when the family is loaded into a project. The six reference planes shown in the project below were added as a training reference. The reference planes in this template are designed to accommodate the point-to-point insertion of a beam component.3 Repeat this step for the other two vertical planes on the left side. The two arrows point to the snap points that the left and right reference planes refer to. The reference planes and their respective explanations are listed below. In the image below. two steel columns and a steel beam have been added to a project. ■ Stick Symbol Left and Stick Symbol Right: Adding Reference Planes | 885 . Reference planes that display within a family file do not display within a project. notice the location of the beam extents. In the project plan view image below.

click . Before adding new reference planes. Add new reference planes 6 On the Design Bar. click Ref Plane. In a later exercise. 886 | Chapter 18 Parametric Component Design Techniques . 5 On the Edit Toolbar. you add the solid geometry for the truss as a sweep. Delete existing solid geometry 4 Select the rectangular beam extrusion. NOTE Be careful not to select the symbolic line. it is important to be familiar with the template so you do not create duplicate or conflicting planes. 7 Add a reference plane approximately 50 mm above the horizontal reference plane: Center (Front/Back). 8 Add a reference plane approximately 50 mm below the horizontal reference plane: Center (Front/Back).These two planes refer to the extents of the stick symbol when it is loaded into a project and the plan view display setting is coarse. Each family template has a different set of reference planes established within it. You will use these two reference planes to control the beam width and keep it centered on the reference plane: Center (Front/Back).

To do this. select the lower horizontal reference plane. 14 On the Options Bar. 13 On the Design Bar. Level. 15 Place the cursor over the top horizontal reference plane. TIP You can control the direction of the offset by moving the cursor slightly to either side of the line you intend to pick. click Ref Plane. 12 Add a reference plane approximately 150 mm above the Level: Ref. Level. When a copy of the reference plane displays below it. planes to control beam depth 9 In the Project Browser. Level as the mirror axis. click on the Edit toolbar. under Elevations.Add ref. click Ref Plane. and select the Level: Ref. Adding Reference Planes | 887 . The next four reference planes that you add mark the thickness of the truss chords. TIP You can also use the mirror tool to accomplish this task. click . double-click Front. This beam requires additional reference planes to complete the truss skeleton. 10 On the Design Bar. These two reference planes mark the top and bottom extents of the beam. click to place it. 11 Add a reference plane approximately 150 mm below the Level: Ref. and specify an Offset of 38 mm.

19 On the Options Bar. you must add four additional reference planes to accommodate the center chase. Before you move on to the next exercise. and when a copy of the reference plane displays to the left of it. click to place it as shown. 888 | Chapter 18 Parametric Component Design Techniques . 17 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Member Left.16 Place the cursor over the lower horizontal reference plane and when a copy of the reference plane displays above it. You have completed the reference planes that make up the skeleton of the chords. 18 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Member Right. click to place it as shown. specify an Offset of 200 mm. click to place it as shown. and when a copy of the reference plane displays to the right of it.

and when a copy of the reference plane displays to the right of it. click to place it as shown. click to place it as shown. specify an Offset of 238 mm. which you do in the next exercise. under Floor Plans. 24 In the Project Browser. 21 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Center (Left/Right). 23 Use the Reference Plane: Center (Left/Right) to add reference planes to the left and right of it as shown below. Level. Notice the reference planes that you added in the elevation view. double-click Ref. 22 On the Options Bar. cleaning up some of the extents would make the view easier. Although there is nothing technically incorrect regarding the reference planes in this view. and when a copy of the reference plane displays to the left of it. Adding Reference Planes | 889 .20 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Center (Left/Right).

that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. Wood Floor Truss. navigate to the folder of your choice. This tool is the aligned dimension tool. By applying dimensions and constraints directly to the skeleton of the family. After adding the dimension. 890 | Chapter 18 Parametric Component Design Techniques .25 On the Design Bar. and click Save. Dataset Continue to use the dataset. you can make sure the new family adapts to changes in geometry as expected before adding solid geometry to it. Dimension chord width 1 On the Design Bar. 28 Proceed to the next exercise. 2 On the Options Bar. you add some of the dimensions and constraints that control how the open web floor truss adapts to changes in its geometry. enter Wood Floor Truss for File name.rfa. Adding Dimensions and Constraints In this exercise. 3 Select each of the horizontal reference planes and place the dimension to the left as shown. “Adding Dimensions and Constraints” on page 890. click Dimension. click Modify. Make sure you remember where you saved it. It allows you to dimension between parallel lines. click . NOTE You use this family for the remainder of this tutorial. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. 27 In the Save As dialog box. separate the overriding values by dragging the value controls as shown.

and click the EQ symbol when it displays. and the lower horizontal reference plane. double-click Front. 7 Add a dimension referring to the upper horizontal reference plane and the lower horizontal reference plane.TIP You may need to adjust your zoom settings during this procedure. Adding Dimensions and Constraints | 891 . place the dimension to the left as shown. 9 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. and click the EQ symbol to apply the equality constraint. under Elevations. click Dimension. 5 Select the dimension you added in the previous step. This ensures that changes to the chord width are distributed equally across the center reference plane. the Center reference plane. 6 On the Design Bar. Add the depth dimension and equality constraint 8 In the Project Browser. 4 On the Design Bar. click Modify. Place the dimension as shown. 10 Select the upper horizontal reference plane.

892 | Chapter 18 Parametric Component Design Techniques .NOTE The center horizontal reference plane overlaps the level line: Ref. 13 Add a dimension referring to the reference planes to the left and right of the Center (Left/Right) reference plane. place the dimension under the lines as shown and click the EQ symbol to apply the equality constraint. and place it below the dimension you added previously. Dimension and constrain the center chase width 12 Add a dimension referring to the three vertical reference planes in the center of the model. Level. You may need to use the TAB key to toggle the selection to the reference plane. 11 Add a dimension referring to the upper horizontal reference plane and the lower horizontal reference plane and move it to the left of the equality constrained dimension you added previously.

In addition. you label the dimensions to create instance and type parameters. These parameters are the key to providing flexibility within a project. 15 Add four dimensions as shown. they allow you to “flex” the model in order to test your design. These dimensions refer to the chord thickness. These dimensions refer to the chord thickness of the vertical members and the members that border the center chase.Dimension chord thickness 14 On the right side of the model. and constraints as needed. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. “Creating New Length Parameters” on page 894. you will add additional reference planes. Throughout the tutorial. You have finished adding the dimensions and constraints that control how the truss skeleton adapts to changes. add two dimensions as shown. Adding Dimensions and Constraints | 893 . 17 Proceed to the next exercise. In the next exercise. dimensions.

Under Parameter Data. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. This indicates whether the parameter is a type or instance parameter. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. When you design a new family.Creating New Length Parameters In this exercise. Things to consider when deciding “instance” or “type:” ■ ■ ■ If the component comes in standard sizes that must be maintained. ■ Click OK. it becomes a parameter. consider making it a type parameter. consider making the material parameter an instance parameter. You choose whether to make it an instance or type parameter. ■ Dataset Continue to use the dataset. consider making it an instance parameter. 2 Select the dimension that refers to the width of the chord as shown. you create new length parameters that control the basic dimensions of the floor truss. 894 | Chapter 18 Parametric Component Design Techniques .rfa. select Family parameter. If the parameter controls something that usually remains constant by its nature. When you label a dimension in the Family Editor. it is important to decide how much control over the component will be required after the component is loaded into a project. Create the chord width parameter 1 In the Project Browser. There are many types of parameters and various ways to create them. 3 On the Options Bar. In this exercise. You should lean towards simplicity whenever possible. Wood Floor Truss. The parameters that you create when designing a family are the same parameters used within a project to control the instance and type parameters of that family. Select Type. you label the dimensions that you added in the previous exercise. If the component has material that varies per component. enter Chord Width for Name. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Type. Level. under Floor Plans. select Add parameter for Label. double-click Ref. If the component is something that is cut or otherwise extremely flexible. consider making it a type parameter.

select Add parameter for Label. enter Depth for Name. select Family parameter. Select Type. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. 6 Select the dimension on the left that refers to the depth of the truss. Click OK. select Add parameter for Label. under Elevations. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Type. 11 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. 10 On the Options Bar. Create center chase width parameter 9 Select the dimension that refers to the width of the center chase interior. Click OK. select Family parameter.Create truss depth parameter 5 In the Project Browser. Select Type. Creating New Length Parameters | 895 . Under Parameter Data. 7 On the Options Bar. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Type. double-click Front. enter Center Chase Width for Name. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. Under Parameter Data.

select Family parameter. Click OK. select Chord Thickness for Label. select the dimension that refers to the thickness of the upper horizontal truss chord. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Type. Under Parameter Data. Apply chord thickness label to other dimensions 15 On the right side of the model. select the dimension that refers to the thickness of the lower horizontal truss chord as shown. 14 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. enter Chord Thickness for Name. 896 | Chapter 18 Parametric Component Design Techniques . 13 On the Options Bar. 16 On the Options Bar. Select Type. TIP You may need to drag the text label downward as shown.Create chord thickness parameter 12 On the right side of the model. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. select Add parameter for Label.

Flexing the model means to change parameter values. thus forcing the model to adapt to the changes. You should flex the model after any major change to the design. This is not limited to length parameters. Flexing the Component Model One of the most important steps in the process of creating a new parametric component is the flexing of the model. click Family Types. notice the labelled dimensions display under the list of parameters and under the group. 20 On the File menu. 18 On the Design Bar. click Save. 19 Click Cancel. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. In the Family Types dialog box. You should flex a new family after: ■ ■ Adding or modifying an element. Adding or modifying a parameter. When you load this family into a project. you should also test it to make sure it works as expected. “Flexing the Component Model” on page 897. Flexing the Component Model | 897 . If you add a new material parameter.17 Apply the Chord Thickness label to the vertical chords and the vertical members on the left and right side of the center chase as shown. Dimensions. these parameters will be available within the Type Properties dialog box for the beam.

Preparing the family for flexing 1 When flexing the model. and drag the dialog box so that you can view the model. you need to be able to see the model within the drawing area and also apply new values within the Family Types dialog box: ■ Maximize the Revit window and adjust the zoom settings so the model is in one corner of the drawing area. Dataset Continue to use the dataset. Even though you have yet to add any model geometry to the family. you can add the model geometry to the skeleton and be relatively certain that it will also flex as expected. under Dimensions. click Family Types. When you open the Family Types dialog.rfa. 2 On the Design Bar. When you flex a family. or ■ Reduce the Revit window and keep the model centered in the drawing area.■ ■ ■ Adding a new constraint. that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. you can drag it to the opposing corner. you flex the model to test the various length parameters that you added in the previous exercise. it is important to verify that the reference lines adjust to changes as constraints are maintained. Wood Floor Truss. rather than by manually stretching or manipulating the objects within the family. you can drag it off the Revit window as shown. this is the most accurate way of testing how the family will behave within a project. Flex the truss depth 3 In the Family Types dialog box. and click Apply. 898 | Chapter 18 Parametric Component Design Techniques . In this exercise. Nesting a component. you should always do it from the Family Types dialog box. enter 600 mm for Depth. After you verify this. When you change a parameter value and apply the change. Adding or modifying a parameter formula. Adjust your display using one of the two methods before opening the Family Types dialog box. When you open the Family Types dialog box.

80 mm for Chord Thickness. Also notice the equality constraint spreads the additional depth evenly above and below the Ref.Notice the depth of the truss adapts to the change in dimension value. notice that the reference planes marking the chord thickness adapted to the change in depth while maintaining their specified value. 4 Enter 450 mm for Depth. Enter 400 mm for Center Chase Width. Verifying that the entire model adapts to changes and making sure nothing “breaks” is the essence of flexing. In addition. Level. Click Apply. Enter 38 mm for Chord Thickness. Notice that the model adapts to all of the changes. and click Apply. Flexing the Component Model | 899 . 800 mm for Center Chase Width. Click OK. reset the parameters back to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter 300 mm for Depth. Reset parameters 5 In the Family Types dialog box.

When working within the Family Editor. and click OK. you add the solid geometry using extrusions for the chords and trimmable plywood ends. select Reference Plane: Member Left. Adding Solid Geometry In this lesson. double-click Left. you create the top and bottom chords of the truss. After adding the chords. 3 On the Design Bar. Wood Floor Truss. 5 On the Design Bar. 4 In the Work Plane dialog box. click Lines. you load the truss into a project to verify that it works as designed. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. Dataset Continue to use the dataset. under Elevations. 7 Proceed to the next lesson. click Name. Add chord extrusions 1 In the Project Browser. After flexing the design. that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. you align and lock their position. click Save. 7 Select the four reference planes that border the top chord as shown.rfa. After creating the extrusions. click . 6 On the File menu. Creating Solid Extrusions In this exercise. 6 On the Options Bar. you constrain them using a combination of locked alignments and labelled dimensions. 900 | Chapter 18 Parametric Component Design Techniques . 2 Zoom in around the center of the truss design. “Adding Solid Geometry” on page 900. and select Lock. you should always flex the design after you add new elements or modify the existing design in any way.

Creating Solid Extrusions | 901 . and verify that Lock is selected. 13 On the Tools toolbar. You can ignore this warning because after you finish trimming. click . click Lines. click . 9 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to create the top chord sketch as shown. 8 On the Tools toolbar. click .Notice that the sketch lines are automatically locked to the reference planes. When using the Trim tool. NOTE A warning dialog displays notifying you that there are overlapping lines. 12 Select the four reference planes that border the bottom chord as shown. 11 On the Options Bar. the lines will no longer overlap. 10 On the Design Bar. 14 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to create the bottom chord sketch as shown. click the part of the line you want to keep.

17 On the File menu. Click the lock symbol to lock the extrusion edge to the reference plane. Wood Floor Truss. Notice the chord extrusions and the symbolic line. Dataset Continue to use the dataset. 18 Proceed to the next exercise. 16 In the Project Browser. click Finish Sketch. The chords need to be aligned and locked to the correct reference planes in order for them to flex with changes in the geometry. under Elevations. Th